Teva Pharmaceuticals Usa Inc

Manufacturer Details

There are currently no manufacturer details available.

Teva Pharmaceuticals Usa Inc Drugs

Tolterodine Tartrate

Tolterodine Tartrate

The initial recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate tablets is 2 mg twice daily. The dose may be lowered to 1 mg twice daily based on individual response and tolerability. For patients with significantly reduced hepatic or renal function or who are currently taking drugs that are potent inhibitors of CYP3A4, the recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate is 1 mg twice daily (see PRECAUTIONS, General; PRECAUTIONS, Reduced Hepatic and Renal Function, and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).
Ondansetron Hydrochlori...

Ondansetron Hydrochloride

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Highly Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage of ondansetron hydrochloride tablets is 24 mg given as three 8 mg tablets administered 30 minutes before the start of single-day highly emetogenic chemotherapy, including cisplatin ≥ 50 mg/m2. Multiday, single-dose administration of a 24 mg dosage has not been studied.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of a 24 mg dosage in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Moderately Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet given twice a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with a subsequent dose 8 hours after the first dose. One 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered twice a day (every 12 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the dosage is the same as for adults. For pediatric patients 4 through 11 years of age, the dosage is one 4 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet given 3 times a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with subsequent doses 4 and 8 hours after the first dose. One 4 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered 3 times a day (every 8 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Radiotherapy, Either Total Body Irradiation, or Single High-Dose Fraction or Daily Fractions to the Abdomen

The recommended oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet given 3 times a day.

For total body irradiation, one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before each fraction of radiotherapy administered each day.

For single high-dose fraction radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for 1 to 2 days after completion of radiotherapy.

For daily fractionated radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for each day radiotherapy is given.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron hydrochloride tablets in the prevention of radiation-induced nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

The recommended dosage is 16 mg given as two 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablets 1 hour before induction of anesthesia.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron hydrochloride tablets in the prevention of postoperative nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh2 score of 10 or greater), clearance is reduced and apparent volume of distribution is increased with a resultant increase in plasma half-life. In such patients, a total daily dose of 8 mg should not be exceeded.
Oxycodone Hydrochloride...

Oxycodone Hydrochloride

2.1 Initial Dosing

OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS should be prescribed only by healthcare professionals who are knowledgeable in the use of potent opioids for the management of chronic pain.

OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS 80 mg tablets, a single dose greater than 40 mg, or a total daily dose greater than 80 mg are only for use in patients in whom tolerance to an opioid of comparable potency has been established. Patients considered opioid tolerant are those receiving, for one week or longer, at least 60 mg oral morphine/day, 25 mcg transdermal fentanyl/hour, 30 mg oral oxycodone/day, 8 mg oral hydromorphone/day, 25 mg oral oxymorphone/day, or an equianalgesic dose of another opioid.

Initiate the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient's prior analgesic treatment experience, and risk factors for addiction, abuse, and misuse [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. Monitor patients closely for respiratory depression, especially within the first 24-72 hours of initiating therapy with OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS must be taken whole, one tablet at a time, with enough water to ensure complete swallowing immediately after placing in the mouth [see Patient Counseling Information (17)]. Crushing, chewing, or dissolving OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS will result in uncontrolled delivery of oxycodone and can lead to overdose or death [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Use of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS as the First Opioid Analgesic

Initiate treatment with OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS with one 10 mg tablet orally every 12 hours.

Use of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS in Patients who are not Opioid Tolerant

The starting dose for patients who are not opioid tolerant is OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS 10 mg orally every 12 hours. Patients who are opioid tolerant are those receiving, for one week or longer, at least 60 mg oral morphine per day, 25 mcg transdermal fentanyl per hour, 30 mg oral oxycodone per day, 8 mg oral hydromorphone per day, 25 mg oral oxymorphone per day, or an equianalgesic dose of another opioid.

Use of higher starting doses in patients who are not opioid tolerant may cause fatal respiratory depression.

Conversion from other Oral Oxycodone Formulations to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Patients receiving other oral oxycodone formulations may be converted to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS by administering one-half of the patient's total daily oral oxycodone dose as OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS every 12 hours.

Conversion from other Opioids to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Discontinue all other around-the-clock opioid drugs when OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS therapy is initiated.

There are no established conversion ratios for conversion from other opioids to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS defined by clinical trials. Discontinue all other around-the-clock opioid drugs when OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS therapy is initiated and initiate dosing using OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS 10 mg orally every 12 hours.

It is safer to underestimate a patient’s 24-hour oral oxycodone requirements and provide rescue medication (e.g., immediate-release opioid) than to overestimate the 24-hour oral oxycodone requirements which could result in adverse reactions. While useful tables of opioid equivalents are readily available, there is substantial inter-patient variability in the relative potency of different opioid drugs and products.

Conversion from Methadone to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Close monitoring is of particular importance when converting from methadone to other opioid agonists. The ratio between methadone and other opioid agonists may vary widely as a function of previous dose exposure. Methadone has a long half-life and can accumulate in the plasma.

Conversion from Transdermal Fentanyl to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Eighteen hours following the removal of the transdermal fentanyl patch, OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS treatment can be initiated. Although there has been no systematic assessment of such conversion, a conservative oxycodone dose, approximately 10 mg every 12 hours of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS, should be initially substituted for each 25 mcg/hr fentanyl transdermal patch. Follow the patient closely during conversion from transdermal fentanyl to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS, as there is limited documented experience with this conversion.

2.2 Titration and Maintenance of Therapy

Individually titrate OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS to a dose that provides adequate analgesia and minimizes adverse reactions. Continually reevaluate patients receiving OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS to assess the maintenance of pain control and the relative incidence of adverse reactions, as well as monitoring for the development of addiction, abuse and misuse. Frequent communication is important among the prescriber, other members of the healthcare team, the patient, and the caregiver/family during periods of changing analgesic requirements, including initial titration. During chronic therapy, periodically reassess the continued need for the use of opioid analgesics.

Patients who experience breakthrough pain may require a dose increase of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS or may need rescue medication with an appropriate dose of an immediate-release analgesic. If the level of pain increases after dose stabilization, attempt to identify the source of increased pain before increasing the OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS dose. Because steady-state plasma concentrations are approximated in 1 day, OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS dosage may be adjusted every 1 to 2 days. If unacceptable opioid-related adverse reactions are observed, the subsequent dose may be reduced. Adjust the dose to obtain an appropriate balance between management of pain and opioid-related adverse reactions.

There are no well-controlled clinical studies evaluating the safety and efficacy with dosing more frequently than every 12 hours. As a guideline, the total daily oxycodone dose usually can be increased by 25% to 50% of the current dose, each time an increase is clinically indicated.

2.3 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

For patients with hepatic impairment, start dosing patients at 1/3 to 1/2 the usual starting dose followed by careful dose titration [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Discontinuation of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

When the patient no longer requires therapy with OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS, use a gradual downward titration of the dose to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient. Do not abruptly discontinue OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS.

2.5 Administration of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Instruct patients to swallow OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS intact. The tablets are not to be crushed, dissolved, or chewed due to the risk of rapid release and absorption of a potentially fatal dose of oxycodone [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Instruct patients to take OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS one tablet at a time and with enough water to ensure complete swallowing immediately after placing in the mouth [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9) and Patient Counseling Information (17)].
Dutasteride

Dutasteride

The capsules should be swallowed whole and not chewed or opened, as contact with the capsule contents may result in irritation of the oropharyngeal mucosa. Dutasteride capsules may be administered with or without food.

2.1 Monotherapy

The recommended dose of dutasteride is 1 capsule (0.5 mg) taken once daily.

2.2 Combination With Alpha Adrenergic Antagonist

The recommended dose of dutasteride is 1 capsule (0.5 mg) taken once daily and tamsulosin 0.4 mg taken once daily.
Oxycodone Hydrochloride...

Oxycodone Hydrochloride Solution

2.1 General Considerations

Dose once daily. The dosage can be increased after 1 to 2 weeks of therapy to a maximum of one 10 mg/320 mg tablet once daily as needed to control blood pressure. The majority of the antihypertensive effect is attained within 2 weeks after initiation of therapy or a change in dose.

Amlodipine and valsartan tablets may be administered with or without food.

Amlodipine and valsartan tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

2.2 Add-on Therapy

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with amlodipine (or another dihydropyridine calcium-channel blocker) alone or with valsartan (or another angiotensin II receptor blocker) alone may be switched to combination therapy with amlodipine and valsartan tablets.

A patient who experiences dose-limiting adverse reactions on either component alone may be switched to amlodipine and valsartan tablets containing a lower dose of that component in combination with the other to achieve similar blood pressure reductions. The clinical response to amlodipine and valsartan tablets should be subsequently evaluated and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after 3 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dose may be titrated up to a maximum of 10 mg/320 mg.

2.3 Replacement Therapy

For convenience, patients receiving amlodipine and valsartan from separate tablets may instead wish to receive amlodipine and valsartan tablets containing the same component doses.

2.4 Initial Therapy

A patient may be initiated on amlodipine and valsartan tablets if it is unlikely that control of blood pressure would be achieved with a single agent. The usual starting dose is amlodipine and valsartan tablets, 5 mg/160 mg once daily in patients who are not volume-depleted.
Aspirin And Dipyridamol...

Aspirin And Dipyridamole

Aspirin and extended-release dipyridamole capsules are not interchangeable with the individual components of aspirin and dipyridamole tablets.

The recommended dose of aspirin and extended-release dipyridamole capsules is one capsule given orally twice daily, one in the morning and one in the evening. Swallow capsules whole without chewing. Aspirin and extended-release dipyridamole capsules can be administered with or without food.

2.1 Alternative Regimen in Case of Intolerable Headaches

In the event of intolerable headaches during initial treatment, switch to one capsule at bedtime and low-dose aspirin in the morning. Because there are no outcome data with this regimen and headaches become less of a problem as treatment continues, patients should return to the usual regimen as soon as possible, usually within one week.
Junel Fe 24

Junel Fe 24

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, Junel Fe 24 should be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. Junel Fe 24 tablets may be administered without regard to meals.

Junel Fe 24 provides a regimen consisting of 24 light yellow active tablets of norethindrone acetate and ethinyl estradiol and 4 brown non-hormonal (inert) tablets of ferrous fumarate. The ferrous fumarate tablets do not serve any therapeutic purpose.

During the First Cycle Of Use

The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered. The patient is instructed to begin taking Junel Fe 24 on either Day 1 of menstruation (Day 1 Start) or the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation (Sunday Start). If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first tablet (light yellow) is taken that day. One light yellow tablet should be taken daily for 24 consecutive days followed by one brown tablet daily for 4 consecutive days. Withdrawal bleeding should usually occur within three days following discontinuation of light yellow tablets and may not have finished before the next pack is started. During the first cycle with a Sunday start, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on Junel Fe 24 until a light yellow tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days and a non-hormonal back-up method of birth control (such as condoms or spermicide) should be used during those 7 days.

The patient begins her next and all subsequent 28 day courses of tablets on the same day of the week on which she began her first course, following the same schedule: 24 days on light yellow tablets—4 days on brown tablets. If in any cycle the patient starts tablets later than the proper day, she should protect herself against pregnancy by using a non-hormonal back-up method of birth control until she has taken a light yellow tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

Switching from another Hormonal Method of Contraception

When the patient is switching to Junel Fe 24 after completing a 21 day regimen of oral contraceptive tablets, transdermal patches, or a vaginal ring, she should wait 7 days after her last tablet, patch, or ring before she starts Junel Fe 24. She will probably experience withdrawal bleeding during that week. She should be sure that no more than 7 days pass after her previous 21 day regimen. When the patient is switching to Junel Fe 24 after completing a 28 day regimen of oral contraceptive tablets, she should start her first pack of Junel Fe 24 on the day after her last tablet. She should not wait any days between packs. The patient may switch any day from a progestin-only pill and should begin Junel Fe 24 the next day. If switching from an implant or injection, the patient should start Junel Fe 24 on the day of implant removal or, if using an injection, the day the next injection would be due.

If Spotting or Breakthrough Bleeding Occurs

The patient is instructed to continue on the same regimen. This type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance; however, if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, the patient is advised to consult her healthcare provider. Although pregnancy is unlikely if Junel Fe 24 is taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, the possibility of pregnancy must be considered. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed schedule (missed one or more tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), the probability of pregnancy should be considered at the time of the first missed period and appropriate diagnostic measures taken. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out. Hormonal contraceptives should be discontinued if pregnancy is confirmed.

For Additional Patient Instructions Regarding Missed Pills

See the “WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS” section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING. Any time the patient misses two or more light yellow tablets, she should also use another method of non-hormonal back-up contraception until she has taken a light yellow tablet daily for seven consecutive days. If the patient misses one or more brown tablets, she is still protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking the active light yellow tablets again on the proper day. If breakthrough bleeding occurs following missed light yellow tablets, it will usually be transient and of no consequence. The possibility of ovulation increases with each successive day that scheduled light yellow tablets are missed. Therefore, the risk of pregnancy increases with each active (light yellow) tablet missed.

Use After Pregnancy, Abortion Or Miscarriage

Junel Fe 24 should be initiated no earlier than 28 days postpartum in the nonlactating mother due to the increased risk for thromboembolism. When the tablets are administered in the postpartum period, the increased risk of thromboembolic disease associated with the postpartum period must be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS concerning thromboembolic disease). The patient should be advised to use a non-hormonal back-up method for the first 7 days of tablet taking. However, if intercourse has already occurred, the possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

Junel Fe 24 may be initiated after a first-trimester abortion or miscarriage; if the patient starts Junel Fe 24 immediately, additional contraceptive measures are not needed.

For additional patient instructions regarding complete dosing instructions, see the “HOW TO TAKE THE PILL” section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING.
Anti-diarrheal

Anti-diarrheal

Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED, soft gelatin capsules, has increased bioavailability in comparison to Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP). Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED and Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP) are not bioequivalent and cannot be used interchangeably without physician supervision.

The daily dose of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED should always be given in two divided doses (BID). It is recommended that Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED be administered on a consistent schedule with regard to time of day and relation to meals. Grapefruit and grapefruit juice affect metabolism, increasing blood concentration of cyclosporine, thus should be avoided.

Specific Populations

Renal Impairment in Kidney, Liver, and Heart Transplantation

Cyclosporine undergoes minimal renal elimination and its pharmacokinetics do not appear to be significantly altered in patients with end-stage renal disease who receive routine hemodialysis treatments (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). However, due to its nephrotoxic potential (see WARNINGS), careful monitoring of renal function is recommended; cyclosporine dosage should be reduced if indicated (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Renal Impairment in Rheumatoid Arthritis and Psoriasis

Patients with impaired renal function should not receive cyclosporine (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Hepatic Impairment

The clearance of cyclosporine may be significantly reduced in severe liver disease patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Dose reduction may be necessary in patients with severe liver impairment to maintain blood concentrations within the recommended target range (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Newly Transplanted Patients

The initial oral dose of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED can be given 4 to 12 hours prior to transplantation or be given postoperatively. The initial dose of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED varies depending on the transplanted organ and the other immunosuppressive agents included in the immunosuppressive protocol. In newly transplanted patients, the initial oral dose of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED is the same as the initial oral dose of Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP). Suggested initial doses are available from the results of a 1994 survey of the use of Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP) in US transplant centers. The mean ± SD initial doses were 9 ± 3 mg/kg/day for renal transplant patients (75 centers), 8 ± 4 mg/kg/day for liver transplant patients (30 centers), and 7 ± 3 mg/kg/day for heart transplant patients (24 centers). Total daily doses were divided into two equal daily doses. The Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED dose is subsequently adjusted to achieve a pre-defined cyclosporine blood concentration (see Blood Concentration Monitoring in Transplant Patients, below). If cyclosporine trough blood concentrations are used, the target range is the same for Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED as for Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP). Using the same trough concentration target range for Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED as for Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP) results in greater cyclosporine exposure when Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED are administered (see Pharmacokinetics, Absorption). Dosing should be titrated based on clinical assessments of rejection and tolerability. Lower Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED doses may be sufficient as maintenance therapy.

Adjunct therapy with adrenal corticosteroids is recommended initially. Different tapering dosage schedules of prednisone appear to achieve similar results. A representative dosage schedule based on the patient’s weight started with 2 mg/kg/day for the first 4 days tapered to 1 mg/kg/day by 1 week, 0.6 mg/kg/day by 2 weeks, 0.3 mg/kg/day by 1 month, and 0.15 mg/kg/day by 2 months and thereafter as a maintenance dose. Steroid doses may be further tapered on an individualized basis depending on status of patient and function of graft. Adjustments in dosage of prednisone must be made according to the clinical situation.

Conversion from Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP) to Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED in Transplant Patients

In transplanted patients who are considered for conversion to Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED from Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP), Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED should be started with the same daily dose as was previously used with Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP) (1:1 dose conversion). The Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED dose should subsequently be adjusted to attain the pre-conversion cyclosporine blood trough concentration. Using the same trough concentration target range for Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED as for Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP) results in greater cyclosporine exposure when Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED are administered (see Pharmacokinetics, Absorption). Patients with suspected poor absorption of Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP) require different dosing strategies (see Transplant Patients with Poor Absorption of Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP), below). In some patients, the increase in blood trough concentration is more pronounced and may be of clinical significance.

Until the blood trough concentration attains the pre-conversion value, it is strongly recommended that the cyclosporine blood trough concentration be monitored every 4 to 7 days after conversion to Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED. In addition, clinical safety parameters such as serum creatinine and blood pressure should be monitored every two weeks during the first two months after conversion. If the blood trough concentrations are outside the desired range and/or if the clinical safety parameters worsen, the dosage of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED must be adjusted accordingly.

Transplant Patients with Poor Absorption of Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP)

Patients with lower than expected cyclosporine blood trough concentrations in relation to the oral dose of Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP) may have poor or inconsistent absorption of cyclosporine from Sandimmune (Cyclosporine Capsules USP). After conversion to Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED, patients tend to have higher cyclosporine concentrations. Due to the increase in bioavailability of cyclosporine following conversion to Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED, the cyclosporine blood trough concentration may exceed the target range. Particular caution should be exercised when converting patients to Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED at doses greater than 10 mg/kg/day. The dose of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED should be titrated individually based on cyclosporine trough concentrations, tolerability, and clinical response. In this population the cyclosporine blood trough concentration should be measured more frequently, at least twice a week (daily, if initial dose exceeds 10 mg/kg/day) until the concentration stabilizes within the desired range.

Rheumatoid Arthritis

The initial dose of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED is 2.5 mg/kg/day, taken twice daily as a divided (BID) oral dose. Salicylates, NSAIDs, and oral corticosteroids may be continued (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). Onset of action generally occurs between 4 and 8 weeks. If insufficient clinical benefit is seen and tolerability is good (including serum creatinine less than 30% above baseline), the dose may be increased by 0.5 to 0.75 mg/kg/day after 8 weeks and again after 12 weeks to a maximum of 4 mg/kg/day. If no benefit is seen by 16 weeks of therapy, Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED therapy should be discontinued.

Dose decreases by 25% to 50% should be made at any time to control adverse events, e.g., hypertension elevations in serum creatinine (30% above patient’s pretreatment level) or clinically significant laboratory abnormalities (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

If dose reduction is not effective in controlling abnormalities or if the adverse event or abnormality is severe, Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED should be discontinued. The same initial dose and dosage range should be used if Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED are combined with the recommended dose of methotrexate. Most patients can be treated with Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED doses of 3 mg/kg/day or below when combined with methotrexate doses of up to 15 mg/week (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Trials).

There is limited long-term treatment data. Recurrence of rheumatoid arthritis disease activity is generally apparent within 4 weeks after stopping cyclosporine.

Psoriasis

The initial dose of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED should be 2.5 mg/kg/day. Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED should be taken twice daily, as a divided (1.25 mg/kg BID) oral dose. Patients should be kept at that dose for at least 4 weeks, barring adverse events. If significant clinical improvement has not occurred in patients by that time, the patient’s dosage should be increased at 2 week intervals. Based on patient response, dose increases of approximately 0.5 mg/kg/day should be made to a maximum of 4 mg/kg/day.

Dose decreases by 25% to 50% should be made at any time to control adverse events, e.g., hypertension, elevations in serum creatinine (≥ 25% above the patient’s pretreatment level), or clinically significant laboratory abnormalities. If dose reduction is not effective in controlling abnormalities, or if the adverse event or abnormality is severe, Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED should be discontinued (see Special Monitoring for Psoriasis Patients).

Patients generally show some improvement in the clinical manifestations of psoriasis in 2 weeks. Satisfactory control and stabilization of the disease may take 12 to 16 weeks to achieve. Results of a dose-titration clinical trial with Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED indicate that an improvement of psoriasis by 75% or more (based on PASI) was achieved in 51% of the patients after 8 weeks and in 79% of the patients after 16 weeks. Treatment should be discontinued if satisfactory response cannot be achieved after 6 weeks at 4 mg/kg/day or the patient’s maximum tolerated dose. Once a patient is adequately controlled and appears stable the dose of Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED should be lowered, and the patient treated with the lowest dose that maintains an adequate response (this should not necessarily be total clearing of the patient). In clinical trials, cyclosporine doses at the lower end of the recommended dosage range were effective in maintaining a satisfactory response in 60% of the patients. Doses below 2.5 mg/kg/day may also be equally effective.

Upon stopping treatment with cyclosporine, relapse will occur in approximately 6 weeks (50% of the patients) to 16 weeks (75% of the patients). In the majority of patients rebound does not occur after cessation of treatment with cyclosporine. Thirteen cases of transformation of chronic plaque psoriasis to more severe forms of psoriasis have been reported. There were 9 cases of pustular and 4 cases of erythrodermic psoriasis. Long term experience with Cyclosporine Capsules USP MODIFIED in psoriasis patients is limited and continuous treatment for extended periods greater than one year is not recommended. Alternation with other forms of treatment should be considered in the long term management of patients with this life long disease.

Blood Concentration Monitoring in Transplant Patients

Transplant centers have found blood concentration monitoring of cyclosporine to be an essential component of patient management. Of importance to blood concentration analysis are the type of assay used, the transplanted organ, and other immunosuppressant agents being administered. While no fixed relationship has been established, blood concentration monitoring may assist in the clinical evaluation of rejection and toxicity, dose adjustments, and the assessment of compliance.

Various assays have been used to measure blood concentrations of cyclosporine. Older studies using a nonspecific assay often cited concentrations that were roughly twice those of the specific assays. Therefore, comparison between concentrations in the published literature and an individual patient concentration using current assays must be made with detailed knowledge of the assay methods employed. Current assay results are also not interchangeable and their use should be guided by their approved labeling. A discussion of the different assay methods is contained in Annals of Clinical Biochemistry 1994;31:420-446. While several assays and assay matrices are available, there is a consensus that parent-compound-specific assays correlate best with clinical events. Of these, HPLC is the standard reference, but the monoclonal antibody RIAs and the monoclonal antibody FPIA offer sensitivity, reproducibility, and convenience. Most clinicians base their monitoring on trough cyclosporine concentrations. Applied Pharmacokinetics, Principles of Therapeutic Drug Monitoring (1992) contains a broad discussion of cyclosporine pharmacokinetics and drug monitoring techniques. Blood concentration monitoring is not a replacement for renal function monitoring or tissue biopsies.
Aripiprazole

Aripiprazole

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

The recommended starting and target dose for aripiprazole tablets is 10 or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. Aripiprazole tablets have been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either aripiprazole 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

Adolescents

The recommended target dose of aripiprazole is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. Aripiprazole can be administered without regard to meals [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to aripiprazole tablets or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. Aripiprazole tablets can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of aripiprazole tablets is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. Aripiprazole tablets can be given without regard to meals [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.2)].

Additional pediatric use information is approved for Otsuka America Pharmaceutical, Inc.’s ABILIFY® (aripiprazole) product. However, due to Otsuka America Pharmaceutical, Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that information.

2.7 Dosage Adjustments for Cytochrome P450 Considerations

Dosage adjustments are recommended in patients who are known CYP2D6 poor metabolizers and in patients taking concomitant CYP3A4 inhibitors or CYP2D6 inhibitors or strong CYP3A4 inducers (see Table 2). When the coadministered drug is withdrawn from the combination therapy, aripiprazole dosage should then be adjusted to its original level. When the coadministered CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn, aripiprazole dosage should be reduced to the original level over 1 to 2 weeks. Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (e.g., a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response.

Table 2: Dose Adjustments for Aripiprazole in Patients who are known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers and Patients Taking Concomitant CYP2D6 Inhibitors, 3A4 Inhibitors, and/or CYP3A4 Inducers

Factors

Dosage Adjustments for Aripiprazole

Known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers

Administer half of usual dose

Known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers taking concomitant strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., itraconazole, clarithromycin)

Administer a quarter of usual dose

Strong CYP2D6 (e.g., quinidine, fluoxetine, paroxetine) or CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., itraconazole, clarithromycin)

Administer half of usual dose

Strong CYP2D6 and CYP3A4 inhibitors

Administer a quarter of usual dose

Strong CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., carbamazepine, rifampin)

Double usual dose over 1 to 2 weeks

2.8 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].
Aripiprazole

Aripiprazole

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

The recommended starting and target dose for aripiprazole tablets is 10 or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. Aripiprazole tablets have been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either aripiprazole 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

Adolescents

The recommended target dose of aripiprazole is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. Aripiprazole can be administered without regard to meals [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to aripiprazole tablets or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. Aripiprazole tablets can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of aripiprazole tablets is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. Aripiprazole tablets can be given without regard to meals [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.2)].

Additional pediatric use information is approved for Otsuka America Pharmaceutical, Inc.’s ABILIFY® (aripiprazole) product. However, due to Otsuka America Pharmaceutical, Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that information.

2.7 Dosage Adjustments for Cytochrome P450 Considerations

Dosage adjustments are recommended in patients who are known CYP2D6 poor metabolizers and in patients taking concomitant CYP3A4 inhibitors or CYP2D6 inhibitors or strong CYP3A4 inducers (see Table 2). When the coadministered drug is withdrawn from the combination therapy, aripiprazole dosage should then be adjusted to its original level. When the coadministered CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn, aripiprazole dosage should be reduced to the original level over 1 to 2 weeks. Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (e.g., a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response.

Table 2: Dose Adjustments for Aripiprazole in Patients who are known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers and Patients Taking Concomitant CYP2D6 Inhibitors, 3A4 Inhibitors, and/or CYP3A4 Inducers

Factors

Dosage Adjustments for Aripiprazole

Known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers

Administer half of usual dose

Known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers taking concomitant strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., itraconazole, clarithromycin)

Administer a quarter of usual dose

Strong CYP2D6 (e.g., quinidine, fluoxetine, paroxetine) or CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., itraconazole, clarithromycin)

Administer half of usual dose

Strong CYP2D6 and CYP3A4 inhibitors

Administer a quarter of usual dose

Strong CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., carbamazepine, rifampin)

Double usual dose over 1 to 2 weeks

2.8 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].
Fluocinonide

Fluocinonide

The topical corticosteroids are generally applied to the affected area as a thin film from two to four times daily depending on the severity of the condition.

Occlusive dressings may be used for the management of psoriasis or recalcitrant conditions.

If an infection develops, the use of occlusive dressings should be discontinued and appropriate antimicrobial therapy instituted.
Warfarin Sodium

Warfarin Sodium

2.1 Individualized Dosing

The dosage and administration of warfarin sodium tablets must be individualized for each patient according to the patient’s INR response to the drug. Adjust the dose based on the patient’s INR and the condition being treated. Consult the latest evidence-based clinical practice guidelines from the American College of Chest Physicians (ACCP) to assist in the determination of the duration and intensity of anticoagulation with warfarin sodium tablets [see References (15)].

2.2 Recommended Target INR Ranges and Durations for Individual Indications

An INR of greater than 4 appears to provide no additional therapeutic benefit in most patients and is associated with a higher risk of bleeding.

Venous Thromboembolism (including deep venous thrombosis [DVT] and PE)

Adjust the warfarin dose to maintain a target INR of 2.5 (INR range, 2 to 3) for all treatment durations. The duration of treatment is based on the indication as follows:
• For patients with a DVT or PE secondary to a transient (reversible) risk factor, treatment with warfarin for 3 months is recommended. • For patients with an unprovoked DVT or PE, treatment with warfarin is recommended for at least 3 months. After 3 months of therapy, evaluate the risk-benefit ratio of long-term treatment for the individual patient. • For patients with two episodes of unprovoked DVT or PE, long-term treatment with warfarin is recommended. For a patient receiving long-term anticoagulant treatment, periodically reassess the risk-benefit ratio of continuing such treatment in the individual patient.
Atrial Fibrillation

In patients with non-valvular AF, anticoagulate with warfarin to target INR of 2.5 (range, 2 to 3).
• In patients with non-valvular AF that is persistent or paroxysmal and at high risk of stroke (i.e., having any of the following features: prior ischemic stroke, transient ischemic attack, or systemic embolism, or 2 of the following risk factors: age greater than 75 years, moderately or severely impaired left ventricular systolic function and/or heart failure, history of hypertension, or diabetes mellitus), long-term anticoagulation with warfarin is recommended. • In patients with non-valvular AF that is persistent or paroxysmal and at an intermediate risk of ischemic stroke (i.e., having 1 of the following risk factors: age greater than 75 years, moderately or severely impaired left ventricular systolic function and/or heart failure, history of hypertension, or diabetes mellitus), long-term anticoagulation with warfarin is recommended. • For patients with AF and mitral stenosis, long-term anticoagulation with warfarin is recommended. • For patients with AF and prosthetic heart valves, long-term anticoagulation with warfarin is recommended; the target INR may be increased and aspirin added depending on valve type and position, and on patient factors.
Mechanical and Bioprosthetic Heart Valves
• For patients with a bileaflet mechanical valve or a Medtronic Hall (Minneapolis, MN) tilting disk valve in the aortic position who are in sinus rhythm and without left atrial enlargement, therapy with warfarin to a target INR of 2.5 (range, 2 to 3) is recommended. • For patients with tilting disk valves and bileaflet mechanical valves in the mitral position, therapy with warfarin to a target INR of 3 (range, 2.5 to 3.5) is recommended. • For patients with caged ball or caged disk valves, therapy with warfarin to a target INR of 3 (range, 2.5 to 3.5) is recommended. • For patients with a bioprosthetic valve in the mitral position, therapy with warfarin to a target INR of 2.5 (range, 2 to 3) for the first 3 months after valve insertion is recommended. If additional risk factors for thromboembolism are present (AF, previous thromboembolism, left ventricular dysfunction), a target INR of 2.5 (range 2 to 3) is recommended.
Post-Myocardial Infarction
• For high-risk patients with MI (e.g., those with a large anterior MI, those with significant heart failure, those with intracardiac thrombus visible on transthoracic echocardiography, those with AF, and those with a history of a thromboembolic event), therapy with combined moderate-intensity (INR, 2 to 3) warfarin plus low-dose aspirin (≤ 100 mg/day) for at least 3 months after the MI is recommended.
Recurrent Systemic Embolism and Other Indications

Oral anticoagulation therapy with warfarin has not been fully evaluated by clinical trials in patients with valvular disease associated with AF, patients with mitral stenosis, and patients with recurrent systemic embolism of unknown etiology. However, a moderate dose regimen (INR 2 to 3) may be used for these patients.

2.3 Initial and Maintenance Dosing

The appropriate initial dosing of warfarin sodium tablets varies widely for different patients. Not all factors responsible for warfarin dose variability are known, and the initial dose is influenced by:
• Clinical factors including age, race, body weight, sex, concomitant medications, and comorbidities • Genetic factors (CYP2C9 and VKORC1 genotypes) [ see Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)].
Select the initial dose based on the expected maintenance dose, taking into account the above factors. Modify this dose based on consideration of patient-specific clinical factors. Consider lower initial and maintenance doses for elderly and/or debilitated patients and in Asian patients [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Routine use of loading doses is not recommended as this practice may increase hemorrhagic and other complications and does not offer more rapid protection against clot formation.

Individualize the duration of therapy for each patient. In general, anticoagulant therapy should be continued until the danger of thrombosis and embolism has passed [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

Dosage Recommendations without Consideration of Genotype

If the patient’s CYP2C9 and VKORC1 genotypes are not known, the initial dose of warfarin sodium tablets is usually 2 to 5 mg once daily. Determine each patient’s dosing needs by close monitoring of the INR response and consideration of the indication being treated. Typical maintenance doses are 2 to 10 mg once daily.

Dosing Recommendations with Consideration of Genotype

Table 1 displays three ranges of expected maintenance warfarin sodium tablets doses observed in subgroups of patients having different combinations of CYP2C9 and VKORC1 gene variants [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)]. If the patient’s CYP2C9 and/or VKORC1 genotype are known, consider these ranges in choosing the initial dose. Patients with CYP2C9 *1/*3, *2/*2, *2/*3, and *3/*3 may require more prolonged time (> 2 to 4 weeks) to achieve maximum INR effect for a given dosage regimen than patients without these CYP variants.

Table 1: Three Ranges of Expected Maintenance Warfarin Sodium Tablets Daily Doses Based on CYP2C9 and VKORC1 Genotypes†

VKORC1

CYP2C9

*1/*1

*1/*2

*1/*3

*2/*2

*2/*3

*3/*3

GG

5 to 7 mg

5 to 7 mg

3 to 4 mg

3 to 4 mg

3 to 4 mg

0.5 to 2 mg

AG

5 to 7 mg

3 to 4 mg

3 to 4 mg

3 to 4 mg

0.5 to 2 mg

0.5 to 2 mg

AA

3 to 4 mg

3 to 4 mg

0.5 to 2 mg

0.5 to 2 mg

0.5 to 2 mg

0.5 to 2 mg

† Ranges are derived from multiple published clinical studies. VKORC1 −1639G > A (rs9923231) variant is used in this table. Other co-inherited VKORC1 variants may also be important determinants of warfarin dose.

2.4 Monitoring to Achieve Optimal Anticoagulation

Warfarin sodium tablets are a narrow therapeutic range (index) drug, and their action may be affected by factors such as other drugs and dietary vitamin K. Therefore, anticoagulation must be carefully monitored during warfarin sodiumtablets therapy. Determine the INR daily after the administration of the initial dose until INR results stabilize in the therapeutic range. After stabilization, maintain dosing within the therapeutic range by performing periodic INRs. The frequency of performing INR should be based on the clinical situation but generally acceptable intervals for INR determinations are 1 to 4 weeks. Perform additional INR tests when other warfarin products are interchanged with warfarin sodiumtablets, as well as whenever other medications are initiated, discontinued, or taken irregularly. Heparin, a common concomitant drug, increases the INR [see Dosage and Administration (2.8) and Drug Interactions (7)].

Determinations of whole blood clotting and bleeding times are not effective measures for monitoring of warfarin sodium tablets therapy.

2.5 Missed Dose

The anticoagulant effect of warfarin sodium tablets persists beyond 24 hours. If a patient misses a dose of warfarin sodium tablets at the intended time of day, the patient should take the dose as soon as possible on the same day. The patient should not double the dose the next day to make up for a missed dose.

2.7 Treatment During Dentistry and Surgery

Some dental or surgical procedures may necessitate the interruption or change in the dose of warfarin sodium tablets therapy. Consider the benefits and risks when discontinuing warfarin sodium tablets even for a short period of time. Determine the INR immediately prior to any dental or surgical procedure. In patients undergoing minimally invasive procedures who must be anticoagulated prior to, during, or immediately following these procedures, adjusting the dosage of warfarin sodium tablets to maintain the INR at the low end of the therapeutic range may safely allow for continued anticoagulation.

2.8 Conversion From Other Anticoagulants

Heparin

Since the full anticoagulant effect of warfarin sodium tablets is not achieved for several days, heparin is preferred for initial rapid anticoagulation. During initial therapy with warfarin sodium tablets, the interference with heparin anticoagulation is of minimal clinical significance. Conversion to warfarin sodium tablets may begin concomitantly with heparin therapy or may be delayed 3 to 6 days. To ensure therapeutic anticoagulation, continue full dose heparin therapy and overlap warfarin sodium tablets therapy with heparin for 4 to 5 days and until warfarin sodium tablets has produced the desired therapeutic response as determined by INR, at which point heparin may be discontinued.

As heparin may affect the INR, patients receiving both heparin and warfarin sodium tablets should have INR monitoring at least:
• 5 hours after the last intravenous bolus dose of heparin, or • 4 hours after cessation of a continuous intravenous infusion of heparin, or • 24 hours after the last subcutaneous heparin injection.
Warfarin sodium tablets may increase the activated partial thromboplastin time (aPTT) test, even in the absence of heparin. A severe elevation (> 50 seconds) in aPTT with an INR in the desired range has been identified as an indication of increased risk of postoperative hemorrhage.

Other Anticoagulants

Consult the labeling of other anticoagulants for instructions on conversion to warfarin sodium tablets.
Pioglitazone

Pioglitazone

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone tablets USP should be taken once daily and can be taken without regard to meals.

The recommended starting dose for patients without congestive heart failure is 15 mg or 30 mg once daily.

The recommended starting dose for patients with congestive heart failure (NYHA Class I or II) is 15 mg once daily.

The dose can be titrated in increments of 15 mg up to a maximum of 45 mg once daily based on glycemic response as determined by HbA1c.

After initiation of pioglitazone tablets USP or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure [see Boxed Warning and Warnings and Precautions (5.5)].

Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone tablets USP. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone tablets USP is not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone tablets USP or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone tablets USP should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Concomitant Use With an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets USP and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets USP and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Concomitant Use With Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone tablets USP and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3 fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone tablets USP is 15 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Pantoprazole Sodium

Pantoprazole Sodium

2.1 Instructions for Use in All Patients

Voriconazole tablets should be taken at least one hour before or after a meal.

2.3 Recommended Dosing in Adults

Invasive aspergillosis and serious fungal infections due to Fusarium spp. and Scedosporium apiospermum

See Table 1. Therapy must be initiated with the specified loading dose regimen of intravenous voriconazole on Day 1 followed by the recommended maintenance dose regimen. Intravenous treatment should be continued for at least 7 days. Once the patient has clinically improved and can tolerate medication given by mouth, the oral tablet form or oral suspension form of voriconazole may be utilized. The recommended oral maintenance dose of 200 mg achieves a voriconazole exposure similar to 3 mg/kg IV; a 300 mg oral dose achieves an exposure similar to 4 mg/kg IV. Switching between the intravenous and oral formulations is appropriate because of the high bioavailability of the oral formulation in adults [see Clinical Pharmacology (12)].

Candidemia in non-neutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for at least 14 days following resolution of symptoms or following last positive culture, whichever is longer.

Esophageal Candidiasis

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for a minimum of 14 days and for at least 7 days following resolution of symptoms.

Table 1:
Recommended Dosing Regimen
Infection

Loading Dose

Maintenance Dosea,b

IV

IV

Oralc

Invasive Aspergillosisd

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

Candidemia in nonneutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

3 to 4 mg/kg q12he

200 mg q12h

Esophageal Candidiasis

f

f

200 mg q12h

Scedosporiosis and Fusariosis

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

a Increase dose when voriconazole is coadministered with phenytoin or efavirenz (7); Decrease dose in patients with hepatic impairment (2.7).

b In healthy volunteer studies, the 200 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUCτ) similar to a 3 mg/kg IV q12h dose; the 300 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUCτ) similar to a 4 mg/kg IV q12h dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12)].

c Adult patients who weigh less than 40 kg should receive half of the oral maintenance dose.

d In a clinical study of invasive aspergillosis, the median duration of IV voriconazole therapy was 10 days (range 2 to 85 days). The median duration of oral voriconazole therapy was 76 days (range 2 to 232 days) [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

e In clinical trials, patients with candidemia received 3 mg/kg IV q12h as primary therapy, while patients with other deep tissue Candida infections received 4 mg/kg q12h as salvage therapy. Appropriate dose should be based on the severity and nature of the infection.

f Not evaluated in patients with esophageal candidiasis.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment

If patient response is inadequate, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 200 mg every 12 hours (similar to 3 mg/kg IV q12h) to 300 mg every 12 hours (similar to 4 mg/kg IV q12h). For adult patients weighing less than 40 kg, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 100 mg every 12 hours to 150 mg every 12 hours. If patient is unable to tolerate 300 mg orally every 12 hours, reduce the oral maintenance dose by 50 mg steps to a minimum of 200 mg every 12 hours (or to 100 mg every 12 hours for adult patients weighing less than 40 kg).

If patient is unable to tolerate 4 mg/kg IV q12h, reduce the intravenous maintenance dose to 3 mg/kg q12h.

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be increased when coadministered with phenytoin or efavirenz [see Drug Interactions (7)].

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be reduced in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, Child-Pugh Class A and B [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)]. There are no PK data to allow for dosage adjustment recommendations in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class C). Duration of therapy should be based on the severity of the patient’s underlying disease, recovery from immunosuppression, and clinical response.

2.7 Use in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

In the clinical program, patients were included who had baseline liver function tests (ALT, AST) up to 5 times the upper limit of normal. No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with this degree of abnormal liver function, but continued monitoring of liver function tests for further elevations is recommended [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

It is recommended that the standard loading dose regimens be used but that the maintenance dose be halved in patients with mild to moderate hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class A and B) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Voriconazole tablets have not been studied in patients with severe hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class C) or in patients with chronic hepatitis B or chronic hepatitis C disease. Voriconazole tablets have been associated with elevations in liver function tests and clinical signs of liver damage, such as jaundice, and should only be used in patients with severe hepatic impairment if the benefit outweighs the potential risk. Patients with hepatic insufficiency must be carefully monitored for drug toxicity.

2.8 Use in Patients With Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of orally administered voriconazole tablets are not significantly affected by renal impairment. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary for oral dosing in patients with mild to severe renal impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

In patients with moderate or severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min), accumulation of the intravenous vehicle, SBECD, occurs. Oral voriconazole should be administered to these patients, unless an assessment of the benefit/risk to the patient justifies the use of intravenous voriconazole. Serum creatinine levels should be closely monitored in these patients, and, if increases occur, consideration should be given to changing to oral voriconazole therapy [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Voriconazole is hemodialyzed with clearance of 121 mL/min. The intravenous vehicle, SBECD, is hemodialyzed with clearance of 55 mL/min. A 4 hour hemodialysis session does not remove a sufficient amount of voriconazole to warrant dose adjustment.

2.8 Use in Patients With Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of orally administered voriconazole tablets are not significantly affected by renal impairment. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary for oral dosing in patients with mild to severe renal impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

In patients with moderate or severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min), accumulation of the intravenous vehicle, SBECD, occurs. Oral voriconazole should be administered to these patients, unless an assessment of the benefit/risk to the patient justifies the use of intravenous voriconazole. Serum creatinine levels should be closely monitored in these patients, and, if increases occur, consideration should be given to changing to oral voriconazole therapy [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Voriconazole is hemodialyzed with clearance of 121 mL/min. The intravenous vehicle, SBECD, is hemodialyzed with clearance of 55 mL/min. A 4 hour hemodialysis session does not remove a sufficient amount of voriconazole to warrant dose adjustment.
Baman 40

Baman 40

Levalbuterol inhalation solution (concentrate) is for oral inhalation only. Dilute with sterile normal saline before administration. Administer by nebulization using a standard jet nebulizer (with a face mask or mouthpiece) connected to an air compressor. Do not exceed recommended dose. For dosages less than 1.25 mg, the non-concentrate (i.e., levalbuterol inhalation solution, 3mL) formulation must be used.

Children 6 to 11 years old: The recommended dosage of levalbuterol inhalation solution for patients 6 to 11 years old is 0.31 mg administered three times a day, by nebulization. Routine dosing should not exceed 0.63 mg three times a day.

Adults and Adolescents ≥ 12 years old: The recommended starting dosage of levalbuterol inhalation solution for patients 12 years of age and older is 0.63 mg administered three times a day, every 6 to 8 hours, by nebulization.

Patients 12 years of age and older with more severe asthma or patients who do not respond adequately to a dose of 0.63 mg of levalbuterol inhalation solution may benefit from a dosage of 1.25 mg three times a day.

Patients receiving the highest dose of levalbuterol inhalation solution should be monitored closely for adverse systemic effects, and the risks of such effects should be balanced against the potential for improved efficacy.

The use of levalbuterol inhalation solution can be continued as medically indicated to help control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. During this time, most patients gain optimal benefit from regular use of the inhalation solution.

If a previously effective dosage regimen fails to provide the usual response this may be a marker of destabilization of asthma and requires reevaluation of the patient and the treatment regimen, giving special consideration to the possible need for anti-inflammatory treatment, e.g., corticosteroids.

The drug compatibility (physical and chemical), efficacy, and safety of levalbuterol inhalation solution when mixed with other drugs in a nebulizer have not been established.

The safety and efficacy of levalbuterol inhalation solution have been established in clinical trials when administered using the PARI LC Jet™ and PARI LC Plus™ nebulizers, and the PARI Master® Dura-Neb® 2000 and Dura-Neb® 3000 compressors. The safety and efficacy of levalbuterol inhalation solution when administered using other nebulizer systems have not been established.
Sildenafil

Sildenafil

Carvedilol tablets should be taken with food to slow the rate of absorption and reduce the incidence of orthostatic effects.

2.1 Heart Failure

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND CLOSELY MONITORED BY A PHYSICIAN DURING UP-TITRATION. Prior to initiation of carvedilol tablets, it is recommended that fluid retention be minimized. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol tablets is 3.125 mg twice daily for 2 weeks. If tolerated, patients may have their dose increased to 6.25, 12.5, and 25 mg twice daily over successive intervals of at least 2 weeks. Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. A maximum dose of 50 mg twice daily has been administered to patients with mild-to-moderate heart failure weighing over 85 kg (187 lbs).

Patients should be advised that initiation of treatment and (to a lesser extent) dosage increases may be associated with transient symptoms of dizziness or lightheadedness (and rarely syncope) within the first hour after dosing. During these periods, patients should avoid situations such as driving or hazardous tasks, where symptoms could result in injury. Vasodilatory symptoms often do not require treatment, but it may be useful to separate the time of dosing of carvedilol tablets from that of the ACE inhibitor or to reduce temporarily the dose of the ACE inhibitor. The dose of carvedilol tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure or vasodilation have been stabilized.

Fluid retention (with or without transient worsening heart failure symptoms) should be treated by an increase in the dose of diuretics.

The dose of carvedilol tablets should be reduced if patients experience bradycardia (heart rate < 55 beats/minute).

Episodes of dizziness or fluid retention during initiation of carvedilol tablets can generally be managed without discontinuation of treatment and do not preclude subsequent successful titration of, or a favorable response to, carvedilol.

2.2 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP-TITRATION. Treatment with carvedilol tablets may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that carvedilol tablets be started at 6.25 mg twice daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 12.5 mg twice daily, then again to the target dose of 25 mg twice daily. A lower starting dose may be used (3.125 mg twice daily) and/or the rate of up-titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β-blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.3 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol tablets is 6.25 mg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 12.5 mg twice daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure one hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 25 mg twice daily if tolerated and needed. The full antihypertensive effect of carvedilol tablets is seen within 7 to 14 days. Total daily dose should not exceed 50 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

Carvedilol tablets should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Contraindications (4)].
Cefadroxil

Cefadroxil

Cefadroxil for oral suspension is acid-stable and may be administered orally without regard to meals. Administration with food may be helpful in diminishing potential gastrointestinal complaints occasionally associated with oral cephalosporin therapy.

Adults

Urinary Tract Infections

For uncomplicated lower urinary tract infections (i.e., cystitis) the usual dosage is 1 or 2 g per day in a single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.).

For all other urinary tract infections the usual dosage is 2 g per day in divided doses (b.i.d.).

Skin and Skin Structure Infections

For skin and skin structure infections the usual dosage is 1 g per day in single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.).

Pharyngitis and Tonsillitis

Treatment of group A beta-hemolytic streptococcal pharyngitis and tonsillitis – 1 g per day in single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.) for 10 days.

Children

For urinary tract infections, the recommended daily dosage for children is 30 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours. For pharyngitis, tonsillitis, and impetigo, the recommended daily dosage for children is 30 mg/kg/day in a single dose or in equally divided doses every 12 hours. For other skin and skin structure infections, the recommended daily dosage is 30 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 12 hours. In the treatment of beta-hemolytic streptococcal infections, a therapeutic dosage of cefadroxil for oral suspension should be administered for at least 10 days.

See chart for total daily dosage for children.
DAILY DOSAGE OF CEFADROXIL FOR ORAL SUSPENSION USP Child’s Weight lbs kg 250 mg/5 mL 500 mg/5 mL 10 4.5 ½ tsp 20 9.1 1 tsp 30 13.6 1½ tsp 40 18.2 2 tsp 1 tsp 50 22.7 2½ tsp 1¼ tsp 60 27.3 3 tsp 1½ tsp 70 & above 31.8 + -- 2 tsp
Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment, the dosage of cefadroxil monohydrate should be adjusted according to creatinine clearance rates to prevent drug accumulation. The following schedule is suggested. In adults, the initial dose is 1000 mg of cefadroxil for oral suspension and the maintenance dose (based on the creatinine clearance rate [mL/min/1.73 m2]) is 500 mg at the time intervals listed below.
Creatinine Clearances Dosage Interval 0 to 10 mL/min 36 hours 10 to 25 mL/min 24 hours 25 to 50 mL/min 12 hours
Patients with creatinine clearance rates over 50 mL/min may be treated as if they were patients having normal renal function.
Reconstitution Directions for Oral Suspension Bottle Size Reconstitution Directions 100 mL Suspend in a total of 82 mL water. Method: Tap bottle lightly to loosen powder. Add 82 mL of water in two portions. Shake well after each addition. 75 mL Suspend in a total of 62 mL water. Method: Tap bottle lightly to loosen powder. Add 62 mL of water in two portions. Shake well after each addition. 50 mL Suspend in a total of 43 mL water. Method: Tap bottle lightly to loosen powder. Add 43 mL of water in two portions. Shake well after each addition. After reconstitution, store in refrigerator. Shake well before using. Keep container tightly closed. Discard unused portion after 14 days.
Backaid Max

Backaid Max

2.1 Required Laboratory Testing Prior to Initiation and During Therapy

Prior to initiating treatment with Clozapine ODT, a baseline ANC must be obtained. The baseline ANC must be at least 1500/µL for the general population, and at least 1000/µL for patients with documented Benign Ethnic Neutropenia (BEN). To continue treatment, the ANC must be monitored regularly [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.2 Important Administration Instructions

Clozapine orally disintegrating tablets should be immediately placed in the mouth after removing the tablet from the blister pack or bottle. The tablet disintegrates rapidly after placement in the mouth. The tablets can be allowed to disintegrate, or they may be chewed. They may be swallowed with saliva. No water is necessary for administration.

The orally disintegrating tablets in a blister pack should be left in the unopened blister until the time of use. Just prior to use, peel the foil from the blister and gently remove the orally disintegrating tablet. Do not push the tablets through the foil, because this could damage the tablet.

2.3 Dosing Information

The starting dose is 12.5 mg once daily or twice daily. The total daily dose can be increased in increments of 25 mg to 50 mg per day, if well-tolerated, to achieve a target dose of 300 mg to 450 mg per day (administered in divided doses) by the end of 2 weeks. Subsequently, the dose can be increased once weekly or twice weekly, in increments of up to 100 mg. The maximum dose is 900 mg per day. To minimize the risk of orthostatic hypotension, bradycardia, and syncope, it is necessary to use this low starting dose, gradual titration schedule, and divided dosages [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Clozapine ODT can be taken with or without food [see Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.4 Maintenance Treatment

Generally, patients responding to Clozapine ODT should continue maintenance treatment on their effective dose beyond the acute episode.

2.5 Discontinuation of Treatment

Method of treatment discontinuation will vary depending on the patient’s last ANC:
• See Tables 2 or 3 for appropriate ANC monitoring based on the level of neutropenia if abrupt treatment discontinuation is necessary because of moderate to severe neutropenia. • Reduce the dose gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks if termination of Clozapine ODT therapy is planned and there is no evidence of moderate to severe neutropenia. • For abrupt clozapine discontinuation for a reason unrelated to neutropenia, continuation of the existing ANC monitoring is recommended for general population patients until their ANC is ≥1500/µL and for BEN patients until their ANC is ≥1000/µL or above their baseline. • Additional ANC monitoring is required for any patient reporting onset of fever (temperature of 38.5ºC or 101.3ºF, or greater) during the 2 weeks after discontinuation [see Warnings and Precautions ( 5.1)] . • Monitor all patients carefully for the recurrence of psychotic symptoms and symptoms related to cholinergic rebound such as profuse sweating, headache, nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea.
2.6 Re-Initiation of Treatment

When restarting Clozapine ODT in patients who have discontinued Clozapine ODT (i.e., 2 days or more since the last dose), re-initiate with 12.5 mg once daily or twice daily. This is necessary to minimize the risk of hypotension, bradycardia, and syncope [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. If that dose is well-tolerated, the dose may be increased to the previously therapeutic dose more quickly than recommended for initial treatment.

2.7 Dosage Adjustments with Concomitant use of CYP1A2, CYP2D6, CYP3A4 Inhibitors or CYP1A2, CYP3A4 Inducers

Dose adjustments may be necessary in patients with concomitant use of: strong CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., fluvoxamine, ciprofloxacin, or enoxacin); moderate or weak CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., oral contraceptives, or caffeine); CYP2D6 or CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., cimetidine, escitalopram, erythromycin, paroxetine, bupropion, fluoxetine, quinidine, duloxetine, terbinafine, or sertraline); CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, St. John’s wort, and rifampin); or CYP1A2 inducers (e.g., tobacco smoking) (Table 1) [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Table 1: Dosage Adjustment in Patients Taking Concomitant Medications

Co-medications

Scenarios

Initiating Clozapine ODT while taking a co-medication

Adding a co-medication while taking Clozapine ODT

Discontinuing a co-medication while continuing Clozapine ODT

Strong CYP1A2 Inhibitors

Use one third of the Clozapine ODT dose.

Increase Clozapine ODT dose based on clinical response.

Moderate or Weak CYP1A2 Inhibitors

Monitor for adverse reactions. Consider reducing the Clozapine ODT dose if necessary.

Monitor for lack of effectiveness. Consider increasing Clozapine ODT dose if necessary.

CYP2D6 or

CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Strong CYP3A4

Inducers

Concomitant use is not recommended. However, if the inducer is necessary, it may be necessary to increase the Clozapine ODT dose. Monitor for decreased effectiveness.

Reduce Clozapine ODT dose based on clinical response.

Moderate or Weak CYP1A2 or

CYP3A4 Inducers

Monitor for decreased effectiveness. Consider increasing the Clozapine ODT dose if necessary.

Monitor for adverse reactions. Consider reducing the Clozapine ODT dose if necessary.

2.8 Renal or Hepatic Impairment or CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers

It may be necessary to reduce the Clozapine ODT dose in patients with significant renal or hepatic impairment, or in CYP2D6 poor metabolizers [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6, 8.7)].
Timolol Maleate Solutio...

Timolol Maleate Solution Drops

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their sensitivity to the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with penicillinase-resistant penicillins should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer term of therapy.

Concurrent administration of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins and probenecid increases and prolongs serum penicillin levels.

Probenecid decreases the apparent volume of distribution and slows the rate of excretion by competitively inhibiting renal tubular secretion of penicillin. Penicillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of penicillin are necessary.

Oral preparations of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should not be used as initial therapy in serious, life-threatening infections (see PRECAUTIONS - General). Oral therapy with the penicillinase-resistant penicillins may be used to follow up the previous use of a parenteral agent as soon as the clinical condition warrants. For intramuscular gluteal injections, care should be taken to avoid sciatic nerve injury. With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

NB: INFECTIONS CAUSED BY GROUP A BETA-HEMOLYTIC STREPTOCOCCI SHOULD BE TREATED FOR AT LEAST 10 DAYS TO HELP PREVENT THE OCCURRENCE OF ACUTE RHEUMATIC FEVER OR ACUTE GLOMERULONEPHRITIS.
Mucus Relief Pe

Mucus Relief Pe

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection - Olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 1 week, since steady state for olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets would not be achieved for approximately 1 week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets are not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations - The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥ 65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment - The effectiveness of olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection - Olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment - The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy - Olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy - The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment - When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, olanzapine orally disintegrating tablet dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection - Olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Treatment - The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder in the adolescent population has not been evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.3 Administration of Olanzapine Orally Disintegrating Tablets

Remove the blister from the carton, peel back foil on blister. Do not push tablet through foil. Immediately upon opening the blister, using dry hands, remove tablet and place entire olanzapine orally disintegrating tablet in the mouth. Tablet disintegration occurs rapidly in saliva so it can be easily swallowed with or without liquid.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adults

Olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine tablets and olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.
Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax* and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine * Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.
For Symbyax

(mg/day)

Use in Combination

Olanzapine (mg/day)

Fluoxetine (mg/day)

3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

2.5 5 10+2.5 5 10+2.5

20 2020 40+10 40+10

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients under 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

2.1 Healing of Erosive or Ulcerative GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily for four to eight weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.1)]. For those patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8 week course of rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets may be considered.

2.2 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive or Ulcerative GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily. Controlled studies do not extend beyond 12 months [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

2.3 Treatment of Symptomatic GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily for 4 weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.3)]. If symptoms do not resolve completely after 4 weeks, an additional course of treatment may be considered.

2.4 Healing of Duodenal Ulcers in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily after the morning meal for a period up to four weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.5)]. Most patients with duodenal ulcer heal within four weeks. A few patients may require additional therapy to achieve healing.

2.5 Helicobacter pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence in Adults
TABLE 1: THREE DRUG REGIMEN* * It is important that patients comply with the full 7 day regimen [see Clinical Studies (14.5)].
Rabeprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablet

20 mg

Twice Daily for 7 Days

Amoxicillin

1000 mg

Twice Daily for 7 Days

Clarithromycin

500 mg

Twice Daily for 7 Days

All three medications should be taken twice daily with the morning and evening meals.

2.6 Treatment of Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions, Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome in Adults

The dosage of rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets in patients with pathologic hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Some patients may require divided doses. Doses up to 100 mg QD and 60 mg BID have been administered. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets for up to one year.

2.7 Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD in Adolescent Patients 12 Years of Age and Older

The recommended oral dose for adolescents 12 years of age and older is one 20 mg delayed-release tablet once daily for up to 8 weeks [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Studies (14.7)].

2.9 Elderly, Renal, and Hepatic Impaired Patients

No dosage adjustment is necessary in elderly patients, in patients with renal disease, or in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Administration of rabeprazole to patients with mild to moderate liver impairment resulted in increased exposure and decreased elimination. Due to the lack of clinical data on rabeprazole in patients with severe hepatic impairment, caution should be exercised in those patients.

2.10 Administration Recommendations
TABLE 2: ADMINISTRATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Formulation

Population

Instructions

Delayed-Release Tablet

Adults and adolescents 12 years of age and older

Swallow tablets whole. Do not chew, crush, or split tablets.

Tablets can be taken with or without food.
Malarone

Malarone

Patients should be retitrated when transferred from glyburide (micronized) tablets or other oral hypoglycemic agents (see PRECAUTIONS).

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with glyburide tablets. In addition to the usual monitoring of urinary glucose, the patient’s blood glucose must also be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient’s response to therapy.

Short-term administration of glyburide tablets may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

Usual Starting Dose

The usual starting dose of glyburide tablets is 2.5 to 5 mg daily, administered with breakfast or the first main meal. Those patients who may be more sensitive to hypoglycemic drugs should be started at 1.25 mg daily. (See PRECAUTIONS section for patients at increased risk.) Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary and drug regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to therapy.

Transfer From Other Hypoglycemic Therapy Patients Receiving Other Oral Antidiabetic Therapy

Transfer of patients from other oral antidiabetic regimens to glyburide tablets should be done conservatively and the initial daily dose should be 2.5 to 5 mg. When transferring patients from oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to glyburide tablets, no transition period and no initial or priming dose are necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, particular care should be exercised during the first two weeks because the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body and subsequent overlapping drug effects may provoke hypoglycemia.

Patients Receiving Insulin

Some Type II diabetic patients being treated with insulin may respond satisfactorily to glyburide tablets. If the insulin dose is less than 20 units daily, substitution of glyburide tablets 2.5 to 5 mg as a single daily dose may be tried. If the insulin dose is between 20 and 40 units daily, the patient may be placed directly on glyburide tablets 5 mg daily as a single dose. If the insulin dose is more than 40 units daily, a transition period is required for conversion to glyburide tablets. In these patients, insulin dosage is decreased by 50% and glyburide tablets 5 mg daily is started. Please refer to Titration to Maintenance Dose for further explanation.

Patients Receiving Colesevelam

When colesevelam is coadministered with glyburide, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glyburide is reduced. Therefore, glyburide tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.

Titration to Maintenance Dose

The usual maintenance dose is in the range of 1.25 to 20 mg daily, which may be given as a single dose or in divided doses (see Dosage Interval section). Dosage increases should be made in increments of no more than 2.5 mg at weekly intervals based upon the patient’s blood glucose response.

No exact dosage relationship exists between glyburide tablets and the other oral hypoglycemic agents. Although patients may be transferred from the maximum dose of other sulfonylureas, the maximum starting dose of 5 mg of glyburide tablets should be observed. A maintenance dose of 5 mg of glyburide tablets provides approximately the same degree of blood glucose control as 250 to 375 mg chlorpropamide, 250 to 375 mg tolazamide, 500 to 750 mg acetohexamide, or 1000 to 1500 mg tolbutamide.

When transferring patients receiving more than 40 units of insulin daily, they may be started on a daily dose of glyburide tablets 5 mg concomitantly with a 50% reduction in insulin dose. Progressive withdrawal of insulin and increase of glyburide tablets in increments of 1.25 to 2.5 mg every 2 to 10 days is then carried out. During this conversion period when both insulin and glyburide tablets are being used, hypoglycemia may occur. During insulin withdrawal, patients should test their urine for glucose and acetone at least three times daily and report results to their physician. The appearance of persistent acetonuria with glycosuria indicates that the patient is a Type I diabetic who requires insulin therapy.

Concomitant Glyburide and Metformin Therapy

Glyburide tablets should be added gradually to the dosing regimen of patients who have not responded to the maximum dose of metformin monotherapy after four weeks (see Usual Starting Dose and Titration to Maintenance Dose). Refer to metformin package insert.

With concomitant glyburide and metformin therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. However, attempts should be made to identify the optimal dose of each drug needed to achieve this goal. With concomitant glyburide and metformin therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken (see PRECAUTIONS section).

Maximum Dose

Daily doses of more than 20 mg are not recommended.

Dosage Interval

Once-a-day therapy is usually satisfactory. Some patients, particularly those receiving more than 10 mg daily, may have a more satisfactory response with twice-a-day dosage.

Specific Patient Populations

Glyburide is not recommended for use in pregnancy or for use in pediatric patients.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS section).
Progesterone

Progesterone

Prevention of Endometrial Hyperplasia

Progesterone capsules should be given as a single daily dose at bedtime, 200 mg orally for 12 days sequentially per 28 day cycle, to a postmenopausal woman with a uterus who is receiving daily conjugated estrogens tablets.

Treatment of Secondary Amenorrhea

Progesterone capsules may be given as a single daily dose of 400 mg at bedtime for 10 days.

Some women may experience difficulty swallowing progesterone capsules. For these women, progesterone capsules should be taken with a glass of water while in the standing position.
Cvs Triple-thick Antiba...

Cvs Triple-thick Antibacterial Washcloths

Use the lowest effective dose for the patient.

2.1 Dosage in Adults

The recommended starting dose is 1 mg. Dosing can be raised to 2 mg or 3 mg if clinically indicated. In some patients, the higher morning blood levels of eszopiclone tablets following use of the 2 mg or 3 mg dose increase the risk of next day impairment of driving and other activities that require full alertness [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. The total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 3 mg, once daily immediately before bedtime [see Warnings and Precautions (5.6)].

2.2 Geriatric or Debilitated Patients

The total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 2 mg in elderly or debilitated patients.

2.3 Patients with Severe Hepatic Impairment, or Taking Potent CYP3A4 Inhibitors

In patients with severe hepatic impairment, or in patients coadministered eszopiclone tablets with potent CYP3A4 inhibitors, the total dose of eszopiclone tablets should not exceed 2 mg [see Warning and Precautions (5.7)].

2.4 Use with CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustments may be necessary when eszopiclone tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.5 Administration with Food

Taking eszopiclone tablets with or immediately after a heavy, high-fat meal results in slower absorption and would be expected to reduce the effect of eszopiclone tablets on sleep latency [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Mercaptopurine

Mercaptopurine

Maintenance Therapy

Once a complete hematologic remission is obtained, maintenance therapy is considered essential. Maintenance doses will vary from patient to patient. The usual daily maintenance dose of mercaptopurine is 1.5 to 2.5 mg/kg/day as a single dose. It is to be emphasized that in pediatric patients with acute lymphatic leukemia in remission, superior results have been obtained when mercaptopurine has been combined with other agents (most frequently with methotrexate) for remission maintenance. Mercaptopurine should rarely be relied upon as a single agent for the maintenance of remissions induced in acute leukemia.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-8 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate.

Dosage with Concomitant Allopurinol

When allopurinol and mercaptopurine are administered concomitantly, the dose of mercaptopurine must be reduced to one third to one quarter of the usual dose to avoid severe toxicity.

Dosage in TPMT-deficient Patients

Patients with inherited little or no thiopurine S-methyltransferase (TPMT) activity are at increased risk for severe mercaptopurine toxicity from conventional doses of mercaptopurine and generally require substantial dose reduction. The optimal starting dose for homozygous deficient patients has not been established. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS sections.)

Most patients with heterozygous TPMT deficiency tolerated recommended mercaptopurine doses, but some require dose reduction. Genotypic and phenotypic testing of TPMT status are available. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS sections.)

Dosage in Renal and Hepatic Impairment

It is probably advisable to start with lower dosages in patients with impaired renal function, due to slower elimination of the drug and metabolites and a greater cumulative effect. Consideration should be given to reducing the dosage in patients with impaired hepatic function.
Tamoxifen Citrate

Tamoxifen Citrate

For patients with breast cancer, the recommended daily dose is 20 to 40 mg. Dosages greater than 20 mg per day should be given in divided doses (morning and evening).

In three single agent adjuvant studies in women, one 10 mg tamoxifen citrate tablet was administered two (ECOG and NATO) or three (Toronto) times a day for two years. In the NSABP B-14 adjuvant study in women with node-negative breast cancer, one 10 mg tamoxifen citrate tablet was given twice a day for at least 5 years. Results of the B-14 study suggest that continuation of therapy beyond five years does not provide additional benefit (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). In the EBCTCG 1995 overview, the reduction in recurrence and mortality was greater in those studies that used tamoxifen for about 5 years than in those that used tamoxifen for a shorter period of therapy. There was no indication that doses greater than 20 mg per day were more effective. Current data from clinical trials support 5 years of adjuvant tamoxifen therapy for patients with breast cancer.

Ductal Carcinoma in Situ (DCIS)

The recommended dose is tamoxifen 20 mg daily for 5 years.

Reduction in Breast Cancer Incidence in High Risk Women

The recommended dose is tamoxifen 20 mg daily for 5 years. There are no data to support the use of tamoxifen other than for 5 years (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies, Reduction in Breast Cancer Incidence in High Risk Women).
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride

2.1 Depressive Episodes Associated With Bipolar I Disorder

Adults – Administer olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules once daily in the evening, generally beginning with the 6 mg/25 mg (mg olanzapine/mg equivalent fluoxetine) capsule. While food has no appreciable effect on the absorption of olanzapine and fluoxetine given individually, the effect of food on the absorption of olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules has not been studied. Make dosage adjustments, if indicated, according to efficacy and tolerability. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules in a dose range of olanzapine 6 mg to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 mg to 50 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The safety of doses above 18 mg of olanzapine and 75 mg of fluoxetine has not been evaluated in adult clinical studies. Periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age) — Information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine and fluoxetine hydrochloride capsules. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

2.3 Specific Populations

Start olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules, 3 mg/25 mg or 6 mg/25 mg in patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status) or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Titrate slowly and adjust dosage as needed in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. Olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules have not been systematically studied in patients > 65 years of age or in patients < 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.21), Use in Specific Populations (8.5), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3, 12.4)].

Treatment of Pregnant Women — When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine, a component of olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalizations, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

2.4 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [seeContraindications (4.1)].

2.5 Use of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine Capsules With Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving olanzapine and fluoxetine capsule therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.6 Discontinuation of Treatment With Olanzapine and Fluoxetine Capsules

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, a component of olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.25)].
Fluconazole

Fluconazole

Dosage and Administration in Adults

Multiple Dose

SINCE ORAL ABSORPTION IS RAPID AND ALMOST COMPLETE, THE DAILY DOSE OF FLUCONAZOLE IS THE SAME FOR ORAL (TABLETS AND SUSPENSION) AND INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION. In general, a loading dose of twice the daily dose is recommended on the first day of therapy to result in plasma concentrations close to steady-state by the second day of therapy.

The daily dose of fluconazole for the treatment of infections other than vaginal candidiasis should be based on the infecting organism and the patient’s response to therapy. Treatment should be continued until clinical parameters or laboratory tests indicate that active fungal infection has subsided. An inadequate period of treatment may lead to recurrence of active infection. Patients with AIDS and cryptococcal meningitis or recurrent oropharyngeal candidiasis usually require maintenance therapy to prevent relapse.

Oropharyngeal Candidiasis

The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Clinical evidence of oropharyngeal candidiasis generally resolves within several days, but treatment should be continued for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal Candidiasis

The recommended dosage of fluconazole for esophageal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Doses up to 400 mg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of three weeks and for at least two weeks following resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida Infections

For systemic Candida infections including candidemia, disseminated candidiasis, and pneumonia, optimal therapeutic dosage and duration of therapy have not been established. In open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients, doses of up to 400 mg daily have been used.

Urinary Tract Infections and Peritonitis

For the treatment of Candida urinary tract infections and peritonitis, daily doses of 50 to 200 mg have been used in open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients.

Cryptococcal Meningitis

The recommended dosage for treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis is 400 mg on the first day, followed by 200 mg once daily. A dosage of 400 mg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. The recommended dosage of fluconazole for suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in patients with AIDS is 200 mg once daily.

Prophylaxis in Patients Undergoing Bone Marrow Transplantation

The recommended fluconazole daily dosage for the prevention of candidiasis in patients undergoing bone marrow transplantation is 400 mg, once daily. Patients who are anticipated to have severe granulocytopenia (less than 500 neutrophils per cu mm) should start fluconazole prophylaxis several days before the anticipated onset of neutropenia, and continue for 7 days after the neutrophil count rises above 1000 cells per cu mm.

Dosage and Administration in Children

The following dose equivalency scheme should generally provide equivalent exposure in pediatric and adult patients:
Pediatric Patients Adults 3 mg/kg 100 mg 6 mg/kg 200 mg 12* mg/kg 400 mg
* Some older children may have clearances similar to that of adults. Absolute doses exceeding 600 mg/day are not recommended.

Experience with fluconazole in neonates is limited to pharmacokinetic studies in premature newborns (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Based on the prolonged half-life seen in premature newborns (gestational age 26 to 29 weeks), these children, in the first two weeks of life, should receive the same dosage (mg/kg) as in older children, but administered every 72 hours. After the first two weeks, these children should be dosed once daily. No information regarding fluconazole pharmacokinetics in full-term newborns is available.

Oropharyngeal Candidiasis

The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis in children is 6 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 3 mg/kg once daily. Treatment should be administered for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal Candidiasis

For the treatment of esophageal candidiasis, the recommended dosage of fluconazole in children is 6 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 3 mg/kg once daily. Doses up to 12 mg/kg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of three weeks and for at least 2 weeks following the resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida Infections

For the treatment of candidemia and disseminated Candida infections, daily doses of 6 to 12 mg/kg/day have been used in an open, noncomparative study of a small number of children.

Cryptococcal Meningitis

For the treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis, the recommended dosage is 12 mg/kg on the first day, followed by 6 mg/kg once daily. A dosage of 12 mg/kg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. For suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in children with AIDS, the recommended dose of fluconazole is 6 mg/kg once daily.

Dosage In Patients With Impaired Renal Function

Fluconazole is cleared primarily by renal excretion as unchanged drug. In patients with impaired renal function who will receive multiple doses of fluconazole, an initial loading dose of 50 to 400 mg should be given. After the loading dose, the daily dose (according to indication) should be based on the following table:
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Percent of Recommended Dose > 50 100% ≤ 50 (no dialysis) 50% Regular dialysis 100% after each dialysis
These are suggested dose adjustments based on pharmacokinetics following administration of multiple doses. Further adjustment may be needed depending upon clinical condition.

When serum creatinine is the only measure of renal function available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) should be used to estimate the creatinine clearance in adults:

Males: Weight (kg) × (140-age)

72 × serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

Females: 0.85 × above value

Although the pharmacokinetics of fluconazole USP has not been studied in children with renal insufficiency, dosage reduction in children with renal insufficiency should parallel that recommended for adults. The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in children:

K × linear length or height (cm)

serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

(Where K = 0.55 for children older than 1 year and 0.45 for infants.)

Administration

Fluconazole for oral suspension can be taken with or without food.

Directions for Mixing the Oral Suspension

Prepare a suspension at time of dispensing as follows: tap bottle until all the powder flows freely. To reconstitute the 350 mg bottle, add 26 mL of distilled water or Purified Water (USP) to the bottle and shake vigorously to suspend powder. Each bottle will deliver 35 mL of suspension. To reconstitute the 1400 mg bottle, add 24 mL of distilled water or Purified Water (USP) to the bottle and shake vigorously to suspend powder. Each bottle will deliver 35 mL of suspension. The concentrations of the reconstituted suspensions are as follows:
Fluconazole USP Content per Bottle Concentration of Reconstituted Suspension 350 mg 10 mg/mL 1400 mg 40 mg/mL
Diazepam Gel

Diazepam Gel

This section is intended primarily for the prescriber; however, the prescriber should also be aware of the dosing information and directions for use provided in the patient package insert.

A decision to prescribe diazepam rectal gel involves more than the diagnosis and the selection of the correct dose for the patient.

First, the prescriber must be convinced from historical reports and/or personal observations that the patient exhibits the characteristic identifiable seizure cluster that can be distinguished from the patient’s usual seizure activity by the caregiver who will be responsible for administering diazepam rectal gel.

Second, because diazepam rectal gel is only intended for adjunctive use, the prescriber must ensure that the patient is receiving an optimal regimen of standard anti-epileptic drug treatment and is, nevertheless, continuing to experience these characteristic episodes.

Third, because a non-health professional will be obliged to identify episodes suitable for treatment, make the decision to administer treatment upon that identification, administer the drug, monitor the patient, and assess the adequacy of the response to treatment, a major component of the prescribing process involves the necessary instruction of this individual.

Fourth, the prescriber and caregiver must have a common understanding of what is and is not an episode of seizures that is appropriate for treatment, the timing of administration in relation to the onset of the episode, the mechanics of administering the drug, how and what to observe following administration, and what would constitute an outcome requiring immediate and direct medical attention.

Calculating Prescribed Dose

The diazepam rectal gel dose should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. The recommended dose of diazepam rectal gel is 0.2-0.5 mg/kg depending on age. See the dosing table for specific recommendations.
Age (years) Recommended Dose 2 through 5 0.5 mg/kg 6 through 11 0.3 mg/kg 12 and older 0.2 mg/kg
Because diazepam rectal gel is provided as unit doses of 2.5, 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 17.5, and 20 mg, the prescribed dose is obtained by rounding upward to the next available dose. The following table provides acceptable weight ranges for each dose and age category, such that patients will receive between 90% and 180% of the calculated recommended dose. The safety of this strategy has been established in clinical trials.
2 - 5 Years0.5 mg/kg 6 - 11 Years0.3 mg/kg 12+ Years0.2 mg/kg Weight(kg) Dose(mg) Weight(kg) Dose(mg) Weight(kg) Dose(mg) 6 to 10 5 10 to 16 5 14 to 25 5 11 to 15 7.5 17 to 25 7.5 26 to 37 7.5 16 to 20 10 26 to 33 10 38 to 50 10 21 to 25 12.5 34 to 41 12.5 51 to 62 12.5 26 to 30 15 42 to 50 15 63 to 75 15 31 to 35 17.5 51 to 58 17.5 76 to 87 17.5 36 to 44 20 59 to 74 20 88 to 111 20
The rectal delivery system includes a plastic applicator with a flexible, molded tip available in two lengths. The diazepam rectal gel 10 mg syringe is available with a 4.4 cm tip and the diazepam rectal gel 20 mg syringe is available with a 6.0 cm tip. Diazepam rectal gel 2.5 mg is also available with a 4.4 cm tip.

In elderly and debilitated patients, it is recommended that the dosage be adjusted downward to reduce the likelihood of ataxia or oversedation.

The prescribed dose of diazepam rectal gel should be adjusted by the physician periodically to reflect changes in the patient’s age or weight.

The diazepam rectal gel 2.5 mg dose may also be used as a partial replacement dose for patients who may expel a portion of the first dose.

Additional Dose

The prescriber may wish to prescribe a second dose of diazepam rectal gel. A second dose, when required, may be given 4-12 hours after the first dose.

Treatment Frequency

It is recommended that diazepam rectal gel be used to treat no more than five episodes per month and no more than one episode every five days.

Pharmacist Instructions
Methylphenidate Hydroch...

Methylphenidate Hydrochloride

Administration of Dose

Methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules are for oral administration once daily in the morning. Methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be swallowed as whole capsules or alternatively may be administered by sprinkling the capsule contents on a small amount of applesauce (see specific instructions below). Methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules and/or their contents should not be crushed, chewed, or divided.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the pellets sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should not be warm because it could affect the modified release properties of this formulation. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.

Dosing Recommendations

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patients.

Initial Treatment

The recommended starting dose of methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules is 20 mg once daily. Dosage may be adjusted in weekly 10 mg increments to a maximum of 60 mg/day taken once daily in the morning, depending on tolerability and degree of efficacy observed. Daily dosage above 60 mg is not recommended. When in the judgement of the clinician a lower initial dose is appropriate, patients may begin treatment with methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules 10 mg.

Patients Currently Receiving Methylphenidate

The recommended dose of methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for patients currently taking methylphenidate b.i.d. or sustained release (SR) is provided below.
Previous Methylphenidate Dose Recommended Methylphenidate Hydrochloride Extended-Release Capsules Dose 5 mg methylphenidate b.i.d. 10 mg q.d.
10 mg methylphenidate b.i.d.
or 20 mg methylphenidate-SR 20 mg q.d. 15 mg methylphenidate b.i.d. 30 mg q.d.
20 mg methylphenidate b.i.d.
or 40 mg of methylphenidate-SR 40 mg q.d.
30 mg methylphenidate b.i.d.
or 60 mg methylphenidate-SR 60 mg q.d.
For other methylphenidate regimens, clinical judgment should be used when selecting the starting dose. Methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsule dosage may be adjusted at weekly intervals in 10 mg increments.

Daily dosage above 60 mg is not recommended.

Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use methylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with trials off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued. If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a one-month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Fentanyl Patch

Fentanyl Patch

Special Precautions

Fentanyl transdermal system contains a high concentration of a potent Schedule II opioid agonist, fentanyl. Schedule II opioid substances which include fentanyl, hydromorphone, methadone, morphine, oxycodone, and oxymorphone have the highest potential for abuse and associated risk of fatal overdose due to respiratory depression. Fentanyl can be abused and is subject to criminal diversion. The high content of fentanyl in fentanyl transdermal system may be a particular target for abuse and diversion.

Fentanyl transdermal systems are intended for transdermal use (on intact skin) only. The fentanyl transdermal system should not be used if the seal is broken, or the patch is cut, damaged, or changed in any way.

Each fentanyl transdermal system may be worn continuously for 72 hours. The next patch should be applied to a different skin site after removal of the previous transdermal system.

If problems with adhesion of the fentanyl transdermal system occur, the edges of the patch may be taped with first aid tape. If problems with adhesion persist, the patch may be overlayed with a transparent adhesive film dressing (e.g., Bioclusive™).

If the patch falls off before 72 hours, dispose of it by folding in half and flushing down the toilet. A new patch may be applied to a different skin site.

Fentanyl transdermal system is ONLY for use in patients who are already tolerant to opioid therapy of comparable potency. Use in non-opioid tolerant patients may lead to fatal respiratory depression. Overestimating the fentanyl transdermal system dose when converting patients from another opioid medication can result in fatal overdose with the first dose. Due to the mean elimination half-life of 17 hours of fentanyl transdermal system, patients who are thought to have had a serious adverse event, including overdose, will require monitoring and treatment for at least 24 hours.

The concomitant use of fentanyl transdermal system with all cytochrome P450 3A4 inhibitors (such as ritonavir, ketoconazole, itraconazole, troleandomycin, clarithromycin, nelfinavir, nefazodone, amiodarone, amprenavir, aprepitant, diltiazem, erythromycin, fluconazole, fasamprenavir, grapefruit juice, and verapamil) may result in an increase in fentanyl plasma concentrations, which could increase or prolong adverse drug effects and may cause potentially fatal respiratory depression. Patients receiving fentanyl transdermal system and any CYP3A4 inhibitor should be carefully monitored for an extended period of time and dosage adjustments should be made if warranted (see BOX WARNING; WARNINGS; CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Drug Interactions; WARNINGS; and PRECAUTIONS for further information).

Pediatric patients converting to fentanyl transdermal system with a 25 mcg/hr patch should be opiod-tolerant and receiving at least 60 mg of oral morphine or the equivalent per day. The dose conversion schedule described in Table C, and method of titration described below are recommended in opioid-tolerant pediatric patients over 2 years of age with chronic pain (see PRCAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).

Respiratory depression is the chief hazard in elderly or debilitated patients, usually following large initial doses in non-tolerant patients, or when opioids are given in conjunction with other agents that depress respiration.

Fentanyl transdermal system should be used with caution in elderly, cachectic, or debilitated patients as they may have altered pharmacokinetics due to poor fat stores, muscle wasting, or altered clearance (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, Geriatric Use).

General Principles

Fentanyl transdermal system is indicated for management of persistent, moderate to severe chronic pain that:
requires continuous, around-the-clock opioid administration for an extended period of time cannot be managed by other means such as non-steroidal analgesics, opioid combination products, or immediate-release opioids.
Fentanyl transdermal system should ONLY be used in patients who are already receiving opioid therapy, who have demonstrated opioid tolerance, and who require a total daily dose at least equivalent to fentanyl transdermal system 25 mcg/hr. Patients who are considered opioid-tolerant are those who have been taking, for a week or longer, at least 60 mg of morphone daily, or at least 30 mg of oral oxycodone daily, or at least 8 mg oral hydromorphone daily, or an equianalgesic dose of another opioid.

Because serious or life-threatening hypoventilation could occur, fentanyl transdermal system is contraindicated:
in patients who are not opioid-tolerant in the management of acute pain or in patients who require opioid analgesia for a short period of time. in the management of post-operative pain, including use after out-patient or day surgeries (e.g., tonsillectomies) in the management of mild pain in the management of intermittent pain (e.g., use on an as needed basis [prn])
(See CONTRAINDICATIONS for further information.)

Safety of fentanyl transdermal system has not been established in children under 2 years of age. Fentanyl transdermal system should be administered to children only if they are opioid-tolerant and 2 years of age or older (see PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).

Prescribers should individualize treatment using a progressive plan of pain management such as outlined by the World Health Organization, the Agency for Health Research and Quality, the Federation of State Medical Boards Model Policy, or the American Pain Society.

With all opioids, the safety of patients using the products is dependent on health care practitioners prescribing them in strict conformity with their approved labeling with respect to patient selection, dosing, and proper conditions for use.

As with all opioids, dosage should be individualized. The most important factor to be considered in determining the appropriate dose is the extent of preexisting opioid-tolerance (see BOXWARNING and CONTRAINDICATIONS). Initial doses should be reduced in elderly or debilitated patients (see PRECAUTIONS).

Fentanyl transdermal system should be applied to intact, non-irritated, and non-irradiated skin on a flat surface such as the chest, back, flank, or upper arm. In young children and persons with cognitive impairment, adhesion should be monitored and the upper back is the preferred location to minimize the potential of inappropriate patch removal. Hair at the application site should be clipped (not shaved) prior to system application. If the site of fentanyl transdermal system application must be cleansed prior to application of the patch, do so with clear water. Do not use soaps, oils, lotions, alcohol, or any other agents that might irritate the skin or alter its characteristics. Allow the skin to dry completely prior to patch application.

Fentanyl transdermal system should be applied immediately upon removal from the sealed blister package. Do not use if the seal is broken. Do not alter the patch (e.g., cut) in any way prior to application and do not use cut or damaged patches.

The transdermal system should be pressed firmly in place with the palm of the hand for 30 seconds, making sure the contact is complete, especially around the edges. If the drug matrix accidentally contacts the skin of the patient or caregiver, the skin should be washed with copious amounts of water. Do not use soap, alcohol, or other solvents because they may enhance the drug’s ability to penetrate the skin.

Fentanyl transdermal system should be kept out of the reach of children. Used patches should be folded so that the adhesive side of the patch adheres to itself, then the patch should be flushed down the toilet immediately upon removal. Patients should dispose of any patches remaining from a prescription as soon as they are no longer needed. Unused patches should be removed from their blisters, folded so that the adhesive side of the patch adheres to itself, and flushed down the toilet.

Dose Selection

Doses must be individualized based upon the status of each patient and should be assessed at regular intervals after fentanyl transdermal system application. Reduced doses of fentanyl transdermal system are suggested for the elderly and other groups discussed in PRECAUTIONS.

Fentanyl transdermal system is ONLY for use in patients who are already tolerant to opioid therapy of comparable potency. Use in non-opioid tolerant patients may lead to fatal respiratory depression.

In selecting an initial fentanyl transdermal system dose, attention should be given to 1) the daily dose, potency, and characteristics of the opioid the patient has been taking previously (e.g., whether it is a pure agonist or mixed agonist-antagonist), 2) the reliability of the relative potency estimates used to calculate the fentanyl transdermal system dose needed (potency estimates may vary with the route of administration), 3) the degree of opioid tolerance, and 4) the general condition and medical status of the patient. Each patient should be maintained at the lowest dose providing acceptable pain control.

Initial Fentanyl Transdermal System Dose Selection

Overestimating the fentanyl transdermal system dose when converting patients from another opioid medication can result in fatal overdose with the first dose. Due to the mean elimination half-life of 17 hours of fentanyl transdermal system, patients who are thought to have had a serious adverse event, including overdose, will require monitoring and treatment for at least 24 hours.

There has been no systemic evaluation of fentanyl transdermal system as an initial opioid analgesic in the management of chronic pain, since most patients in the clinical trials were converted to fentanyl transdermal system from other narcotics. The efficacy of fentanyl transdermal system 12 mcg/hr as an initiating dose has not been determined. In addition, patients who are not opioid-tolerant have experienced hypoventilation and death during use of fentanyl transdermal system. Therefore, fentanyl transdermal system should be used only in patients who are opioid-tolerant.

To convert adult and pediatric patients from oral or parenteral opioids to fentanyl transdermal system use TABLE C:

Alternatively, for adult and pediatric patients taking opioids or doses not listed in TABLE C, use the following methodology:
Calculate the previous 24 hour analgesic requirement. Convert this amount to the equianalgesic oral morphine dose using TABLE D. TABLE E displays the range of 24 hour oral morphine doses that are recommended for conversion to each fentanyl transdermal system dose. Use this table to find the calculated 24 hour morphine dose and the corresponding fentanyl transdermal system dose. Initiate fentanyl transdermal system treatment using the recommended dose and titrate patients upwards (no more frequently than every 3 days after the initial dose or than every 6 days thereafter) until analgesic efficacy is attained. The recommended starting dose when converting from other opioids to fentanyl transdermal system is likely too low for 50% of patients. This starting dose is recommended to minimize the potential for overdosing patients with the first dose. For delivery rates in excess of 100 mcg/hr, multiple systems may be used. TABLE C1 DOSE CONVERSION GUIDELINES Current Analgesic Daily Dosage (mg/d) Oral morphine 60 to 134 135 to 224 225 to 314 315 to 404 IM/IV morphine 10 to 22 23 to 37 38 to 52 53 to 67 Oral oxycodone 30 to 67 67.5 to 112 112.5 to 157 157.5 to 202 IM/IV oxycodone 15 to 33 33.1 to 56 56.1 to 78 78.1 to 101 Oral codeine 150 to 447 448 to 747 748 to 1047 1048 to 1347 Oral hydromorphone 8 to 17 17.1 to 28 28.1 to 39 39.1 to 51 IV hydromorphone 1.5 to 3.4 3.5 to 5.6 5.7 to 7.9 8 to 10 IM meperidine 75 to 165 166 to 278 279 to 390 391 to 503 Oral methadone 20 to 44 45 to 74 75 to 104 105 to 134 IM methadone 10 to 22 23 to 37 38 to 52 53 to 67 ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ Recommended fentanyl transdermal system dose 25 mcg/hr 50 mcg/hr 75 mcg/hr 100 mcg/hr
Alternatively, for adult and pediatric patients taking opioids or doses not listed in TABLE C, use the conversion methodology outlined above with TABLE D.

1 TABLE C should not be used to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies because this conversion to fentanyl transdermal system is conservative. Use of TABLE C for conversion to other analgesic therapies can overestimate the dose of the new agent. Overdosage of the new analgesic agent is possible (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Discontinuation of Fentanyl Transdermal System).
TABLE D*† EQUIANALGESIC POTENCY CONVERSION * TABLE D should not be used to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies because this conversion to fentanyl transdermal system is conservative. Use of TABLE D for conversion to other analgesic therapies can overestimate the dose of the new agent. Overdosage of the new analgesic agent is possible (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Discontinuation of Fentanyl Transdermal System). † All IM and PO doses in this chart are considered equivalent to 10 mg of IM morphine in analgesic effect. IM denotes intramuscular, PO oral, and PR rectal. ‡ Based on single-dose studies in which an intramuscular dose of each drug listed was compared with morphine to establish the relative potency. Oral doses are those recommended when changing from parenteral to an oral route. Reference: Foley, K.M. (1985) The treatment of cancer pain. NEJM 313(2):84-95. § Although controlled studies are not available, in clinical practice it is customary to consider the doses of opioid given IM, IV, or subcutaneously to be equivalent. There may be some differences in pharmacokinetic parameters such as C max and T max. ¶ The conversion ratio of 10 mg parenteral morphine = 30 mg oral morphine is based on clinical experience in patients with chronic pain. The conversion ratio of 10 mg parenteral morphine = 60 mg oral morphine is based on a potency study in acute pain. Reference: Ashburn and Lipman (1993) Management of pain in the cancer patient. Anesth Analg 76:402-416. Name Equianalgesic Dose (mg) IM‡,§ PO Morphine 10 60 (30)¶ Hydromorphone (Dilaudid®) 1.5 7.5 Methadone (Dolophine®) 10 20 Oxycodone 15 30 Levorphanol (Levo-Dromoran®) 2 4 Oxymorphone (Numorphan®) 1 10 (PR) Meperidine (Demerol®) 75 - Codeine 130 200 TABLE E* RECOMMENDED INITIAL FENTANYL TRANSDERMAL SYSTEM DOSE BASED UPON DAILY ORAL MORPHINE DOSE * TABLE E should not be used to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies because this conversion to fentanyl transdermal system is conservative. Use of TABLE E for conversion to other analgesic therapies can overestimate the dose of the new agent. Overdosage of the new analgesic agent is possible (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Discontinuation of Fentanyl Transdermal System). Oral 24 hour Morphine (mg/day) Fentanyl Transdermal System Dose (mcg/hr) 60 to 134 25 135 to 224 50 225 to 314 75 315 to 404 100 405 to 494 125 495 to 584 150 585 to 674 175 675 to 764 200 765 to 854 225 855 to 944 250 945 to 1034 275 1035 to 1124 300
NOTE: In clinical trials, these ranges of daily oral morphine doses were used as a basis for conversion to fentanyl transdermal system.

The majority of patients are adequately maintained with fentanyl transdermal system administered every 72 hours. Some patients may not achieve adequate analgesia using this dosing interval and may require systems to be applied every 48 hours rather than every 72 hours. An increase in the fentanyl transdermal system dose should be evaluated before changing dosing intervals in order to maintain patients on a 72 hour regimen. Dosing intervals less than every 72 hours were not studied in children and adolescents and are not recommended.

Because of the increase in serum fentanyl concentration over the first 24 hours following initial system application, the initial evaluation of the maximum analgesic effect of fentanyl transdermal system cannot be made before 24 hours of wearing. The initial fentanyl transdermal system dose may be increased after 3 days (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Dose Titration).

During the initial application of fentanyl transdermal system, patients should use short-acting analgesics as needed until analgesic efficacy with fentanyl transdermal system is attained. Thereafter, some patients still may require periodic supplemental doses of other short-acting analgesics for “breakthrough” pain.

Dose Titration

The recommended initial fentanyl transdermal system dose based upon the daily oral morphine dose is conservative, and 50% of patients are likely to require a dose increase after initial application of fentanyl transdermal system. The initial fentanyl transdermal system dosage may be increased after 3 days based on the daily dose of supplemental opioid analgesics required by the patient in the second or third day of the initial application.

Physicians are advised that it may take up to 6 days after increasing the dose of fentanyl transdermal system for the patient to reach equilibrium on the new dose (see graph in CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Therefore, patients should wear a higher dose through two applications before any further increase in dosage is made on the basis of the average daily use of a supplemental analgesic.

Appropriate dosage increments should be based on the daily dose of supplementary opioids, using the ratio of 45 mg/24 hours of oral morphine to a 12.5 mcg/hr increase in fentanyl transdermal system dose.

Discontinuation of Fentanyl Transdermal System

To convert patients to another opioid, remove fentanyl transdermal system and titrate the dose of the new analgesic based upon the patient’s report of pain until adequate analgesia has been attained. Upon system removal, 17 hours or more are required for a 50% decrease in serum fentanyl concentrations. Opioid withdrawal symptoms (such as nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, anxiety, and shivering) are possible in some patients after conversion or dose adjustment. For patients requiring discontinuation of opioids, a gradual downward titration is recommended since it is not known at what dose level the opioid may be discontinued without producing the signs and symptoms of abrupt withdrawal.

TABLES C, D, and E should not be used to convert from fentanyl transdermal system to other therapies. Because the conversion of fentanyl transdermal system is conservative, use of TABLES C, D, and E for conversion to other analgesic therapies can overestimate the dose of the new agent. Overdosage of the new analgesic agent is possible.
Cephalexin Capsule Ceph...

Cephalexin Capsule Cephalexin

Cephalexin is administered orally.

Adults

The adult dosage ranges from 1 to 4 g daily in divided doses. The 333 mg and 750 mg strengths should be administered such that the daily dose is within 1 to 4 grams per day. The usual adult dose is 250 mg every 6 hours. For the following infections, a dosage of 500 mg may be administered every 12 hours: streptococcal pharyngitis, skin and skin structure infections, and uncomplicated cystitis in patients over 15 years of age. Cystitis therapy should be continued for 7 to 14 days. For more severe infections or those caused by less susceptible organisms, larger doses may be needed. If daily doses of cephalexin greater than 4 g are required, parenteral cephalosporins, in appropriate doses, should be considered.

Pediatric Patients

The usual recommended daily dosage for pediatric patients is 25 to 50 mg/kg in divided doses. For streptococcal pharyngitis in patients over 1 year of age and for skin and skin structure infections, the total daily dose may be divided and administered every 12 hours.

Cephalexin Suspension

Weight

125 mg/5 mL

250 mg/5 mL

10 kg (22 lb)

1/2 to 1 tsp q.i.d.

1/4 to 1/2 tsp q.i.d.

20 kg (44 lb)

1 to 2 tsp q.i.d.

1/2 to 1 tsp q.i.d.

40 kg (88 lb)

2 to 4 tsp q.i.d.

1 to 2 tsp q.i.d.

or

Weight

125 mg/5 mL

250 mg/5 mL

10 kg (22 lb)

1 to 2 tsp b.i.d.

1/2 to 1 tsp b.i.d

20 kg (44 lb)

2 to 4 tsp b.i.d.

1 to 2 tsp b.i.d.

40 kg (88 lb)

4 to 8 tsp b.i.d.

2 to 4 tsp b.i.d.

In severe infections, the dosage may be doubled.

In the therapy of otitis media, clinical studies have shown that a dosage of 75 to 100 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses is required.

In the treatment of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, a therapeutic dosage of cephalexin should be administered for at least 10 days.

Directions for Mixing

125 mg per 5 mL (100 mL when mixed): Prepare suspension at time of dispensing. Add to the bottle a total of 71 mL of water. For ease in preparation, tap bottle to loosen powder, add the water in 2 portions, shaking well after each addition. The resulting suspension will contain cephalexin monohydrate equivalent to 125 mg cephalexin in each 5 mL (teaspoonful).

125 mg per 5 mL (200 mL when mixed): Prepare suspension at time of dispensing. Add to the bottle a total of 140 mL of water. For ease in preparation, tap bottle to loosen powder, add the water in 2 portions, shaking well after each addition. The resulting suspension will contain cephalexin monohydrate equivalent to 125 mg cephalexin in each 5 mL (teaspoonful).

250 mg per 5 mL (100 mL when mixed): Prepare suspension at time of dispensing. Add to the bottle a total of 71 mL of water. For ease in preparation, tap bottle to loosen powder, add the water in 2 portions, shaking well after each addition. The resulting suspension will contain cephalexin monohydrate equivalent to 250 mg cephalexin in each 5 mL (teaspoonful).

250 mg per 5 mL (200 mL when mixed): Prepare suspension at time of dispensing. Add to the bottle a total of 140 mL of water. For ease in preparation, tap bottle to loosen powder, add the water in 2 portions, shaking well after each addition. The resulting suspension will contain cephalexin monohydrate equivalent to 250 mg cephalexin in each 5 mL (teaspoonful).

* After mixing, store in refrigerator. May be kept for 14 days without significant loss of potency.
Estazolam

Estazolam

The recommended initial dose for adults is 1 mg at bedtime; however, some patients may need a 2 mg dose. In healthy elderly patients, 1 mg is also the appropriate starting dose, but increases should be initiated with particular care. In small or debilitated older patients, a starting dose of 0.5 mg, while only marginally effective in the overall elderly population, should be considered.
Clemastine Fumarate

Clemastine Fumarate

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED ACCORDING TO THE NEEDS AND RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

Clemastine Fumarate Tablets 1.34 mg

The recommended starting dose is one tablet twice daily. Dosage may be increased as required, but not to exceed six tablets daily.

Clemastine Fumarate Tablets 2.68 mg

The maximum recommended dosage is one tablet three times daily. Many patients respond favorably to a single dose which may be repeated as required, but not to exceed three tablets daily.
Clomiphene Citrate

Clomiphene Citrate

General Considerations

The workup and treatment of candidates for clomiPHENE citrate therapy should be supervised by physicians experienced in management of gynecologic or endocrine disorders. Patients should be chosen for therapy with clomiPHENE citrate only after careful diagnostic evaluation (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE). The plan of therapy should be outlined in advance. Impediments to achieving the goal of therapy must be excluded or adequately treated before beginning clomiPHENE citrate. The therapeutic objective should be balanced with potential risks and discussed with the patient and others involved in the achievement of a pregnancy.

Ovulation most often occurs from 5 to 10 days after a course of clomiPHENE citrate. Coitus should be timed to coincide with the expected time of ovulation. Appropriate tests to determine ovulation may be useful during this time.

Recommended Dosage

Treatment of the selected patient should begin with a low dose, 50 mg daily (1 tablet) for 5 days. The dose should be increased only in those patients who do not ovulate in response to cyclic 50 mg clomiPHENE citrate. A low dosage or duration of treatment course is particularly recommended if unusual sensitivity to pituitary gonadotropin is suspected, such as in patients with polycystic ovary syndrome (see WARNINGS: Ovarian Hyperstimulation Syndrome).

The patient should be evaluated carefully to exclude pregnancy, ovarian enlargement, or ovarian cyst formation between each treatment cycle.

If progestin-induced bleeding is planned, or if spontaneous uterine bleeding occurs prior to therapy, the regimen of 50 mg daily for 5 days should be started on or about the 5th day of the cycle. Therapy may be started at any time in the patient who has had no recent uterine bleeding. When ovulation occurs at this dosage, there is no advantage to increasing the dose in subsequent cycles of treatment.

If ovulation does not appear to occur after the first course of therapy, a second course of 100 mg daily (two 50 mg tablets given as a single daily dose) for 5 days should be given. This course may be started as early as 30 days after the previous one after precautions are taken to exclude the presence of pregnancy. Increasing the dosage or duration of therapy beyond 100 mg/day for 5 days is not recommended.

The majority of patients who are going to ovulate will do so after the first course of therapy. If ovulation does not occur after three courses of therapy, further treatment with clomiPHENE citrate is not recommended and the patient should be reevaluated. If three ovulatory responses occur, but pregnancy has not been achieved, further treatment is not recommended. If menses does not occur after an ovulatory response, the patient should be reevaluated. Long-term cyclic therapy is not recommended beyond a total of about six cycles (see PRECAUTIONS).
Diflunisal

Diflunisal

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diflunisal tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diflunisal tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with diflunisal tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Concentration-dependent pharmacokinetics prevail when diflunisal is administered; a doubling of dosage produces a greater than doubling of drug accumulation. The effect becomes more apparent with repetitive doses.

For mild to moderate pain, an initial dose of 1000 mg followed by 500 mg every 12 hours is recommended for most patients. Following the initial dose, some patients may require 500 mg every 8 hours.

A lower dosage may be appropriate depending on such factors as pain severity, patient response, weight, or advanced age; for example, 500 mg initially, followed by 250 mg every 8 to 12 hours.

For osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis, the suggested dosage range is 500 mg to 1000 mg daily in two divided doses. The dosage of diflunisal may be increased or decreased according to patient response.

Maintenance doses higher than 1500 mg a day are not recommended.

Tablets should be swallowed whole, not crushed or chewed.
Desmopressin Acetate

Desmopressin Acetate

Central Diabetes Insipidus

The dosage of desmopressin acetate tablets must be determined for each individual patient and adjusted according to the diurnal pattern of response. Response should be estimated by two parameters: adequate duration of sleep and adequate, not excessive, water turnover. Patients previously on intranasal desmopressin acetate therapy should begin tablet therapy twelve hours after the last intranasal dose. During the initial dose titration period, patients should be observed closely and appropriate safety parameters measured to assure adequate response. Patients should be monitored at regular intervals during the course of desmopressin acetate tablet therapy to assure adequate antidiuretic response. Modifications in dosage regimen should be implemented as necessary to assure adequate water turnover. Fluid restriction should be observed (see WARNINGS; PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use and Geriatric Use).

Adults and Children

It is recommended that patients be started on doses of 0.05 mg (½ of the 0.1 mg tablet) two times a day and individually adjusted to their optimum therapeutic dose. Most patients in clinical trials found that the optimal dosage range is 0.1 mg to 0.8 mg daily, administered in divided doses. Each dose should be separately adjusted for an adequate diurnal rhythm of water turnover. Total daily dosage should be increased or decreased in the range of 0.1 mg to 1.2 mg divided into two or three daily doses as needed to obtain adequate antidiuresis. See Pediatric Use subsection for special considerations when administering desmopressin acetate to pediatric diabetes insipidus patients.

Geriatric Use

This drug is known to be substantially excreted by the kidney, and the risk of toxic reactions to this drug may be greater in patients with impaired renal function. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, HumanPharmacokinetics; CONTRAINDICATIONS; and PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use).

Primary Nocturnal Enuresis

The dosage of desmopressin acetate tablets must be determined for each individual patient and adjusted according to response. Patients previously on intranasal desmopressin acetate therapy can begin tablet therapy the night following (24 hours after) the last intranasal dose. The recommended initial dose for patients age 6 years and older is 0.2 mg at bedtime. The dose may be titrated up to 0.6 mg to achieve the desired response. Fluid restriction should be observed, and fluid intake should be limited to a minimum from 1 hour before desmopressin administration, until the next morning, or at least 8 hours after administration (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use and Geriatric Use).
Clemastine Fumarate Syr...

Clemastine Fumarate Syrup

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED ACCORDING TO THE NEEDS AND RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

Pediatric

Children aged 6 to 12 years

For Symptoms of Allergic Rhinitis - The starting dose is 1 teaspoonful (0.5 mg clemastine) twice daily. Since single doses of up to 2.25 mg clemastine were well tolerated by this age group, dosage may be increased as required, but not to exceed 6 teaspoonfuls daily (3 mg clemastine).

For Urticaria and Angioedema - The starting dose is 2 teaspoonfuls (1 mg clemastine) twice daily, not to exceed 6 teaspoonfuls daily (3 mg clemastine).

Adults and Children 12 Years and Over

For Symptoms of Allergic Rhinitis - The starting dose is 2 teaspoonfuls (1 mgclemastine) twice daily. Dosage may be increased as required, but not to exceed 12 teaspoonfuls daily (6 mg clemastine).

For Urticaria and Angioedema - The starting dose is 4 teaspoonfuls (2 mg clemastine) twice daily, not to exceed 12 teaspoonfuls daily (6 mg clemastine).
Loperamide Hydrochlorid...

Loperamide Hydrochloride

(1 capsule = 2 mg)

Patients should receive appropriate fluid and electrolyte replacement as needed.

Acute Diarrhea

Adults

The recommended initial dose is 4 mg (two capsules) followed by 2 mg (one capsule) after each unformed stool. Daily dosage should not exceed 16 mg (eight capsules). Clinical improvement is usually observed within 48 hours.

Children

In children 2 to 5 years of age (20 kg or less), the non-prescription liquid formulation (loperamide hydrochloride for oral solution, 1 mg/5 mL) should be used; for ages 6 to 12, either loperamide hydrochloride capsules or loperamide hydrochloride for oral solution may be used. For children 2 to 12 years of age, the following schedule for capsules or liquid will usually fulfill initial dosage requirements:

Recommended First Day Dosage Schedule

Two to five years: 1 mg t.i.d. (3 mg daily dose) (13 to 20 kg)

Six to eight years: 2 mg b.i.d. (4 mg daily dose) (20 to 30 kg)

Eight to twelve years: 2 mg t.i.d. (6 mg daily dose) (greater than 30 kg)

Recommended Subsequent Daily Dosage

Following the first treatment day, it is recommended that subsequent loperamide hydrochloride doses (1 mg/10 kg body weight) be administered only after a loose stool. Total daily dosage should not exceed recommended dosages for the first day.

Chronic Diarrhea

Children

Although loperamide hydrochloride has been studied in a limited number of children with chronic diarrhea; the therapeutic dose for the treatment of chronic diarrhea in a pediatric population has not been established.

Adults

The recommended initial dose is 4 mg (two capsules) followed by 2 mg (one capsule) after each unformed stool until diarrhea is controlled, after which the dosage of loperamide hydrochloride capsules should be reduced to meet individual requirements. When the optimal daily dosage has been established, this amount may then be administered as a single dose or in divided doses.

The average daily maintenance dosage in clinical trials was 4 to 8 mg (two to four capsules). A dosage of 16 mg (eight capsules) was rarely exceeded. If clinical improvement is not observed after treatment with 16 mg per day for at least 10 days, symptoms are unlikely to be controlled by further administration. Loperamide hydrochloride capsules administration may be continued if diarrhea cannot be adequately controlled with diet or specific treatment.

Children Under 2 Years

The use of loperamide hydrochloride in children under 2 years is not recommended. There have been rare reports of paralytic ileus associated with abdominal distention. Most of these reports occurred in the setting of acute dysentery, overdose, and with very young children less than two years of age.

Elderly

No formal pharmacokinetic studies were conducted in elderly subjects. However, there were no major differences reported in the drug disposition in elderly patients with diarrhea relative to young patients. No dosage adjustment is required for the elderly.

Renal Impairment

No pharmacokinetic data are available in patients with renal impairment. Since the metabolites and the unchanged drug are mainly excreted in the feces, no dosage adjustment is required for patients with renal impairment (see PRECAUTIONS).

Hepatic Impairment

Although no pharmacokinetic data are available in patients with hepatic impairment, loperamide hydrochloride should be used with caution in such patients because of reduced first pass metabolism (see PRECAUTIONS).
Oxaprozin

Oxaprozin

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of oxaprozin tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use oxaprozin tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with oxaprozin tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Rheumatoid Arthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, the usual recommended dose is 1200 mg (two 600 mg tablets) given orally once a day (see Individualization of Dosage).

Osteoarthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis, the usual recommended dose is 1200 mg (two 600 mg tablets) given orally once a day (see Individualization of Dosage).

Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of JRA in patients 6 to 16 years of age, the recommended dose given orally once per day should be based on body weight of the patient as given in Table 3 (see also Individualization of Dosage).
Table 3 Body Weight Range (kg) Dose (mg) 22 to 31 600 32 to 54 900 ≥ 55 1200
(see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, Pediatric Patients)

Individualization of Dosage

As with other NSAIDs, the lowest dose should be sought for each patient. Therefore, after observing the response to initial therapy with oxaprozin, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs. In osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis and juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, the dosage should be individualized to the lowest effective dose of oxaprozin to minimize adverse effects. The maximum recommended total daily dose of oxaprozin in adults is 1800 mg (26 mg/kg, whichever is lower) in divided doses. In children, doses greater than 1200 mg have not been studied.

Patients of low body weight should initiate therapy with 600 mg once daily. Patients with severe renal impairment or on dialysis should also initiate therapy with 600 mg once daily. If there is insufficient relief of symptoms in such patients, the dose may be cautiously increased to 1200 mg, but only with close monitoring (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations).

In adults, in cases where a quick onset of action is important, the pharmacokinetics of oxaprozin allow therapy to be started with a one-time loading dose of 1200 to 1800 mg (not to exceed 26 mg/kg). Doses larger than 1200 mg/day on a chronic basis should be reserved for patients who weigh more than 50 kg, have normal renal and hepatic function, are at low risk of peptic ulcer, and whose severity of disease justifies maximal therapy. Physicians should ensure that patients are tolerating doses in the 600 to 1200 mg/day range without gastroenterologic, renal, hepatic, or dermatologic adverse effects before advancing to the larger doses. Most patients will tolerate once-a-day dosing with oxaprozin, although divided doses may be tried in patients unable to tolerate single doses.
Diclofenac Sodium

Diclofenac Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Diclofenac Sodium Extended-release Tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use Diclofenac Sodium Extended-release Tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with Diclofenac Sodium Extended-release Tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

For the relief of osteoarthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 mg q.d.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 mg q.d. In the rare patient where Diclofenac Sodium Extended-release Tablets 100 mg/day is unsatisfactory, the dose may be increased to 100 mg b.i.d. if the benefits outweigh the clinical risks of increased side effects.

Different formulations of diclofenac [diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets; diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets; diclofenac potassium immediate-release tablets] are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Cromolyn Sodium Solutio...

Cromolyn Sodium Solution Drops

The dose is 1 – 2 drops in each eye 4 – 6 times a day at regular intervals.

One drop contains approximately 1.6 mg cromolyn sodium.

Patients should be advised that the effect of cromolyn sodium ophthalmic solution therapy is dependent upon its administration at regular intervals, as directed.

Symptomatic response to therapy (decreased itching, tearing, redness, and discharge) is usually evident within a few days, but longer treatment for up to six weeks is sometimes required. Once symptomatic improvement has been established, therapy should be continued for as long as needed to sustain improvement.

If required, corticosteroids may be used concomitantly with cromolyn sodium ophthalmic solution.

FOR OPHTHALMIC USE ONLY.
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam is administered orally. For optimal results, dose, frequency of administration, and duration of therapy should be individualized according to patient response. To facilitate this, 0.5 mg, 1 mg, and 2 mg tablets are available.

The usual range is 2 to 6 mg/day given in divided doses, the largest dose being taken before bedtime, but the daily dosage may vary from 1 to 10 mg/day.

For anxiety, most patients require an initial dose of 2 to 3 mg/day given b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For insomnia due to anxiety or transient situational stress, a single daily dose of 2 to 4 mg may be given, usually at bedtime.

For elderly or debilitated patients, an initial dosage of 1 to 2 mg/day in divided doses is recommended, to be adjusted as needed and tolerated.

The dosage of lorazepam should be increased gradually when needed to help avoid adverse effects. When higher dosage is indicated, the evening dose should be increased before the daytime doses.
Zeosa

Zeosa

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, ZEOSA tablets must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. The dosage is one light yellow tablet daily for 21 consecutive days, followed by one brown tablet daily for 7 consecutive days. It is recommended that tablets be taken at the same time each day. The pill may be swallowed whole or chewed and swallowed. If the pill is chewed, the patient should drink a full glass (8 ounces) of liquid immediately after swallowing. During the first cycle of use, the patient is instructed to begin taking tablets on either Day 1 or the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation. If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first tablet (light yellow) is taken that day. One light yellow tablet should be taken daily for 21 consecutive days followed by one brown tablet daily for 7 consecutive days. Withdrawal bleeding should usually occur within three days following discontinuation of light yellow tablets and may not have finished before the next pack is started. During the first cycle with a Sunday start, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets, until a light yellow tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days and a nonhormonal back-up method of birth control (such as condoms or spermicides) should be used during those 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

The patient begins her next and all subsequent 28-day courses of tablets on the same day of the week on which she began her first course, following the same schedule: 21 days on light yellow tablets—7 days on brown tablets. If in any cycle the patient starts tablets later than the proper day, she should protect herself against pregnancy by using a nonhormonal back-up method of birth control until she has taken a light yellow tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

When the patient is switching from a 21-day regimen of tablets, she should wait 7 days after her last tablet before she starts norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable). She will probably experience withdrawal bleeding during that week. She should be sure that no more than 7 days pass after her previous 21-day regimen. When the patient is switching from a 28-day regimen of tablets, she should start her first pack of norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) on the day after her last tablet. She should not wait any days between packs. The patient may switch any day from a progestin-only pill and should begin norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) the next day. If switching from an implant or injection, the patient should start norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) on the day of implant removal or, if using an injection, the day the next injection would be due.

If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs, the patient is instructed to continue on the same regimen. This type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance; however, if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, the patient is advised to consult her healthcare provider. Although pregnancy is unlikely if norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) are taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, the possibility of pregnancy must be considered. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed schedule (missed one or more tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), the probability of pregnancy should be considered at the time of the first missed period and appropriate diagnostic measures taken. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, pregnancy should be ruled out. Hormonal contraceptives should be discontinued if pregnancy is confirmed.

For additional patient instructions regarding missed pills, see the “WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS” section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING. Any time the patient misses two or more light yellow tablets, she should also use another method of nonhormonal back-up contraception until she has taken a light yellow tablet daily for seven consecutive days. If the patient misses one or more brown tablets, she is still protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking light yellow tablets again on the proper day. If breakthrough bleeding occurs following missed light yellow tablets, it will usually be transient and of no consequence. The possibility of ovulation increases with each successive day that scheduled light yellow tablets are missed. The risk of pregnancy increases with each active (light yellow) tablet missed.

Norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) may be initiated no earlier than day 28 postpartum in the nonlactating mother due to the increased risk for thromboembolism. When the tablets are administered in the postpartum period, the increased risk of thromboembolic disease associated with the postpartum period must be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS concerning thromboembolic disease). The patient should be advised to use a nonhormonal back-up method for the first 7 days of tablet-taking. However, if intercourse has already occurred, the possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered. Norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) may be initiated after a first-trimester abortion; if the patient starts norethindrone and ethinyl estradiol tablets (chewable) and ferrous fumarate tablets (chewable) immediately, additional contraceptive measures are not needed.

For additional patient instructions regarding complete dosing instructions, see the “HOW TO TAKE THE PILL” section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING.
Cefprozil

Cefprozil

Cefprozil for oral suspension is administered orally.
* In the treatment of infections due to Streptococcus pyogenes, cefprozil should be administered for at least 10 days. † Not to exceed recommended adult doses. Population/Infection Dosage (mg) Duration (days) ADULTS (13 years and older) UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis 500 q24h 10* Acute Sinusitis (For moderate to severe infections, the higher dose should be used) 250 q12h or 500 q12h 10 LOWER RESPIRATORY TRACT Secondary Bacterial Infection of Acute Bronchitis and Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis 500 q12h 10 SKIN AND SKIN STRUCTURE Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections 250 q12h or 500 q24h or 500 q12h 10 CHILDREN (2 years to 12 years) UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT† Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis 7.5 mg/kg q12h 10* SKIN AND SKIN STRUCTURE† Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections 20 mg/kg q24h 10 INFANTS & CHILDREN (6 months to 12 years) UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT† Otitis Media (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES) 15 mg/kg q12h 10 Acute Sinusitis (For moderate to severe infections, the higher dose should be used) 7.5 mg/kg q12h or 15 mg/kg q12h 10
Renal Impairment

Cefprozil may be administered to patients with impaired renal function. The following dosage schedule should be used.
* Cefprozil is in part removed by hemodialysis; therefore, cefprozil should be administered after the completion of hemodialysis. Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Dosage (mg) Dosing Interval 30 to 120 standard standard 0 to 29* 50% of standard standard
Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with impaired hepatic function.
Ketoconazole

Ketoconazole

Cutaneous candidiasis, tinea corporis, tinea cruris, tinea pedis, and tinea (pityriasis) versicolor: It is recommended that ketoconazole cream, 2% be applied once daily to cover the affected and immediate surrounding area. Clinical improvement may be seen fairly soon after treatment is begun; however, candidal infections and tinea cruris and corporis should be treated for two weeks in order to reduce the possibility of recurrence. Patients with tinea versicolor usually require two weeks of treatment. Patients with tinea pedis require six weeks of treatment.

If a patient shows no clinical improvement after the treatment period, the diagnosis should be redetermined.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Patients controlled on diltiazem alone or in combination with other medications may be switched to Diltiazem Hydrochloride Extended-release Capsules (Once-a-Day Dosage) at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Higher doses of Diltiazem Hydrochloride Extended-release Capsules (Once-a-Day Dosage) may be needed in some patients. Patients should be closely monitored. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may be necessary and should be initiated as clinically warranted. There is limited general clinical experience with doses above 360 mg, but doses to 540 mg have been studied in clinical trials. The incidence of side effects increases as the dose increases with first-degree AV block, dizziness, and sinus bradycardia bearing the strongest relationship to dose.

Hypertension. Dosage needs to be adjusted by titration to individual patient needs. When used as monotherapy, reasonable starting doses are 180 to 240 mg once daily, although some patients may respond to lower doses. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 240 to 360 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 480 mg once daily.

Angina. Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with a dose of 120 or 180 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 480 mg once daily. When necessary, titration may be carried out over a 7- to 14-day period.

Concomitant Use With Other Cardiovascular Agents

1. Sublingual NTG. May be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during Diltiazem Hydrochloride Extended-release (One-a-Day Dosage) therapy.

2. Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy. Diltiazem Hydrochloride Extended-release Capsules (Once-a-Day Dosage) may be safely coadministered with short-and long-acting nitrates.

3. Beta-blockers (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

4. Antihypertensives. Diltiazem Hydrochloride Extended-release Capsules (Once-a-Day Dosage) have an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of Diltiazem Hydrochloride Extended-release Capsules (Once-a-Day Dosage) or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other.
Cimetidine

Cimetidine

Duodenal Ulcer

Active Duodenal Ulcer

Clinical studies have indicated that suppression of nocturnal acid is the most important factor in duodenal ulcer healing (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Acid Secretion). This is supported by recent clinical trials (see Clinical Trials, Active duodenal ulcer). Therefore, there is no apparent rationale, except for familiarity with use, for treating with anything other than a once-daily at bedtime oral dosage regimen.

In a U.S. oral dose-ranging study of 400 mg at bedtime, 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime, a continuous dose response relationship for ulcer healing was demonstrated.

However, 800 mg at bedtime is the dose of choice for most patients, as it provides a high healing rate (the difference between 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime being small), maximal pain relief, a decreased potential for drug interactions (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions) and maximal patient convenience. Patients unhealed at four weeks, or those with persistent symptoms, have been shown to benefit from two to four weeks of continued therapy.

It has been shown that patients who both have an endoscopically demonstrated ulcer larger than 1 cm and are also heavy smokers (i.e., smoke one pack of cigarettes or more per day) are more difficult to heal. There is some evidence which suggests that more rapid healing can be achieved in this subpopulation with cimetidine 1600 mg at bedtime. While early pain relief with either 800 mg at bedtime or 1600 mg at bedtime is equivalent in all patients, 1600 mg at bedtime provides an appropriate alternative when it is important to ensure healing within four weeks for this subpopulation. Alternatively, approximately 94% of all patients will also heal in eight weeks with cimetidine 800 mg at bedtime.

Other cimetidine oral regimens in the U.S. which have been shown to be effective are: 300 mg four times daily, with meals and at bedtime, the original regimen with which U.S. physicians have the most experience, and 400 mg twice daily, in the morning and at bedtime (see Clinical Trials, Active duodenal ulcer).

Concomitant antacids should be given as needed for relief of pain. However, simultaneous administration of oral cimetidine and antacids is not recommended, since antacids have been reported to interfere with the absorption of cimetidine.

While healing with cimetidine often occurs during the first week or two, treatment should be continued for 4 to 6 weeks unless healing has been demonstrated by endoscopic examination.

Maintenance Therapy for Duodenal Ulcer

In those patients requiring maintenance therapy, the recommended adult oral dose is 400 mg at bedtime.

Active Benign Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dosage for short-term treatment of active benign gastric ulcer is 800 mg at bedtime, or 300 mg four times a day with meals and at bedtime. Controlled clinical studies were limited to six weeks of treatment (see Clinical Trials). 800 mg at bedtime is the preferred regimen for most patients based upon convenience and reduced potential for drug interactions. Symptomatic response to cimetidine dose not preclude the presence of a gastric malignancy. It is important to follow gastric ulcer patients to assure rapid progress to complete healing.

Erosive Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dosage for the treatment of erosive esophagitis that has been diagnosed by endoscopy is 1600 mg daily in divided doses (800 mg twice daily or 400 mg four times daily) for 12 weeks. The use of cimetidine beyond 12 weeks has not been established.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome)

Recommended adult oral dosage: 300 mg four times a day with meals at bedtime. In some patients it may be necessary to administer higher doses more frequently. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs, but should not usually exceed 2400 mg per day and should continue as long as clinically needed.

Dosage Adjustments for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Patients with severely impaired renal function have been treated with cimetidine. However, such dosage has been very limited. On the basis of this experience the recommended dosage is 300 mg every 12 hours orally. Should the patient’s condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 8 hours or even further with caution. In severe renal failure, accumulation may occur and the lower frequency of dosing comparable with an adequate patient response should be used. When liver impairment is also present, further reductions in dosage may be necessary. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating cimetidine. Ideally, the dosage schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.
Nifedical Xl

Nifedical Xl

Dosage must be adjusted according to each patient's needs. Therapy for either hypertension or angina should be initiated with 30 or 60 mg once daily. Nifedical XL® Extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and should not be bitten or divided. In general, titration should proceed over a 7 to 14 day period so that the physician can fully assess the response to each dose level and monitor blood pressure before proceeding to higher doses. Since steady-state plasma levels are achieved on the second day of dosing, if symptoms so warrant, titration may proceed more rapidly provided the patient is assessed frequently. Titration to doses above 120 mg are not recommended.

Angina patients controlled on nifedipine capsules alone or in combination with other antianginal medications may be safely switched to Nifedical XL® Extended-release tablets at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may be necessary and should be initiated as clinically warranted. Experience with doses greater than 90 mg in patients with angina is limited. Therefore, doses greater than 90 mg should be used with caution and only when clinically warranted.

No "rebound effect" has been observed upon discontinuation of nifedipine extended-release tablets. However, if discontinuation of nifedipine is necessary, sound clinical practice suggests that the dosage should be decreased gradually with close physician supervision.

Care should be taken when dispensing Nifedical XL® Extended-release Tablets to assure that the extended-release dosage form has been prescribed.

Coadministration with Other Antianginal Drugs

Sublingual nitroglycerin may be taken as required for the control of acute manifestations of angina, particularly during nifedipine titration. See PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions, for information on coadministration of nifedipine with beta-blockers or long-acting nitrates.
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily doses. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP in adults is 2000 mg.

Metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP should generally be given once daily with the evening meal. Metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP must be swallowed whole and never crushed or chewed. Occasionally, the inactive ingredients of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP will be eliminated in the feces as a soft, hydrated mass (see PATIENT INFORMATION printed below).

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults—In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP is 500 mg once daily with the evening meal. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly, up to a maximum of 2000 mg once daily with the evening meal. If glycemic control is not achieved on metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP 2000 mg once daily, a trial of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP 1000 mg twice daily should be considered. If higher doses of metformin are required, metformin hydrochloride tablets should be used at total daily doses up to 2550 mg administered in divided daily doses (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies).

In a randomized trial, patients currently treated with metformin hydrochloride tablets were switched to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP. Results of this trial suggest that patients receiving metformin hydrochloride tablet treatment may be safely switched to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP once daily at the same total daily dose, up to 2000 mg once daily. Following a switch from metformin hydrochloride tablets to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP, glycemic control should be closely monitored and dosage adjustments made accordingly (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies).

Pediatrics—The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Safety and effectiveness of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP in pediatric patients have not been established.

Transfer From Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets USP and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablet USP monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablet USP and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin hydrochloride tablets 500 mg and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of metformin hydrochloride tablets and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1C and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken (see Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea).

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets USP and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablet USP therapy. Metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablet USP therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2000 mg for metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP are not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP are not recommended in pediatric patients (below the age of 17 years).

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets USP.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly (see WARNINGS).
Prochlorperazine Maleat...

Prochlorperazine Maleate

Adults

(For children’s dosage and administration, see below.) Dosage should be increased more gradually in debilitated or emaciated patients.

Elderly Patients

In general, dosages in the lower range are sufficient for most elderly patients. Since they appear to be more susceptible to hypotension and neuromuscular reactions, such patients should be observed closely. Dosage should be tailored to the individual, response carefully monitored and dosage adjusted accordingly. Dosage should be increased more gradually in elderly patients.

1. To Control Severe Nausea and Vomiting

Adjust dosage to the response of the individual. Begin with the lowest recommended dosage.

Oral Dosage - Tablets

Usually one 5 mg or 10 mg tablet 3 or 4 times daily. Daily dosages above 40 mg should be used only in resistant cases.

2. In Adult Psychiatric Disorders

Adjust dosage to the response of the individual and according to the severity of the condition. Begin with the lowest recommended dose. Although response ordinarily is seen within a day or 2, longer treatment is usually required before maximal improvement is seen.

Oral Dosage

Non-Psychotic Anxiety – Usual dosage is 5 mg 3 or 4 times daily. Do not administer in doses of more than 20 mg per day or for longer than 12 weeks.

Psychotic Disorders including Schizophrenia – In relatively mild conditions, as seen in private psychiatric practice or in outpatient clinics, dosage is 5 or 10 mg 3 or 4 times daily.

In moderate to severe conditions, for hospitalized or adequately supervised patients, usual starting dosage is 10 mg 3 or 4 times daily. Increase dosage gradually until symptoms are controlled or side effects become bothersome. When dosage is increased by small increments every 2 or 3 days, side effects either do not occur or are easily controlled. Some patients respond satisfactorily on 50 to 75 mg daily.

In more severe disturbances, optimum dosage is usually 100 to 150 mg daily.

Children

Do not use in pediatric surgery.

Children seem more prone to develop extrapyramidal reactions, even on moderate doses. Therefore, use lowest effective dosage. Tell parents not to exceed prescribed dosage, since the possibility of adverse reactions increases as dosage rises.

Occasionally the patient may react to the drug with signs of restlessness and excitement; if this occurs, do not administer additional doses. Take particular precaution in administering the drug to children with acute illnesses or dehydration (see under Dystonia).

1. Severe Nausea and Vomiting in Children

Prochlorperazine should not be used in pediatric patients under 20 pounds in weight or 2 years of age. It should not be used in conditions for which children’s dosages have not been established. Dosage and frequency of administration should be adjusted according to the severity of the symptoms and the response of the patient. The duration of activity following intramuscular administration may last up to 12 hours. Subsequent doses may be given by the same route if necessary.

Oral Dosage

More than 1 day’s therapy is seldom necessary.
Weight Usual Dosage Not to Exceed under 20 lbs not recommended 20 to 29 lbs 2.5 mg 1 or 2 times a day 7.5 mg per day 30 to 39 lbs 2.5 mg 2 or 3 times a day 10 mg per day 40 to 85 lbs 2.5 mg 3 times a day or 5 mg 2 times a day 15 mg per day
2. In Children With Schizophrenia

Oral Dosage

For children 2 to 12 years, starting dosage is 2.5 mg 2 or 3 times daily. Do not give more than 10 mg the first day. Then increase dosage according to patient’s response.

FOR AGES 2 to 5, total daily dosage usually does not exceed 20 mg.

FOR AGES 6 to 12, total daily dosage usually does not exceed 25 mg.
Camreselo

Camreselo

Take one tablet by mouth at the same time every day. The dosage of CamreseLo is one orange tablet containing levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by one yellow ethinyl estradiol tablet for 7 days. To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, CamreseLo must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours.

Instruct the patient to begin taking CamreseLo on the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation. If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first orange tablet is taken that day. One orange tablet should be taken daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by one yellow tablet for 7 consecutive days. A non-hormonal back-up method of contraception (such as condoms or spermicide) should be used until an orange tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days. A scheduled period should occur during the 7 days that the yellow tablets are taken.

Begin the next and all subsequent 91-day cycles without interruption on the same day of the week (Sunday) on which the patient began her first dose of CamreseLo, following the same schedule: 84 days taking an orange tablet followed by 7 days taking a yellow tablet. If the patient does not immediately start her next pill pack, she should protect herself from pregnancy by using a non-hormonal back-up method of contraception until she has taken an orange tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

If unscheduled spotting or bleeding occurs, instruct the patient to continue on the same regimen. If the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, advise the patient to consult her healthcare provider.

For patient instructions regarding missed pills, see PATIENT COUNSELING INFORMATION (17.2).

For postpartum women who are not breastfeeding, start CamreseLo no earlier than four to six weeks postpartum. If the patient starts on CamreseLo postpartum and has not yet had a period, evaluate for possible pregnancy, and instruct her to use an additional method of contraception until she has taken an orange tablet for 7 consecutive days.
Imiquimod

Imiquimod

2.1 Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose for bicalutamide therapy in combination with an LHRH analog is one 50 mg tablet once daily (morning or evening), with or without food. It is recommended that bicalutamide tablets be taken at the same time each day. Treatment with bicalutamide tablets should be started at the same time as treatment with an LHRH analog. If a dose of bicalutamide tablets is missed, take the next dose at the scheduled time. Do not take the missed dose and do not double the next dose.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. In patients with severe liver impairment (n = 4), although there was a 76% increase in the half-life (5.9 and 10.4 days for normal and impaired patients, respectively) of the active enantiomer of bicalutamide no dosage adjustment is necessary [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].
Ticlopidine Hydrochlori...

Ticlopidine Hydrochloride

Stroke

The recommended dose of ticlopidine hydrochloride is 250 mg bid taken with food. Other doses have not been studied in controlled trials for these indications.

Coronary Artery Stenting

The recommended dose of ticlopidine hydrochloride is 250 mg bid taken with food together with antiplatelet doses of aspirin for up to 30 days of therapy following successful stent implantation.
Metoclopramide

Metoclopramide

Therapy with metoclopramide tablets, USP should not exceed 12 weeks in duration.

For the Relief of Symptomatic Gastroesophageal Reflux

Administer from 10 mg to 15 mg of metoclopramide tablet, USP orally up to q.i.d. 30 minutes before each meal and at bedtime, depending upon symptoms being treated and clinical response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and INDICATIONS AND USAGE). If symptoms occur only intermittently or at specific times of the day, use of metoclopramide in single doses up to 20 mg prior to the provoking situation may be preferred rather than continuous treatment. Occasionally, patients (such as elderly patients) who are more sensitive to the therapeutic or adverse effects of metoclopramide will require only 5 mg per dose.

Experience with esophageal erosions and ulcerations is limited, but healing has thus far been documented in one controlled trial using q.i.d. therapy at 15 mg/dose, and this regimen should be used when lesions are present, so long as it is tolerated (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Because of the poor correlation between symptoms and endoscopic appearance of the esophagus, therapy directed at esophageal lesions is best guided by endoscopic evaluation.

Therapy longer than 12 weeks has not been evaluated and cannot be recommended.

For the Relief of Symptoms Associated With Diabetic Gastroparesis (Diabetic Gastric Stasis)

Administer 10 mg of metoclopramide 30 minutes before each meal and at bedtime for two to eight weeks, depending upon response and the likelihood of continued well-being upon drug discontinuation.

The initial route of administration should be determined by the severity of the presenting symptoms. If only the earliest manifestations of diabetic gastric stasis are present, oral administration of metoclopramide tablets, USP may be initiated. However, if severe symptoms are present, therapy should begin with metoclopramide injection (consult labeling of the injection prior to initiating parenteral administration).

Administration of metoclopramide injection up to 10 days may be required before symptoms subside, at which time oral administration may be instituted. Since diabetic gastric stasis is frequently recurrent, metoclopramide tablet, USP therapy should be reinstituted at the earliest manifestation.

Use in Patients With Renal or Hepatic Impairment

Since metoclopramide is excreted principally through the kidneys, in those patients whose creatinine clearance is below 40 mL/min, therapy should be initiated at approximately one-half the recommended dosage. Depending upon clinical efficacy and safety considerations, the dosage may be increased or decreased as appropriate.

See OVERDOSAGE section for information regarding dialysis.

Metoclopramide undergoes minimal hepatic metabolism, except for simple conjugation. Its safe use has been described in patients with advanced liver disease whose renal function was normal.
Sinecch

Sinecch

2.1 Acute Treatment of Migraine Attacks

The recommended dose of almotriptan malate tablets in adults and adolescents age 12 to 17 years is 6.25 mg to 12.5 mg, with the 12.5 mg dose tending to be a more effective dose in adults. As individuals may vary in their response to different doses of almotriptan malate tablets, the choice of dose should be made on an individual basis.

If the headache is relieved after the initial almotriptan malate tablets dose but returns, the dose may be repeated after 2 hours. The effectiveness of a second dose has not been established in placebo-controlled trials. The maximum daily dose should not exceed 25 mg. The safety of treating an average of more than four migraines in a 30-day period has not been established.

2.2 Hepatic Impairment

The recommended starting dose of almotriptan malate tablets in patients with hepatic impairment is 6.25 mg. The maximum daily dose should not exceed 12.5 mg over a 24-hour period [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Renal Impairment

The recommended starting dose of almotriptan malate tablets in patients with severe renal impairment is 6.25 mg. The maximum daily dose should not exceed 12.5 mg over a 24-hour period [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Dyrenium

Dyrenium

Patients should be retitrated when transferred from nonmicronized glyburide tablets or other oral hypoglycemic agents.

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with glyburide tablets (micronized). In addition to the usual monitoring of urinary glucose, the patient’s blood glucose must also be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient’s response to therapy.

Short-term administration of glyburide tablets (micronized) may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

Usual Starting Dose

The suggested starting dose of glyburide tablets (micronized) is 1.5 to 3 mg daily, administered with breakfast or the first main meal. Those patients who may be more sensitive to hypoglycemic drugs should be started at 0.75 mg daily (see PRECAUTIONS for patients at increased risk). Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary and drug regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to therapy.

Transfer From Other Hypoglycemic Therapy; Patients Receiving Other Oral Antidiabetic Therapy

Patients should be retitrated when transferred from nonmicronized glyburide tablets or other oral hypoglycemic agents. The initial daily dose should be 1.5 to 3 mg. When transferring patients from oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to glyburide tablets (micronized), no transition period and no initial or priming dose are necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, particular care should be exercised during the first two weeks because the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body and subsequent overlapping drug effects may provoke hypoglycemia.

Patients Receiving Insulin

Some Type II diabetic patients being treated with insulin may respond satisfactorily to glyburide tablets (micronized). If the insulin dose is less than 20 units daily, substitution of glyburide tablets (micronized) 1.5 to 3 mg as a single daily dose may be tried. If the insulin dose is between 20 and 40 units daily, the patient may be placed directly on glyburide tablets (micronized) 3 mg daily as a single dose. If the insulin dose is more than 40 units daily, a transition period is required for conversion to glyburide tablets (micronized). In these patients, insulin dosage is decreased by 50% and glyburide tablets (micronized) 3 mg daily is started. Please refer to Titration to Maintenance Dose for further explanation.

Patients Receiving Colesevelam

When colesevelam is coadministered with glyburide, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glyburide is reduced. Therefore, glyburide tablets (micronized) should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.

Titration to Maintenance Dose

The usual maintenance dose is in the range of 0.75 to 12 mg daily, which may be given as a single dose or in divided doses (see Dosage Interval). Dosage increases should be made in increments of no more than 1.5 mg at weekly intervals based upon the patient’s blood glucose response.

No exact dosage relationship exists between glyburide tablets (micronized) and the other oral hypoglycemic agents, including nonmicronized glyburide tablets. Although patients may be transferred from the maximum dose of other sulfonylureas, the maximum starting dose of 3 mg of glyburide tablets (micronized) should be observed. A maintenance dose of 3 mg of glyburide tablets (micronized) provides approximately the same degree of blood glucose control as 250 to 375 mg chlorpropamide, 250 to 375 mg tolazamide, 5 mg of glyburide (nonmicronized tablets), 500 to 750 mg acetohexamide, or 1000 to 1500 mg tolbutamide.

When transferring patients receiving more than 40 units of insulin daily, they may be started on a daily dose of glyburide tablets (micronized) 3 mg concomitantly with a 50% reduction in insulin dose. Progressive withdrawal of insulin and increase of glyburide tablets (micronized) in increments of 0.75 to 1.5 mg every 2 to 10 days is then carried out. During this conversion period when both insulin and glyburide tablets (micronized) are being used, hypoglycemia may occur. During insulin withdrawal, patients should test their urine for glucose and acetone at least three times daily and report results to their physician. The appearance of persistent acetonuria with glycosuria indicates that the patient is a Type I diabetic who requires insulin therapy.

Concomitant Glyburide and Metformin Therapy

Glyburide tablets (micronized) should be added gradually to the dosing regimen of patients who have not responded to the maximum dose of metformin monotherapy after four weeks (see Usual Starting Dose and Titration to Maintenance Dose). Refer to metformin package insert.

With concomitant glyburide and metformin therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. However, attempts should be made to identify the optimal dose of each drug needed to achieve this goal. With concomitant glyburide and metformin therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken (see PRECAUTIONS).

Maximum Dose

Daily doses of more than 12 mg are not recommended.

Dosage Interval

Once-a-day therapy is usually satisfactory. Some patients, particularly those receiving more than 6 mg daily, may have a more satisfactory response with twice-a-day dosage.

Specific Patient Populations

Glyburide tablets (micronized) are not recommended for use in pregnancy or for use in pediatric patients.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS).
Prednisolone Solution

Prednisolone Solution

Dosage of prednisolone oral solution should be individualized according to the severity of the disease and the response of the patient. For infants and children, the recommended dosage should be governed by the same considerations rather than strict adherence to the ratio indicated by age or body weight.

Hormone therapy is an adjunct to and not a replacement for conventional therapy.

Dosage should be decreased or discontinued gradually when the drug has been administered for more than a few days.

The severity, prognosis, expected duration of the disease, and the reaction of the patient to medication are primary factors in determining dosage.

If a period of spontaneous remission occurs in a chronic condition, treatment should be discontinued.

Blood pressure, body weight, routine laboratory studies, including two-hour postprandial blood glucose and serum potassium, and a chest X-ray should be obtained at regular intervals during prolonged therapy. Upper GI X-rays are desirable in patients with known or suspected peptic ulcer disease.

The initial dosage of prednisolone oral solution may vary from 5 mg to 60 mg per day depending on the specific disease entity being treated. In situations of less severity lower doses will generally suffice while in selected patients higher initial doses may be required. The initial dosage should be maintained or adjusted until a satisfactory response is noted. If after a reasonable period of time there is a lack of satisfactory clinical response, prednisolone oral solution should be discontinued and the patient transferred to other appropriate therapy. IT SHOULD BE EMPHASIZED THAT DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE UNDER TREATMENT AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. It should be kept in mind that constant monitoring is needed in regard to drug dosage. Included in the situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient's individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of prednisolone oral solution for a period of time consistent with the patient's condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.
Albuterol Sulfate Syrup...

Albuterol Sulfate Syrup

The following dosages of albuterol sulfate syrup are expressed in terms of albuterol base.

Usual Dosage

Adults and Children Over 14 Years of Age: The usual starting dosage for adults and children over 14 years of age is 2 mg (1 teaspoonful) or 4 mg (2 teaspoonfuls) three or four times a day.

Children Over 6 Years to 14 Years of Age: The usual starting dosage for children over 6 years to 14 years of age is 2 mg (1 teaspoonful) three or four times a day.

Children 2 to 5 Years of Age: Dosing in children 2 to 5 years of age should be initiated at 0.1 mg/kg of body weight three times a day. This starting dosage should not exceed 2 mg (1 teaspoonful) three times a day.

Dosage Adjustment

Adults and Children Over 14 Years of Age: For adults and children over 14 years of age, a dosage above 4 mg four times a day should be used only when the patient fails to respond. If a favorable response does not occur with the 4-mg initial dosage, it should be cautiously increased stepwise up to a maximum of 8 mg four times a day as tolerated.

Children Over 6 Years to 14 Years of Age Who Fail to Respond to the Initial Starting Dosage of 2 mg Four Times a Day: For children over 6 years to 14 years of age who fail to respond to the initial starting dosage of 2 mg four times a day, the dosage may be cautiously increased stepwise, but not to exceed 24 mg/day (given in divided doses).

Children 2 to 5 Years of Age Who Do Not Respond Satisfactorily to the Initial Dosage: For children from 2 to 5 years of age who do not respond satisfactorily to the initial starting dosage, the dosage may be increased stepwise to 0.2 mg/kg of body weight three times a day, but not to exceed a maximum of 4 mg (2 teaspoonfuls) given three times a day.

Elderly Patients and Those Sensitive to Beta-adrenergic Stimulators: The initial dosage should be restricted to 2 mg three or four times a day and individually adjusted thereafter.
Benazepril Hydrochlorid...

Benazepril Hydrochloride

2.1 Recommended Dosage

ADULTS

The recommended initial dose for patients not receiving a diuretic is 10 mg once a day. The usual maintenance dosage range is 20 mg to 40 mg per day administered as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. A dose of 80 mg gives an increased response, but experience with this dose is limited. The divided regimen was more effective in controlling trough (pre-dosing) blood pressure than the same dose given as a once-daily regimen.

Use with diuretics in adults

The recommended starting dose of benazepril hydrochloride tablets in a patient on a diuretic is 5 mg once daily. If blood pressure is not controlled with benazepril hydrochloride tablets alone, a low dose of diuretic may be added.

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS 6 YEARS OF AGE AND OLDER

The recommended starting dose for pediatric patients is 0.2 mg/kg once per day. Titrate as needed to 0.6 mg/kg once per day. Doses above 0.6 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg daily) have not been studied in pediatric patients.

Benazepril hydrochloride tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients less than 6 years of age or in pediatric patients with GFR less than 30 mL/min/1.73m2 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

2.2. Dose Adjustment for Renal Impairment

For adults with a GFR < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (serum creatinine > 3 mg/dL), the recommended initial dose is 5 mg Benazepril hydrochloride tablets once daily. Dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum total daily dose of 40 mg. Benazepril hydrochloride tablets can also worsen renal function [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

2.3. Preparation of Suspension (for 150 mL of a 2 mg/mL Suspension)

Add 75 mL of Ora-Plus®* oral suspending vehicle to an amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing fifteen benazepril hydrochloride 20 mg tablets, and shake for at least two minutes. Allow the suspension to stand for a minimum of 1 hour. After the standing time, shake the suspension for a minimum of one additional minute. Add 75 mL of Ora-Sweet®* oral syrup vehicle to the bottle and shake the suspension to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 28°C (36 to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 30 days in the PET bottle with a child-resistant screw-cap closure. Shake the suspension before each use.

*Ora-Plus® and Ora-Sweet® are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. Ora Plus® contains carrageenan, citric acid, methylparaben, microcrystalline cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose sodium, potassium sorbate, simethicone, sodium phosphate monobasic, xanthan gum, and water. Ora-Sweet® contains citric acid, berry citrus flavorant, glycerin, methylparaben, potassium sorbate, sodium phosphate monobasic, sorbitol, sucrose, and water.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Exertional Angina Pectoris Due to Atherosclerotic Coronary Artery Disease or Angina Pectoris at Rest Due to Coronary Artery Spasm

Dosage must be adjusted to each patient's needs. Starting with 30 mg four times daily, before meals and at bedtime, dosage should be increased gradually (given in divided doses three or four times daily) at 1 to 2 day intervals until optimum response is obtained. Although individual patients may respond to any dosage level, the average optimum dosage range appears to be 180 to 360 mg/day. There are no available data concerning dosage requirements in patients with impaired renal or hepatic function. If the drug must be used in such patients, titration should be carried out with particular caution.

Concomitant Use With Other Cardiovascular Agents
1. Sublingual NTG may be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem hydrochloride tablet therapy. 2. Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy: Diltiazem hydrochloride tablets may be safely coadministered with short- and long-acting nitrates, but there have been no controlled studies to evaluate the antianginal effectiveness of this combination. 3. Beta-blockers. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)
Swallow diltiazem tablets whole; do not split, crush, or chew the tablets.
Leflunomide

Leflunomide

Loading Dose

Due to the long half-life in patients with RA and recommended dosing interval (24 hours), a loading dose is needed to provide steady-state concentrations more rapidly. It is recommended that leflunomide tablet USP therapy be initiated with a loading dose of one 100 mg tablet per day for 3 days.

Elimination of the loading dose regimen may decrease the risk of adverse events. This could be especially important for patients at increased risk of hematologic or hepatic toxicity, such as those receiving concomitant treatment with methotrexate or other immunosuppressive agents or on such medications in the recent past (see WARNINGS, Hepatotoxicity).

Maintenance Therapy

Daily dosing of 20 mg is recommended for treatment of patients with RA. A small cohort of patients (n = 104), treated with 25 mg/day, experienced a greater incidence of side effects; alopecia, weight loss, liver enzyme elevations. Doses higher than 20 mg/day are not recommended. If dosing at 20 mg/day is not well tolerated clinically, the dose may be decreased to 10 mg daily. Due to the prolonged half-life of the active metabolite of leflunomide, patients should be carefully observed after dose reduction, since it may take several weeks for metabolite levels to decline.

Monitoring

Hematology parameters and liver enzymes should be monitored (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests; WARNINGS, Hepatotoxicity; WARNINGS, Immunosuppression Potential/Bone Marrow Suppression).
Phentermine Hydrochlori...

Phentermine Hydrochloride

Exogenous Obesity

Dosage should be individualized to obtain an adequate response with the lowest effective dose.

The usual dosage is 15 to 30 mg at approximately 2 hours after breakfast for appetite control. Late evening medication should be avoided because of the possibility of resulting insomnia. Administration of one capsule (30 mg) daily has been found to be adequate in depression of the appetite for 12 to 14 hours.

Phentermine hydrochloride is not recommended for use in pediatric patients ≤ 16 years of age.
Pioglitazone

Pioglitazone

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone tablets should be taken once daily and can be taken without regard to meals.

The recommended starting dose for patients without congestive heart failure is 15 mg or 30 mg once daily.

The recommended starting dose for patients with congestive heart failure (NYHA Class I or II) is 15 mg once daily.

The dose can be titrated in increments of 15 mg up to a maximum of 45 mg once daily based on glycemic response as determined by HbA1c.

After initiation of pioglitazone tablets or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure [see Boxed Warning and Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone tablets. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone tablets is not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone tablets or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone tablets should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Concomitant Use with an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Coadministration with Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone tablets and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3-fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone tablets is 15 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Imipenem And Cilastatin...

Imipenem And Cilastatin

2.1 General Considerations

The side effects of irbesartan are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter [see Adverse Reactions (6)].

Maximum antihypertensive effects are attained within 2 to 4 weeks after a change in dose.

Irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with or without food.

Irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Renal impairment. The usual regimens of therapy with irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be followed as long as the patient’s creatinine clearance is > 30 mL/min. In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended.

Hepatic impairment. No dosage adjustment is necessary in patients with hepatic impairment.

2.2 Add-On Therapy

In patients not controlled on monotherapy with irbesartan or hydrochlorothiazide, the recommended doses of irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, in order of increasing mean effect, are (irbesartan-hydrochlorothiazide) 150/12.5 mg, 300/12.5 mg, and 300/25 mg. The largest incremental effect will likely be in the transition from monotherapy to 150/12.5 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be substituted for the titrated components.

2.4 Initial Therapy

The usual starting dose is irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 150/12.5 mg once daily. The dosage can be increased after 1 to 2 weeks of therapy to a maximum of one 300/25 mg tablet once daily as needed to control blood pressure [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Irbesartan and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended as initial therapy in patients with intravascular volume depletion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Gianvi

Gianvi

2.1 How to Take Gianvi

Take one tablet by mouth at the same time every day. The failure rate may increase when pills are missed or taken incorrectly.

To achieve maximum contraceptive and PMDD effectiveness, Gianvi must be taken exactly as directed, in the order directed on the blister pack. Single missed pills should be taken as soon as remembered.

2.2 How to Start Gianvi

Instruct the patient to begin taking Gianvi either on the first day of her menstrual period (Day 1 Start) or on the first Sunday after the onset of her menstrual period (Sunday Start).

Day 1 Start

During the first cycle of Gianvi use, instruct the patient to take one light pink Gianvi daily, beginning on Day 1 of her menstrual cycle. (The first day of menstruation is Day 1.) She should take one light pink Gianvi daily for 24 consecutive days, followed by one white inert tablet daily on Days 25 through 28. Gianvi should be taken in the order directed on the package at the same time each day, preferably after the evening meal or at bedtime with some liquid, as needed. Gianvi can be taken without regard to meals. If Gianvi is first taken later than the first day of the menstrual cycle, Gianvi should not be considered effective as a contraceptive until after the first 7 consecutive days of product administration. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal contraceptive as back-up during the first 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

Sunday Start

During the first cycle of Gianvi use, instruct the patient to take one light pink Gianvi daily, beginning on the first Sunday after the onset of her menstrual period. She should take one light pink Gianvi daily for 24 consecutive days, followed by one white inert tablet daily on Days 25 through 28. Gianvi should be taken in the order directed on the package at the same time each day, preferably after the evening meal or at bedtime with some liquid, as needed. Gianvi can be taken without regard to meals. Gianvi should not be considered effective as a contraceptive until after the first 7 consecutive days of product administration. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal contraceptive as back-up during the first 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

The patient should begin her next and all subsequent 28-day regimens of Gianvi on the same day of the week that she began her first regimen, following the same schedule. She should begin taking her light pink tablets on the next day after ingestion of the last white tablet, regardless of whether or not a menstrual period has occurred or is still in progress. Anytime a subsequent cycle of Gianvi is started later than the day following administration of the last white tablet, the patient should use another method of contraception until she has taken a light pink Gianvi daily for seven consecutive days.

When switching from a different birth control pill

When switching from another birth control pill, Gianvi should be started on the same day that a new pack of the previous oral contraceptive would have been started.

When switching from a method other than a birth control pill
When switching from a transdermal patch or vaginal ring, Gianvi should be started when the next application would have been due. When switching from an injection, Gianvi should be started when the next dose would have been due. When switching from an intrauterine contraceptive or an implant, Gianvi should be started on the day of removal.
Withdrawal bleeding usually occurs within 3 days following the last light pink tablet. If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs while taking Gianvi, instruct the patient to continue taking Gianvi by the regimen described above. Counsel her that this type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance; however, advise her that if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, she should consult her healthcare provider.

Although the occurrence of pregnancy is low if Gianvi is taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, consider the possibility of pregnancy. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed dosing schedule (missed one or more active tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), consider the possibility of pregnancy at the time of the first missed period and take appropriate diagnostic measures. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, rule out pregnancy. Discontinue Gianvi if pregnancy is confirmed.

The risk of pregnancy increases with each active light pink tablet missed. For additional patient instructions regarding missed pills, see the "WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS" section in the FDA Approved Patient Labeling. If breakthrough bleeding occurs following missed tablets, it will usually be transient and of no consequence. If the patient misses one or more white tablets, she should still be protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking a new cycle of light pink tablets on the proper day.

For postpartum women who do not breastfeed or after a second trimester abortion, start Gianvi no earlier than 4 weeks postpartum due to the increased risk of thromboembolism. If the patient starts on Gianvi postpartum and has not yet had a period, evaluate for possible pregnancy, and instruct her to use an additional method of contraception until she has taken Gianvi for 7 consecutive days.

2.3 Advice in Case of Gastrointestinal Disturbances

In case of severe vomiting or diarrhea, absorption may not be complete and additional contraceptive measures should be taken. If vomiting occurs within 3–4 hours after tablet-taking, this can be regarded as a missed tablet.
Adapalene Gel

Adapalene Gel

Adapalene Gel should be applied once a day to affected areas after washing in the evening before retiring. A thin film of the gel should be applied, avoiding eyes, lips, and mucous membranes.

During the early weeks of therapy, an apparent exacerbation of acne may occur. This is due to the action of the medication on previously unseen lesions and should not be considered a reason to discontinue therapy. Therapeutic results should be noticed after eight to twelve weeks of treatment.
Camrese

Camrese

Take one tablet by mouth at the same time every day. The dosage of Camrese is one light blue-green tablet containing levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by one yellow ethinyl estradiol tablet for 7 days. To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, Camrese must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours.

Instruct the patient to begin taking Camrese on the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation. If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first light blue-green tablet is taken that day. One light blue-green tablet should be taken daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by one yellow tablet for 7 consecutive days. A non-hormonal back-up method of contraception (such as condoms or spermicide) should be used until a light blue-green tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days. A scheduled period should occur during the 7 days that the yellow tablets are taken.

Begin the next and all subsequent 91-day cycles without interruption on the same day of the week (Sunday) on which the patient began her first dose of Camrese, following the same schedule: 84 days taking a light blue-green tablet followed by 7 days taking a yellow tablet. If the patient does not immediately start her next pill pack, she should protect herself from pregnancy by using a non-hormonal back-up method of contraception until she has taken a light blue-green tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

If unscheduled spotting or bleeding occurs, instruct the patient to continue on the same regimen. If the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, advise the patient to consult her healthcare provider.

For patient instructions regarding missed pills, see FDA-Approved Patient Labeling.

For postpartum women who are not breastfeeding, start Camrese no earlier than four to six weeks postpartum due to increased risk of thromboembolism. If the patient starts on Camrese postpartum and has not yet had a period, evaluate for possible pregnancy, and instruct her to use an additional method of contraception until she has taken a light blue-green tablet for 7 consecutive days.
Irbesartan

Irbesartan

Irbesartan tablets USP may be administered with other antihypertensive agents and with or without food.

Hypertension

The recommended initial dose of irbesartan tablets USP is 150 mg once daily. Patients requiring further reduction in blood pressure should be titrated to 300 mg once daily.

A low dose of a diuretic may be added, if blood pressure is not controlled by irbesartan tablets USP alone. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies). Patients not adequately treated by the maximum dose of 300 mg once daily are unlikely to derive additional benefit from a higher dose or twice-daily dosing.

No dosage adjustment is necessary in elderly patients, or in patients with hepatic impairment or mild to severe renal impairment.

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The recommended target maintenance dose is 300 mg once daily. There are no data on the clinical effects of lower doses of irbesartan tablets USP on diabetic nephropathy (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies).

Volume- and Salt-Depleted Patients

A lower initial dose of irbesartan tablets USP (75 mg) is recommended in patients with depletion of intravascular volume or salt (e.g., patients treated vigorously with diuretics or on hemodialysis) (see WARNINGS, Hypotension in Volume- or Salt-Depleted Patients).
Valcyte

Valcyte

The recommended dose for adults is 1200 mg administered in two divided doses 30 minutes before the morning and evening meals (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).
Haloperidol

Haloperidol

There is considerable variation from patient to patient in the amount of medication required for treatment. As with all antipsychotic drugs, dosage should be individualized according to the needs and response of each patient. Dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, should be carried out as rapidly as practicable to achieve optimum therapeutic control.

To determine the initial dosage, consideration should be given to the patient’s age, severity of illness, previous response to other antipsychotic drugs, and any concomitant medication or disease state. Children, debilitated or geriatric patients, as well as those with a history of adverse reactions to antipsychotic drugs, may require less haloperidol. The optimal response in such patients is usually obtained with more gradual dosage adjustments and at lower dosage levels, as recommended below.

Clinical experience suggests the following recommendations:

Initial Dosage Range

Adults

Moderate Symptomatology

0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Severe Symptomatology

3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

To achieve prompt control, higher doses may be required in some cases.

Geriatric or Debilitated Patients 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Chronic or Resistant Patients 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Patients who remain severely disturbed or inadequately controlled may require dosage adjustment. Daily dosages up to 100 mg may be necessary in some cases to achieve an optimal response. Infrequently, haloperidol has been used in doses above 100 mg for severely resistant patients; however, the limited clinical usage has not demonstrated the safety of prolonged administration of such doses.

Children

The following recommendations apply to children between the ages of 3 and 12 years (weight range 15 to 40 kg). Haloperidol is not intended for children under 3 years old. Therapy should begin at the lowest dose possible (0.5 mg per day). If required, the dose should be increased by an increment of 0.5 mg at 5 to 7 day intervals until the desired therapeutic effect is obtained (see chart below).

The total dose may be divided, to be given b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Psychotic Disorders

0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.15 mg/kg/day

Non-Psychotic behavior Disorders and Tourette’s Disorder

0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.075 mg/kg/day

Severely disturbed psychotic children may require higher doses.

In severely disturbed, non-psychotic children or in hyperactive children with accompanying conduct disorders, who have failed to respond to psychotherapy or medications other than antipsychotics, it should be noted that since these behaviors may be short-lived, short-term administration of haloperidol may suffice. There is no evidence establishing a maximum dosage. There is little evidence that behavior improvement is further enhanced in dosages beyond 6 mg per day.

Maintenance Dosage

Upon achieving a satisfactory therapeutic response, dosage should then be gradually reduced to the lowest effective maintenance level.

Intramuscular Administration

Adults

Parenteral medication, administered intramuscularly in doses of 2 to 5 mg, is utilized for prompt control of acutely agitated patient with moderately severe to very severe symptoms. Depending on the response of the patient, subsequent doses may be given, administered as often as every hour, although 4 to 8 hour intervals may be satisfactory.

Controlled trials to establish the safety and effectiveness of intramuscular administration in children have not been conducted.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Switchover Procedure (From Intramuscular Administration)

The oral form should supplant the injectable as soon as practicable. In the absence of bioavailability studies establishing bioequivalence between these two dosage forms the following guidelines for dosage are suggested. For an initial approximation of the total daily dose required, the parenteral dose administered in the preceding 24 hours may be used. Since this dose is only an initial estimate, it is recommended that careful monitoring of clinical signs and symptoms, including clinical efficacy, sedation, and adverse effects, be carried out periodically for the first several days following the initiation of switchover. In this way, dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, can be quickly accomplished. Depending on the patient’s clinical status, the first oral dose should be given within 12 to 24 hours following the last parenteral dose.
Bisac-evac

Bisac-evac

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of etodolac tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use etodolac tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with etodolac tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Dosage adjustment of etodolac tablets is generally not required in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. Etodolac tablets should be used with caution in such patients, because, as with other NSAIDs, they may further decrease renal function in some patients with impaired renal function (see WARNINGS, Renal Effects).

Analgesia

The recommended total daily dose of etodolac tablets for acute pain is up to 1,000 mg, given as 200 to 400 mg every 6 to 8 hours. Doses of etodolac greater than 1,000 mg/day have not been adequately evaluated in well-controlled clinical trials.

Osteoarthritis and Rheumatoid Arthritis

The recommended starting dose of etodolac tablets for the management of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis or rheumatoid arthritis is: 300 mg b.i.d., t.i.d., or 400 mg b.i.d., or 500 mg b.i.d. A lower dose of 600 mg/day may suffice for long-term administration. Physicians should be aware that doses above 1,000 mg/day have not been adequately evaluated in well-controlled clinical trials.

In chronic conditions, a therapeutic response to therapy with etodolac tablets is sometimes seen within one week of therapy, but most often is observed by two weeks. After a satisfactory response has been achieved, the patient’s dose should be reviewed and adjusted as required.
Hylenex Recombinant

Hylenex Recombinant

2.1 Sildenafil Tablets

The recommended dose of sildenafil tablets is 20 mg three times a day. Administer sildenafil tablet doses 4 to 6 hours apart.

In the clinical trial no greater efficacy was achieved with the use of higher doses. Treatment with doses higher than 20 mg three times a day is not recommended.
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although naproxen tablets, naproxen suspension, Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets, and naproxen sodium tablets all circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 30 minutes in patients taking naproxen sodium and within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen. Because Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets dissolve in the small intestine rather than in the stomach, the absorption of the drug is delayed compared to the other naproxen formulations (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min) (see WARNINGS, Renal Effects).

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis
Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets 375 mg twice daily or 500 mg twice daily
To maintain the integrity of the enteric coating, the Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablet should not be broken, crushed, or chewed during ingestion.

During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Juvenile Arthritis

The recommended total daily dose of naproxen is approximately 10 mg/kg given in 2 divided doses (i.e., 5 mg/kg given twice a day). Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets are not well suited to this dosage so use of naproxen oral suspension is recommended for this indication.
Fenofibrate

Fenofibrate

2.1 General Considerations

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving Fenofibrate tablets for oral use, and should continue this diet during treatment with Fenofibrate tablets for oral use. Fenofibrate tablets for oral use can be given without regard to meals.

The initial treatment for dyslipidemia is dietary therapy specific for the type of lipoprotein abnormality. Excess body weight and excess alcoholic intake may be important factors in hypertriglyceridemia and should be addressed prior to any drug therapy. Physical exercise can be an important ancillary measure. Diseases contributory to hyperlipidemia, such as hypothyroidism or diabetes mellitus should be looked for and adequately treated. Estrogen therapy, thiazide diuretics and beta-blockers, are sometimes associated with massive rises in plasma triglycerides, especially in subjects with familial hypertriglyceridemia. In such cases, discontinuation of the specific etiologic agent may obviate the need for specific drug therapy of hypertriglyceridemia.

Lipid levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use if lipid levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Therapy should be withdrawn in patients who do not have an adequate response after two months of treatment with the maximum recommended dose of 145 mg once daily.

2.2 Primary Hypercholesterolemia or Mixed Dyslipidemia

The initial dose of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use is 145 mg once daily.

2.3 Severe Hypertriglyceridemia

The initial dose is 48 to 145 mg per day. Dosage should be individualized according to patient response, and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 145 mg once daily.

2.4 Impaired Renal Function

Treatment with Fenofibrate tablets for oral use should be initiated at a dose of 48 mg per day in patients having mild to moderately impaired renal function, and increased only after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. The use of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use should be avoided in patients with severe renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].
Amlodipine Besylate

Amlodipine Besylate

2.1 Adults

The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine besylate tablets is 5 mg once daily, and the maximum dose is 10 mg once daily.

Small, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine besylate tablets to other antihypertensive therapy.

Adjust dosage according to blood pressure goals. In general, wait 7 to 14 days between titration steps. Titrate more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently.

Angina: The recommended dose for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5 to 10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect.

Coronary Artery Disease: The recommended dose range for patients with coronary artery disease is 5 to 10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].

2.2 Children

The effective antihypertensive oral dose in pediatric patients ages 6 to 17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4), Clinical Studies (14.1)].
Nifedipine

Nifedipine

2.1 Chronic Kidney Disease Stages 3 and 4

Paricalcitol capsules may be administered daily or three times a week. When dosing three times weekly, the dose should be administered not more frequently than every other day. The total weekly doses for both daily and three times a week dosage regimens are similar [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Paricalcitol capsules may be taken without regard to food. No dosing adjustment is required in patients with mild and moderate hepatic impairment.

Initial Dose

The initial dose of paricalcitol capsules for CKD Stages 3 and 4 patients is based on baseline intact parathyroid hormone (iPTH) levels.
* To be administered not more often than every other day
Baseline iPTH Level

Daily Dose

Three Times a Week Dose*

≤ 500 pg/mL

1 mcg

2 mcg

> 500 pg/mL

2 mcg

4 mcg

Dose Titration

Dosing must be individualized and based on serum or plasma iPTH levels, with monitoring of serum calcium and serum phosphorus. The following is a suggested approach to dose titration.
* To be administered not more often than every other day
Dose Adjustment at 2 to 4 Week Intervals

iPTH Level Relative to Baseline

Paricalcitol Capsule Dose

Daily Dosage

Three Times a Week Dosage*

The same, increased or decreased by < 30%

Increase dose by

1 mcg

2 mcg

Decreased by ≥ 30% and ≤ 60%

Maintain dose

-

-

Decreased by > 60% or iPTH < 60 pg/mL

Decrease dose by

1 mcg

2 mcg
1. To be administered not more often than every other day
If a patient is taking the lowest dose, 1 mcg, on the daily regimen and a dose reduction is needed, the dose can be decreased to 1 mcg three times a week. If a further dose reduction is required, the drug should be withheld as needed and restarted at a lower dosing frequency. If a patient is on a calcium-based phosphate binder, the phosphate-binder dose may be decreased or withheld, or the patient may be switched to a non-calcium-based phosphate binder. If hypercalcemia is observed, the dose of paricalcitol capsules should be reduced or withheld until these parameters are normalized.

Serum calcium and phosphorus levels should be closely monitored after initiation of paricalcitol capsules, during dose titration periods and during coadministration with strong CYP3A inhibitors [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3), Drug Interactions (7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Chronic Kidney Disease Stage 5

Paricalcitol capsules are to be administered three times a week, not more frequently than every other day.

Paricalcitol capsules may be taken without regard to food. No dosing adjustment is required in patients with mild and moderate hepatic impairment.

Initial Dose

The initial dose of paricalcitol capsules in micrograms is based on a baseline iPTH level (pg/mL)/80. To minimize the risk of hypercalcemia patients should be treated only after their baseline serum calcium has been adjusted to 9.5 mg/dL or lower [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2) and Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Dose Titration

Subsequent dosing should be individualized and based on iPTH, serum calcium and phosphorus levels. A suggested dose titration of paricalcitol capsules is based on the following formula:

Titration dose (micrograms) = most recent iPTH level (pg/ml)/80

Serum calcium and phosphorus levels should be closely monitored after initiation, during dose titration periods, and with coadministration of strong P450 3A inhibitors. If an elevated serum calcium is observed and the patient is on a calcium-based phosphate binder, the binder dose may be decreased or withheld, or the patient may be switched to a non-calcium-based phosphate binder. If serum calcium is elevated, the dose should be decreased by 2 to 4 micrograms lower than that calculated by the most recent iPTH/80. If further adjustment is required, the dose of paricalcitol capsules should be reduced or withheld until these parameters are normalized.

As iPTH approaches the target range, small, individualized dose adjustments may be necessary in order to achieve a stable iPTH. In situations where monitoring of iPTH, Ca or P occurs less frequently than once per week, a more modest initial and dose titration ratio (e.g., iPTH/100) may be warranted.
Ampicillin And Sulbacta...

Ampicillin And Sulbactam

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of flurbiprofen tablets USP and other treatment options before deciding to use flurbiprofen tablets USP. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with flurbiprofen tablets USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

For relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis or osteoarthritis, the recommended starting dose of flurbiprofen tablets USP is 200 to 300 mg per day, divided for administration two, three, or four times a day. The largest recommended single dose in a multiple-dose daily regimen is 100 mg.
Direct Safety Extra Str...

Direct Safety Extra Strength Aspirin Free

Buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets are administered sublingually as a single daily dose. Buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets should be used in patients who have been initially inducted using buprenorphine sublingual tablets.

Medication should be prescribed in consideration of the frequency of visits. Provision of multiple refills is not advised early in treatment or without appropriate patient follow-up visits.

2.1 Maintenance
• Buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets are indicated for maintenance treatment. The recommended target dosage of buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets is 16 mg/4 mg buprenorphine/naloxone/day as a single daily dose • The dosage of buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets should be progressively adjusted in increments/decrements of 2 mg/0.5 mg or 4 mg/1 mg buprenorphine/naloxone to a level that holds the patient in treatment and suppresses opioid withdrawal signs and symptoms • The maintenance dose of buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets is generally in the range of 4 mg/1 mg buprenorphine/naloxone to 24 mg/6 mg buprenorphine/naloxone per day depending on the individual patient. Dosages higher than this have not been demonstrated to provide any clinical advantage
2.2 Method of Administration

Buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets should be placed under the tongue until it is dissolved. For doses requiring the use of more than two tablets, patients are advised to either place all the tablets at once or alternatively (if they cannot fit in more than two tablets comfortably), place two tablets at a time under the tongue. Either way, the patients should continue to hold the tablets under the tongue until they dissolve; swallowing the tablets reduces the bioavailability of the drug. To ensure consistency in bioavailability, patients should follow the same manner of dosing with continued use of the product.

Proper administration technique should be demonstrated to the patient.

2.3 Clinical Supervision

Treatment should be initiated with supervised administration, progressing to unsupervised administration as the patient’s clinical stability permits. Buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets are subject to diversion and abuse. When determining the prescription quantity for unsupervised administration, consider the patient’s level of stability, the security of his or her home situation, and other factors likely to affect the ability to manage supplies of take-home medication.

Ideally patients should be seen at reasonable intervals (e.g., at least weekly during the first month of treatment) based upon the individual circumstances of the patient. Medication should be prescribed in consideration of the frequency of visits. Provision of multiple refills is not advised early in treatment or without appropriate patient follow-up visits. Periodic assessment is necessary to determine compliance with the dosing regimen, effectiveness of the treatment plan, and overall patient progress.

Once a stable dosage has been achieved and patient assessment (e.g., urine drug screening) does not indicate illicit drug use, less frequent follow-up visits may be appropriate. A once-monthly visit schedule may be reasonable for patients on a stable dosage of medication who are making progress toward their treatment objectives. Continuation or modification of pharmacotherapy should be based on the physician’s evaluation of treatment outcomes and objectives such as:
1. Absence of medication toxicity 2. Absence of medical or behavioral adverse effects 3. Responsible handling of medications by the patient 4. Patient’s compliance with all elements of the treatment plan (including recovery-oriented activities, psychotherapy, and/or other psychosocial modalities) 5. Abstinence from illicit drug use (including problematic alcohol and/or benzodiazepine use)
If treatment goals are not being achieved, the physician should reevaluate the appropriateness of continuing the current treatment.

2.4 Unstable Patients

Physicians will need to decide when they cannot appropriately provide further management for particular patients. For example, some patients may be abusing or dependent on various drugs, or unresponsive to psychosocial intervention such that the physician does not feel that he/she has the expertise to manage the patient. In such cases, the physician may want to assess whether to refer the patient to a specialist or more intensive behavioral treatment environment. Decisions should be based on a treatment plan established and agreed upon with the patient at the beginning of treatment.

Patients who continue to misuse, abuse, or divert buprenorphine products or other opioids should be provided with, or referred to, more intensive and structured treatment.

2.5 Patients With Hepatic Impairment

Because the doses of this fixed combination product cannot be individually titrated, severe hepatic impairment results in a reduced clearance of naloxone to a much greater extent than buprenorphine, and moderate hepatic impairment also results in a reduced clearance of naloxone to a greater extent than buprenorphine, the combination product should generally be avoided in patients with severe hepatic impairment and may not be appropriate for patients with moderate hepatic impairment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.11)].

2.6 Stopping Treatment

The decision to discontinue therapy with buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets after a period of maintenance should be made as part of a comprehensive treatment plan. Both gradual and abrupt discontinuation of buprenorphine has been used, but the data are insufficient to determine the best method of dose taper at the end of treatment.

2.7 Switching Between Buprenorphine and Naloxone Sublingual Film and Buprenorphine and Naloxone Sublingual Tablets

Patients being switched between buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets and buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film should be started on the same dosage as the previously administered product. However, dosage adjustments may be necessary when switching between products. Because of the potentially greater relative bioavailability of buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film compared to buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets, patients switching from buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets to buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film should be monitored for overmedication. Those switching from buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film to buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets should be monitored for withdrawal or other indications of underdosing. In clinical studies, pharmacokinetics of buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film was similar to the respective dosage strengths of buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets, although not all doses and dose combinations met bioequivalence criteria.
Naproxen Sodium

Naproxen Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Naproxen Sodium Tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use Naproxen Sodium Tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with Naproxen Sodium Tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although naproxen tablets, naproxen suspension, naproxen delayed-release tablets, and Naproxen Sodium Tablets all circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 30 minutes in patients taking naproxen sodium and within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen. Because naproxen delayed-release tablets dissolve in the small intestine rather than in the stomach, the absorption of the drug is delayed compared to the other naproxen formulations (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min) (see WARNINGS, Renal Effects).

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis

Naproxen Sodium Tablets

275 mg (naproxen 250 mg with 25 mg sodium)

twice daily

or 550 mg (naproxen 500 mg with 50 mg sodium)

twice daily

During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen sodium 1650 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen sodium 1650 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Juvenile Arthritis

For the relief of juvenile arthritis, the recommended dose is approximately 10 mg/kg given orally in 2 divided doses (i.e., 5 mg/kg given twice a day). Naproxen Sodium Tablets are not well suited to this dosage so use of naproxen oral suspension is recommended for this indication.

Management of Pain, Primary Dysmenorrhea, and Acute Tendonitis and Bursitis

The recommended starting dose is 550 mg of naproxen sodium followed by 550 mg every 12 hours or 275 mg every 6 to 8 hours as required. The initial total daily dose should not exceed 1375 mg of naproxen sodium. Thereafter, the total daily dose should not exceed 1100 mg of naproxen sodium. Because the sodium salt of naproxen is more rapidly absorbed, Naproxen Sodium Tablets are recommended for the management of acute painful conditions when prompt onset of pain relief is desired.

Acute Gout

The recommended starting dose is 825 mg of Naproxen Sodium Tablets followed by 275 mg every 8 hours until the attack has subsided.
Methyldopa

Methyldopa

Adults

Initiation of Therapy

The usual starting dosage of methyldopa tablet is 250 mg two or three times a day in the first 48 hours. The daily dosage then may be increased or decreased, preferably at intervals of not less than two days, until an adequate response is achieved. To minimize the sedation, start dosage increases in the evening. By adjustment of dosage, morning hypotension may be prevented without sacrificing control of afternoon blood pressure.

When methyldopa is given to patients on other anti-hypertensives, the dose of these agents may need to be adjusted to effect a smooth transition. When methyldopa is given with anti-hypertensives other than thiazides, the initial dosage of methyldopa should be limited to 500 mg daily in divided doses; when methyldopa is added to a thiazide, the dosage of thiazide need not be changed.

Maintenance Therapy

The usual daily dosage of methyldopa is 500 mg to 2 g in two to four doses. Although occasional patients have responded to higher doses, the maximum recommended daily dosage is 3 g. Once an effective dosage range is attained, a smooth blood pressure response occurs in most patients in 12 to 24 hours. Since methyldopa has a relatively short duration of action, withdrawal is followed by return of hypertension usually within 48 hours. This is not complicated by an overshoot of blood pressure.

Occasionally tolerance may occur, usually between the second and third month of therapy. Adding a diuretic or increasing the dosage of methyldopa frequently will restore effective control of blood pressure. A thiazide may be added at any time during methyldopa therapy and is recommended if therapy has not been started with a thiazide or if effective control of blood pressure cannot be maintained on 2 g of methyldopa daily.

Methyldopa is largely excreted by the kidney and patients with impaired renal function may respond to smaller doses. Syncope in older patients may be related to an increased sensitivity and advanced arteriosclerotic vascular disease. This may be avoided by lower doses (see PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use).

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS

Initial dosage is based on 10 mg/kg of body weight daily in two to four doses. The daily dosage then is increased or decreased until an adequate response is achieved. The maximum dosage is 65 mg/kg or 3 g daily, whichever is less (see PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).
Famciclovir

Famciclovir

Famciclovir tablets may be taken with or without food.

2.1 Dosing Recommendation in Immunocompetent Adult Patients

Herpes labialis (cold sores): The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for the treatment of recurrent herpes labialis is 1500 mg as a single dose. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of herpes labialis (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

Genital herpes:

Recurrent episodes: The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for the treatment of recurrent episodes of genital herpes is 1000 mg twice daily for 1 day. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of a recurrent episode (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

Suppressive therapy: The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent episodes of genital herpes is 250 mg twice daily.

Herpes zoster (shingles): The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for the treatment of herpes zoster is 500 mg every 8 hours for 7 days. Therapy should be initiated as soon as herpes zoster is diagnosed.

2.2 Dosing Recommendation in HIV-Infected Adult Patients

Recurrent orolabial or genital herpes: The recommended dosage of famciclovir tablets for the treatment of recurrent orolabial or genital herpes in HIV-infected patients is 500 mg twice daily for 7 days. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of a recurrent episode (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

2.3 Dosing Recommendation in Patients With Renal Impairment

Dosage recommendations for adult patients with renal impairment are provided in Table 1 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 1: Dosage Recommendations for Adult Patients With Renal Impairment
Indication and Normal Dosage Regimen

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Adjusted Dosage Regimen Dose (mg)

Dosing Interval

Single-Day Dosing Regimens

Recurrent Genital Herpes

1000 mg every 12 hours for 1 day

≥ 60

1000

every 12 hours for 1 day

40 to 59

500

every 12 hours for 1 day

20 to 39

500

single dose

< 20

250

single dose

HDa

250

single dose following dialysis

Recurrent Herpes Labialis

1500 mg single dose

≥ 60

1500

single dose

40 to 59

750

single dose

20 to 39

500

single dose

< 20

250

single dose

HDa

250

single dose following dialysis

Multiple-Day Dosing Regimens

Herpes Zoster

500 mg every 8 hours

≥ 60

500

every 8 hours

40 to 59

500

every 12 hours

20 to 39

500

every 24 hours

< 20

250

every 24 hours

HDa

250

following each dialysis

Suppression of Recurrent Genital Herpes

250 mg every 12 hours

≥ 40

250

every 12 hours

20 to 39

125

every 12 hours

< 20

125

every 24 hours

HDa

125

following each dialysis

Recurrent Orolabial or Genital Herpes in HIV-Infected Patients

500 mg every 12 hours

≥ 40

500

every 12 hours

20 to 39

500

every 24 hours

< 20

250

every 24 hours

HDa

250

following each dialysis
Topotecan Hydrochloride...

Topotecan Hydrochloride

2.1 Treatment of Postmenopausal Osteoporosis [see Indications and Usage (1.1)]

The recommended regimen is:
• one 5 mg tablet orally, taken daily
or
• one 35 mg tablet orally, taken once-a-week
or
• one 75 mg tablet orally, taken on two consecutive days for a total of two tablets each month
or
• one 150 mg tablet orally, taken once-a-month
2.2 Prevention of Postmenopausal Osteoporosis [see Indications and Usage (1.1)]

The recommended regimen is:
• one 5 mg tablet orally, taken daily
or
• one 35 mg tablet orally, taken once-a-week
or
• alternatively, one 75 mg tablet orally, taken on two consecutive days for a total of two tablets each month may be considered
or
• alternatively, one 150 mg tablet orally, taken once-a-month may be considered
2.3 Treatment to Increase Bone Mass in Men With Osteoporosis [see Indications and Usage (1.2)]

The recommended regimen is:
• one 35 mg tablet orally, taken once-a-week
2.4 Treatment and Prevention of Glucocorticoid-Induced Osteoporosis [see Indications and Usage (1.3)]

The recommended regimen is:
• one 5 mg tablet orally, taken daily
2.5 Treatment of Paget’s Disease [see Indications and Usage (1.4)]

The recommended treatment regimen is 30 mg orally once daily for 2 months. Retreatment may be considered (following post-treatment observation of at least 2 months) if relapse occurs, or if treatment fails to normalize serum alkaline phosphatase. For retreatment, the dose and duration of therapy are the same as for initial treatment. No data are available on more than 1 course of retreatment.

2.6 Important Administration Instructions

Instruct patients to do the following:
• Take risedronate sodium tablets at least 30 minutes before the first food or drink of the day other than water, and before taking any oral medication or supplementation, including calcium, antacids, or vitamins to maximize absorption and clinical benefit, [ see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Avoid the use of water with supplements, including mineral water, because they may have a higher concentration of calcium. • Swallow risedronate sodium tablets whole with a full glass of plain water (6 to 8 ounces). Avoid lying down for 30 minutes after taking the medication [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. Do not chew or suck the tablet because of a potential for oropharyngeal ulceration. • Do not eat or drink anything except plain water, or take other medications for at least 30 minutes after taking risedronate sodium tablets.
2.7 Recommendations for Calcium and Vitamin D Supplementation

Instruct patients to take supplemental calcium and vitamin D if their dietary intake is inadequate; and to take calcium supplements, antacids, magnesium-based supplements or laxatives, and iron preparations at a different time of the day as they interfere with the absorption of risedronate sodium tablets.

2.8 Administration Instructions for Missed Doses

Instruct patients about missing risedronate sodium tablet doses as follows:
• If a dose of risedronate sodium tablets, 35 mg once-a-week is missed: ∘ Take 1 tablet on the morning after they remember and return to taking 1 tablet once-a-week, as originally scheduled on their chosen day. ∘ Do not take 2 tablets on the same day. • If one or both tablets of risedronate sodium tablets, 75 mg on two consecutive days per month are missed, and the next month’s scheduled doses are more than 7 days away: ∘ If both tablets are missed, take one risedronate sodium tablet, 75 mg in the morning after the day it is remembered and then the other tablet on the next consecutive morning. ∘ If only one risedronate sodium tablet, 75 mg is missed, take the missed tablet in the morning after the day it is remembered. ∘ Return to taking their risedronate sodium tablets, 75 mg on two consecutive days per month as originally scheduled. ∘ Do not take more than two 75 mg tablets within 7 days. • If one or both tablets of risedronate sodium tablets, 75 mg on two consecutive days per month are missed, and the next month's scheduled doses are within 7 days: ∘ Wait until their next month’s scheduled doses and then continue taking risedronate sodium tablets, 75 mg on two consecutive days per month as originally scheduled. • If the dose of risedronate sodium tablets, 150 mg once-a-month is missed, and the next month’s scheduled dose is more than 7 days away: ∘ Take the missed tablet in the morning after the day it is remembered and then return to taking their risedronate sodium tablets, 150 mg once-a-month as originally scheduled. ∘ Do not take more than one 150 mg tablet within 7 days. • If the dose of risedronate sodium tablets, 150 mg once-a-month is missed, and the next month's scheduled dose is within 7 days: ∘ Wait until their next month’s scheduled dose and then continue taking risedronate sodium tablets, 150 mg once-a-month as originally scheduled.
Sucralfate

Sucralfate

Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dosage for duodenal ulcer is 1 g four times per day on an empty stomach.

Antacids may be prescribed as needed for relief of pain but should not be taken within one-half hour before or after sucralfate.

While healing with sucralfate may occur during the first week or two, treatment should be continued for 4 to 8 weeks unless healing has been demonstrated by x-ray or endoscopic examination.

Maintenance Therapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is 1 g twice a day.

Elderly

In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting the greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy (see PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use).

Call your doctor for medical advice about side effects. You may report side effects to TEVA USA, PHARMACOVIGILANCE at tel: 1-888-838-2872, x6351 or drug.safety@tevapharm.com; or FDA at 1-800-FDA-1088 or www.fda.gov/medwatch.
Allergy

Allergy

2.1 Acute Coronary Syndrome

Clopidogrel tablets can be administered with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
• For patients with non-ST-elevation ACS (UA/NSTEMI), initiate clopidogrel tablets with a single 300 mg oral loading dose and then continue at 75 mg once daily. Initiate aspirin (75 to 325 mg once daily) and continue in combination with clopidogrel tablets [ see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. • For patients with STEMI, the recommended dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, administered in combination with aspirin (75 to 325 mg once daily), with or without thrombolytics. Clopidogrel tablets may be initiated with or without a loading dose [ see Clinical Studies (14.1)].
2.2 Recent MI, Recent Stroke, or Established Peripheral Arterial Disease

The recommended daily dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 CYP2C19 Poor Metabolizers

CYP2C19 poor metabolizer status is associated with diminished antiplatelet response to clopidogrel. Although a higher dose regimen in poor metabolizers increases antiplatelet response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)], an appropriate dose regimen for this patient population has not been established.

2.4 Use With Proton Pump Inhibitors (PPI)

Avoid using omeprazole or esomeprazole with clopidogrel tablets. Omeprazole and esomeprazole significantly reduce the antiplatelet activity of clopidogrel tablets. When concomitant administration of a PPI is required, consider using another acid-reducing agent with minimal or no CYP2C19 inhibitory effect on the formation of clopidogrel active metabolite [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Amoxicillin

Amoxicillin

2.1 Dosing for Adult and Pediatric Patients > 3 Months of Age

Except for gonorrhea, treatment should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. It is recommended that there be at least 10 days’ treatment for any infection caused by Streptococcus pyogenes to prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever. In some infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.
Table 1. Dosing Recommendations for Adult and Pediatric Patients > 3 Months of Age * Dosing for infections caused by bacteria that are intermediate in their susceptibility to amoxicillin should follow the recommendations for severe infections. † The children’s dosage is intended for individuals whose weight is less than 40 kg. Children weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to the adult recommendations.
Infection

Severity*

Usual Adult Dose

Usual Dose for Children > 3 Months†

Ear/Nose/Throat

Skin/Skin Structure

Genitourinary Tract

Mild/Moderate

500 mg every 12 hours or

250 mg every 8 hours

25 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours

or

20 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 8 hours

Severe

875 mg every 12 hours or

500 mg every 8 hours

45 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours

or

40 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 8 hours

Lower Respiratory

Tract

Mild/Moderate or

Severe

875 mg every 12 hours or

500 mg every 8 hours

45 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours

or

40 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 8 hours

Gonorrhea,

Acute, Uncomplicated

(Ano-Genital and Urethral Infections)

3 grams as single oral dose

Prepubertal Children:

50 mg/kg Amoxicillin Tablets, combined with 25 mg/kg probenecid as a single dose.

Note: since probenecid is contraindicated in children under 2 years, do not use this regimen in children under 2

years of age.

2.2 Dosing in Neonates and Infants Aged ≤ 12 Weeks (≤ 3 Months)

Treatment should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. It is recommended that there be at least 10 days’ treatment for any infection caused by Streptococcus pyogenes to prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever. Due to incompletely developed renal function affecting elimination of amoxicillin in this age group, the recommended upper dose of amoxicillin is 30 mg/kg/day divided every 12 hours. There are currently no dosing recommendations for pediatric patients with impaired renal function.

2.3 Dosing for H. pylori Infection

Triple Therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 1 gram amoxicillin, 500 mg clarithromycin, and 30 mg lansoprazole, all given twice daily (every 12 hours) for 14 days.

Dual Therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 1 gram amoxicillin and 30 mg lansoprazole, each given three times daily (every 8 hours) for 14 days.

Please refer to clarithromycin and lansoprazole full prescribing information.

2.4 Dosing in Renal Impairment
• Patients with impaired renal function do not generally require a reduction in dose unless the impairment is severe. • Severely impaired patients with a glomerular filtration rate of < 30 mL/min. should not receive a 875 mg dose. • Patients with a glomerular filtration rate of 10 to 30 mL/min should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 12 hours, depending on the severity of the infection. • Patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 10 mL/min should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. • Hemodialysis patients should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. They should receive an additional dose both during and at the end of dialysis.
Zaleplon

Zaleplon

The dose of zaleplon capsules should be individualized. The recommended dose of zaleplon capsules for most non-elderly adults is 10 mg. For certain low weight individuals, 5 mg may be a sufficient dose. Although the risk of certain adverse events associated with the use of zaleplon capsules appears to be dose dependent, the 20 mg dose has been shown to be adequately tolerated and may be considered for the occasional patient who does not benefit from a trial of a lower dose. Doses above 20 mg have not been adequately evaluated and are not recommended.

Zaleplon capsules should be taken immediately before bedtime or after the patient has gone to bed and has experienced difficulty falling asleep (see PRECAUTIONS). Taking zaleplon capsules with or immediately after a heavy, high-fat meal results in slower absorption and would be expected to reduce the effect of zaleplon capsules on sleep latency (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics).

Special Populations

Elderly patients and debilitated patients appear to be more sensitive to the effects of hypnotics, and respond to 5 mg of zaleplon capsules. The recommended dose for these patients is therefore 5 mg. Doses over 10 mg are not recommended.

Hepatic insufficiency

Patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment should be treated with zaleplon capsules 5 mg because clearance is reduced in this population. Zaleplon capsules are not recommended for use in patients with severe hepatic impairment.

Renal insufficiency

No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. Zaleplon capsules have not been adequately studied in patients with severe renal impairment.

An initial dose of 5 mg should be given to patients concomitantly taking cimetidine because zaleplon clearance is reduced in this population (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).
Piroxicam

Piroxicam

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of piroxicam capsules and other treatment options before deciding to use piroxicam capsules. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with piroxicam capsules, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis, the recommended dose is 20 mg given orally once per day. If desired, the daily dose may be divided. Because of the long half-life of piroxicam capsules, steady-state blood levels are not reached for 7 to 12 days. Therefore, although the therapeutic effects of piroxicam are evident early in treatment, there is a progressive increase in response over several weeks and the effect of therapy should not be assessed for two weeks.
Buspirone Hydrochloride...

Buspirone Hydrochloride

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg daily (7.5 mg b.i.d.). To achieve an optimal therapeutic response, at intervals of 2 to 3 days the dosage may be increased 5 mg per day, as needed. The maximum daily dosage should not exceed 60 mg per day. In clinical trials allowing dose titration, divided doses of 20 to 30 mg per day were commonly employed.

The bioavailability of buspirone is increased when given with food as compared to the fasted state (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Consequently, patients should take buspirone in a consistent manner with regard to the timing of dosing; either always with or always without food.

When buspirone is to be given with a potent inhibitor of CYP3A4, the dosage recommendations described in the PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions section should be followed.
Fosinopril Sodium

Fosinopril Sodium

Hypertension

Adults

The recommended initial dose of fosinopril sodium tablets USP is 10 mg once a day, both as monotherapy and when the drug is added to a diuretic. Dosage should then be adjusted according to blood pressure response at peak (2 to 6 hours) and trough (about 24 hours after dosing) blood levels. The usual dosage range needed to maintain a response at trough is 20 to 40 mg but some patients appear to have a further response to 80 mg. In some patients treated with once daily dosing, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. If trough response is inadequate, dividing the daily dose should be considered. If blood pressure is not adequately controlled with fosinopril sodium tablets USP alone, a diuretic may be added.

Concomitant administration of fosinopril sodium tablets USP with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics can lead to increases of serum potassium (see PRECAUTIONS).

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of fosinopril sodium tablets USP. To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued 2 to 3 days prior to beginning therapy with fosinopril sodium tablets USP (see WARNINGS). Then, if blood pressure is not controlled with fosinopril sodium tablets USP alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed. If diuretic therapy cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 10 mg of fosinopril sodium tablets USP should be used with careful medical supervision for several hours and until blood pressure has stabilized (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Information for Patients and Drug Interactions).

Since concomitant administration of fosinopril sodium tablets USP with potassium supplements, or potassium-containing salt substitutes or potassium-sparing diuretics may lead to increases in serum potassium, they should be used with caution (see PRECAUTIONS).

Pediatrics

In children, doses of fosinopril sodium tablets between 0.1 and 0.6 mg/kg have been studied and shown to reduce blood pressure to a similar extent (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects). Based on this, the recommended dose of fosinopril sodium tablets USP in children weighing more than 50 kg is 5 to 10 mg once per day as monotherapy. An appropriate dosage strength is not available for children weighing less than 50 kg.

Heart Failure

Digitalis is not required for fosinopril sodium tablets USP to manifest improvements in exercise tolerance and symptoms. Most placebo-controlled clinical trial experience has been with both digitalis and diuretics present as background therapy.

The usual starting dose of fosinopril sodium tablets USP should be 10 mg once daily. Following the initial dose of fosinopril sodium tablets USP, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least 2 hours for the presence of hypotension or orthostasis, and if present, until blood pressure stabilizes. An initial dose of 5 mg is preferred in heart failure patients with moderate to severe renal failure or those who have been vigorously diuresed.

Dosage should be increased, over a several week period, to a dose that is maximal and tolerated but not exceeding 40 mg once daily. The usual effective dosage range is 20 to 40 mg once daily.

The appearance of hypotension, orthostasis, or azotemia early in dose titration should not preclude further careful dose titration. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretic.

For Hypertensive or Heart Failure Patients With Renal Impairment

In patients with impaired renal function, the total body clearance of fosinoprilat is approximately 50% slower than in patients with normal renal function. Since hepatobiliary elimination partially compensates for diminished renal elimination, the total body clearance of fosinoprilat does not differ appreciably with any degree of renal insufficiency (creatinine clearances < 80 mL/min/1.73 m2), including end-stage renal failure (creatinine clearance < 10 mL/min/1.73 m2). This relative constancy of body clearance of active fosinoprilat, resulting from the dual route of elimination, permits use of the usual dose in patients with any degree of renal impairment (see WARNINGS, Anaphylactoid Reactions During Membrane Exposure and PRECAUTIONS, Hemodialysis).
Triamcinolone Acetonide...

Triamcinolone Acetonide Spray

Administer Triamcinolone Acetonide Nasal Spray by the intranasal route only. Shake Triamcinolone Acetonide Nasal Spray well before each use.
2.1 Adults and Adolescents 12 Years of Age and Older
The recommended starting and maximum dose is 220 mcg per day as two sprays in each nostril once daily. Titrate an individual patient to the minimum effective dose to reduce the possibility of side effects. When the maximum benefit has been achieved and symptoms have been controlled, reducing the dose to 110 mcg per day (one spray in each nostril once a day) has been shown to be effective in maintaining control of the allergic rhinitis symptoms.
2.2 Children 2 to 12 Years of Age
Children 6 to 12 years of Age The recommended starting dose is 110 mcg per day given as one spray in each nostril once daily. Children not responding adequately to 110 mcg per day may use 220 mcg (2 sprays in each nostril) once daily. Once symptoms have been controlled, the dosage may be decreased to 110 mcg once daily. Children 2 to 5 years of age: The recommended and maximum dose is 110 mcg per day given as one spray in each nostril once daily. Triamcinolone Acetonide Nasal Spray is not recommended for children under 2 years of age.
2.3 Administration Information
Priming Prime Triamcinolone Acetonide Nasal Spray before using for the first time by shaking the contents well and releasing 5 sprays into the air away from the face. It will remain adequately primed for two weeks. If the product is not used for more than 2 weeks, then it can be adequately reprimed with one spray. Shake Triamcinolone Acetonide Nasal Spray well before each use. If adequate relief of symptoms has not been obtained after 3 weeks of treatment, Triamcinolone Acetonide Nasal Spray should be discontinued. [ see Warnings and Precautions (5), Patient Counseling Information (17), and Adverse Reactions (6)]
Meloxicam

Meloxicam

2.1 General Instructions

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of meloxicam tablets USP and other treatment options before deciding to use meloxicam tablets USP. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

After observing the response to initial therapy with meloxicam tablets USP, adjust the dose to suit an individual patient's needs.

In adults, the maximum recommended daily oral dose of meloxicam tablets USP is 15 mg regardless of formulation. In patients with hemodialysis, a maximum daily dosage of 7.5 mg is recommended [see Warnings and Precautions (5.6), Use in Specific Populations (8.7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Meloxicam tablets USP may be taken without regard to timing of meals.

2.2 Osteoarthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis the recommended starting and maintenance oral dose of meloxicam tablets USP is 7.5 mg once daily. Some patients may receive additional benefit by increasing the dose to 15 mg once daily.

2.3 Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended starting and maintenance oral dose of meloxicam tablets USP is 7.5 mg once daily. Some patients may receive additional benefit by increasing the dose to 15 mg once daily.

2.4 Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis (JRA) Pauciarticular and Polyarticular Course

To improve dosing accuracy in smaller weight children, the use of the meloxicam oral suspension is recommended. For the treatment of juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended oral dose of meloxicam is 0.125 mg/kg once daily up to a maximum of 7.5 mg. There was no additional benefit demonstrated by increasing the dose above 0.125 mg/kg once daily in these clinical trials.
Prostate Relief

Prostate Relief

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

The recommended starting and target dose for aripiprazole tablets is 10 or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. Aripiprazole tablets have been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either aripiprazole 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

Adolescents

The recommended target dose of aripiprazole is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. Aripiprazole can be administered without regard to meals [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to aripiprazole tablets or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

Additional pediatric use information is approved for Otsuka America Pharmaceutical, Inc.’s ABILIFY® (aripiprazole) product. However, due to Otsuka America Pharmaceutical, Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that information.

2.7 Dosage Adjustments for Cytochrome P450 Considerations

Dosage adjustments are recommended in patients who are known CYP2D6 poor metabolizers and in patients taking concomitant CYP3A4 inhibitors or CYP2D6 inhibitors or strong CYP3A4 inducers (see Table 2). When the coadministered drug is withdrawn from the combination therapy, aripiprazole dosage should then be adjusted to its original level. When the coadministered CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn, aripiprazole dosage should be reduced to the original level over 1 to 2 weeks. Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (e.g., a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response.

Table 2: Dose Adjustments for Aripiprazole in Patients who are known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers and Patients Taking Concomitant CYP2D6 Inhibitors, 3A4 Inhibitors, and/or CYP3A4 Inducers

Factors

Dosage Adjustments for Aripiprazole

Known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers

Administer half of usual dose

Known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers taking concomitant strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., itraconazole, clarithromycin)

Administer a quarter of usual dose

Strong CYP2D6 (e.g., quinidine, fluoxetine, paroxetine) or CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., itraconazole, clarithromycin)

Administer half of usual dose

Strong CYP2D6 and CYP3A4 inhibitors

Administer a quarter of usual dose

Strong CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., carbamazepine, rifampin)

Double usual dose over 1 to 2 weeks

2.8 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].
Ribavirin

Ribavirin

2.1 Chronic Hepatitis C Monoinfection

The recommended dose of ribavirin tablets is provided in Table 1. The recommended duration of treatment for patients previously untreated with ribavirin and interferon is 24 to 48 weeks.

The daily dose of ribavirin tablets is 800 mg to 1200 mg administered orally in two divided doses. The dose should be individualized to the patient depending on baseline disease characteristics (e.g., genotype), response to therapy, and tolerability of the regimen (see Table 1).

Ribavirin tablets should be taken with food.
Table 1. Peginterferon alfa-2a and Ribavirin Tablet Dosing Recommendations * See peginterferon alfa-2a Package Insert for further details on peginterferon alfa-2a dosing and administration. Hepatitis C Virus (HCV) Genotype Peginterferon alfa-2a Dose* Ribavirin Tablet Dose Duration Genotypes 1, 4 180 mcg < 75 kg = 1000 mg 48 weeks ≥ 75 kg = 1200 mg 48 weeks Genotypes 2, 3 180 mcg 800 mg 24 weeks
Genotypes 2 and 3 showed no increased response to treatment beyond 24 weeks (see Table 6).Data on genotypes 5 and 6 are insufficient for dosing recommendations.

2.2 Chronic Hepatitis C With HIV Coinfection

The recommended dose for treatment of chronic hepatitis C in patients coinfected with HIV is peginterferon alfa-2a 180 mcg subcutaneous once weekly and ribavirin tablets, 800 mg by mouth daily for a total duration of 48 weeks, regardless of HCV genotype.

Ribavirin tablets should be taken with food.

2.3 Dose Modifications

If severe adverse reactions or laboratory abnormalities develop during combination ribavirin tablet/peginterferon alfa-2a therapy, the dose should be modified or discontinued, if appropriate, until the adverse reactions abate or decrease in severity. If intolerance persists after dose adjustment, ribavirin tablet/peginterferon alfa-2a therapy should be discontinued. Table 2 provides guidelines for dose modifications and discontinuation based on the patient’s hemoglobin concentration and cardiac status.

Ribavirin tablets should be administered with caution to patients with preexisting cardiac disease. Patients should be assessed before commencement of therapy and should be appropriately monitored during therapy. If there is any deterioration of cardiovascular status, therapy should be stopped [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Table 2. Ribavirin Tablet Dosage Modification Guidelines * One 200 mg tablet in the morning and two 200 mg tablets in the evening. Laboratory Values Reduce Only Ribavirin Tablet Dose to 600 mg/day* if: Discontinue Ribavirin Tablets if: Hemoglobin in patients with no cardiac disease < 10 g/dL < 8.5 g/dL Hemoglobin in patients with history of stable cardiac disease ≥ 2 g/dL decrease in hemoglobin during any 4 week period treatment < 12 g/dL despite 4 weeks at reduced dose
Once ribavirin tablets have been withheld due to either a laboratory abnormality or clinical manifestation, an attempt may be made to restart ribavirin tablets at 600 mg daily and further increase the dose to 800 mg daily. However, it is not recommended that ribavirin tablets be increased to the original assigned dose (1000 mg to 1200 mg).

See peginterferon alfa-2a full prescribing information for recommendations on peginterferon alfa-2a dose modification.

2.4 Discontinuation of Dosing

Discontinuation of peginterferon alfa-2a/ribavirin tablet therapy should be considered if the patient has failed to demonstrate at least a 2 log10 reduction from baseline in HCV RNA by 12 weeks of therapy, or undetectable HCV RNA levels after 24 weeks of therapy.

Peginterferon alfa-2a/ribavirin tablet therapy should be discontinued in patients who develop hepatic decompensation during treatment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

2.5 Renal Impairment

Ribavirin tablets should not be used in patients with creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].
Clonazepam

Clonazepam

Clonazepam tablets USP should be administered with water by swallowing the tablet whole.

Seizure Disorders

Adults

The initial dose for adults with seizure disorders should not exceed 1.5 mg/day divided into three doses. Dosage may be increased in increments of 0.5 to 1 mg every 3 days until seizures are adequately controlled or until side effects preclude any further increase. Maintenance dosage must be individualized for each patient depending upon response. Maximum recommended daily dose is 20 mg.

The use of multiple anticonvulsants may result in an increase of depressant adverse effects. This should be considered before adding clonazepam to an existing anticonvulsant regimen.

Pediatric Patients

Clonazepam is administered orally. In order to minimize drowsiness, the initial dose for infants and children (up to 10 years of age or 30 kg of body weight) should be between 0.01 and 0.03 mg/kg/day but not to exceed 0.05 mg/kg/day given in two or three divided doses. Dosage should be increased by no more than 0.25 to 0.5 mg every third day until a daily maintenance dose of 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg of body weight has been reached, unless seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increase. Whenever possible, the daily dose should be divided into three equal doses. If doses are not equally divided, the largest dose should be given before retiring.

Geriatric Patients

There is no clinical trial experience with clonazepam in seizure disorder patients 65 years of age and older. In general, elderly patients should be started on low doses of clonazepam and observed closely (see PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use).

Panic Disorder

Adults

The initial dose for adults with panic disorder is 0.25 mg bid. An increase to the target dose for most patients of 1 mg/day may be made after 3 days. The recommended dose of 1 mg/day is based on the results from a fixed dose study in which the optimal effect was seen at 1 mg/day. Higher doses of 2, 3 and 4 mg/day in that study were less effective than the 1 mg/day dose and were associated with more adverse effects. Nevertheless, it is possible that some individual patients may benefit from doses of up to a maximum dose of 4 mg/day, and in those instances, the dose may be increased in increments of 0.125 to 0.25 mg bid every 3 days until panic disorder is controlled or until side effects make further increases undesired. To reduce the inconvenience of somnolence, administration of one dose at bedtime may be desirable.

Treatment should be discontinued gradually, with a decrease of 0.125 mg bid every 3 days, until the drug is completely withdrawn.

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with clonazepam should remain on it. Therefore, the physician who elects to use clonazepam for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Pediatric Patients

There is no clinical trial experience with clonazepam in panic disorder patients under 18 years of age.

Geriatric Patients

There is no clinical trial experience with clonazepam in panic disorder patients 65 years of age and older. In general, elderly patients should be started on low doses of clonazepam and observed closely (see PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use).
Bumetanide

Bumetanide

Dosage should be individualized with careful monitoring of patient response.

Oral Administration

The usual total daily dosage of bumetanide is 0.5 to 2 mg and in most patients is given as a single dose.

If the diuretic response to an initial dose of bumetanide is not adequate, in view of its rapid onset and short duration of action, a second or third dose may be given at 4- to 5-hour intervals up to a maximum daily dose of 10 mg. An intermittent dose schedule, whereby bumetanide is given on alternate days or for 3 to 4 days with rest periods of 1 to 2 days in between, is recommended as the safest and most effective method for the continued control of edema. In patients with hepatic failure, the dosage should be kept to a minimum, and if necessary, dosage increased very carefully. Because cross-sensitivity with furosemide has rarely been observed, bumetanide can be substituted at approximately a 1:40 ratio of bumetanide to furosemide in patients allergic to furosemide.

Parenteral Administration

Bumetanide Injection may be administered parenterally (IV or IM) to patients in whom gastrointestinal absorption may be impaired or in whom oral administration is not practical.

Parenteral treatment should be terminated and oral treatment instituted as soon as possible.
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin hydrochloride tablets USP or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily doses. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10 to 16 years of age).

Metformin hydrochloride tablets USP should be given in divided doses with meals. Metformin hydrochloride tablets USP should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin hydrochloride tablets USP and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults —In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, metformin hydrochloride tablets USP may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

Pediatrics —The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Transfer From Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin hydrochloride tablets USP, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets USP and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablet USP monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin hydrochloride tablets USP at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin hydrochloride tablets USP and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin hydrochloride tablets USP 500 mg and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin hydrochloride tablets USP and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken (see Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea).

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin hydrochloride tablets USP.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets USP and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin hydrochloride tablet USP therapy. Metformin hydrochloride tablet USP therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for metformin hydrochloride tablets USP. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin hydrochloride tablets USP are not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin hydrochloride tablets USP are not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years.

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets USP.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly (see WARNINGS).
Enalapril Maleate

Enalapril Maleate

Hypertension

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally may occur following the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets. The diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued for two to three days before beginning therapy with enalapril maleate tablets to reduce the likelihood of hypotension (see WARNINGS). If the patient's blood pressure is not controlled with enalapril maleate tablets alone, diuretic therapy may be resumed.

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued an initial dose of 2.5 mg should be used under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).

The recommended initial dose in patients not on diuretics is 5 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 10 to 40 mg per day administered in a single dose or two divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients, an increase in dosage or twice daily administration should be considered. If blood pressure is not controlled with enalapril maleate tablets alone, a diuretic may be added. Concomitant administration of enalapril maleate tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics may lead to increases of serum potassium (see PRECAUTIONS).

Dosage Adjustment in Hypertensive Patients with Renal Impairment

The usual dose of enalapril is recommended for patients with a creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min (serum creatinine of up to approximately 3 mg/dL). For patients with creatinine clearance ≤ 30 mL/min (serum creatinine ≥ 3 mg/dL), the first dose is 2.5 mg once daily. The dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum of 40 mg daily.
* See WARNINGS, Anaphylactoid reactions during membrane exposure. † Dosage on nondialysis days should be adjusted depending on the blood pressure response.
Renal Status

Creatinine-Clearance mL/min

Initial Dose mg/day

Normal Renal Function

> 80 mL/min

5 mg

Mild Impairment

≤ 80 > 30 mL/min

5 mg

Moderate to Severe Impairment

≤ 30 mL/min

2.5 mg

Dialysis Patients*

2.5 mg on dialysis days†

Heart Failure

Enalapril maleate tablets are indicated for the treatment of symptomatic heart failure, usually in combination with diuretics and digitalis. In the placebo-controlled studies that demonstrated improved survival, patients were titrated as tolerated up to 40 mg, administered in two divided doses.

The recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg. The recommended dosing range is 2.5 to 20 mg given twice a day. Doses should be titrated upward, as tolerated, over a period of a few days or weeks. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials was 40 mg in divided doses.

After the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

Asymptomatic Left Ventricular Dysfunction

In the trial that demonstrated efficacy, patients were started on 2.5 mg twice daily and were titrated as tolerated to the targeted daily dose of 20 mg (in divided doses).

After the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Heart Failure and Renal Impairment or Hyponatremia

In patients with heart failure who have hyponatremia (serum sodium less than 130 mEq/L) or with serum creatinine greater than 1.6 mg/dL, therapy should be initiated at 2.5 mg daily under close medical supervision (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Heart Failure; WARNINGS; and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). The dose may be increased to 2.5 mg b.i.d., then 5 mg b.i.d. and higher as needed, usually at intervals of four days or more if at the time of dosage adjustment there is not excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renal function. The maximum daily dose is 40 mg.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.08 mg/kg (up to 5 mg) once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 0.58 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Pharmacology in Pediatric Patients).

Enalapril maleate tablets are not recommended in neonates and in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2, as no data are available.

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 1.0 mg/mL suspension)

Add 50 mL of Bicitra® to a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 20 mg tablets of enalapril maleate tablets and shake for at least 2 minutes. Let concentrate stand for 60 minutes. Following the 60 minute hold time, shake the concentrate for an additional minute. Add 150 mL of Ora-Sweet SF™ to the concentrate in the PET bottle and shake the suspension to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2 to 8°C (36 to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 30 days. Shake the suspension before each use.
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

2.1 Dosing Information

The recommended dose of naratriptan tablets is 1 mg or 2.5 mg.

If the migraine returns or if the patient has only partial response, the dose may be repeated once after 4 hours, for a maximum dose of 5 mg in a 24-hour period.

The safety of treating an average of more than 4 migraine attacks in a 30‑day period has not been established.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Patients With Renal Impairment

Naratriptan tablets are contraindicated in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance: <15 mL/min) because of decreased clearance of the drug [see Contraindications (4), Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

In patients with mild to moderate renal impairment, the maximum daily dose should not exceed 2.5 mg over a 24‑hour period and a 1-mg starting dose is recommended [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

Naratriptan tablets are contraindicated in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh grade C) because of decreased clearance [see Contraindications (4), Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

In patients with mild or moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh grade A or B), the maximum daily dose should not exceed 2.5 mg over a 24-hour period and a 1-mg starting dose is recommended [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Niacin

Niacin

Niacin Extended-Release Tablets should be taken at bedtime, after a low-fat snack, and doses should be individualized according to patient response. Therapy with Niacin Extended-Release Tablets must be initiated at 500 mg at bedtime in order to reduce the incidence and severity of side effects which may occur during early therapy. The recommended dose escalation is shown in Table 1 below.
Table 1. Recommended Dosing
Week(s)

Daily Dose

Niacin Extended-Release Tablets Dosage

INITIALTITRATION

1 to 4

500 mg

1 Niacin Extended-Release 500 mg Tablet at bedtime

SCHEDULE

5 to 8

1000 mg

1 Niacin Extended-Release 1000 mg Tablet or 2 Niacin Extended-Release 500 mg Tablets at bedtime

*

1500 mg

2 Niacin Extended-Release 750 mg Tablets or 3 Niacin Extended-Release 500 mg Tablets at bedtime

*

2000 mg

2 Niacin Extended-Release 1000 mg Tablets or 4 Niacin Extended-Release 500 mg Tablets at bedtime

* After Week 8, titrate to patient response and tolerance. If response to 1000 mg daily is inadequate, increase dose to 1500 mg daily; may subsequently increase dose to 2000 mg daily. Daily dose should not be increased more than 500 mg in a 4-week period, and doses above 2000 mg daily are not recommended. Women may respond at lower doses than men.

Maintenance Dose

The daily dosage of Niacin Extended-Release Tablets should not be increased by more than 500 mg in any 4-week period. The recommended maintenance dose is 1000 mg (two 500 mg tablets or one 1000 mg tablet) to 2000 mg (two 1000 mg tablets or four 500 mg tablets) once daily at bedtime. Doses greater than 2000 mg daily are not recommended. Women may respond at lower Niacin Extended-Release Tablet doses than men [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Single-dose bioavailability studies have demonstrated that two of the 500 mg and one of the 1000 mg tablet strengths are interchangeable but three of the 500 mg and two of the 750 mg tablet strengths are not interchangeable.

Flushing of the skin [see Adverse Reactions (6.1)] may be reduced in frequency or severity by pretreatment with aspirin (up to the recommended dose of 325 mg taken 30 minutes prior to Niacin Extended-Release Tablet dose). Tolerance to this flushing develops rapidly over the course of several weeks. Flushing, pruritus, and gastrointestinal distress are also greatly reduced by slowly increasing the dose of niacin and avoiding administration on an empty stomach. Concomitant alcoholic, hot drinks or spicy foods may increase the side effects of flushing and pruritus and should be avoided around the time of Niacin Extended-Release Tablet ingestion.

Equivalent doses of Niacin Extended-Release Tablets should not be substituted for sustained-release (modified-release, timed-release) niacin preparations or immediate-release (crystalline) niacin [see Warnings and Precautions (5)]. Patients previously receiving other niacin products should be started with the recommended Niacin Extended-Release Tablet titration schedule (see Table 1), and the dose should subsequently be individualized based on patient response.

If Niacin Extended-Release Tablet therapy is discontinued for an extended period, reinstitution of therapy should include a titration phase (see Table 1).

Niacin Extended-Release Tablets should be taken whole and should not be broken, crushed or chewed before swallowing.

Dosage in Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

Use of Niacin Extended-Release Tablets in patients with renal or hepatic impairment has not been studied. Niacin Extended-Release Tablets are contraindicated in patients with significant or unexplained hepatic dysfunction. Niacin Extended-Release Tablets should be used with caution in patients with renal impairment [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].
Tolterodine Tartrate

Tolterodine Tartrate

The initial recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate tablets is 2 mg twice daily. The dose may be lowered to 1 mg twice daily based on individual response and tolerability. For patients with significantly reduced hepatic or renal function or who are currently taking drugs that are potent inhibitors of CYP3A4, the recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate is 1 mg twice daily (see PRECAUTIONS, General, PRECAUTIONS, Reduced Hepatic and Renal Function and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).
Disopyramide Phosphate

Disopyramide Phosphate

The dosage of Disopyramide Phosphate must be individualized for each patient on the basis of response and tolerance. The usual adult dosage of Disopyramide Phosphate is 400 to 800 mg per day given in divided doses. The recommended dosage for most adults is 600 mg/day given in divided doses (150 mg every 6 hours). For patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds (50 kg), the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (100 mg every 6 hours). In the event of increased anticholinergic side effects, plasma levels of disopyramide should be monitored and the dose of the drug adjusted accordingly. A reduction of the dose by one third, from the recommended 600 mg/day to 400 mg/day, would be reasonable, without changing the dosing interval.

For patients with cardiomyopathy or possible cardiac decompensation, a loading dose, as discussed below, should not be given, and initial dosage should be limited to 100 mg every 6 to 8 hours. Subsequent dosage adjustments should be made gradually, with close monitoring for the possible development of hypotension and/or congestive heart failure (see WARNINGS).

For patients with moderate renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance greater than 40 mL/min) or hepatic insufficiency, the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (100 mg every 6 hours).

For patients with severe renal insufficiency (Ccr 40 mL/min or less), the recommended dosage regimen is 100 mg at intervals shown in the table below, with or without an initial loading dose of 150 mg.
DISOPYRAMIDE PHOSPHATE DOSAGE INTERVAL FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY Creatinine clearance (mL/min) 40 to 30 30 to 15 less than 15 Approximate maintenance – dosing interval q 8 hr q 12 hr q 24 hr
For patients in whom rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 300 mg of Disopyramide Phosphate (200 mg for patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds) is recommended, followed by the appropriate maintenance dosage. Therapeutic effects are usually attained 30 minutes to 3 hours after administration of a 300 mg loading dose. If there is no response or evidence of toxicity within 6 hours of the loading dose, 200 mg of Disopyramide Phosphate every 6 hours may be prescribed instead of the usual 150 mg. If there is no response to this dosage within 48 hours, either Disopyramide Phosphate should then be discontinued or the physician should consider hospitalizing the patient for careful monitoring while subsequent Disopyramide Phosphate doses of 250 mg or 300 mg every 6 hours are given. A limited number of patients with severe refractory ventricular tachycardia have tolerated daily doses of Disopyramide Phosphate up to 1600 mg per day (400 mg every 6 hours), resulting in disopyramide plasma levels up to 9 mcg/mL. If such treatment is warranted, it is essential that patients be hospitalized for close evaluation and continuous monitoring.

Transferring to Disopyramide Phosphate

The following dosage schedule based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data is suggested for transferring patients with normal renal function from either quinidine sulfate or procainamide therapy (Type 1 antiarrhythmic agents) to Disopyramide Phosphate therapy:

Disopyramide Phosphate should be started using the regular maintenance schedule without a loading dose 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate or 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide.

In patients in whom withdrawal of quinidine sulfate or procainamide is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, the physician should consider hospitalization of the patient.

Pediatric Dosage

Controlled clinical studies have not been conducted in pediatric patients; however, the following suggested dosage table is based on published clinical experience.

Total daily dosage should be divided and equal doses administered orally every 6 hours or at intervals according to individual patient needs. Disopyramide plasma levels and therapeutic response must be monitored closely. Patients should be hospitalized during the initial treatment period, and dose titration should start at the lower end of the ranges provided below.
SUGGESTED TOTAL DAILY DOSAGE* * Dosage is expressed in milligrams of disopyramide base. Since disopyramide phosphate 100 mg capsules contain 100 mg of disopyramide base, the pharmacist can readily prepare a 1 mg/mL to 10 mg/mL liquid suspension by adding the entire contents of disopyramide capsules to cherry syrup. (Prepare cherry syrup as follows: cherry juice, 475 mL; sucrose 800 g; alcohol 20 mL; purified water, a sufficient quantity to make 1000 mL.) The resulting suspension, when refrigerated, is stable for one month and should be thoroughly shaken before the measurement of each dose. The suspension should be dispensed in an amber glass bottle with a child-resistant closure. Age (years) Disopyramide (mg/kg body weight/day) Under 1 10 to 30 1 to 4 10 to 20 4 to 12 10 to 15 12 to 18 6 to 15
Enalapril Maleate And H...

Enalapril Maleate And Hydrochlorothiazide

Enalapril and hydrochlorothiazide are effective treatments for hypertension. The usual dosage range of enalapril is 10 to 40 mg per day administered in a single or two divided doses; hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 to 50 mg daily. The side effects (see WARNINGS) of enalapril are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of enalapril and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects but the addition of enalapril in clinical trials blunted the hypokalemia normally seen with diuretics. To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

Dose Titration Guided by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with either enalapril or hydrochlorothiazide monotherapy may be given enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 5 mg/12.5 mg or enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 10 mg/25 mg. Further increases of enalapril, hydrochlorothiazide or both depend on clinical response. The hydrochlorothiazide dose should generally not be increased until 2 to 3 weeks have elapsed. In general, patients do not require doses in excess of 20 mg of enalapril or 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide. The daily dosage should not exceed four tablets of enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide 5 mg/12.5 mg or two tablets of enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide 10 mg/25 mg.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Use in Renal Impairment

The usual regimens of therapy with enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide need not be adjusted as long as the patient’s creatinine clearance is > 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (serum creatinine approximately ≤ 3 mg/dL or 265 µmol/L). In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so enalapril maleate and hydrochlorothiazide is not recommended (see WARNINGS, General,Enalapril Maleate, Anaphylactoid and Possibly Related Reactions, Anaphylactoid Reactions During Membrane Exposure).
Amoxicillin

Amoxicillin

2.1 Dosing for Adult and Pediatric Patients > 3 Months of Age

Except for gonorrhea, treatment should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. It is recommended that there be at least 10 days’ treatment for any infection caused by Streptococcus pyogenes to prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever. In some infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.
Table 1. Dosing Recommendations for Adult and Pediatric Patients > 3 Months of Age * Dosing for infections caused by bacteria that are intermediate in their susceptibility to amoxicillin should follow the recommendations for severe infections. † The children’s dosage is intended for individuals whose weight is less than 40 kg. Children weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to the adult recommendations.
Infection

Severity*

Usual Adult Dose

Usual Dose for Children > 3 Months†

Ear/Nose/Throat

Skin/Skin Structure

Genitourinary Tract

Mild/Moderate

500 mg every 12 hours or

250 mg every 8 hours

25 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours

or

20 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 8 hours

Severe

875 mg every 12 hours or

500 mg every 8 hours

45 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours

or

40 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 8 hours

Lower Respiratory

Tract

Mild/Moderate or

Severe

875 mg every 12 hours or

500 mg every 8 hours

45 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 12 hours

or

40 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 8 hours

Gonorrhea

Acute, Uncomplicated Ano-Genital and Urethral Infections

3 grams as single oral dose

Prepubertal children:

50 mg/kg Amoxicillin For Oral Suspension, combined with 25 mg/kg probenecid as a single dose.

Note: since probenecid is contraindicated in children under 2 years, do not use this regimen in children under 2

years of age.

2.2 Dosing in Neonates and Infants Aged ≤ 12 Weeks (≤ 3 Months)

Treatment should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. It is recommended that there be at least 10 days’ treatment for any infection caused by Streptococcus pyogenes to prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever. Due to incompletely developed renal function affecting elimination of amoxicillin in this age group, the recommended upper dose of Amoxicillin for Oral Suspension is 30 mg/kg/day divided every 12 hours. There are currently no dosing recommendations for pediatric patients with impaired renal function.

2.3 Dosing for H. pylori Infection

Triple Therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 1 gram Amoxicillin for Oral Suspension, 500 mg clarithromycin, and 30 mg lansoprazole, all given twice daily (every 12 hours) for 14 days.

Dual Therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 1 gram Amoxicillin for Oral Suspension and 30 mg lansoprazole, each given three times daily (every 8 hours) for 14 days.

Please refer to clarithromycin and lansoprazole full prescribing information.

2.4 Dosing in Renal Impairment
• Patients with impaired renal function do not generally require a reduction in dose unless the impairment is severe. • Severely impaired patients with a glomerular filtration rate of < 30 mL/min. should not receive a 875 mg dose. • Patients with a glomerular filtration rate of 10 to 30 mL/min should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 12 hours, depending on the severity of the infection. • Patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 10 mL/min should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. • Hemodialysis patients should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. They should receive an additional dose both during and at the end of dialysis.
2.5 Directions for Mixing Oral Suspension

Tap bottle until all powder flows freely. Add approximately 1/3 of the total amount of water for reconstitution (see Table 2) and shake vigorously to wet powder. Add remainder of the water and again shake vigorously.
Table 2. Amount of Water for Mixing Oral Suspension
Strength

Bottle Size

Amount of Water

Required for Reconstitution

Oral Suspension 200 mg/5 mL

50 mL

39 mL

75 mL

57 mL

100 mL

75 mL

Each teaspoonful (5 mL) will contain 200 mg amoxicillin.

Oral Suspension 400 mg/5 mL

50 mL

35 mL

75 mL

51 mL

100 mL

67 mL

Each teaspoonful (5 mL) will contain 400 mg amoxicillin.

After reconstitution, the required amount of suspension should be placed directly on the child’s tongue for swallowing. Alternate means of administration are to add the required amount of suspension to formula, milk, fruit juice, water, ginger ale, or cold drinks. These preparations should then be taken immediately.

NOTE: SHAKE ORAL SUSPENSION WELL BEFORE USING. Keep bottle tightly closed. Any unused portion of the reconstituted suspension must be discarded after 14 days. Refrigeration is preferable, but not required.
Moexipril Hydrochloride...

Moexipril Hydrochloride And Hydrochlorothiazide

Moexipril and hydrochlorothiazide are effective treatments for hypertension. The recommended dosage range of moexipril is 7.5 to 30 mg daily, administered in a single or two divided doses one hour before meals, while hydrochlorothiazide is effective in a dosage of 12.5 to 50 mg daily.

The side effects (see WARNINGS) of moexipril are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent phenomena (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of moexipril and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects, but regimens in which moexipril is combined with low doses of hydrochlorothiazide produce minimal effects on serum potassium. In moexipril hydrochloride/hydrochlorothiazide controlled clinical trials, the average change in serum potassium was near zero in subjects who received 3.75 mg/6.25 mg or 7.5 mg/12.5 mg, but subjects who received 15 mg/12.5 mg or 15 mg/25 mg experienced a mild decrease in serum potassium, similar to that experienced by subjects who received the same dose of hydrochlorothiazide monotherapy. To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

Dose Titration Guided by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with either moexipril or hydrochlorothiazide monotherapy may be given moexipril hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 7.5 mg/12.5 mg, moexipril hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 15 mg/12.5 mg or moexipril hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 15 mg/25 mg one hour before a meal. Further increases of moexipril, hydrochlorothiazide or both depend on clinical response. The hydrochlorothiazide dose should generally not be increased until 2 to 3 weeks have elapsed.

Total daily doses above 30 mg/50 mg a day have not been studied in hypertensive patients. Patients whose blood pressures are adequately controlled with 25 mg of hydrochlorothiazide daily, but who experience significant potassium loss with this regimen, may achieve blood pressure control without electrolyte disturbance if they are switched to moexipril 3.75 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 6.25 mg (one-half of the moexipril hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablet, 7.5 mg/12.5 mg). For patients who experience an excessive reduction in blood pressure with moexipril hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 7.5 mg/12.5 mg, the physician may consider prescribing moexipril 3.75 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 6.25 mg.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated individual active ingredients.

Use in Renal Impairment

The usual dosage regimen of moexipril hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablets does not need to be adjusted as long as the patient’s creatinine clearance is > 40 mL/min/1.73 m2 (serum creatinine approximately ≤ 3 mg/dL or 265 µmol/L). In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so moexipril hydrochloride and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended (see PRECAUTIONS, General).
Trimethoprim

Trimethoprim

The usual oral adult dosage is 100 mg of trimethoprim every 12 hours or 200 mg of trimethoprim every 24 hours, each for 10 days. The use of trimethoprim in patients with a creatinine clearance of less than 15 mL/min is not recommended. For patients with a creatinine clearance of 15 to 30 mL/min, the dose should be 50 mg every 12 hours.
Nabumetone

Nabumetone

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of nabumetone tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use nabumetone tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with nabumetone tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Osteoarthritis and Rheumatoid Arthritis

The recommended starting dose is 1,000 mg taken as a single dose with or without food. Some patients may obtain more symptomatic relief from 1,500 mg to 2,000 mg per day. Nabumetone tablets can be given in either a single or twice-daily dose. Dosages greater than 2,000 mg per day have not been studied. The lowest effective dose should be used for chronic treatment (see WARNINGS, Renal Effects). Patients weighing under 50 kg may be less likely to require dosages beyond 1,000 mg; therefore, after observing the response to initial therapy, the dose should be adjusted to meet individual patients’ requirements.
Anti-aging Eye Sunscree...

Anti-aging Eye Sunscreen Broad Spectrum Spf 15

Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, 0.4 mg once-daily is recommended as the dose for the treatment of the signs and symptoms of BPH. It should be administered approximately one-half hour following the same meal each day. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules should not be crushed, chewed or opened.

For those patients who fail to respond to the 0.4 mg dose after 2 to 4 weeks of dosing, the dose of tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules can be increased to 0.8 mg once-daily. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, 0.4 mg should not be used in combination with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (e.g., ketoconazole) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

If tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules administration is discontinued or interrupted for several days at either the 0.4 mg or 0.8 mg dose, therapy should be started again with the 0.4 mg once-daily dose.
Moexipril Hydrochloride...

Moexipril Hydrochloride

Hypertension

The recommended initial dose of moexipril hydrochloride tablets in patients not receiving diuretics is 7.5 mg, one hour prior to meals, once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The antihypertensive effect of moexipril hydrochloride tablets may diminish towards the end of the dosing interval. Blood pressure should, therefore, be measured just prior to dosing to determine whether satisfactory blood pressure control is obtained. If control is not adequate, increased dose or divided dosing can be tried. The recommended dose range is 7.5 to 30 mg daily, administered in one or two divided doses one hour before meals. Total daily doses above 60 mg a day have not been studied in hypertensive patients.

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension may occasionally occur following the initial dose of moexipril hydrochloride tablets. The diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued for 2 to 3 days before therapy with moexipril hydrochloride tablets is begun, to reduce the likelihood of hypotension (see WARNINGS). If the patient’s blood pressure is not controlled with moexipril hydrochloride tablets alone, diuretic therapy may then be reinstituted. If diuretic therapy cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 3.75 mg of moexipril hydrochloride tablets should be used with medical supervision until blood pressure has stabilized (see WARNINGSand PRECAUTIONS,Drug Interactions).

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

For patients with a creatinine clearance ≤ 40 mL/min/1.73 m2, an initial dose of 3.75 mg once daily should be given cautiously. Doses may be titrated upward to a maximum daily dose of 15 mg.
Nystatin

Nystatin

The usual therapeutic dosage is one to two tablets (500,000 to 1,000,000 units nystatin) three times daily. Treatment should generally be continued for at least 48 hours after clinical cure to prevent relapse.
Quinidine Sulfate

Quinidine Sulfate

Conversion of Atrial Fibrillation/Flutter to Sinus Rhythm

Especially in patients with known structural heart disease or other risk factors for toxicity, initiation or dose-adjustment of treatment with quinidine sulfate should generally be performed in a setting where facilities and personnel for monitoring and resuscitation are continuously available. Patients with symptomatic atrial fibrillation/flutter should be treated with quinidine sulfate only after ventricular rate control (e.g., with digitalis or β-blockers) has failed to provide satisfactory control of symptoms. Adequate trials have not identified an optimal regimen of quinidine sulfate for conversion of atrial fibrillation/flutter to sinus rhythm. Therapy with quinidine sulfate should begin with one tablet (300 mg; 249 mg of quinidine base) every 8 to 12 hours. If this regimen is well tolerated, if the serum quinidine level is still well within the laboratory’s therapeutic range, and if this regimen has not resulted in conversion, then the dose may be cautiously raised. If, at any point during administration, the QRS complex widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration; the QTc interval widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration and is then longer than 500 ms; P waves disappear; or the patient develops significant tachycardia, symptomatic bradycardia, or hypotension, then quinidine sulfate is discontinued, and other means of conversion (e.g., direct-current cardioversion) are considered.

Reduction of Frequency of Relapse into Atrial Fibrillation/Flutter

In a patient with a history of frequent symptomatic episodes of atrial fibrillation/flutter, the goal of therapy with quinidine sulfate should be an increase in the average time between episodes. In most patients, the tachyarrhythmia will recur during therapy with quinidine sulfate, and a single recurrence should not be interpreted as therapeutic failure.

Especially in patients with known structural heart disease or other risk factors for toxicity, initiation or dose-adjustment of treatment with quinidine sulfate should generally be performed in a setting where facilities and personnel for monitoring and resuscitation are continuously available. Monitoring should be continued for two or three days after initiation of the regimen on which the patient will be discharged.

Therapy with quinidine sulfate should begin with one tablet (300 mg; 249 mg of quinidine base) every eight to twelve hours. If this regimen is well tolerated, if the serum quinidine level is still well within the laboratory’s therapeutic range, and if the average time between arrhythmic episodes has not been satisfactorily increased, then the dose may be cautiously raised. The total daily dosage should be reduced if the QRS complex widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration; the QTc interval widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration and is then longer than 500 ms; P waves disappear; or the patient develops significant tachycardia, symptomatic bradycardia, or hypotension.

Suppression of Ventricular Arrhythmias

Dosing regimens for the use of quinidine sulfate in suppressing life-threatening ventricular arrhythmias have not been adequately studied. Described regimens have generally been similar to the regimen described just above for the prophylaxis of symptomatic atrial fibrillation/flutter. Where possible, therapy should be guided by the results of programmed electrical stimulation and/or Holter monitoring with exercise.
Neomycin Sulfate

Neomycin Sulfate

To minimize the risk of toxicity, use the lowest possible dose and the shortest possible treatment period to control the condition. Treatment for periods longer than two weeks is not recommended.

Hepatic Coma

For use as an adjunct in the management of hepatic coma, the recommended dose is 4 to 12 grams per day given in the following regimen:
Withdraw protein from diet. Avoid use of diuretic agents. Give supportive therapy, including blood products, as indicated. Give neomycin sulfate tablets in doses of 4 to 12 grams of neomycin sulfate per day (eight to 24 tablets) in divided doses. Treatment should be continued over a period of five to six days, during which time protein should be returned incrementally to the diet. If less potentially toxic drugs cannot be used for chronic hepatic insufficiency, neomycin in doses of up to four grams daily (eight tablets per day) may be necessary. The risk for the development of neomycin-induced toxicity progressively increases when treatment must be extended to preserve the life of a patient with hepatic encephalopathy who has failed to fully respond. Frequent periodic monitoring of these patients to ascertain the presence of drug toxicity is mandatory (see PRECAUTIONS). Also, neomycin serum concentrations should be monitored to avoid potentially toxic levels. The benefits to the patient should be weighed against the risks of nephrotoxicity, permanent ototoxicity and neuromuscular blockade following the accumulation of neomycin in the tissues.
Preoperative Prophylaxis for Elective Colorectal Surgery

Listed below is an example of a recommended bowel preparation regimen. A proposed surgery time of 8:00 a.m. has been used.

Pre-op Day 3: Minimum residue or clear liquid diet. Bisacodyl, 1 tablet orally at 6:00 p.m.

Pre-op Day 2: Minimum residue or clear liquid diet. Magnesium sulfate, 30 mL, 50% solution (15 g) orally at 10:00 a.m., 2:00 p.m., and 6:00 p.m. Enema at 7:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m.

Pre-op Day 1: Clear liquid diet. Supplemental (IV) fluids as needed. Magnesium sulfate, 30 mL, 50% solution (15 g) orally at 10:00 a.m., and 2:00 p.m. Neomycin sulfate (1 g) and erythromycin base (1 g) orally at 1:00 p.m., 2:00 p.m. and 11:00 p.m. No enema.

Day of Operation: Patient evacuates rectum at 6:30 a.m. for scheduled operation at 8:00 a.m.
Rexall Pain Relief

Rexall Pain Relief

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Quetiapine tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.2 Recommended Dosing

The recommended initial dose, titration, dose range and maximum quetiapine tablets dose for each approved indication is displayed in Table 1. After initial dosing, adjustments can be made upwards or downwards, if necessary, depending upon the clinical response and tolerability of the patient [see Clinical Studies (14.1 and 14.2)].
Table 1: Recommended Dosing for Quetiapine Tablets * N/A Not applicable
Indication

Initial Dose and Titration

Recommended

Dose

Maximum Dose

Schizophrenia-Adults

Day 1: 25 mg twice daily.

Increase in increments of 25 mg to 50 mg divided two or three times on Days 2 and 3 to range of 300 to 400 mg by Day 4.

Further adjustments can be made in

increments of 25 to 50 mg twice a day, in intervals of not less than 2 days.

150 to 750

mg/day

750 mg/day

Schizophrenia-

Adolescents (13 to 17 years)

Day 1: 25 mg twice daily.

Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg.

Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.

Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.

Day 5: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.

Further adjustments should be in increments no greater than 100 mg/day within the recommended dose range of 400 to 800 mg/day.

Based on response and tolerability, may be administered three times daily.

400 to 800 mg/day

800 mg/day

Schizophrenia-

Maintenance

N/A*

400 to 800

mg/day

800 mg/day

Bipolar Mania- Adults Monotherapy or as an adjunct to lithium or divalproex

Day 1: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg.

Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.

Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.

Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.

Further dosage adjustments up to 800 mg/day by Day 6 should be in increments of no greater than 200 mg/day.

400 to 800

mg/day

800 mg/day

Bipolar Mania-Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years),

Monotherapy

Day 1: 25 mg twice daily.

Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg.

Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.

Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.

Day 5: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.

Further adjustments should be in increments no greater than 100 mg/day within the recommended dose range of 400 to 600 mg/day.

Based on response and tolerability, may be administered three times daily.

400 to 600

mg/day

600 mg/day

Bipolar Depression-

Adults

Administer once daily at bedtime.

Day 1: 50 mg

Day 2: 100 mg

Day 3: 200 mg

Day 4: 300 mg

300 mg/day

300 mg/day

Bipolar I Disorder

Maintenance Therapy- Adults

Administer twice daily totaling 400 to 800 mg/day as adjunct to lithium or divalproex.

Generally, in the maintenance phase, patients continued on the same dose on which they were stabilized.

400 to 800

mg/day

800 mg/day

Maintenance Treatment for Schizophrenia and Bipolar I Disorder

Maintenance Treatment—Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

2.3 Dose Modifications in Elderly Patients

Consideration should be given to a slower rate of dose titration and a lower target dose in the elderly and in patients who are debilitated or who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Elderly patients should be started on quetiapine tablets 50 mg/day and the dose can be increased in increments of 50 mg/day depending on the clinical response and tolerability of the individual patient.

2.4 Dose Modifications in Hepatically Impaired Patients

Patients with hepatic impairment should be started on 25 mg/day. The dose should be increased daily in increments of 25 mg/day to 50 mg/day to an effective dose, depending on the clinical response and tolerability of the patient.

2.5 Dose Modifications when used with CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Quetiapine tablets dose should be reduced to one sixth of original dose when co-medicated with a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor (e.g., ketoconazole, itraconazole, indinavir, ritonavir, nefazodone, etc.). When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine tablets should be increased by 6 fold [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.6 Dose Modifications when used with CYP3A4 Inducers

Quetiapine tablets dose should be increased up to 5 fold of the original dose when used in combination with a chronic treatment (e.g., greater than 7 to 14 days) of a potent CYP3A4 inducer (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, rifampin, avasimibe, St. John’s wort etc.). The dose should be titrated based on the clinical response and tolerability of the individual patient. When the CYP3A4 inducer is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine tablets should be reduced to the original level within 7 to 14 days [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.7 Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address re-initiation of treatment, it is recommended that when restarting therapy of patients who have been off quetiapine tablets for more than one week, the initial dosing schedule should be followed. When restarting patients who have been off quetiapine tablets for less than one week, gradual dose escalation may not be required and the maintenance dose may be reinitiated.

2.8 Switching from Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from antipsychotics to quetiapine tablets, or concerning concomitant administration with antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized. When switching patients with schizophrenia from depot antipsychotics, if medically appropriate, initiate quetiapine tablets therapy in place of the next scheduled injection. The need for continuing existing EPS medication should be re-evaluated periodically.
Glyburide

Glyburide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with Glyburide or any other hypoglycemic agent. The patient's fasting blood glucose must be measured periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Periodic glycosylated hemoglobin determinations should be performed.

Short-term administration of Glyburide may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

1. Usual Starting Dose

The usual starting dose of Glyburide as initial therapy is 2.5 to 5 mg daily, administered with breakfast or the first main meal. Those patients who may be more sensitive to hypoglycemic drugs should be started at 1.25 mg daily. (See PRECAUTIONS Section for patients at increased risk). Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary and drug regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to therapy.

Transfer of patients from other oral antidiabetic regimens to Glyburide should be done conservatively and the initial daily dose should be 2.5 to 5 mg. When transferring patients from oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide, to Glyburide, no transition period and no initial priming dose is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, particular care should be exercised during the first two weeks because the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body and subsequent overlapping drug effects may provoke hypoglycemia.

Bioavailability studies have demonstrated that Glynase®1 PresTab®1 Tablets 3 mg are not bioequivalent to Glyburide tablets USP 5 mg. Therefore, these products are not substitutable and patients should be retitrated if transferred.

Some Type II diabetic patients being treated with insulin may respond satisfactorily to Glyburide. If the insulin dose is less than 20 units daily, substitution of Glyburide 2.5 to 5 mg as a single daily dose may be tried. If the insulin dose is between 20 and 40 units daily, the patient may be placed directly on Glyburide 5 mg daily as a single dose. If the insulin dose is more than 40 units daily, a transition period is required for conversion to Glyburide. In these patients, insulin dosage is decreased by 50% and Glyburide 5 mg daily is started. Please refer to Usual Maintenance Dose for further explanation.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glyburide, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glyburide is reduced. Therefore, glyburide should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.
1 Trademarks of their respective owners, not affiliated with sanofi-aventis.
2. Usual Maintenance Dose

The usual maintenance dose is in the range of 1.25 to 20 mg daily, which may be given as a single dose or in divided doses (See Dosage Interval Section). Dosage increases should be made in increments of no more than 2.5 mg at weekly intervals based upon the patient's blood glucose response.

No exact dosage relationship exists between Glyburide and the other oral hypoglycemic agents. Although patients may be transferred from the maximum dose of other sulfonylureas, the maximum starting dose of 5 mg of Glyburide should be observed. A maintenance dose of 5 mg Glyburide provides approximately the same degree of blood glucose control as 250 to 375 mg chlorpropamide, 250 to 375 mg tolazamide, 500 to 750 mg acetohexamide, or 1000 to 1500 mg tolbutamide.

When transferring patients receiving more than 40 units of insulin daily, they may be started on a daily dose of Glyburide 5 mg concomitantly with a 50% reduction in insulin dose. Progressive withdrawal of insulin and increase of Glyburide in increments of 1.25 to 2.5 mg every 2 to 10 days is then carried out. During this conversion period when both insulin and Glyburide are being used, hypoglycemia may rarely occur. During insulin withdrawal, patients should self-test their blood for glucose and their urine for acetone at least 3 times daily and report results to their physician. Self-testing of urinary glucose is a less desirable alternative. The appearance of persistent acetonuria with glycosuria indicates that the patient is a Type I diabetic who requires insulin therapy.

3. Maximum Dose

Daily doses of more than 20 mg are not recommended.

4. Dosage Interval

Once-a-day therapy is usually satisfactory, based upon usual meal patterns and a 10 hour half-life of Glyburide. Some patients, particularly those receiving more than 10 mg daily, may have a more satisfactory response with twice-a-day dosage

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions. (See PRECAUTIONS Section.)
Nadolol

Nadolol

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. NADOLOL TABLETS MAY BE ADMINISTERED WITHOUT REGARD TO MEALS.

Angina Pectoris

The usual initial dose is 40 mg nadolol tablets once daily. Dosage may be gradually increased in 40 to 80 mg increments at 3 to 7 day intervals until optimum clinical response is obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The usual maintenance dose is 40 or 80 mg administered once daily. Doses up to 160 or 240 mg administered once daily may be needed.

The usefulness and safety in angina pectoris of dosage exceeding 240 mg per day have not been established. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of one to two weeks (see WARNINGS).

Hypertension

The usual initial dose is 40 mg nadolol tablets once daily, whether it is used alone or in addition to diuretic therapy. Dosage may be gradually increased in 40 to 80 mg increments until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. The usual maintenance dose is 40 or 80 mg administered once daily. Doses up to 240 or 320 mg administered once daily may be needed.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Failure

Absorbed nadolol is excreted principally by the kidneys and, although nonrenal elimination does occur, dosage adjustments are necessary in patients with renal impairment. The following dose intervals are recommended:
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Dosage Interval (hours) > 50 24 31 to 50 24 to 36 10 to 30 24 to 48 < 10 40 to 60
Sirturo

Sirturo

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac potassium tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac potassium tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac potassium tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

For treatment of pain or primary dysmenorrhea the recommended dosage is 50 mg t.i.d. With experience, physicians may find that in some patients an initial dose of 100 mg of diclofenac potassium tablets, followed by 50 mg doses, will provide better relief.

For the relief of osteoarthritis the recommended dosage is 100 to 150 mg/day in divided doses, 50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis the recommended dosage is 150 to 200 mg/day in divided doses, 50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.

Different formulations of diclofenac [diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets; diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets; diclofenac potassium tablets] are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Fluvastatin

Fluvastatin

2.1 General Dosing Information

Dose range: 20 mg to 80 mg/day.

Fluvastatin capsules USP can be administered orally as a single dose, with or without food.

Do not open fluvastatin capsules USP prior to administration.

Do not take two fluvastatin capsules USP, 40 mg at one time.

Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of ≥ 25%, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg as one capsule in the evening, or 80 mg in divided doses of the 40 mg capsule given twice daily. For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of < 25% a starting dose of 20 mg may be used.

2.2 Adult Patients With Hypercholesterolemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia

Adult patients can be started on fluvastatin capsules USP. The recommended starting dose for fluvastatin capsules USP is one 40 mg capsule in the evening, or one fluvastatin capsule USP, 40 mg twice daily. Do not take two fluvastatin capsules USP, 40 mg at one time.

2.3 Pediatric Patients (10 to 16 Years of Age) With Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended starting dose is one fluvastatin capsule USP, 20 mg. Dose adjustments, up to a maximum daily dose administered as fluvastatin capsules USP, 40 mg twice daily should be made at 6 week intervals. Doses should be individualized according to the goal of therapy [see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines and CLINICAL STUDIES (14)]1.

1 National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics. 89(3):495-501. 1992.

2.4 Use With Cyclosporine

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg b.i.d. fluvastatin capsules USP in patients taking cyclosporine [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.5 Use With Fluconazole

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg b.i.d. fluvastatin capsules USP in patients taking fluconazole [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].
Ipratropium Bromide And...

Ipratropium Bromide And Albuterol Sulfate Solution

The recommended dose of ipratropium bromide and albuterol sulfate inhalation solution is one 3 mL vial administered 4 times per day via nebulization with up to 2 additional 3 mL doses allowed per day, if needed. Safety and efficacy of additional doses or increased frequency of administration of ipratropium bromide and albuterol sulfate inhalation solution beyond these guidelines has not been studied and the safety and efficacy of extra doses of albuterol sulfate or ipratropium bromide in addition to the recommended doses of ipratropium bromide and albuterol sulfate inhalation solution have not been studied.

The use of ipratropium bromide and albuterol sulfate inhalation solution can be continued as medically indicated to control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. If a previously effective regimen fails to provide the usual relief, medical advice should be sought immediately, as this is often a sign of worsening COPD, which would require reassessment of therapy.

A nebulizer (with face mask or mouthpiece) connected to a compressor was used to deliver ipratropium bromide and albuterol sulfate inhalation solution to each patient in one U.S. clinical study. The safety and efficacy of ipratropium bromide and albuterol sulfate inhalation solution delivered by other nebulizers and compressors have not been established.

Ipratropium bromide and albuterol sulfate inhalation solution should be administered via jet nebulizer connected to an air compressor with an adequate air flow, equipped with a mouthpiece or suitable face mask.
Tolmetin Sodium

Tolmetin Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of tolmetin sodium capsules and other treatment options before deciding to use tolmetin sodium capsules. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with tolmetin sodium capsules, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis or osteoarthritis, the recommended starting dose for adults is 400 mg three times daily (1200 mg daily), preferably including a dose on arising and a dose at bedtime. To achieve optimal therapeutic effect the dose should be adjusted according to the patient’s response after one or two weeks. Control is usually achieved at doses of 600 to 1800 mg daily in divided doses (generally t.i.d.). Doses larger than 1800 mg/day have not been studied and are not recommended.

For the relief of juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended starting dose for pediatric patients (2 years and older) is 20 mg/kg/day in divided doses (t.i.d. or q.i.d.). When control has been achieved, the usual dose ranges from 15 to 30 mg/kg/day. Doses higher than 30 mg/kg/day have not been studied, and, therefore, are not recommended.

A therapeutic response to tolmetin sodium can be expected in a few days to a week. Progressive improvement can be anticipated during succeeding weeks of therapy. If gastrointestinal symptoms occur, tolmetin sodium capsules can be administered with antacids other than sodium bicarbonate. Tolmetin sodium capsule bioavailability and pharmacokinetics are not significantly affected by acute or chronic administration of magnesium and aluminum hydroxides; however, bioavailability is affected by food or milk (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug/Food Interactions).
Oxybutynin Chloride

Oxybutynin Chloride

Oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole with the aid of liquids, and must not be chewed, divided, or crushed.

Oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets may be administered with or without food.

2.1 Adults

The recommended starting dose of oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets is 5 or 10 mg once daily at approximately the same time each day. Dosage may be adjusted in 5-mg increments to achieve a balance of efficacy and tolerability (up to a maximum of 30 mg/day). In general, dosage adjustment may proceed at approximately weekly intervals.

2.2 Pediatric Patients Aged 6 Years of Age and Older

The recommended starting dose of oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets is 5 mg once daily at approximately the same time each day. Dosage may be adjusted in 5-mg increments to achieve a balance of efficacy and tolerability (up to a maximum of 20 mg/day).
Dicyclomine Hydrochlori...

Dicyclomine Hydrochloride

Methylphenidate capsules (CD) are administered once daily in the morning, before breakfast.

Methylphenidate capsules (CD) may be swallowed whole with the aid of liquids, or alternatively, the capsule may be opened and the capsule contents sprinkled onto a small amount (tablespoon) of applesauce and given immediately, and not stored for future use. Drinking some fluids, e.g., water, should follow the intake of the sprinkles with applesauce. The capsules and the capsule contents must not be crushed or chewed (see PRECAUTIONS, Information for Patients). Patients should be advised to avoid alcohol while taking methylphenidate capsules (CD).

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

Initial Treatment

The recommended starting dose of methylphenidate capsules (CD) is 20 mg once daily. Dosage may be adjusted in weekly 10 to 20 mg increments to a maximum of 60 mg/day taken once daily in the morning, depending upon tolerability and degree of efficacy observed. Daily dosage above 60 mg is not recommended.

Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with methylphenidate capsules (CD). It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use methylphenidate capsules (CD) for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with trials off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a one-month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Glipizide And Metformin...

Glipizide And Metformin Hydrochloride

General Considerations

Dosage of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily dose of 20 mg glipizide/2000 mg metformin. Glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP should be given with meals and should be initiated at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation as described below, in order to avoid hypoglycemia (largely due to glipizide), reduce GI side effects (largely due to metformin), and permit determination of the minimum effective dose for adequate control of blood glucose for the individual patient.

With initial treatment and during dose titration, appropriate blood glucose monitoring should be used to determine the therapeutic response to glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP and to identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, HbA1c should be measured at intervals of approximately 3 months to assess the effectiveness of therapy. The therapeutic goal in all patients with type 2 diabetes is to decrease FPG, PPG, and HbA1c to normal or as near normal as possible. Ideally, the response to therapy should be evaluated using HbA1c, which is a better indicator of long-term glycemic control than FPG alone.

No studies have been performed specifically examining the safety and efficacy of switching to glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablet therapy in patients taking concomitant glipizide (or other sulfonylurea) plus metformin. Changes in glycemic control may occur in such patients, with either hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia possible. Any change in therapy of type 2 diabetes should be undertaken with care and appropriate monitoring.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glipizide ER, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glipizide is reduced. Therefore, glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.

Glipizide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets USP in Patients With Inadequate Glycemic Control on Diet and Exercise Alone

For patients with type 2 diabetes whose hyperglycemia cannot be satisfactorily managed with diet and exercise alone, the recommended starting dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP is 2.5 mg/250 mg once a day with a meal. For patients whose FPG is 280 mg/dL to 320 mg/dL a starting dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP, 2.5 mg/500 mg twice daily should be considered. The efficacy of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP in patients whose FPG exceeds 320 mg/dL has not been established. Dosage increases to achieve adequate glycemic control should be made in increments of 1 tablet per day every 2 weeks up to maximum of 10 mg/1000 mg or 10 mg/2000 mg glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP per day given in divided doses. In clinical trials of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP as initial therapy, there was no experience with total daily doses > 10 mg/2000 mg per day.

Glipizide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets USP in Patients With Inadequate Glycemic Control on a Sulfonylurea and/or Metformin

For patients not adequately controlled on either glipizide (or another sulfonylurea) or metformin alone, the recommended starting dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP is 2.5 mg/500 mg or 5 mg/500 mg twice daily with the morning and evening meals. In order to avoid hypoglycemia, the starting dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP should not exceed the daily doses of glipizide or metformin already being taken. The daily dose should be titrated in increments of no more than 5 mg/500 mg up to the minimum effective dose to achieve adequate control of blood glucose or to a maximum dose of 20 mg/2000 mg per day.

Patients previously treated with combination therapy of glipizide (or another sulfonylurea) plus metformin may be switched to glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP, 2.5 mg/500 mg or 5 mg/500 mg; the starting dose should not exceed the daily dose of glipizide (or equivalent dose of another sulfonylurea) and metformin already being taken. The decision to switch to the nearest equivalent dose or to titrate should be based on clinical judgment. Patients should be monitored closely for signs and symptoms of hypoglycemia following such a switch and the dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP should be titrated as described above to achieve adequate control of blood glucose.

Specific Patient Populations

Glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP are not recommended for use during pregnancy or for use in pediatric patients. The initial and maintenance dosing of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment requires a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of glipizide and metformin hydrochloride tablets USP to avoid the risk of hypoglycemia. Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of metformin-associated lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly (see WARNINGS).
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Hypertension

Individualize the dosage of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets. Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets is 100 mg daily in single or divided doses, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. Increase the dosage at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. The effective dosage range of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets is 100 to 450 mg per day. Dosages above 450 mg per day have not been studied. While once-daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, lower doses (especially 100 mg) may not maintain a full effect at the end of the 24 hour period, and larger or more frequent daily doses may be required. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. Beta1 selectivity diminishes as the dose of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets is increased.

Angina Pectoris

The dosage of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets should be individualized. Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets is 100 mg daily, given in two divided doses. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The effective dosage range of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets is 100 to 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, gradually decrease the dosage over a period of 1 to 2 weeks (see WARNINGS).

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, initiate treatment with Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets as soon as possible after the patient's arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient's hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Begin treatment in this early phase with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; give the injections at approximately 2 minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol tartrate, monitor blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), initiate Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continue for 48 hours. Thereafter, the maintenance dosage is 100 mg twice daily (see Late Treatment below).

Start patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose on Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, discontinue Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets (see WARNINGS).

Late Treatment

Start patients with contraindications to treatment during the early phase of suspected or definite myocardial infarction, patients who appear not to tolerate the full early treatment, and patients in whom the physician wishes to delay therapy for any other reason on Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets, 100 mg twice daily, as soon as their clinical condition allows. Continue therapy for at least 3 months. Although the efficacy of metoprolol tartrate beyond 3 months has not been conclusively established, data from studies with other beta blockers suggest that treatment should be continued for 1 to 3 years.

Special Populations

Pediatric Patients

No pediatric studies have been performed. The safety and efficacy of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets in pediatric patients have not been established.

Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment of Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets is required in patients with renal impairment.

Hepatic Impairment

Metoprolol tartrate blood levels are likely to increase substantially in patients with hepatic impairment. Therefore, Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets should be initiated at low doses with cautious gradual dose titration according to clinical response.

Geriatric Patients (> 65 Years)

In general, use a low initial starting dose in elderly patients given their greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy.

Method of Administration

For oral treatment, the tablets should be swallowed un-chewed with a glass of water. Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets should always be taken in standardized relation with meals. If the physician asks the patient to take Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets either before breakfast or with breakfast, then the patient should continue taking Metoprolol Tartrate Tablets with the same schedule during the course of therapy.
Ketoprofen

Ketoprofen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketoprofen capsules and other treatment options before deciding to use ketoprofen capsules. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with ketoprofen capsules, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Concomitant use of ketoprofen capsules and ketoprofen extended-release capsules is not recommended.

If minor side effects appear, they may disappear at a lower dose which may still have an adequate therapeutic effect. If well tolerated but not optimally effective, the dosage may be increased. Individual patients may show a better response to 300 mg of ketoprofen capsules daily as compared to 200 mg, although in well-controlled clinical trials patients on 300 mg did not show greater mean effectiveness. They did, however, show an increased frequency of upper- and lower-GI distress and headaches. It is of interest that women also had an increased frequency of these adverse effects compared to men. When treating patients with 300 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefit to offset potential increased risk.

In patients with mildly impaired renal function, the maximum recommended total daily dose of ketoprofen capsules is 150 mg. In patients with a more severe renal impairment (GFR less than 25 mL/min/1.73 m2 or end-stage renal impairment), the maximum total daily dose of ketoprofen capsules should not exceed 100 mg.

In elderly patients, renal function may be reduced with apparently normal serum creatinine and/or BUN levels. Therefore, it is recommended that the initial dosage of ketoprofen capsules should be reduced for patients over 75 years of age (see Geriatric Use).

It is recommended that for patients with impaired liver function and serum albumin concentration less than 3.5 g/dL, the maximum initial total daily dose of ketoprofen capsules should be 100 mg. All patients with metabolic impairment, particularly those with both hypoalbuminemia and reduced renal function, may have increased levels of free (biologically active) ketoprofen and should be closely monitored. The dosage may be increased to the range recommended for the general population, if necessary, only after good individual tolerance has been ascertained.

Because hypoalbuminemia and reduced renal function both increase the fraction of free drug (biologically active form), patients who have both conditions may be at greater risk of adverse effects. Therefore, it is recommended that such patients also be started on lower doses of ketoprofen capsules and closely monitored.

Rheumatoid Arthritis and Osteoarthritis

The recommended starting dose of ketoprofen capsules in otherwise healthy patients is 75 mg three times or 50 mg four times a day. Smaller doses of ketoprofen capsules should be utilized initially in small individuals or in debilitated or elderly patients. The recommended maximum daily dose of ketoprofen capsules is 300 mg/day.

Dosages higher than 300 mg/day of ketoprofen capsules are not recommended because they have not been studied. Concomitant use of ketoprofen capsules and ketoprofen extended-release capsules is not recommended. Relatively smaller people may need smaller doses.

As with other non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, the predominant adverse effects of ketoprofen are gastrointestinal. To attempt to minimize these effects, physicians may wish to prescribe that ketoprofen capsules be taken with antacids, food, or milk. Although food delays the absorption of ketoprofen capsules (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), in most of the clinical trials ketoprofen was taken with food or milk.

Physicians may want to make specific recommendations to patients about when they should take ketoprofen capsules in relation to food and/or what patients should do if they experience minor GI symptoms associated with ketoprofen capsules.

Management of Pain and Dysmenorrhea

The usual dose of ketoprofen capsules recommended for mild-to-moderate pain and dysmenorrhea is 25 to 50 mg every 6 to 8 hours as necessary. A smaller dose should be utilized initially in small individuals, in debilitated or elderly patients, or in patients with renal or liver disease (see PRECAUTIONS). A larger dose may be tried if the patient’s response to a previous dose was less than satisfactory, but doses above 75 mg have not been shown to give added analgesia. Daily doses above 300 mg are not recommended because they have not been adequately studied. Because of its typical non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug-side-effect profile, including as its principal adverse effect GI side effects (see WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS), higher doses of ketoprofen capsules should be used with caution and patients receiving them observed carefully.
Imiquimod

Imiquimod

The application frequency for imiquimod cream is different for each indication.

Imiquimod is not for oral, ophthalmic, or intravaginal use.

2.1 Actinic Keratosis

Imiquimod cream should be applied 2 times per week for a full 16 weeks to a defined treatment area on the face or scalp (but not both concurrently). The treatment area is defined as one contiguous area of approximately 25 cm2 (e.g., 5 cm x 5 cm) on the face (e.g., forehead or one cheek) or on the scalp. Examples of 2 times per week application schedules are Monday and Thursday, or Tuesday and Friday. Imiquimod cream should be applied to the entire treatment area and rubbed in until the cream is no longer visible. No more than one packet of imiquimod cream should be applied to the contiguous treatment area at each application. Imiquimod cream should be applied prior to normal sleeping hours and left on the skin for approximately 8 hours, after which time the cream should be removed by washing the area with mild soap and water. The prescriber should demonstrate the proper application technique to maximize the benefit of imiquimod cream therapy.

It is recommended that patients wash their hands before and after applying imiquimod cream. Before applying the cream, the patient should wash the treatment area with mild soap and water and allow the area to dry thoroughly (at least 10 minutes).

Contact with the eyes, lips and nostrils should be avoided.

Local skin reactions in the treatment area are common [see Adverse Reactions (6.1, 6.5)]. A rest period of several days may be taken if required by the patient's discomfort or severity of the local skin reaction. However, the treatment period should not be extended beyond 16 weeks due to missed doses or rest periods. Response to treatment cannot be adequately assessed until resolution of local skin reactions. Lesions that do not respond to treatment should be carefully re-evaluated and management reconsidered.

Imiquimod cream is packaged in single-use packets, with 24 packets supplied per box. Patients should be prescribed no more than 36 packets for the 16 week treatment period. Unused packets should be discarded. Partially-used packets should be discarded and not reused.

2.3 External Genital Warts

Imiquimod cream should be applied 3 times per week to external genital/perianal warts. Imiquimod cream treatment should continue until there is total clearance of the genital/perianal warts or for a maximum of 16 weeks. Examples of 3 times per week application schedules are: Monday, Wednesday, Friday or Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday. Imiquimod cream should be applied prior to normal sleeping hours and left on the skin for 6 to 10 hours, after which time the cream should be removed by washing the area with mild soap and water. The prescriber should demonstrate the proper application technique to maximize the benefit of imiquimod cream therapy.

It is recommended that patients wash their hands before and after applying imiquimod cream.

A thin layer of imiquimod cream should be applied to the wart area and rubbed in until the cream is no longer visible. The application site should not be occluded. Following the treatment period the cream should be removed by washing the treated area with mild soap and water.

Local skin reactions at the treatment site are common [see Adverse Reactions (6.3, 6.5)]. A rest period of several days may be taken if required by the patient's discomfort or severity of the local skin reaction. Treatment may resume once the reaction subsides. Non-occlusive dressings such as cotton gauze or cotton underwear may be used in the management of skin reactions.

Imiquimod cream is packaged in single-use packets which contain sufficient cream to cover a wart area of up to 20 cm2; use of excessive amounts of cream should be avoided.
Gelato Topical Anesthet...

Gelato Topical Anesthetic

Capecitabine tablets should be swallowed whole with water within 30 minutes after a meal. Do not crush or cut capecitabine tablets. Capecitabine tablets dose is calculated according to body surface area.

2.1 Standard Starting Dose

Monotherapy (Metastatic Colorectal Cancer, Adjuvant Colorectal Cancer, Metastatic Breast Cancer)

The recommended dose of capecitabine tablets is 1250 mg/m2 administered orally twice daily (morning and evening; equivalent to 2500 mg/m2 total daily dose) for 2 weeks followed by a 1-week rest period given as 3-week cycles (see Table 1).

Adjuvant treatment in patients with Dukes' C colon cancer is recommended for a total of 6 months [i.e., capecitabine tablets 1250 mg/m2 orally twice daily for 2 weeks followed by a 1-week rest period, given as 3-week cycles for a total of 8 cycles (24 weeks)].
Table 1: Capecitabine Tablets Dose Calculation According to Body Surface Area * Total Daily Dose divided by 2 to allow equal morning and evening doses
Dose Level 1250 mg/m2 Twice a Day

Number of Tablets to be Taken at Each Dose (Morning and Evening)

Surface Area (m2)

Total Daily Dose* (mg)

150 mg

500 mg

≤ 1.25

3000

0

3

1.26 to 1.37

3300

1

3

1.38 to 1.51

3600

2

3

1.52 to 1.65

4000

0

4

1.66 to 1.77

4300

1

4

1.78 to 1.91

4600

2

4

1.92 to 2.05

5000

0

5

2.06 to 2.17

5300

1

5

≥ 2.18

5600

2

5

In Combination With Docetaxel (Metastatic Breast Cancer)

In combination with docetaxel, the recommended dose of capecitabine tablets is 1250 mg/m2 twice daily for 2 weeks followed by a 1-week rest period, combined with docetaxel at 75 mg/m2 as a 1-hour intravenous infusion every 3 weeks. Pre-medication, according to the docetaxel labeling, should be started prior to docetaxel administration for patients receiving the capecitabine tablets plus docetaxel combination. Table 1 displays the total daily dose of capecitabine tablets by body surface area and the number of tablets to be taken at each dose.

2.2 Dose Management Guidelines

General

Capecitabine tablets dosage may need to be individualized to optimize patient management. Patients should be carefully monitored for toxicity and doses of capecitabine tablets should be modified as necessary to accommodate individual patient tolerance to treatment [see Clinical Studies (14)]. Toxicity due to capecitabine tablet administration may be managed by symptomatic treatment, dose interruptions and adjustment of capecitabine tablets dose. Once the dose has been reduced, it should not be increased at a later time. Doses of capecitabine tablets omitted for toxicity are not replaced or restored; instead the patient should resume the planned treatment cycles.

The dose of phenytoin and the dose of coumarin-derivative anticoagulants may need to be reduced when either drug is administered concomitantly with capecitabine tablets [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

Monotherapy (Metastatic Colorectal Cancer, Adjuvant Colorectal Cancer, Metastatic Breast Cancer)

Capecitabine tablets dose modification scheme as described below (see Table 2) is recommended for the management of adverse reactions.
Table 2: Recommended Dose Modifications of Capecitabine Tablets * National Cancer Institute of Canada Common Toxicity Criteria were used except for the hand-and-foot syndrome [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].
Toxicity NCIC Grades*

During a Course of Therapy

Dose Adjustment for Next Treatment (% of starting dose)

Grade 1

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

Grade 2

-1st appearance

Interrupt until resolved to grade 0 to 1

100%

-2nd appearance

75%

-3rd appearance

50%

-4th appearance

Discontinue treatment permanently

-

Grade 3

-1st appearance

Interrupt until resolved to grade 0 to 1

75%

-2nd appearance

50%

-3rd appearance

Discontinue treatment permanently

-

Grade 4

-1st appearance

Discontinue permanentlyORIf physician deems it to be in the patient's best interest to continue, interrupt until resolved to grade 0 to 1

50%

In Combination With Docetaxel (Metastatic Breast Cancer)

Dose modifications of capecitabine tablets for toxicity should be made according to Table 2 above for capecitabine tablets. At the beginning of a treatment cycle, if a treatment delay is indicated for either capecitabine tablets or docetaxel, then administration of both agents should be delayed until the requirements for restarting both drugs are met.

The dose reduction schedule for docetaxel when used in combination with capecitabine tablets for the treatment of metastatic breast cancer is shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Docetaxel Dose Reduction Schedule in Combination with Capecitabine Tablets * National Cancer Institute of Canada Common Toxicity Criteria were used except for hand-and-foot syndrome [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].
Toxicity NCIC Grades*

Grade 2

Grade 3

Grade 4

1st appearance

Delay treatment until resolved to grade 0 to 1; Resume treatment with original dose of 75 mg/m2 docetaxel

Delay treatment until resolved to grade 0 to 1; Resume treatment at 55 mg/m2 of docetaxel.

Discontinue treatment with docetaxel

2nd appearance

Delay treatment until resolved to grade 0 to 1; Resume treatment at 55 mg/m2 of docetaxel.

Discontinue treatment with docetaxel

-

3rd appearance

Discontinue treatment with docetaxel

-

-

2.3 Adjustment of Starting Dose in Special Populations

Renal Impairment

No adjustment to the starting dose of capecitabine tablets is recommended in patients with mild renal impairment (creatinine clearance = 51 to 80 mL/min [Cockroft and Gault, as shown below]). In patients with moderate renal impairment (baseline creatinine clearance = 30 to 50 mL/min), a dose reduction to 75% of the capecitabine tablets starting dose when used as monotherapy or in combination with docetaxel (from 1250 mg/m2 to 950 mg/m2 twice daily) is recommended [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Subsequent dose adjustment is recommended as outlined in Table 2 and Table 3 (depending on the regimen) if a patient develops a grade 2 to 4 adverse event [see Warnings and Precautions (5.5)]. The starting dose adjustment recommendations for patients with moderate renal impairment apply to both capecitabine tablets monotherapy and capecitabine tablets in combination use with docetaxel.

Cockroft and Gault Equation:

(140 - age [yrs]) (body wt [kg])

Creatinine clearance for males =

—————————————

(72) (serum creatinine [mg/dL])

Creatinine clearance for females = 0.85 × male value

Geriatrics

Physicians should exercise caution in monitoring the effects of capecitabine tablets in the elderly. Insufficient data are available to provide a dosage recommendation.
Quetiapine Fumarate

Quetiapine Fumarate

Citalopram tablets should be administered once daily, in the morning or evening, with or without food.

Initial Treatment

Citalopram tablets should be administered at an initial dose of 20 mg once daily, with an increase to a maximum dose of 40 mg/day at an interval of no less than one week. Doses above 40 mg/day are not recommended due to the risk of QT prolongation. Additionally, the only study pertinent to dose response for effectiveness did not demonstrate an advantage for the 60 mg/day dose over the 40 mg/day dose.

Special Populations

20 mg/day is the maximum recommended dose for patients who are greater than 60 years of age, patients with hepatic impairment, and for CYP2C19 poor metabolizers or those patients taking cimetidine or another CYP2C19 inhibitor (see WARNINGS).

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Citalopram Tablets should be used with caution in patients with severe renal impairment.

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to citalopram tablets and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester, have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with citalopram tablets during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Systematic evaluation of Citalopram Tablets in two studies has shown that its antidepressant efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 24 weeks following 6 or 8 weeks of initial treatment (32 weeks total). In one study, patients were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of Citalopram Tablets (20 to 60 mg/day) during maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, while in the other study, patients were assigned randomly to continuation of Citalopram Tablets 20 or 40 mg/day, or placebo, for maintenance treatment. In the latter study, the rates of relapse to depression were similar for the two dose groups (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Efficacy Trials). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether the dose of citalopram needed to maintain euthymia is identical to the dose needed to induce remission. If adverse reactions are bothersome, a decrease in dose to 20 mg/day can be considered.

Discontinuation of Treatment With Citalopram Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of citalopram tablets and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

Switching a Patient to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with citalopram tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping citalopram tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Citalopram Tablets with Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start citalopram tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving citalopram tablets therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, citalopram tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with citalopram tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with citalopram tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Disulfiram

Disulfiram

Disulfiram should never be administered until the patient has abstained from alcohol for at least 12 hours.

Initial Dosage Schedule

In the first phase of treatment, a maximum of 500 mg daily is given in a single dose for one to two weeks. Although usually taken in the morning, disulfiram may be taken on retiring by patients who experience a sedative effect. Alternatively, to minimize, or eliminate, the sedative effect, dosage may be adjusted downward.

Maintenance Regimen

The average maintenance dose is 250 mg daily (range, 125 to 500 mg), it should not exceed 500 mg daily.

Note: Occasionally patients, while seemingly on adequate maintenance doses of disulfiram, report that they are able to drink alcoholic beverages with impunity and without any symptomatology. All appearances to the contrary, such patients must be presumed to be disposing of their tablets in some manner without actually taking them. Until such patients have been observed reliably taking their daily disulfiram tablets (preferably crushed and well mixed with liquid), it cannot be concluded that disulfiram is ineffective.

Duration of Therapy

The daily, uninterrupted administration of disulfiram must be continued until the patient is fully recovered socially and a basis for permanent self-control is established. Depending on the individual patient, maintenance therapy may be required for months or even years.

Trial with Alcohol

During early experience with disulfiram, it was thought advisable for each patient to have at least one supervised alcohol-drug reaction. More recently, the test reaction has been largely abandoned. Furthermore, such a test reaction should never be administered to a patient over 50 years of age. A clear, detailed and convincing description of the reaction is felt to be sufficient in most cases.

However, where a test reaction is deemed necessary, the suggested procedure is as follows:

After the first one to two weeks’ therapy with 500 mg daily, a drink of 15 mL (1/2 oz) of 100 proof whiskey, or equivalent, is taken slowly. This test dose of alcoholic beverage may be repeated once only, so that the total dose does not exceed 30 mL (1 oz) of whiskey. Once a reaction develops, no more alcohol should be consumed. Such tests should be carried out only when the patient is hospitalized, or comparable supervision and facilities, including oxygen, are available.

Management of Disulfiram-Alcohol Reaction

In severe reactions, whether caused by an excessive test dose or by the patient’s unsupervised ingestion of alcohol, supportive measures to restore blood pressure and treat shock should be instituted. Other recommendations include: oxygen, carbogen (95% oxygen and 5% carbon dioxide), vitamin C intravenously in massive doses (1 g) and ephedrine sulfate. Antihistamines have also been used intravenously. Potassium levels should be monitored, particularly in patients on digitalis, since hypokalemia has been reported.
Glimepiride

Glimepiride

2.1 Recommended Dosing

Glimepiride tablets USP should be administered with breakfast or the first main meal of the day.

The recommended starting dose of glimepiride tablets USP is 1 mg or 2 mg once daily. Patients at increased risk for hypoglycemia (e.g., the elderly or patients with renal impairment) should be started on 1 mg once daily [seeWarnings and Precautions (5.1) andUse in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6)].

After reaching a daily dose of 2 mg, further dose increases can be made in increments of 1 mg or 2 mg based upon the patient’s glycemic response. Uptitration should not occur more frequently than every 1 to 2 weeks. A conservative titration scheme is recommended for patients at increased risk for hypoglycemia [seeWarnings and Precautions (5.1) andUse in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6)].

The maximum recommended dose is 8 mg once daily.

Patients being transferred to glimepiride tablets USP from longer half-life sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide) may have overlapping drug effect for 1 to 2 weeks and should be appropriately monitored for hypoglycemia.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glimepiride, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glimepiride is reduced. Therefore, glimepiride tablets USP should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.
Prazosin Hydrochloride

Prazosin Hydrochloride

The dose of prazosin hydrochloride capsules USP should be adjusted according to the patient’s individual blood pressure response. The following is a guide to its administration:

Initial Dose

1 mg two or three times a day (see WARNINGS).

Maintenance Dose

Dosage may be slowly increased to a total daily dose of 20 mg given in divided doses. The therapeutic dosages most commonly employed have ranged from 6 mg to 15 mg daily given in divided doses. Doses higher than 20 mg usually do not increase efficacy, however a few patients may benefit from further increases up to a daily dose of 40 mg given in divided doses. After initial titration some patients can be maintained adequately on a twice daily dosage regimen.

Use With Other Drugs

When adding a diuretic or other antihypertensive agent, the dose of prazosin hydrochloride capsules USP should be reduced to 1 mg or 2 mg three times a day and retitration then carried out.

Concomitant administration of prazosin hydrochloride capsules USP with a PDE-5 inhibitor can result in additive blood pressure lowering effects and symptomatic hypotension; therefore, PDE-5 inhibitor therapy should be initiated at the lowest dose in patients taking prazosin hydrochloride capsules USP.
Levocetirizine Dihydroc...

Levocetirizine Dihydrochloride

Levocetirizine dihydrochloride is available as 5 mg breakable (scored) tablets, allowing for the administration of 2.5 mg, if needed. Levocetirizine dihydrochloride tablets can be taken without regard to food consumption.

2.1 Adults and Children 12 Years of Age and Older

The recommended dose of levocetirizine dihydrochloride is 5 mg (1 tablet) once daily in the evening. Some patients may be adequately controlled by 2.5 mg (½ tablet) once daily in the evening.

2.2 Children 6 to 11 Years of Age

The recommended dose of levocetirizine dihydrochloride is 2.5 mg (½ tablet) once daily in the evening. The 2.5 mg dose should not be exceeded because the systemic exposure with 5 mg is approximately twice that of adults [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Dose Adjustment for Renal and Hepatic Impairment

In adults and children 12 years of age and older with:
• Mild renal impairment (creatinine clearance [CL CR] = 50 to 80 mL/min): a dose of 2.5 mg once daily is recommended; • Moderate renal impairment (CL CR = 30 to 50 mL/min): a dose of 2.5 mg once every other day is recommended; • Severe renal impairment (CL CR = 10 to 30 mL/min): a dose of 2.5 mg twice weekly (administered once every 3 to 4 days) is recommended; • End-stage renal disease patients (CL CR < 10 mL/min) and patients undergoing hemodialysis should not receive levocetirizine dihydrochloride tablets.
No dose adjustment is needed in patients with solely hepatic impairment. In patients with both hepatic impairment and renal impairment, adjustment of the dose is recommended.
Cefdinir

Cefdinir

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE for Indicated Pathogens.)

Powder for Oral Suspension

The recommended dosage and duration of treatment for infections in pediatric patients are described in the following chart; the total daily dose for all infections is 14 mg/kg, up to a maximum dose of 600 mg per day. Once-daily dosing for 10 days is as effective as BID dosing. Once-daily dosing has not been studied in skin infections; therefore, cefdinir for oral suspension USP should be administered twice daily in this infection. Cefdinir for oral suspension USP may be administered without regard to meals.
Pediatric Patients (Age 6 Months Through 12 Years)
Type of Infection

Dosage

Duration

Acute Bacterial Otitis Media

7 mg/kg q12h

5 to 10 days

or

14 mg/kg q24h

10 days

Acute Maxillary Sinusitis

7 mg/kg q12h

10 days

or

14 mg/kg q24h

10 days

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

7 mg/kg q12h

5 to 10 days

or

14 mg/kg q24h

10 days

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

7 mg/kg q12h

10 days
CEFDINIR FOR ORAL SUSPENSION PEDIATRIC DOSAGE CHART * Pediatric patients who weigh ≥ 43 kg should receive the maximum daily dose of 600 mg.
Weight

125 mg/5 mL

250 mg/5 mL

9 kg/20 lbs

2.5 mL q12h or 5 mL q24h

Use 125 mg/5 mL product

18 kg/40 lbs

5 mL q12h or 10 mL q24h

2.5 mL q12h or 5 mL q24h

27 kg/60 lbs

7.5 mL q12h or 15 mL q24h

3.75 mL q12h or 7.5mL q24h

36 kg/80 lbs

10 mL q12h or 20 mL q24h

5 mL q12h or 10 mL q24h

≥ 43 kg*/95 lbs

12 mL q12h or 24 mL q24h

6 mL q12h or 12 mL q24h

Patients With Renal Insufficiency

For adult patients with creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min, the dose of cefdinir should be 300 mg given once daily.

Creatinine clearance is difficult to measure in outpatients. However, the following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance (CLcr) in adult patients. For estimates to be valid, serum creatinine levels should reflect steady-state levels of renal function.

Males:

CLcr =

(weight) (140 − age)

(72) (serum creatinine)

Females:

CLcr =

0.85 × above value

where creatinine clearance is in mL/min, age is in years, weight is in kilograms, and serum creatinine is in mg/dL.3

The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in pediatric patients:

CLcr = K ×

body length or height

serum creatinine

where K = 0.55 for pediatric patients older than 1 year4 and 0.45 for infants (up to 1 year).5

In the above equation, creatinine clearance is in mL/min/1.73 m2, body length or height is in centimeters, and serum creatinine is in mg/dL.

For pediatric patients with a creatinine clearance of < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2, the dose of cefdinir should be 7 mg/kg (up to 300 mg) given once daily.

Patients on Hemodialysis

Hemodialysis removes cefdinir from the body. In patients maintained on chronic hemodialysis, the recommended initial dosage regimen is a 300 mg or 7 mg/kg dose every other day. At the conclusion of each hemodialysis session, 300 mg (or 7 mg/kg) should be given. Subsequent doses (300 mg or 7 mg/kg) are then administered every other day.
Directions for Mixing Cefdinir for Oral Suspension USP
Final Concentration

Final Volume (mL)

Amount of Water

Directions

125 mg/5 mL

60

50 mL

Tap bottle to loosen powder, then add water in 2 portions. Shake well after each aliquot.

100

80 mL

250 mg/5 mL

60

49 mL

Tap bottle to loosen powder, then add water in 2 portions. Shake well after each aliquot.

100

80 mL

After mixing, the suspension can be stored at room temperature (25°C/77°F). The container should be kept tightly closed, and the suspension should be shaken well before each administration. The suspension may be used for 10 days, after which any unused portion must be discarded.
Sotalol Hydrochloride

Sotalol Hydrochloride

As with other antiarrhythmic agents, sotalol hydrochloride tablets USP should be initiated and doses increased in a hospital with facilities for cardiac rhythm monitoring and assessment (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE). Sotalol hydrochloride tablets USP should be administered only after appropriate clinical assessment (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE), and the dosage of sotalol hydrochloride tablets USP must be individualized for each patient on the basis of therapeutic response and tolerance. Proarrhythmic events can occur not only at initiation of therapy, but also with each upward dosage adjustment.

Adults

Dosage of sotalol hydrochloride tablets USP should be adjusted gradually, allowing 3 days between dosing increments in order to attain steady-state plasma concentrations, and to allow monitoring of QT intervals. Graded dose adjustment will help prevent the usage of doses which are higher than necessary to control the arrhythmia. The recommended initial dose is 80 mg twice daily. This dose may be increased, if necessary, after appropriate evaluation to 240 or 320 mg/day (120 to 160 mg twice daily). In most patients, a therapeutic response is obtained at a total daily dose of 160 to 320 mg/day, given in two or three divided doses. Some patients with life-threatening refractory ventricular arrhythmias may require doses as high as 480 to 640 mg/day; however, these doses should only be prescribed when the potential benefit outweighs the increased risk of adverse events, in particular proarrhythmia. Because of the long terminal elimination half-life of sotalol hydrochloride tablets USP, dosing on more than a BID regimen is usually not necessary.

Children

As in adults the following precautionary measures should be considered when initiating sotalol treatment in children: initiation of treatment in the hospital after appropriate clinical assessment; individualized regimen as appropriate; gradual increase of doses if required; careful assessment of therapeutic response and tolerability; and frequent monitoring of the QTc interval and heart rate.

For Children Aged About 2 Years and Greater

For children aged about 2 years and greater, with normal renal function, doses normalized for body surface area are appropriate for both initial and incremental dosing. Since the Class III potency in children (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY) is not very different from that in adults, reaching plasma concentrations that occur within the adult dose range is an appropriate guide. From pediatric pharmacokinetic data the following is recommended.

For initiation of treatment, 30 mg/m2 three times a day (90 mg/m2 total daily dose) is approximately equivalent to the initial 160 mg total daily dose for adults. Subsequent titration to a maximum of 60 mg/m2 (approximately equivalent to the 360 mg total daily dose for adults) can then occur. Titration should be guided by clinical response, heart rate and QTc, with increased dosing being preferably carried out in-hospital. At least 36 hours should be allowed between dose increments to attain steady-state plasma concentrations of sotalol in patients with age-adjusted normal renal function.

For Children Aged about 2 Years or Younger

For children aged about 2 years or younger, the above pediatric dosage should be reduced by a factor that depends heavily upon age, as shown in the following graph, age plotted on a logarithmic scale in months.

For a child aged 20 months, the dosing suggested for children with normal renal function aged 2 years or greater should be multiplied by about 0.97; the initial starting dose would be (30 X 0.97) = 29.1 mg/m2, administered three times daily. For a child aged 1 month, the starting dose should be multiplied by 0.68; the initial starting dose would be (30 X 0.68) = 20 mg/m2, administered three times daily. For a child aged about 1 week, the initial starting dose should be multiplied by 0.3; the starting dose would be (30 X 0.3) = 9 mg/m2. Similar calculations should be made for increased doses as titration proceeds. Since the half-life of sotalol decreases with decreasing age (below about 2 years), time to steady-state will also increase. Thus, in neonates the time to steady-state may be as long as a week or longer.

In all children, individualization of dosage is required. As in adults sotalol hydrochloride should be used with particular caution in children if the QTc is greater than 500 msec on therapy, and serious consideration should be given to reducing the dose or discontinuing therapy when QTc exceeds 550 msec.

Dosage in Renal Impairment

Adults

Because sotalol is excreted predominantly in urine and its terminal elimination half-life is prolonged in conditions of renal impairment, the dosing interval (time between divided doses) of sotalol should be modified (when creatinine clearance is lower than 60 mL/min) according to the following table.
* The initial dose of 80 mg and subsequent doses should be administered at these intervals. See following paragraph for dosage escalations. Creatinine Clearance mL/min Dosing* Interval (hours) > 60 12 30 to 59 24 10 to 29 36 to 48 < 10 Dose should be individualized
Since the terminal elimination half-life of sotalol hydrochloride is increased in patients with renal impairment, a longer duration of dosing is required to reach steady-state. Dose escalations in renal impairment should be done after administration of at least 5 to 6 doses at appropriate intervals (see table above). Extreme caution should be exercised in the use of sotalol in patients with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis. The half-life of sotalol is prolonged (up to 69 hours) in anuric patients. Sotalol, however, can be partly removed by dialysis with subsequent partial rebound in concentrations when dialysis is completed. Both safety (heart rate, QT interval) and efficacy (arrhythmia control) must be closely monitored.

Children

The use of sotalol hydrochloride in children with renal impairment has not been investigated. Sotalol elimination is predominantly via the kidney in the unchanged form. Use of sotalol in any age group with decreased renal function should be at lower doses or at increased intervals between doses. Monitoring of heart rate and QTc is more important and it will take much longer to reach steady-state with any dose and/or frequency of administration.

Transfer to Sotalol Hydrochloride Tablets USP

Before starting sotalol hydrochloride tablets USP, previous antiarrhythmic therapy should generally be withdrawn under careful monitoring for a minimum of 2 to 3 plasma half-lives if the patient’s clinical condition permits (see Drug Interactions). Treatment has been initiated in some patients receiving I.V. lidocaine without ill effect. After discontinuation of amiodarone, sotalol hydrochloride tablets USP should not be initiated until the QT interval is normalized (see WARNINGS).

Preparation of Extemporaneous Oral Solution

Sotalol Hydrochloride Syrup 5 mg/mL can be compounded using Simple Syrup containing 0.1% sodium benzoate (Syrup, NF) available from Humco Laboratories as follows:
Measure 120 mL of Simple Syrup. Transfer the syrup to a 6 ounce amber plastic (polyethylene terephthalate [PET]) prescription bottle. NOTE: An oversized bottle is used to allow for a headspace, so that there will be more effective mixing during shaking of the bottle. Add five (5) sotalol hydrochloride tablets USP, 120 mg to the bottle. These tablets are added intact; it is not necessary to crush the tablets. NOTE: The addition of the tablets can also be done first. The tablets can also be crushed if preferred. If the tablets are crushed, care should be taken to transfer the entire quantity of tablet powder into the bottle containing the syrup. Shake the bottle to wet the entire surface of the tablets. If the tablets have been crushed, shake the bottle until the endpoint is achieved. Allow the tablets to hydrate for at least two hours. After at least two hours have elapsed, shake the bottle intermittently over the course of at least another two hours until the tablets are completely disintegrated. NOTE: The tablets can be allowed to hydrate overnight to simplify the disintegration process.
The endpoint is achieved when a dispersion of fine particles in the syrup is obtained.

This compounding procedure results in a solution containing 5 mg/mL of sotalol HCl. The fine solid particles are the water-insoluble inactive ingredients of the tablets.

This extemporaneously prepared oral solution of sotalol HCl (with suspended inactive particles) must be shaken well prior to administration. This is to ensure that the amount of inactive solid particles per dose remains constant throughout the duration of use.

Stability studies indicate that the suspension is stable for three months when stored at controlled room temperature, (15° to 30°C / 59° to 86°F) and ambient humidity.

Transfer to Betapace AF® from Sotalol

Patients with a history of symptomatic AFIB/AFL who are currently receiving sotalol for the maintenance of normal sinus rhythm should be transferred to Betapace AF® because of the significant differences in labeling (i.e., patient package insert for Betapace AF®, dosing administration, and safety information).
Calcitriol

Calcitriol

The optimal daily dose of calcitriol capsules must be carefully determined for each patient. Calcitriol can be administered orally as a capsule (0.25 mcg or 0.50 mcg). Calcitriol therapy should always be started at the lowest possible dose and should not be increased without careful monitoring of serum calcium.

The effectiveness of calcitriol capsule therapy is predicated on the assumption that each patient is receiving an adequate but not excessive daily intake of calcium. Patients are advised to have a dietary intake of calcium at a minimum of 600 mg daily. The U.S. RDA for calcium in adults is 800 mg to 1200 mg. To ensure that each patient receives an adequate daily intake of calcium, the physician should either prescribe a calcium supplement or instruct the patient in proper dietary measures.

Because of improved calcium absorption from the gastrointestinal tract, some patients on calcitriol may be maintained on a lower calcium intake. Patients who tend to develop hypercalcemia may require only low doses of calcium or no supplementation at all.

During the titration period of treatment with calcitriol, serum calcium levels should be checked at least twice weekly. When the optimal dosage of calcitriol has been determined, serum calcium levels should be checked every month (or as given below for individual indications). Samples for serum calcium estimation should be taken without a tourniquet.

Dialysis Patients

The recommended initial dose of calcitriol capsules is 0.25 mcg/day. If a satisfactory response in the biochemical parameters and clinical manifestations of the disease state is not observed, dosage may be increased by 0.25 mcg/day at 4 to 8 week intervals. During this titration period, serum calcium levels should be obtained at least twice weekly, and if hypercalcemia is noted, the drug should be immediately discontinued until normocalcemia ensues (see PRECAUTIONS, General). Phosphorus, magnesium, and alkaline phosphatase should be determined periodically.

Patients with normal or only slightly reduced serum calcium levels may respond to calcitriol capsule doses of 0.25 mcg every other day. Most patients undergoing hemodialysis respond to doses between 0.5 and 1 mcg/day.

Oral calcitriol capsules may normalize plasma ionized calcium in some uremic patients, yet fail to suppress parathyroid hyperfunction. In these individuals with autonomous parathyroid hyperfunction, oral calcitriol capsules may be useful to maintain normocalcemia, but have not been shown to be adequate treatment for hyperparathyroidism.

Hypoparathyroidism

The recommended initial dosage of calcitriol capsules is 0.25 mcg/day given in the morning. If a satisfactory response in the biochemical parameters and clinical manifestations of the disease is not observed, the dose may be increased at 2 to 4 week intervals. During the dosage titration period, serum calcium levels should be obtained at least twice weekly and, if hypercalcemia is noted, calcitriol capsules should be immediately discontinued until normocalcemia ensues (see PRECAUTIONS, General). Careful consideration should also be given to lowering the dietary calcium intake. Serum calcium, phosphorus, and 24 hour urinary calcium should be determined periodically.

Most adult patients and pediatric patients age 6 years and older have responded to dosages in the range of 0.5 mcg to 2 mcg daily. Pediatric patients in the 1 to 5 year age group with hypoparathyroidism have usually been given 0.25 mcg to 0.75 mcg daily. The number of treated patients with pseudohypoparathyroidism less than 6 years of age is too small to make dosage recommendations.

Malabsorption is occasionally noted in patients with hypoparathyroidism; hence, larger doses of calcitriol may be needed.

Predialysis Patients

The recommended initial dosage of calcitriol is 0.25 mcg/day in adults and pediatric patients 3 years of age and older. This dosage may be increased if necessary to 0.5 mcg/day.

For pediatric patients less than 3 years of age, the recommended initial dosage of calcitriol is 10 to 15 ng/kg/day.
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Naproxen Tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use Naproxen Tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with Naproxen Tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although Naproxen Tablets, naproxen suspension, naproxen delayed-release tablets, and naproxen sodium tablets all circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 30 minutes in patients taking naproxen sodium and within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen. Because naproxen delayed-release tablets dissolve in the small intestine rather than in the stomach, the absorption of the drug is delayed compared to the other naproxen formulations (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min) (see WARNINGS, Renal Effects).

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis, and Ankylosing Spondylitis
Naproxen Tablets 250 mg twice daily or 375 mg twice daily or 500 mg twice daily
During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Juvenile Arthritis

The recommended total daily dose of naproxen is approximately 10 mg/kg given in 2 divided doses (i.e., 5 mg/kg given twice a day). Naproxen Tablets are not well suited to this dosage so use of naproxen oral suspension is recommended for this indication.

Management of Pain, Primary Dysmenorrhea, and Acute Tendonitis and Bursitis

Because the sodium salt of naproxen is more rapidly absorbed, naproxen sodium is recommended for the management of acute painful conditions when prompt onset of pain relief is desired. Naproxen Tablets may also be used.

For the relief of mild to moderate pain, primary dysmenorrhea, and acute tendonitis and bursitis, the recommended starting dose of naproxen is 500 mg given orally, followed by 500 mg given orally every 12 hours or 250 mg given orally every 6 to 8 hours as required. The initial total daily dose should not exceed 1250 mg of naproxen. Thereafter, the total daily dose should not exceed 1000 mg of naproxen (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

Acute Gout

The recommended starting dose is 750 mg of naproxen followed by 250 mg every 8 hours until the attack has subsided (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).
Lovastatin

Lovastatin

General Considerations

Dosage of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily dose of 20 mg glyburide/2000 mg metformin. Glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be given with meals and should be initiated at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation as described below, in order to avoid hypoglycemia (largely due to glyburide), reduce GI side effects (largely due to metformin), and permit determination of the minimum effective dose for adequate control of blood glucose for the individual patient.

With initial treatment and during dose titration, appropriate blood glucose monitoring should be used to determine the therapeutic response to glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets and to identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, HbA1c should be measured at intervals of approximately 3 months to assess the effectiveness of therapy. The therapeutic goal in all patients with type 2 diabetes is to decrease FPG, PPG, and HbA1c to normal or as near normal as possible. Ideally, the response to therapy should be evaluated using HbA1c (glycosylated hemoglobin), which is a better indicator of long-term glycemic control than FPG alone.

No studies have been performed specifically examining the safety and efficacy of switching to glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets therapy in patients taking concomitant glyburide (or other sulfonylurea) plus metformin. Changes in glycemic control may occur in such patients, with either hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia possible. Any change in therapy of type 2 diabetes should be undertaken with care and appropriate monitoring.

Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets Use in Patients with Inadequate Glycemic Control on Diet and Exercise

Recommended starting dose: 1.25 mg/250 mg once or twice daily with meals.

For patients with type 2 diabetes whose hyperglycemia cannot be satisfactorily managed with diet and exercise alone, the recommended starting dose of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets is 1.25 mg/250 mg once a day with a meal. As initial therapy in patients with baseline HbA1c > 9% or an FPG > 200 mg/dL, a starting dose of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets 1.25 mg/250 mg twice daily with the morning and evening meals may be used. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 1.25 mg/250 mg per day every two weeks up to the minimum effective dose necessary to achieve adequate control of blood glucose. In clinical trials of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets as initial therapy, there was no experience with total daily doses greater than 10 mg/2000 mg per day. Glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets 5 mg/500 mg should not be used as initial therapy due to an increased risk of hypoglycemia.

Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets Use in Patients with Inadequate Glycemic Control on a Sulfonylurea and/or Metformin

Recommended starting dose: 2.5 mg/500 mg or 5 mg/500 mg twice daily with meals.

For patients not adequately controlled on either glyburide (or another sulfonylurea) or metformin alone, the recommended starting dose of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2.5 mg/500 mg or 5 mg/500 mg twice daily with the morning and evening meals. In order to avoid hypoglycemia, the starting dose of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should not exceed the daily doses of glyburide or metformin already being taken. The daily dose should be titrated in increments of no more than 5 mg/500 mg up to the minimum effective dose to achieve adequate control of blood glucose or to a maximum dose of 20 mg/2000 mg per day.

For patients previously treated with combination therapy of glyburide (or another sulfonylurea) plus metformin, if switched to glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets, the starting dose should not exceed the daily dose of glyburide (or equivalent dose of another sulfonylurea) and metformin already being taken. Patients should be monitored closely for signs and symptoms of hypoglycemia following such a switch and the dose of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be titrated as described above to achieve adequate control of blood glucose.

Addition of Thiazolidinediones to Glyburide and Metformin Hydrochloride Tablets Therapy

For patients not adequately controlled on glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets, a thiazolidinedione can be added to glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets therapy. When a thiazolidinedione is added to glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets therapy, the current dose of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets can be continued and the thiazolidinedione initiated at its recommended starting dose. For patients needing additional glycemic control, the dose of the thiazolidinedione can be increased based on its recommended titration schedule. The increased glycemic control attainable with glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets plus a thiazolidinedione may increase the potential for hypoglycemia at any time of day. In patients who develop hypoglycemia when receiving glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets and a thiazolidinedione, consideration should be given to reducing the dose of the glyburide component of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets. As clinically warranted, adjustment of the dosages of the other components of the antidiabetic regimen should also be considered.

Patients Receiving Colesevelam

When colesevelam is coadministered with glyburide, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glyburide is reduced. Therefore, glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.

Specific Patient Populations

Glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets are not recommended for use during pregnancy. The initial and maintenance dosing of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment requires a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of glyburide and metformin hydrochloride tablets to avoid the risk of hypoglycemia. Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of metformin-associated lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly (see WARNINGS).
Olanzapine

Olanzapine

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection— Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should 4 generally occur at intervals of not less than 1 week, since steady state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately 1 week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations — The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment —The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment — The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy — The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment — When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection— Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Treatment— The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder in the adolescent population has not been evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adults

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.

Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyaxa and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine
Use in Combination For Symbyax(mg/day) Olanzapine (mg/day) Fluoxetine(mg/day) 3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 5 20 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 5 40+10 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 40+10
a Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients under < 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Fluocinonide

Fluocinonide

The topical corticosteroids are generally applied to the affected area as a thin film from two to four times daily depending on the severity of the condition.

Occlusive dressings may be used for the management of psoriasis or recalcitrant conditions.

If an infection develops, the use of occlusive dressings should be discontinued and appropriate antimicrobial therapy instituted.
Cefaclor

Cefaclor

The absorption of cefaclor extended-release tablets is enhanced when it is administered with food. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) Therefore, cefaclor extended-release tablets should be administered with meals (i.e., at least within one hour of eating). The extended-release tablets should not be cut, crushed, or chewed.

See INDICATIONS AND USAGE for information about patients for whom cefaclor extended-release tablets are indicated.

NOTE: 500 mg BID of cefaclor extended-release tablets is clinically equivalent to 250 mg TID of cefaclor immediate-release as a capsule in those indications listed in the INDICATIONS AND USAGE section of this label. 500 mg BID of cefaclor extended-release tablets is NOT equivalent to 500 mg TID of other cefaclor formulations.

Adults (age 16 years and older):

Type of Infection (as qualified in the INDICATIONS AND USAGE section of this labeling)

Total Daily Dose

Dose and Frequency

Duration

Acute Bacterial Exacerbations of Chronic Bronchitis due to H. influenzae (non-ß-lactamase-producing strains only). Moraxella catarrhalis (including ß-lactamase-producing strains), or Streptococcus pneumoniae (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

1000 mg

500 mg q 12 hours

7 days

Secondary Bacterial Infection of Acute Bronchitis due to H. influenzae (non-ß-lactamase-producing strains only). M. catarrhalis (including ß-lactamase-producing strains), or S. pneumoniae (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

1000 mg

500 mg q 12 hours

7 days

Pharyngitis and/or tonsillitis due to S. pyogenes

750 mg

375 mg q 12 hours

10 days

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections due to S. aureus (methicillin-susceptible strains) (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

750 mg

375 mg q 12 hours

7 to 10 days

Elderly patients with normal renal function do not require dosage adjustments.
Sun Beige Perfecting Ma...

Sun Beige Perfecting Makeup Broad Spectrum Spf 25 Merle Norman

Ethosuximide oral solution is administered by the oral route. The initial dose for patients 3 to 6 years of age is one teaspoonful (250 mg) per day; for patients 6 years of age and older, 2 teaspoonfuls (500 mg) per day. The dose thereafter must be individualized according to the patient’s response. Dosage should be increased by small increments. One useful method is to increase the daily dose by 250 mg every four to seven days until control is achieved with minimal side effects. Dosages exceeding 1.5 g daily, in divided doses, should be administered only under the strictest supervision of the physician. The optimal dose for most pediatric patients is 20 mg/kg/day. This dose has given average plasma levels within the accepted therapeutic range of 40 to 100 mcg/mL. Subsequent dose schedules can be based on effectiveness and plasma level determinations.

Ethosuximide oral solution may be administered in combination with other anticonvulsants when other forms of epilepsy coexist with absence (petit mal). The optimal dose for most pediatric patients is 20 mg/kg/day.
Gabapentin

Gabapentin

2.1 Treatment of Uncomplicated P. falciparum Malaria

For treatment of uncomplicated P. falciparum malaria in adults: Orally, 648 mg (two capsules) every 8 hours for 7 days [see Clinical Studies (14)].

Quinine sulfate capsules USP should be taken with food to minimize gastric upset [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Renal Impairment

In patients with acute uncomplicated malaria and severe chronic renal impairment, the following dosage regimen is recommended: one loading dose of 648 mg quinine sulfate capsules USP, followed 12 hours later by maintenance doses of 324 mg every 12 hours.

The effects of mild and moderate renal impairment on the safety and pharmacokinetics of quinine sulfate are not known [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Hepatic Impairment

Adjustment of the recommended dose is not required in mild (Child-Pugh A) or moderate (Child-Pugh B) hepatic impairment, but patients should be monitored closely for adverse effects of quinine. Quinine should not be administered in patients with severe (Child-Pugh C) hepatic impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Nitrofurantoin Macrocry...

Nitrofurantoin Macrocrystals

Nitrofurantoin capsules (macrocrystals) should be given with food to improve drug absorption and, in some patients, tolerance.

Adults

50 to 100 mg four times a day - the lower dosage level is recommended for uncomplicated urinary tract infections.

Pediatric Patients

5 to 7 mg/kg of body weight per 24 hours, given in four divided doses (contraindicated under one month of age).

Therapy should be continued for one week or for at least 3 days after sterility of the urine is obtained. Continued infection indicates the need for reevaluation.

For long-term suppressive therapy in adults, a reduction of dosage to 50 to 100 mg at bedtime may be adequate. For long-term suppressive therapy in pediatric patients, doses as low as 1 mg/kg per 24 hours, given in a single dose or in two divided doses, may be adequate. SEEWARNINGS SECTION REGARDING RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH LONG-TERM THERAPY.
Tolterodine Tartrate

Tolterodine Tartrate

2.1 Dosing Information

The recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules is 4 mg once daily with water and swallowed whole. The dose may be lowered to 2 mg daily based on individual response and tolerability; however, limited efficacy data are available for tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules 2 mg [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14)].

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Specific Populations

For patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class A or B) or severe renal impairment (CCr 10–30 mL/min), the recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules is 2 mg once daily. Tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules are not recommended for use in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class C). Patients with CCr<10 mL/min have not been studied and use of tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules in this population is not recommended [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.6) and USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6, 8.7)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Presence of Concomitant Drugs

For patients who are taking drugs that are potent inhibitors of CYP3A4 [e.g., ketoconazole, clarithromycin, ritonavir], the recommended dose of tolterodine tartrate extended-release capsules is 2 mg once daily [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.2)].
Losartan Potassium

Losartan Potassium

Adult Hypertensive Patients

Losartan potassium tablets USP may be administered with other antihypertensive agents, and with or without food.

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan potassium tablets USP is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg used in patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS, Hypotension – Volume-Depleted Patients) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS, General). Losartan potassium tablets USP can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg.

If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response. The effect of losartan is substantially present within one week but in some studies the maximal effect occurred in 3 to 6 weeks (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Hypertension).

If blood pressure is not controlled by losartan potassium tablets USP alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Hypertension).

No initial dosage adjustment is necessary for elderly patients or for patients with renal impairment, including patients on dialysis.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients Greater Than or Equal to 6 Years of Age

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.7 mg/kg once daily (up to 50 mg total) administered as a tablet or a suspension (see Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2.5 mg/mL Suspension)). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 1.4 mg/kg (or in excess of 100 mg) daily have not been studied in pediatric patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations and Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, and WARNINGS, Hypotension – Volume-Depleted Patients).

Losartan potassium tablets USP are not recommended in pediatric patients less than 6 years of age or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate less than 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, and PRECAUTIONS).

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2.5 mg/mL Suspension)

Add 10 mL of Purified Water USP to an 8 ounce (240 mL) amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 50 mg losartan potassium tablets USP. Immediately shake for at least 2 minutes. Let the concentrate stand for 1 hour and then shake for 1 minute to disperse the tablet contents. Separately prepare a 50/50 volumetric mixture of Ora-Plus™ and Ora-Sweet SF™. Add 190 mL of the 50/50 Ora-Plus™/Ora-Sweet SF™ mixture to the tablet and water slurry in the PET bottle and shake for 1 minute to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2 to 8°C (36 to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 4 weeks. Shake the suspension prior to each use and return promptly to the refrigerator.

Hypertensive Patients With Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

The usual starting dose is 50 mg of losartan potassium tablets USP once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg daily should be added and/or the dose of losartan potassium tablets USP should be increased to 100 mg once daily followed by an increase in hydrochlorothiazide to 25 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Reduction in the Risk of Stroke).

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The usual starting dose is 50 mg once daily. The dose should be increased to 100 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients). Losartan potassium tablets USP may be administered with insulin and other commonly used hypoglycemic agents (e.g.,sulfonylureas, glitazones and glucosidase inhibitors).
Losartan Potassium And ...

Losartan Potassium And Hydrochlorothiazide

Hypertension

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg recommended for patients with intravascular volume depletion (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS, Hypotension — Volume-Depleted Patients) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function). Losartan can be administered once or twice daily at total daily doses of 25 to 100 mg. If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response.

Hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 to 50 mg once daily and can be given at doses of 12.5 to 25 mg as losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP.

To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

The side effects (see WARNINGS) of losartan are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects.

Replacement Therapy

The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Dose Titration by Clinical Effect

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with losartan monotherapy (see above) or hydrochlorothiazide alone may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg (losartan 50 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg) once daily. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily. A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with losartan 100 mg monotherapy (see above) may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/12.5 mg once daily. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily.

A patient whose blood pressure is inadequately controlled by 25 mg once daily of hydrochlorothiazide, or is controlled but who experiences hypokalemia with this regimen, may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg, (losartan 50 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg) once daily, reducing the dose of hydrochlorothiazide without reducing the overall expected antihypertensive response. The clinical response to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg should be subsequently evaluated, and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily.

The usual dose of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily. More than two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or more than one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/25 mg once daily is not recommended. The maximal antihypertensive effect is attained about 3 weeks after initiation of therapy.

Use in Patients With Renal Impairment

The usual regimens of therapy with losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP may be followed as long as the patient's creatinine clearance is greater than 30 mL/min. In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP are not recommended.

Patients With Hepatic Impairment

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP are not recommended for titration in patients with hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function) because the appropriate 25 mg starting dose of losartan cannot be given.

Severe Hypertension

The starting dose of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP for initial treatment of severe hypertension is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects). For patients who do not respond adequately to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg after 2 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dosage may be increased to one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/25 mg once daily. The maximum dose is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/25 mg once daily. Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP are not recommended as initial therapy in patients with hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function) because the appropriate 25 mg starting dose of losartan cannot be given. It is also not recommended for use as initial therapy in patients with intravascular volume depletion (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, see WARNINGS, Hypotension —Volume–Depleted Patients).

Hypertensive Patients With Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

Treatment should be initiated with losartan potassium 50 mg once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg should be added or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 50 mg/12.5 mg substituted if the blood pressure reduction is inadequate. If additional blood pressure reduction is needed, losartan potassium 100 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/12.5 mg may be substituted, followed by losartan potassium 100 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP, 100 mg/25 mg. For further blood pressure reduction other antihypertensives should be added (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Losartan Potassium, Reduction in the risk of stroke).

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets USP may be administered with or without food.
Pantoprazole Sodium

Pantoprazole Sodium

2.1 Recommended Dosing Schedule

Pantoprazole sodium is supplied as delayed-release tablets. The recommended dosages are outlined in Table 1.
Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule for Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets * For adult patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8 week course of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets may be considered. † Controlled studies did not extend beyond 12 months ‡ Dosage regimens should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 240 mg daily have been administered.
Indication

Dose

Frequency

Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis Associated With GERD

Adults

40 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks*

Children (5 Years and Older)

≥ 15 kg to < 40 kg

20 mg

Once Daily for up to 8 wks

≥ 40 kg

40 mg

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

Adults

40 mg

Once daily†

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome

Adults

40 mg

Twice daily‡

2.2 Administration Instructions

Directions for method of administration are presented in Table 2.
Table 2: Administration Instructions * Patients should be cautioned that pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets should not be split, chewed, or crushed.
Formulation

Route

Instructions*

Delayed-Release Tablets

Oral

Swallowed whole, with or without food

Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets

Pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets should be swallowed whole, with or without food in the stomach. If patients are unable to swallow a 40 mg tablet, two 20 mg tablets may be taken. Concomitant administration of antacids does not affect the absorption of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets.
Montelukast Sodium

Montelukast Sodium

2.1 Asthma

Montelukast sodium should be taken once daily in the evening. The following doses are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients less than 12 months of age with asthma have not been established.

There have been no clinical trials in patients with asthma to evaluate the relative efficacy of morning versus evening dosing. The pharmacokinetics of montelukast are similar whether dosed in the morning or evening. Efficacy has been demonstrated for asthma when montelukast was administered in the evening without regard to time of food ingestion.

2.2 Exercise-Induced Bronchoconstriction (EIB)

For prevention of EIB, a single 10 mg dose of montelukast should be taken at least 2 hours before exercise. The following doses are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet

An additional dose of montelukast should not be taken within 24 hours of a previous dose. Patients already taking montelukast sodium daily for another indication (including chronic asthma) should not take an additional dose to prevent EIB. All patients should have available for rescue a short-acting β-agonist. Safety and efficacy in patients younger than 6 years of age have not been established. Daily administration of montelukast sodium for the chronic treatment of asthma has not been established to prevent acute episodes of EIB.

2.3 Allergic Rhinitis

For allergic rhinitis, montelukast sodium should be taken once daily. Efficacy was demonstrated for seasonal allergic rhinitis when montelukast was administered in the morning or the evening without regard to time of food ingestion. The time of administration may be individualized to suit patient needs.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of seasonal allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 2 years of age with seasonal allergic rhinitis have not been established.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of perennial allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 6 months of age with perennial allergic rhinitis have not been established.

2.4 Asthma and Allergic Rhinitis

Patients with both asthma and allergic rhinitis should take only one montelukast sodium dose daily in the evening.
Ibuprofen

Ibuprofen

There should be laboratory as well as clinical documentation of infection prior to starting ketoconazole therapy. The usual duration of therapy for systemic infection is 6 months. Treatment should be continued until active fungal infection has subsided.

Adults

The recommended starting dose of ketoconazole tablets is a single daily administration of 200 mg (one tablet). If clinical responsiveness is insufficient within the expected time, the dose of ketoconazole tablets may be increased to 400 mg (two tablets) once daily.

Children

In small numbers of children over 2 years of age, a single daily dose of 3.3 to 6.6 mg/kg has been used. Ketoconazole tablets have not been studied in children under 2 years of age.
Penicillin V Potassium

Penicillin V Potassium

The dosage of penicillin V potassium tablets and penicillin V potassium for oral solution should be determined according to the sensitivity of the causative microorganisms and the severity of infection, and adjusted to the clinical response of the patient.

The usual dosage recommendations for adults and children 12 years and over are as follows:

Streptococcal infections—mild to moderately severe—of the upper respiratory tract and including scarlet fever and erysipelas: 125 to 250 mg (200,000 to 400,000 units) every 6 to 8 hours for 10 days.

Pneumococcal infections—mild to moderately severe—of the respiratory tract, including otitis media: 250 to 500 mg (400,000 to 800,000 units) every 6 hours until the patient has been afebrile for at least 2 days.

Staphylococcal infections—mild infections of skin and soft tissue (culture and sensitivity tests should be performed): 250 to 500 mg (400,000 to 800,000 units) every 6 to 8 hours.

Fusospirochetosis (Vincent’s infection) of the oropharynx. Mild to moderately severe infections: 250 to 500 mg (400,000 to 800,000 units) every 6 to 8 hours.

For the prevention of recurrence following rheumatic fever and/or chorea: 125 to 250 mg (200,000 to 400,000 units) twice daily on a continuing basis.

For prophylaxis against bacterial endocarditis1 in patients with congenital heart disease or rheumatic or other acquired valvular heart disease when undergoing dental procedures or surgical procedures of the upper respiratory tract: 2 gram of penicillin V (1 gram for children under 60 lbs.) 1 hour before the procedure, and then, 1 gram (500 mg for children under 60 lbs.) 6 hours later.

Directions for Mixing Oral Solution

Do not add water until you dispense. When dispensing, tap bottle until all powder flows freely, slowly add the total amount of water for reconstitution (see table below). After partially filling bottle, replace cap and shake vigorously. Add remaining water and repeat shaking. After reconstitution, solution must be stored in a refrigerator. Discard any unused portion after 14 days.

125 mg/5 mL

Bottle size

Total Amount of Water Required for Reconstitution

100 mL

75 mL

200 mL

150 mL

The resulting solution (red in color) will contain penicillin V potassium equivalent to penicillin V 125 mg (200,000 units) in each 5 mL (teaspoonful).

250 mg/5 mL

Bottle size

Total Amount of Water Required for Reconstitution

100 mL

75 mL

200 mL

150 mL

The resulting solution (red in color) will contain penicillin V potassium equivalent to penicillin V 250 mg (400,000 units) in each 5 mL (teaspoonful).
Sulfamethoxazole And Tr...

Sulfamethoxazole And Trimethoprim

Sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim is contraindicated in pediatric patients less than 2 months of age.

Urinary Tract Infections and Shigellosis in Adults and Pediatric Patients, and Acute Otitis Media in Children

Adults

The usual adult dosage in the treatment of urinary tract infections is 1 double strength tablet or 2 single strength tablets every 12 hours for 10 to 14 days. An identical daily dosage is used for 5 days in the treatment of shigellosis.

Children

The recommended dose for children with urinary tract infections or acute otitis media is 40 mg/kg sulfamethoxazole and 8 mg/kg trimethoprim per 24 hours, given in two divided doses every 12 hours for 10 days. An identical daily dosage is used for 5 days in the treatment of shigellosis. The following table is a guideline for the attainment of this dosage:
Children 2 months of age or older Weight Dose—every 12 hours lb kg Tablets 22 10 - 44 20 1 66 30 1½ 88 40 2 or 1 DS tablet
For Patients with Impaired Renal Function

When renal function is impaired, a reduced dosage should be employed using the following table:
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Recommended Dosage Regimen Above 30 Usual standard regimen 15 to 30 ½ the usual regimen Below 15 Use not recommended
Acute Exacerbations of Chronic Bronchitis in Adults

The usual adult dosage in the treatment of acute exacerbations of chronic bronchitis is 1 double strength tablet or 2 single strength tablets every 12 hours for 14 days.

Pneumocystis Jiroveci Pneumonia

Treatment

Adults and children

The recommended dosage for treatment of patients with documented Pneumocystis jiroveci pneumonia is 75 to 100 mg/kg sulfamethoxazole and 15 to 20 mg/kg trimethoprim per 24 hours given in equally divided doses every 6 hours for 14 to 21 days.11 The following table is a guideline for the upper limit of this dosage.
Weight Dose—every 6 hours lb kg Tablets 18 8 - 35 16 1 53 24 1½ 70 32 2 or 1 DS tablet 88 40 2½ 106 48 3 or 1½ DS tablets 141 64 4 or 2 DS tablets 176 80 5 or 2½ DS tablets
For the lower limit dose (75 mg/kg sulfamethoxazole and 15 mg/kg trimethoprim per 24 hours) administer 75% of the dose in the above table.

Prophylaxis

Adults

The recommended dosage for prophylaxis in adults is 1 sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim DS (double strength) tablet daily.12

Children

For children, the recommended dose is 750 mg/m2/day sulfamethoxazole with 150 mg/m2/day trimethoprim given orally in equally divided doses twice a day, on 3 consecutive days per week. The total daily dose should not exceed 1600 mg sulfamethoxazole and 320 mg trimethoprim.13 The following table is a guideline for the attainment of this dosage in children:
Body Surface Area Dose-every 12 hours (m2) Tablets 0.26 - 0.53 ½ 1.06 1
Traveler’s Diarrhea in Adults

For the treatment of traveler’s diarrhea, the usual adult dosage is 1 sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim DS (double strength) tablet or 2 sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim tablets every 12 hours for 5 days.
Letrozole

Letrozole

2.1 Recommended Dose

The recommended dose of letrozole tablets USP is one 2.5 mg tablet administered once a day, without regard to meals.

2.2 Use in Adjuvant Treatment of Early Breast Cancer

In the adjuvant setting, the optimal duration of treatment with letrozole is unknown. The planned duration of treatment in the study was 5 years with 73% of the patients having completed adjuvant therapy. Treatment should be discontinued at relapse [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.3 Use in Extended Adjuvant Treatment of Early Breast Cancer

In the extended adjuvant setting, the optimal treatment duration with letrozole tablets USP is not known. The planned duration of treatment in the study was 5 years. In the final updated analysis, conducted at a median follow-up of 62 months, the median treatment duration was 60 months. Seventy-one percent of patients were treated for at least 3 years and 58% of patients completed least 4.5 years of extended adjuvant treatment. The treatment should be discontinued at tumor relapse [seeClinical Studies (14.2)].

2.4 Use in First and Second-Line Treatment of Advanced Breast Cancer

In patients with advanced disease, treatment with letrozole tablets USP should continue until tumor progression is evident [see Clinical Studies (14.4, 14.5)].

2.5 Use in Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is recommended for patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, although letrozole blood concentrations were modestly increased in subjects with moderate hepatic impairment due to cirrhosis. The dose of letrozole tablets USP in patients with cirrhosis and severe hepatic dysfunction should be reduced by 50% [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. The recommended dose of letrozole tablets USP for such patients is 2.5 mg administered every other day. The effect of hepatic impairment on letrozole exposure in noncirrhotic cancer patients with elevated bilirubin levels has not been determined.

2.6 Use in Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment is required for patients with renal impairment if creatinine clearance is ≥ 10 mL/min [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.1 Mild to Moderate Alzheimer’s Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride tablets shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride tablets might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2 Severe Alzheimer’s Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets have been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at a dose of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3 Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer’s disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride tablets steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Budeprion Sr

Budeprion Sr

General Dosing Considerations

It is particularly important to administer bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) in a manner most likely to minimize the risk of seizure (see WARNINGS). Gradual escalation in dosage is also important if agitation, motor restlessness, and insomnia, often seen during the initial days of treatment, are to be minimized. If necessary, these effects may be managed by temporary reduction of dose or the short-term administration of an intermediate to long-acting sedative hypnotic. A sedative hypnotic usually is not required beyond the first week of treatment. Insomnia may also be minimized by avoiding bedtime doses. If distressing, untoward effects supervene, dose escalation should be stopped. Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be swallowed whole and not crushed, divided, or chewed, as this may lead to an increased risk of adverse effects including seizures.

Initial Treatment

The usual adult target dose for bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) is 300 mg/day, given as 150 mg twice daily. Dosing with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should begin at 150 mg/day given as a single daily dose in the morning. If the 150-mg initial dose is adequately tolerated, an increase to the 300-mg/day target dose, given as 150 mg twice daily, may be made as early as day 4 of dosing. There should be an interval of at least 8 hours between successive doses.

Increasing the Dosage Above 300 mg/day

As with other antidepressants, the full antidepressant effect of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may not be evident until 4 weeks of treatment or longer. An increase in dosage to the maximum of 400 mg/day, given as 200 mg twice daily, may be considered for patients in whom no clinical improvement is noted after several weeks of treatment at 300 mg/day.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. In a study in which patients with major depressive disorder, recurrent type, who had responded during 8 weeks of acute treatment with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) (150 mg twice daily) during 44 weeks of maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, longer-term efficacy was demonstrated (see CLINICAL TRIALS under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY. Based on these limited data, it is unknown whether or not the dose of bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be used with extreme caution in patients with severe hepatic cirrhosis. The dose should not exceed 100 mg every day or 150 mg every other day in these patients. Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be used with caution in patients with hepatic impairment (including mild-to-moderate hepatic cirrhosis) and a reduced frequency and/or dose should be considered in patients with mild-to-moderate hepatic cirrhosis (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS, and PRECAUTIONS).

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be used with caution in patients with renal impairment and a reduced frequency and/or dose should be considered (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).

Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Antidepressant

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat depression and initiation of therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR). Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) before starting an MAOI antidepressant (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and DRUG INTERACTIONS).

Use of Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets (SR) with Reversible MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) in a patient who is being treated with a reversible MAOI such as linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. Drug interactions can increase the risk of hypertensive reactions. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, non-pharmacological interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and DRUG INTERACTIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of hypertensive reactions in a particular patient, bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue.

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with bupropion hydrochloride extended-release tablets (SR) is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of a drug interaction with such use (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and DRUG INTERACTIONS).
Escitalopram

Escitalopram

2.1 General Dosing Information

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol-lowering diet before receiving pravastatin sodium tablets and should continue on this diet during treatment with pravastatin sodium tablets [see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy].

2.2 Adult Patients

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily. If a daily dose of 40 mg does not achieve desired cholesterol levels, 80 mg once daily is recommended. In patients with significant renal impairment, a starting dose of 10 mg daily is recommended. Pravastatin sodium tablets can be administered orally as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

2.3 Pediatric Patients

Children (Ages 8 to 13 Years, Inclusive)

The recommended dose is 20 mg once daily in children 8 to 13 years of age. Doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Adolescents (Ages 14 to 18 Years)

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily in adolescents 14 to 18 years of age. Doses greater than 40 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Children and adolescents treated with pravastatin should be reevaluated in adulthood and appropriate changes made to their cholesterol-lowering regimen to achieve adult goals for LDL-C [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Altering Therapy

Pravastatin sodium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. When administering a bile-acid-binding resin (e.g., cholestyramine, colestipol) and pravastatin, pravastatin sodium tablets should be given either 1 hour or more before or at least 4 hours following the resin [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.5 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine

In patients taking immunosuppressive drugs such as cyclosporine concomitantly with pravastatin, therapy should begin with 10 mg of pravastatin sodium once-a-day at bedtime and titration to higher doses should be done with caution. Most patients treated with this combination received a maximum pravastatin sodium dose of 20 mg/day. In patients taking cyclosporine, therapy should be limited to 20 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Clarithromycin

In patients taking clarithromycin, therapy should be limited to 40 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].
Lovastatin

Lovastatin

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol-lowering diet before receiving lovastatin tablets and should continue on this diet during treatment with lovastatin tablets (see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy). Lovastatin tablets should be given with meals.

Adult Patients

The usual recommended starting dose is 20 mg once a day given with the evening meal. The recommended dosing range of lovastatin is 10 to 80 mg/day in single or two divided doses; the maximum recommended dose is 80 mg/day. Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy (see NCEP Treatment Guidelines and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Patients requiring reductions in LDL-C of 20% or more to achieve their goal (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE) should be started on 20 mg/day of lovastatin tablets. A starting dose of 10 mg of lovastatin may be considered for patients requiring smaller reductions. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

Cholesterol levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of lovastatin tablets if cholesterol levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Dosage in Patients Taking Danazol, Diltiazem, Dronedarone or Verapamil

In patients taking danazol, diltiazem, dronedarone or verapamil concomitantly with lovastatin, therapy should begin with 10 mg of lovastatin and should not exceed 20 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics, WARNINGS, Myopathy/Rhabdomyolysis, PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions, Other Drug Interactions).

Dosage in Patients Taking Amiodarone

In patients taking amiodarone concomitantly with lovastatin tablets, the dose should not exceed 40 mg/day (see WARNINGS, Myopathy/Rhabdomyolysis and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions, Other Drug Interactions).

Adolescent Patients (10 to 17 Years of Age) With Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended dosing range of lovastatin is 10 to 40 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 40 mg/day. Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy (see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines4, CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, and INDICATIONS AND USAGE). Patients requiring reductions in LDL-C of 20% or more to achieve their goal should be started on 20 mg/day of lovastatin tablets. A starting dose of 10 mg of lovastatin may be considered for patients requiring smaller reductions. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

4 National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics. 89(3):495-501. 1992.

Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy

Lovastatin tablets are effective alone or when used concomitantly with bile-acid sequestrants (see WARNINGS, Myopathy/Rhabdomyolysis and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).

Dosage in Patients With Renal Insufficiency

In patients with severe renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min), dosage increases above 20 mg/day should be carefully considered and, if deemed necessary, implemented cautiously (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and WARNINGS, Myopathy/Rhabdomyolysis).
Simvastatin

Simvastatin

2.1 Recommended Dosing

The usual dosage range is 5 to 40 mg/day. In patients with CHD or at high risk of CHD, simvastatin tablets can be started simultaneously with diet. The recommended usual starting dose is 10 or 20 mg once a day in the evening. For patients at high risk for a CHD event due to existing CHD, diabetes, peripheral vessel disease, history of stroke or other cerebrovascular disease, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg/day. Lipid determinations should be performed after 4 weeks of therapy and periodically thereafter.

2.2 Restricted Dosing for 80 mg

Due to the increased risk of myopathy, including rhabdomyolysis, particularly during the first year of treatment, use of the 80 mg dose of simvastatin tablets should be restricted to patients who have been taking simvastatin 80 mg chronically (e.g., for 12 months or more) without evidence of muscle toxicity [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Patients who are currently tolerating the 80 mg dose of simvastatin tablets who need to be initiated on an interacting drug that is contraindicated or is associated with a dose cap for simvastatin should be switched to an alternative statin with less potential for the drug-drug interaction.

Due to the increased risk of myopathy, including rhabdomyolysis, associated with the 80 mg dose of simvastatin tablets, patients unable to achieve their LDL-C goal utilizing the 40 mg dose of simvastatin tablets should not be titrated to the 80 mg dose, but should be placed on alternative LDL-C-lowering treatment(s) that provides greater LDL-C lowering.

2.3 Coadministration With Other Drugs

Patients taking Verapamil, Diltiazem, or Dronedarone
• The dose of simvastatin tablets should not exceed 10 mg/day [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.3), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Patients taking Amiodarone, Amlodipine or Ranolazine
• The dose of simvastatin tablets should not exceed 20 mg/day [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.3), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
2.4 Patients With Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended dosage is 40 mg/day in the evening [see Dosage and Administration, Restricted Dosing for 80 mg (2.2)]. Simvastatin tablets should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

Simvastatin exposure is approximately doubled with concomitant use of lomitapide; therefore, the dose of simvastatin tablets should be reduced by 50% if initiating lomitapide. Simvastatin tablets dosage should not exceed 20 mg/day (or 40 mg/day for patients who have previously taken simvastatin tablets 80 mg/day chronically, e.g., for 12 months or more, without evidence of muscle toxicity) while taking lomitapide.

2.5 Adolescents (10 to 17 Years of Age) With Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended usual starting dose is 10 mg once a day in the evening. The recommended dosing range is 10 to 40 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 40 mg/day. Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines1 and Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

1 National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics. 89(3):495-501. 1992.

2.6 Patients With Renal Impairment

Because simvastatin tablets do not undergo significant renal excretion, modification of dosage should not be necessary in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. However, caution should be exercised when simvastatin tablets are administered to patients with severe renal impairment; such patients should be started at 5 mg/day and be closely monitored [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.7 Chinese Patients Taking Lipid-Modifying Doses (Greater Than or Equal to 1 g/day Niacin) of Niacin-Containing Products

Because of an increased risk for myopathy in Chinese patients taking simvastatin 40 mg coadministered with lipid-modifying doses (greater than or equal to 1 g/day niacin) of niacin-containing products, caution should be used when treating Chinese patients with simvastatin doses exceeding 20 mg/day coadministered with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products. Because the risk for myopathy is dose-related, Chinese patients should not receive simvastatin 80 mg coadministered with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products. The cause of the increased risk of myopathy is not known. It is also unknown if the risk for myopathy with coadministration of simvastatin with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products observed in Chinese patients applies to other Asian patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].
Gb-tone

Gb-tone

2.1 Adult Hypertension

The recommended starting dose of valsartan tablets is 80 mg or 160 mg once daily when used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume-depleted. Patients requiring greater reductions may be started at the higher dose. Valsartan tablets may be used over a dose range of 80 mg to 320 mg daily, administered once a day.

The antihypertensive effect is substantially present within 2 weeks and maximal reduction is generally attained after 4 weeks. If additional antihypertensive effect is required over the starting dose range, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 320 mg or a diuretic may be added. Addition of a diuretic has a greater effect than dose increases beyond 80 mg.

No initial dosage adjustment is required for elderly patients, for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment, or for patients with mild or moderate liver insufficiency. Care should be exercised with dosing of valsartan tablets in patients with hepatic or severe renal impairment.

Valsartan tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Valsartan tablets may be administered with or without food.

2.2 Pediatric Hypertension 6 to 16 Years of Age

For children who can swallow tablets, the usual recommended starting dose is 1.3 mg/kg once daily (up to 40 mg total). The dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses higher than 2.7 mg/kg (up to 160 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients 6 to 16 years old.

For children who cannot swallow tablets, or children for whom the calculated dosage (mg/kg) does not correspond to the available tablet strengths of valsartan tablets, the use of a suspension is recommended. Follow the suspension preparation instructions below (see Preparation of Suspension) to administer valsartan as a suspension. When the suspension is replaced by a tablet, the dose of valsartan may have to be increased. The exposure to valsartan with the suspension is 1.6 times greater than with the tablet.

No data are available in pediatric patients either undergoing dialysis or with a glomerular filtration rate < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 [see Pediatric Use (8.4)].

Valsartan tablets are not recommended for patients < 6 years old [see Adverse Reactions (6.1), Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Preparation of Suspension (for 160 mL of a 4 mg/mL suspension)

Add 80 mL of Ora-Plus® oral suspending vehicle to an amber glass bottle containing 8 valsartan tablets, 80 mg, and shake for a minimum of 2 minutes. Allow the suspension to stand for a minimum of 1 hour. After the standing time, shake the suspension for a minimum of 1 additional minute. Add 80 mL of Ora-Sweet SF® oral sweetening vehicle to the bottle and shake the suspension for at least 10 seconds to disperse the ingredients. The suspension is homogenous and can be stored for either up to 30 days at room temperature (below 30°C/86°F) or up to 75 days at refrigerated conditions (2 to 8°C/35 to 46°F) in the glass bottle with a child-resistant screw-cap closure. Shake the bottle well (at least 10 seconds) prior to dispensing the suspension.

2.3 Heart Failure

The recommended starting dose of valsartan tablets is 40 mg twice daily. Uptitration to 80 mg and 160 mg twice daily should be done to the highest dose, as tolerated by the patient. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretics. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials is 320 mg in divided doses.
Dorzolamide Hydrochlori...

Dorzolamide Hydrochloride Solution

The dose is one drop of dorzolamide hydrochloride ophthalmic solution, 2% in the affected eye(s) three times daily. Dorzolamide hydrochloride ophthalmic solution, 2% may be used concomitantly with other topical ophthalmic drug products to lower intraocular pressure. If more than one topical ophthalmic drug is being used, the drugs should be administered at least five minutes apart.
Ofloxacin

Ofloxacin

The usual dose of ofloxacin tablets is 200 mg to 400 mg orally every 12 h as described in the following dosing chart. These recommendations apply to patients with normal renal function (i.e., creatinine clearance > 50 mL/min). For patients with altered renal function (i.e., creatinine clearance ≤ 50 mL/min), see the Patients With Impaired Renal Function subsection.

Infection†

Unit Dose

Frequency

Duration

Daily Dose

Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis

400 mg

q12h

10 days

800 mg

Comm. Acquired Pneumonia

400 mg

q12h

10 days

800 mg

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

400 mg

q12h

10 days

800 mg

Acute, Uncomplicated Urethral and Cervical Gonorrhea

400 mg

single dose

1 day

400 mg

Nongonococcal Cervicitis/Urethritis Due to C. Trachomatis

300 mg

q12h

7 days

600 mg

Mixed Infection of the Urethra and Cervix Due to C. Trachomatis and N. Gonorrhoeae

300 mg

q12h

7 days

600 mg

Acute Pelvic Inflammatory Disease

400 mg

q12h

10 to 14 days

800 mg

Uncomplicated Cystitis Due to E. Coli or K. Pneumoniae

200 mg

q12h

3 days

400 mg

Uncomplicated Cystitis Due to Other Approved Pathogens

200 mg

q12h

7 days

400 mg

Complicated UTI’s

200 mg

q12h

10 days

400 mg

Prostatitis Due to E. Coli

300 mg

q12h

6 weeks

600 mg

† DUE TO THE DESIGNATED PATHOGENS (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

Antacids containing calcium, magnesium, or aluminum; sucralfate; divalent or trivalent cations such as iron; or multivitamins containing zinc; or didanosine, chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution should not be taken within the two-hour period before or within the two-hour period after taking ofloxacin (see PRECAUTIONS).

Patients With Impaired Renal Function

Dosage should be adjusted for patients with a creatinine clearance ≤ 50 mL/min. After a normal initial dose, dosage should be adjusted as follows:

Creatinine Clearance

Maintenance Dose

Frequency

20 to 50 mL/min

the usual recommended unit dose

q24h

< 20 mL/min

½ the usual recommended unit dose

q24h

When only the serum creatinine is known, the following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance.

Women: 0.85 × the value calculated for men.

The serum creatinine should represent a steady-state of renal function.

Patients With Cirrhosis

The excretion of ofloxacin may be reduced in patients with severe liver function disorders (e.g., cirrhosis with or without ascites). A maximum dose of 400 mg of ofloxacin per day should therefore not be exceeded.
Cabergoline

Cabergoline

The recommended dosage of cabergoline tablets for initiation of therapy is 0.25 mg twice a week. Dosage may be increased by 0.25 mg twice weekly up to a dosage of 1 mg twice a week according to the patient’s serum prolactin level. Before initiating treatment, cardiovascular evaluation should be performed and echocardiography should be considered to assess for valvular disease.

Dosage increases should not occur more rapidly than every 4 weeks, so that the physician can assess the patient’s response to each dosage level. If the patient does not respond adequately, and no additional benefit is observed with higher doses, the lowest dose that achieved maximal response should be used and other therapeutic approaches considered. Patients receiving long-term treatment with cabergoline should undergo periodic assessment of their cardiac status and echocardiography should be considered.

After a normal serum prolactin level has been maintained for 6 months, cabergoline may be discontinued, with periodic monitoring of the serum prolactin level to determine whether or when treatment with cabergoline should be reinstituted. The durability of efficacy beyond 24 months of therapy with cabergoline has not been established.
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and ketorolac tromethamine tablets is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of ketorolac tromethamine tablets is only indicated as continuation therapy to IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine.

Transition from IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose ketorolac tromethamine tablets:

Patients age 17 to 64: 20 mg PO once followed by 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not > 40 mg/day

Patients age ≥ 65, renally impaired, and/or weight < 50 kg (110 lbs): 10 mg PO once followed by 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not > 40 mg/day

Note:

Oral formulation should not be given as an initial dose.

Use minimum effective dose for the individual patient.

Do not shorten dosing interval of 4 to 6 hours.

Total duration of treatment in adult patients: the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and ketorolac tromethamine tablets is not to exceed 5 days.

The following table summarizes ketorolac tromethamine tablet dosing instructions in terms of age group:
Table 4: Summary of Dosing Instructions
Patient Population

Ketorolac Tromethamine Tablets (following IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine)

Age < 17 years

Oral not approved

Adult Age 17 to 64 years

20 mg once, then 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not > 40 mg/day

Adult Age ≥ 65 years, renally impaired, and/or weight < 50 kg

10 mg once, then 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not > 40 mg/day
Verapamil Hydrochloride...

Verapamil Hydrochloride

Essential Hypertension

The dose of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets should be individualized by titration and the drug should be administered with food. Initiate therapy with 180 mg of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets given in the morning. Lower initial doses of 120 mg a day may be warranted in patients who may have an increased response to verapamil (e.g., the elderly or small people). Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy and safety evaluated weekly and approximately 24 hours after the previous dose. The antihypertensive effects of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets are evident within the first week of therapy.

If adequate response is not obtained with 180 mg of verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets, the dose may be titrated upward in the following manner:
• 240 mg each morning, • 180 mg each morning plus 180 mg each evening; or 240 mg each morning plus 120 mg each evening, • 240 mg every 12 hours.
When switching from verapamil hydrochloride immediate-release tablets to verapamil hydrochloride extended-release tablets, the total daily dose in milligrams may remain the same.
Bio Co-enzyme Phase

Bio Co-enzyme Phase

Clarithromycin tablets may be given with or without food.

Clarithromycin may be administered without dosage adjustment in the presence of hepatic impairment if there is normal renal function. In patients with severe renal impairment (CLCR < 30 mL/min), the dose of clarithromycin should be reduced by 50%. However, when patients with moderate or severe renal impairment are taking clarithromycin concomitantly with atazanavir or ritonavir, the dose of clarithromycin should be reduced by 50% or 75% for patients with CLCR of 30 to 60 mL/min or < 30 mL/min, respectively.
ADULT DOSAGE GUIDELINES
Clarithromycin Tablets

Infection

Dosage

(q12h)

Duration

(days)

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis due to

S. pyogenes

250 mg

10

Acute maxillary sinusitis due to

500 mg

14

H. influenzae

M. catarrhalis

S. pneumoniae

Acute exacerbation of chronic bronchitis due to

H. influenzae

500 mg

7 to 14

H. parainfluenzae

500 mg

7

M. catarrhalis

250 mg

7 to 14

S. pneumoniae

250 mg

7 to 14

Community-Acquired Pneumonia due to

H. influenzae

250 mg

7

S. pneumoniae

250 mg

7 to 14

C. pneumoniae

250 mg

7 to 14

M. pneumoniae

250 mg

7 to 14

Uncomplicated skin and skin structure

250 mg

7 to 14

S. aureus

S. pyogenes

H. pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy: Clarithromycin/Lansoprazole/Amoxicillin

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin, 30 mg lansoprazole, and 1 gram amoxicillin, all given twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES).

Triple Therapy: Clarithromycin/Omeprazole/Amoxicillin

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin, 20 mg omeprazole, and 1 gram amoxicillin, all given twice daily (q12h) for 10 days (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES). In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy: Clarithromycin/Omeprazole

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin given three times daily (q8h) and 40 mg omeprazole given once daily (qAM) for 14 days (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES). An additional 14 days of omeprazole 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy: Clarithromycin/Ranitidine Bismuth Citrate

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin given twice daily (q12h) or three times daily (q8h) and 400 mg ranitidine bismuth citrate given twice daily (q12h) for 14 days. An additional 14 days of 400 mg twice daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief. Clarithromycin and ranitidine bismuth citrate combination therapy is not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance less than 25 mL/min (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES).

Children

The usual recommended daily dosage is 15 mg/kg/day divided q12h for 10 days.
PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES
Based on Body Weight

Dosing Calculated on 7.5 mg/kg q12h

Weight

Dose

Kg

lbs

(q12h)

125 mg/5 mL

250 mg/5 mL

9

20

62.5 mg

2.5 mL q12h

1.25 mL q12h

17

37

125 mg

5 mL q12h

2.5 mL q12h

25

55

187.5 mg

7.5 mL q12h

3.75 mL q12h

33

73

250 mg

10 mL q12h

5 mL q12h

Mycobacterial Infections

Prophylaxis

The recommended dose of clarithromycin for the prevention of disseminated Mycobacterium avium disease is 500 mg b.i.d. In children, the recommended dose is 7.5 mg/kg b.i.d. up to 500 mg b.i.d. No studies of clarithromycin for MAC prophylaxis have been performed in pediatric populations and the doses recommended for prophylaxis are derived from MAC treatment studies in children. Dosing recommendations for children are in the table above.

Treatment

Clarithromycin is recommended as the primary agent for the treatment of disseminated infection due to Mycobacterium avium complex. Clarithromycin should be used in combination with other antimycobacterial drugs that have shown in vitro activity against MAC or clinical benefit in MAC treatment (see CLINICAL STUDIES). The recommended dose for mycobacterial infections in adults is 500 mg b.i.d. In children, the recommended dose is 7.5 mg/kg b.i.d. up to 500 mg b.i.d. Dosing recommendations for children are in the table above.

Clarithromycin therapy should continue if clinical response is observed. Clarithromycin can be discontinued when the patient is considered at low risk of disseminated infection.
Acetaminophen And Codei...

Acetaminophen And Codeine Phosphate

Dosage should be adjusted according to severity of pain and response of the patient.

The usual adult dosage is:

Single Doses (range)

Maximum 24 Hour Dose

Codeine Phosphate

15 mg to 60 mg

360 mg

Acetaminophen

300 mg to 1000 mg

4000 mg

The usual dose of codeine phosphate in children is 0.5 mg/kg.

Doses may be repeated up to every 4 hours.

The prescriber must determine the number of tablets per dose, and the maximum number of tablets per 24 hours based upon the above dosage guidance. This information should be conveyed in the prescription.

It should be kept in mind, however, that tolerance to codeine can develop with continued use and that the incidence of untoward effects is dose related. Adult doses of codeine higher than 60 mg fail to give commensurate relief of pain but merely prolong analgesia and are associated with an appreciably increased incidence of undesirable side effects. Equivalently high doses in children would have similar effects.
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Levetiracetam tablets are given orally with or without food. The levetiracetam tablets dosing regimen depends on the indication, age group, dosage form (tablets), and renal function.

Levetiracetam tablets should be swallowed whole. Levetiracetam tablets should not be chewed or crushed.

2.2 Dosing for Partial Onset Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older

Initiate treatment with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Additional dosing increments may be given (1000 mg/day additional every 2 weeks) to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. There is no evidence that doses greater than 3000 mg/day confer additional benefit.

Pediatric Patients

Dosing information in pediatric patients less than 4 years of age as adjunctive therapy in the treatment of partial onset seizures is approved for UCB, Inc.’s levetiracetam tablets. However, due to UCB, Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

4 Years to < 16 Years

Initiate treatment with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 60 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 44 mg/kg. The maximum daily dose was 3000 mg/day.

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing 20 to 40 kg, initiate treatment with a daily dose of 500 mg given as twice daily dosing (250 mg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 500 mg to a maximum recommended daily dose of 1500 mg (750 mg twice daily).

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing more than 40 kg, initiate treatment with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day given as twice daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 1000 mg/day to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg (1500 mg twice daily).

2.3 Dosing for Myoclonic Seizures in Patients 12 Years of Age and Older with Juvenile Myoclonic Epilepsy

Initiate treatment with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Increase the dosage by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been studied.

2.4 Dosing for Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older

Initiate treatment with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Increase dosage by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been adequately studied.

Pediatric Patients Ages 6 to < 16 Years

Initiate treatment with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). Increase the daily dose every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). The effectiveness of doses lower than 60 mg/kg/day has not been adequately studied. Patients with body weight ≤ 20 kg should be dosed with oral solution. Patients with body weight above 20 kg can be dosed with either tablets or oral solution [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Only whole tablets should be administered.

2.5 Dosage Adjustments in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment

Levetiracetam dosing must be individualized according to the patient’s renal function status. Recommended dosage adjustments for adults are shown in Table 1. In order to calculate the dose recommended for patients with renal impairment, creatinine clearance adjusted for body surface area must be calculated. To do this an estimate of the patient’s creatinine clearance (CLcr) in mL/min must first be calculated using the following formula:

CLcr =

[140 - age (years)] x weight (kg) (x 0.85 for female patients)

-----------------------------------------

72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Then CLcr is adjusted for body surface area (BSA) as follows:

CLcr (mL/min/1.73m2) =

CLcr (mL/min)

----------------------------

x 1.73

BSA subject (m2)
Table 1: Dosing Adjustment Regimen for Adult Patients with Renal Impairment * Following dialysis, a 250 to 500 mg supplemental dose is recommended.
Group

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2)

Dosage (mg)

Frequency

Normal

> 80

500 to 1,500

Every 12 hours

Mild

50 to 80

500 to 1,000

Every 12 hours

Moderate

30 to 50

250 to 750

Every 12 hours

Severe

< 30

250 to 500

Every 12 hours

ESRD patients using dialysis

------

500 to 1,000*

Every 24 hours*
Escitalopram

Escitalopram

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF MINOCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS.

Minocycline hydrochloride capsules may be taken with or without food (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Ingestion of adequate amounts of fluids along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline-class is recommended to reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. The capsules should be swallowed whole.

For Pediatric Patients Above 8 Years of Age

Usual pediatric dose: 4 mg/kg initially followed by 2 mg/kg every 12 hours, not to exceed the usual adult dose.

Adults

The usual dosage of minocycline hydrochloride capsules is 200 mg initially followed by 100 mg every 12 hours. Alternatively, if more frequent doses are preferred, two or four 50 mg capsules may be given initially followed by one 50 mg capsule 4 times daily.

Uncomplicated gonococcal infections other than urethritis and anorectal infections in men: 200 mg initially, followed by 100 mg every 12 hours for a minimum of 4 days, with post-therapy cultures within 2 to 3 days.

In the treatment of uncomplicated gonococcal urethritis in men, 100 mg every 12 hours for 5 days is recommended.

For the treatment of syphilis, the usual dosage of minocycline hydrochloride capsules should be administered over a period of 10 to 15 days. Close follow-up, including laboratory tests, is recommended.

In the treatment of meningococcal carrier state, the recommended dosage is 100 mg every 12 hours for 5 days.

Mycobacterium marinum infections: Although optimal doses have not been established, 100 mg every 12 hours for 6 to 8 weeks have been used successfully in a limited number of cases.

Uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infection in adults caused by Chlamydia trachomatis or Ureaplasma urealyticum: 100 mg orally, every 12 hours for at least 7 days.

Ingestion of adequate amounts of fluids along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline-class is recommended to reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration.

The pharmacokinetics of minocycline in patients with renal impairment (CLCR < 80mL/min) have not been fully characterized. Current data are insufficient to determine if a dosage adjustment is warranted. The total daily dosage should not exceed 200 mg in 24 hours. However, due to the anti-anabolic effect of tetracyclines, BUN and creatinine should be monitored (see WARNINGS).
Cyproheptadine Hydrochl...

Cyproheptadine Hydrochloride

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED ACCORDING TO THE NEEDS AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

Each tablet contains 4 mg of cyproheptadine hydrochloride.

Pediatric Patients

Age 2 to 6 years

The total daily dosage for pediatric patients may be calculated on the basis of body weight or body area using approximately 0.25 mg/kg/day or 8 mg per square meter of body surface (8 mg/m2).

The usual dose is 2 mg (½ tablet) two or three times a day, adjusted as necessary to the size and response of the patient. The dose is not to exceed 12 mg a day.

Age 7 to 14 years

The usual dose is 4 mg (1 tablet) two or three times a day adjusted as necessary to the size and response of the patient. The dose is not to exceed 16 mg a day.

Adults

The total daily dose for adults should not exceed 0.5 mg/kg/day. The therapeutic range is 4 to 20 mg a day, with the majority of patients requiring 12 to 16 mg a day. An occasional patient may require as much as 32 mg a day for adequate relief. It is suggested that dosage be initiated with 4 mg (1 tablet) three times a day and adjusted according to the size and response of the patient.
Mycophenolate Mofetil C...

Mycophenolate Mofetil Capsule Mycophenolate Mofetil

Renal Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1 g administered orally twice a day (daily dose of 2 g) is recommended for use in renal transplant patients. Although a dose of 1.5 g administered twice daily (daily dose of 3 g) was used in clinical trials and was shown to be safe and effective, no efficacy advantage could be established for renal transplant patients. Patients receiving 2 g/day of mycophenolate mofetil demonstrated an overall better safety profile than did patients receiving 3 g/day of mycophenolate mofetil.

Pediatrics (3 Months to 18 Years of Age)

The recommended dose of mycophenolate mofetil oral suspension is 600 mg/m2 administered twice daily (up to a maximum daily dose of 2 g/10 mL oral suspension). Patients with a body surface area of 1.25 m2 to 1.5 m2 may be dosed with mycophenolate mofetil capsules at a dose of 750 mg twice daily (1.5 g daily dose). Patients with a body surface area > 1.5 m2 may be dosed with mycophenolate mofetil capsules or tablets at a dose of 1 g twice daily (2 g daily dose).

Cardiac Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1.5 g bid oral (daily dose of 3 g) is recommended for use in adult cardiac transplant patients.

Hepatic Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1.5 g bid oral (daily dose of 3 g) is recommended for use in adult hepatic transplant patients.

Mycophenolate Mofetil Capsules and Tablets

The initial oral dose of mycophenolate mofetil capsules or mycophenolate mofetil tablets should be given as soon as possible following renal, cardiac or hepatic transplantation. Food had no effect on MPA AUC, but has been shown to decrease MPA Cmax by 40%. Therefore, it is recommended that mycophenolate mofetil capsules and mycophenolate mofetil tablets be administered on an empty stomach. However, in stable renal transplant patients, mycophenolate mofetil capsules and mycophenolate mofetil tablets may be administered with food if necessary.

Patients should be instructed to take a missed dose as soon as they remember, except if it is near the next scheduled dose, and then continue to take mycophenolate mofetil at the usual times.

Note:

If required, mycophenolate mofetil oral suspension can be administered via a nasogastric tube with a minimum size of 8 French (minimum 1.7 mm interior diameter).

Patients With Hepatic Impairment

No dose adjustments are recommended for renal patients with severe hepatic parenchymal disease. However, it is not known whether dose adjustments are needed for hepatic disease with other etiologies (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics).

No data are available for cardiac transplant patients with severe hepatic parenchymal disease.

Geriatrics

The recommended oral dose of 1 g bid for renal transplant patients, 1.5 g bid for cardiac transplant patients, and 1.5 g bid administered orally in hepatic transplant patients is appropriate for elderly patients (see PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use).

Dosage Adjustments

In renal transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment (GFR < 25 mL/min/1.73 m2) outside the immediate posttransplant period, doses of mycophenolate mofetil capsules or mycophenolate mofetil tablets greater than 1 g administered twice a day should be avoided. These patients should also be carefully observed. No dose adjustments are needed in renal transplant patients experiencing delayed graft function postoperatively (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics and PRECAUTIONS, Patients With Renal Impairment).

No data are available for cardiac or hepatic transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment. Mycophenolate mofetil capsules and mycophenolate mofetil tablets may be used for cardiac or hepatic transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment if the potential benefits outweigh the potential risks.

If neutropenia develops (ANC < 1.3 x 103/µL), dosing with mycophenolate mofetil capsules and mycophenolate mofetil tablets should be interrupted or the dose reduced, appropriate diagnostic tests performed, and the patient managed appropriately (see WARNINGS, Neutropenia; ADVERSE REACTIONS; and PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests).
Vancomycin Hydrochlorid...

Vancomycin Hydrochloride

2.1 Dosage for Postherpetic Neuralgia

In adults with postherpetic neuralgia, gabapentin tablets may be initiated on Day 1 as a single 300 mg dose, on Day 2 as 600 mg/day (300 mg two times a day), and on Day 3 as 900 mg/day (300 mg three times a day). The dose can subsequently be titrated up as needed for pain relief to a dose of 1800 mg/day (600 mg three times a day). In clinical studies, efficacy was demonstrated over a range of doses from 1800 mg/day to 3600 mg/day with comparable effects across the dose range; however, in these clinical studies, the additional benefit of using doses greater than 1800 mg/day was not demonstrated.

2.2 Dosage for Epilepsy with Partial Onset Seizures

Patients 12 years of age and above

The starting dose is 300 mg three times a day. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin tablets is 300 mg to 600 mg three times a day. Dosages up to 2400 mg/day have been well tolerated in long-term clinical studies. Doses of 3600 mg/day have also been administered to a small number of patients for a relatively short duration, and have been well tolerated. Administer gabapentin tablets three times a day using 600 mg or 800 mg tablets. The maximum time between doses should not exceed 12 hours.

Pediatric Patients Age 3 to 11 years

The starting dose range is 10 mg/kg/day to 15 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses, and the recommended maintenance dose reached by upward titration over a period of approximately 3 days. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin tablets in patients 3 to 4 years of age is 40 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses. The recommended maintenance dose of gabapentin tablets in patients 5 to 11 years of age is 25 mg/kg/day to 35 mg/kg/day, given in three divided doses. Gabapentin may be administered as the oral solution, capsule, or tablet, or using combinations of these formulations. Dosages up to 50 mg/kg/day have been well tolerated in a long-term clinical study. The maximum time interval between doses should not exceed 12 hours.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage adjustment in patients 12 years of age and older with renal impairment or undergoing hemodialysis is recommended, as follows (see dosing recommendations above for effective doses in each indication):
Table 1: Gabapentin Tablets Dosage Based on Renal Function * For patients with creatinine clearance <15 mL/min, reduce daily dose in proportion to creatinine clearance (e.g., patients with a creatinine clearance of 7.5 mL/min should receive one-half the daily dose that patients with a creatinine clearance of 15 mL/min receive). † Patients on hemodialysis should receive maintenance doses based on estimates of creatinine clearance as indicated in the upper portion of the table and a supplemental post-hemodialysis dose administered after each 4 hours of hemodialysis as indicated in the lower portion of the table.
Renal Function Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Total Daily Dose Range (mg/day)

Dose Regimen (mg)

≥ 60

900 to 3600

300 TID

400 TID

600 TID

800 TID

1200 TID

>30 to 59

400 to 1400

200 BID

300 BID

400 BID

500 BID

700 BID

>15 to 29

200 to 700

200 QD

300 QD

400 QD

500 QD

700 QD

15*

100 to 300

100 QD

125 QD

150 QD

200 QD

300 QD

Post-Hemodialysis Supplemental Dose (mg)†

Hemodialysis

125†

150†

200†

250†

350†

TID = Three times a day; BID = Two times a day; QD = Single daily dose

Creatinine clearance (CLCr) is difficult to measure in outpatients. In patients with stable renal function, creatinine clearance can be reasonably well estimated using the equation of Cockcroft and Gault:

The use of gabapentin in patients less than 12 years of age with compromised renal function has not been studied.

2.4 Dosage in Elderly

Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and dose should be adjusted based on creatinine clearance values in these patients.

2.5 Administration Information

Administer gabapentin tablets orally with or without food.

Inform patients that, should they divide the scored 600 mg or 800 mg gabapentin tablet in order to administer a half-tablet, they should take the unused half-tablet as the next dose. Half-tablets not used within 28 days of dividing the scored tablet should be discarded.

If the gabapentin tablets dose is reduced, discontinued, or substituted with an alternative medication, this should be done gradually over a minimum of 1 week (a longer period may be needed at the discretion of the prescriber).
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam extended-release tablets are administered once daily.

Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg once daily. The once daily dosage may be adjusted in increments of 1000 mg every 2 weeks to a maximum recommended once daily dose of 3000 mg.

2.1 Adult Patients With Impaired Renal Function

Levetiracetam extended-release tablet dosing must be individualized according to the patient's renal function status. Recommended doses and adjustment for dose for adults are shown in Table 1. In order to calculate the dose recommended for patients with renal impairment, creatinine clearance adjusted for body surface area must be calculated. To do this, an estimate of the patient's creatinine clearance (CLcr) in mL/min must first be calculated using the following formula:
Table 1: Dosing Adjustment Regimen For Adult Patients With Impaired Renal Function
Group

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2)

Dosage (mg)

Frequency

Normal

> 80

1000 to 3000

Every 24 hours

Mild

50 to 80

1000 to 2000

Every 24 hours

Moderate

30 to 50

500 to 1500

Every 24 hours

Severe

< 30

500 to 1000

Every 24 hours
Buproban

Buproban

2.1 Usual Dosage

Treatment with BUPROBAN® should be initiated before the patient's planned quit day, while the patient is still smoking, because it takes approximately 1 week of treatment to achieve steady-state blood levels of bupropion. The patient should set a "target quit date" within the first 2 weeks of treatment with BUPROBAN®.

Dosing: To minimize the risk of seizure:
Begin dosing with one 150-mg tablet per day for 3 days. Increase dose to 300 mg/day given as one 150-mg tablet twice each day with an interval of at least 8 hours between each dose. Do not exceed 300 mg/day.
BUPROBAN® should be swallowed whole and not crushed, divided, or chewed, as this may lead to an increased risk of adverse effects including seizures [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

BUPROBAN® may be taken with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Duration of Treatment

Treatment with BUPROBAN® should be continued for 7 to 12 weeks. If the patient has not quit smoking after 7 to 12 weeks, it is unlikely that he or she will quit during that attempt so treatment with BUPROBAN® should probably be discontinued and the treatment plan reassessed. The goal of therapy with BUPROBAN® is complete abstinence.

Discuss discontinuing treatment with BUPROBAN® after 12 weeks if the patient feels ready but consider whether the patient may benefit from ongoing treatment. Patients who successfully quit after 12 weeks of treatment but do not feel ready to discontinue treatment should be considered for ongoing therapy with BUPROBAN®; longer treatment should be guided by the relative benefits and risks for individual patients.

It is important that patients continue to receive counseling and support throughout treatment with BUPROBAN® and for a period of time thereafter.

2.3 Individualization of Therapy

Patients are more likely to quit smoking and remain abstinent if they are seen frequently and receive support from their physicians or other healthcare professionals. It is important to ensure that patients read the instructions provided to them and have their questions answered. Physicians should review the patient's overall smoking cessation program that includes treatment with BUPROBAN®. Patients should be advised of the importance of participating in the behavioral interventions, counseling, and/or support services to be used in conjunction with BUPROBAN® [see Medication Guide].

Patients who fail to quit smoking during an attempt may benefit from interventions to improve their chances for success on subsequent attempts. Patients who are unsuccessful should be evaluated to determine why they failed. A new quit attempt should be encouraged when factors that contributed to failure can be eliminated or reduced, and conditions are more favorable.

2.4 Maintenance

Tobacco dependence is a chronic condition. Some patients may need on-going treatment. Whether to continue treatment with BUPROBAN® for periods longer than 12 weeks for smoking cessation must be determined for individual patients.

2.5 Combination Treatment With BUPROBAN® and a Nicotine Transdermal System (NTS)

Combination treatment with BUPROBAN® and NTS may be prescribed for smoking cessation. The prescriber should review the complete prescribing information for both BUPROBAN® and NTS before using combination treatment [see Clinical Studies (14)]. Monitoring for treatment-emergent hypertension in patients treated with the combination of BUPROBAN® and NTS is recommended.

2.6 Dose Adjustment in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 7 to 15), the maximum dose should not exceed 150 mg every other day. In patients with mild hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 5 to 6), consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of dosing [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.7 Dose Adjustment in Patients With Renal Impairment

Consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of BUPROBAN® in patients with renal impairment (Glomerular Filtration Rate <90 mL/min) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.8 Use of BUPROBAN® With Reversible MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start BUPROBAN® in a patient who is being treated with a reversible MAOI such as linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. Drug interactions can increase the risk of hypertensive reactions [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)]. In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with BUPROBAN® may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of hypertensive reactions in a particular patient, BUPROBAN® should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with BUPROBAN® may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue.

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with BUPROBAN® is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of a drug interaction with such use [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.6)].
Harmon Face Values Mino...

Harmon Face Values Minoxidil

Esomeprazole Magnesium Delayed-Release Capsules are supplied as delayed-release capsules for oral administration. The recommended dosages are outlined in Table 1. Esomeprazole Magnesium Delayed-Release Capsules should be taken at least one hour before meals.

The duration of proton pump inhibitor administration should be based on available safety and efficacy data specific to the defined indication and dosing frequency, as described in the prescribing information, and individual patient medical needs. Proton pump inhibitor treatment should only be initiated and continued if the benefits outweigh the risks of treatment.

Table 1: Recommended Dosage Schedule of Esomeprazole Magnesium Delayed-Release Capsules

Indication

Dose

Frequency

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

20 mg or 40 mg

Once Daily for 4 to 8 weeks*

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

20 mg

Once Daily**

Symptomatic Gastroesophageal

Reflux Disease

20 mg

Once Daily for 4 Weeks***

Pediatric GERD

12 to 17 Year Olds

Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

20 mg or 40 mg

Once Daily for 4 to 8 Weeks

Symptomatic GERD

20 mg

Once Daily for 4 Weeks

1 to 11 Year Olds+

Short-term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD

10 mg

Once Daily for up to 8 Weeks

Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

weight < 20 kg

10 mg

Once Daily for 8 Weeks

weight ≥ 20 kg

10 mg or 20 mg

Once Daily for 8 Weeks

Risk Reduction of NSAID-Associated Gastric Ulcer

20 mg or 40 mg

Once Daily for up to 6 months**

H. pyloriEradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy:

Esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules

40 mg

Once Daily for 10 Days

Amoxicillin

1000 mg

Twice Daily for 10 Days

Clarithromycin

500 mg

Twice Daily for 10 Days

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome

40mg†

‡Twice Daily

* [See Clinical Studies (14.1).] The majority of patients are healed within 4 to 8 weeks. For patients who do not heal after 4 to 8 weeks, an additional 4 to 8 weeks of treatment may be considered.

** Controlled studies did not extend beyond six months.

*** If symptoms do not resolve completely after 4 weeks, an additional 4 weeks of treatment may be considered.

+ Doses over 1 mg/kg/day have not been studied.

† The dosage of esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. Dosage regimens should be adjusted to individual patient needs.

‡ Doses up to 240 mg daily have been administered [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Please refer to amoxicillin and clarithromycin prescribing information for Contraindications, Warnings, and dosing in elderly and renally-impaired patients.

Special Populations

Hepatic Insufficiency

In patients with mild to moderate liver impairment (Child Pugh Classes A and B), no dosage adjustment is necessary. For patients with severe liver impairment (Child Pugh Class C), a dose of 20 mg of esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules should not be exceeded [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Directions for use specific to the route and available methods of administration for each of these dosage forms are presented in Table 2.

Table 2: Administration Options

Administration Options

(See text following table for additional instructions.)

Dosage Form

Route

Options

Delayed-Release Capsules

Oral

Capsule can be swallowed whole.

-or-

Capsule can be opened and mixed with applesauce.

Delayed-Release Capsules

Nasogastric Tube

Capsule can be opened and the intact granules emptied into a syringe and delivered through the nasogastric tube.

Esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules should be swallowed whole.

Alternatively, for patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, one tablespoon of applesauce can be added to an empty bowl and the esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsule can be opened, and the granules inside the capsule carefully emptied onto the applesauce. The granules should be mixed with the applesauce and then swallowed immediately: do not store for future use. The applesauce used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. The granules should not be chewed or crushed. If the granules/applesauce mixture is not used in its entirety, the remaining mixture should be discarded immediately.

For patients who have a nasogastric tube in place, esomeprazole magnesium delayed-release capsules can be opened and the intact granules emptied into a 60 mL catheter tipped syringe and mixed with 50 mL of water. It is important to only use a catheter tipped syringe when administering esomeprazole magnesium through a nasogastric tube. Replace the plunger and shake the syringe vigorously for 15 seconds. Hold the syringe with the tip up and check for granules remaining in the tip. Attach the syringe to a nasogastric tube and deliver the contents of the syringe through the nasogastric tube into the stomach. After administering the granules, the nasogastric tube should be flushed with additional water. Do not administer the granules if they have dissolved or disintegrated.

The mixture must be used immediately after preparation.
Dexmethylphenidate Hydr...

Dexmethylphenidate Hydrochloride

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules are for oral administration once daily in the morning.

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be swallowed as whole capsules or alternatively may be administered by sprinkling the capsule contents on a small amount of applesauce (see specific instructions below). Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules and/or their contents should not be crushed, chewed, or divided.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

2.1 Patients New to Methylphenidate

The recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for patients who are not currently taking dexmethylphenidate or racemic methylphenidate, or for patients who are on stimulants other than methylphenidate, is 5 mg/day for pediatric patients and 10 mg/day for adult patients.

Dosage may be adjusted in 5 mg increments for pediatric patients and in 10 mg increments for adult patients. In general, dosage adjustments may proceed at approximately weekly intervals. The patient should be observed for a sufficient duration at a given dose to ensure that a maximal benefit has been achieved before a dose increase is considered. In dose-response (fixed-dose) studies (pediatric from 10 to 30 mg/day and adult from 20 to 40 mg/day), all doses were effective vs. placebo. There was no clear finding, however, of greater average benefits for the higher doses compared to the lower doses. Adverse events and discontinuations, however, were dose-related. Doses above 30 mg/day in pediatrics and 40 mg/day in adults have not been studied and are not recommended.

2.2 Patients Currently Using Methylphenidate

For patients currently using methylphenidate, the recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules is half the total daily dose of racemic methylphenidate. Patients currently using dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets may be switched to the same daily dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

2.3 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with periods off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

2.4 Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a 1 month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Famotidine

Famotidine

adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water. Do not chew. to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water at any time from 15 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn do not use more than 2 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Lansoprazole Amoxicilli...

Lansoprazole Amoxicillin Clarithromycin Kit

H. pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

The recommended adult oral dose is 30 mg lansoprazole, 1 g amoxicillin, and 500 mg clarithromycin administered together twice daily (morning and evening) for 10 or 14 days (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules USP, 30 mg, amoxicillin capsules USP, 500 mg, and clarithromycin tablets USP, 500 mg are not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance less than 30 mL/min.
Finasteride

Finasteride

Finasteride tablets may be administered with or without meals.

2.1 Monotherapy

The recommended dose of finasteride tablets is one tablet (5 mg) taken once a day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Combination With Alpha-Blocker

The recommended dose of finasteride tablets is one tablet (5 mg) taken once a day in combination with the alpha-blocker doxazosin [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].
Germ-x

Germ-x

Levalbuterol inhalation solution is for oral inhalation only. Administer by nebulization using a standard jet nebulizer (with a face mask or mouthpiece) connected to an air compressor. Do not exceed recommended dose.

Children 6 to 11 years old: The recommended dosage of levalbuterol inhalation solution for patients 6 to 11 years old is 0.31 mg administered three times a day, by nebulization. Routine dosing should not exceed 0.63 mg three times a day.

Adults and Adolescents ≥ 12 years old: The recommended starting dosage of levalbuterol inhalation solution for patients 12 years of age and older is 0.63 mg administered three times a day, every 6 to 8 hours, by nebulization.

Patients 12 years of age and older with more severe asthma or patients who do not respond adequately to a dose of 0.63 mg of levalbuterol inhalation solution may benefit from a dosage of 1.25 mg three times a day.

Patients receiving the highest dose of levalbuterol inhalation solution should be monitored closely for adverse systemic effects, and the risks of such effects should be balanced against the potential for improved efficacy.

The use of levalbuterol inhalation solution can be continued as medically indicated to help control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. During this time, most patients gain optimal benefit from regular use of the inhalation solution.

If a previously effective dosage regimen fails to provide the usual response this may be a marker of destabilization of asthma and requires reevaluation of the patient and the treatment regimen, giving special consideration to the possible need for anti-inflammatory treatment, e.g., corticosteroids.

The drug compatibility (physical and chemical), efficacy, and safety of levalbuterol inhalation solution when mixed with other drugs in a nebulizer have not been established.

The safety and efficacy of levalbuterol inhalation solution have been established in clinical trials when administered using the PARI LC Jet™ and PARI LC Plus™ nebulizers, and the PARI Master® Dura-Neb® 2000 and Dura-Neb® 3000 compressors. The safety and efficacy of levalbuterol inhalation solution when administered using other nebulizer systems have not been established.
Nefazodone Hydrochlorid...

Nefazodone Hydrochloride

When deciding among the alternative treatments available for depression, the prescriber should consider the risk of hepatic failure associated with nefazodone hydrochloride treatment (see WARNINGS).

Initial Treatment

The recommended starting dose for nefazodone hydrochloride tablets USP is 200 mg/day, administered in two divided doses (BID). In the controlled clinical trials establishing the antidepressant efficacy of nefazodone, the effective dose range was generally 300 to 600 mg/day. Consequently, most patients, depending on tolerability and the need for further clinical effect, should have their dose increased. Dose increases should occur in increments of 100 mg/day to 200 mg/day, again on a BID schedule, at intervals of no less than 1 week. As with all antidepressants, several weeks on treatment may be required to obtain a full antidepressant response.

Dosage for Elderly or Debilitated Patients

The recommended initial dose for elderly or debilitated patients is 100 mg/day, administered in two divided doses (BID). These patients often have reduced nefazodone clearance and/or increased sensitivity to the side effects of CNS-active drugs. It may also be appropriate to modify the rate of subsequent dose titration. As steady-state plasma levels do not change with age, the final target dose based on a careful assessment of the patient’s clinical response may be similar in healthy younger and older patients.

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the depressed patient should be treated with nefazodone. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment for acute episodes of depression should continue for up to 6 months or longer. Whether the dose of antidepressant needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain euthymia is unknown. Systematic evaluation of the efficacy of nefazodone has shown that efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 36 weeks following 16 weeks of open-label acute treatment (treated for 52 weeks total) at dosages that averaged 438 mg/day. For most patients, their maintenance dose was that associated with response during acute treatment (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). The safety of nefazodone in long-term use is supported by data from both double-blind and open-label trials involving more than 250 patients treated for at least one year.

Switching Patients to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of therapy with nefazodone. In addition, at least 7 days should be allowed after stopping nefazodone before starting an MAOI.
Mimvey

Mimvey

Use of estrogen, alone or in combination with a progestin, should be with the lowest effective dose and for the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals and risks for the individual woman. Patients should be re-evaluated periodically as clinically appropriate (e.g., 3 to 6 month intervals) to determine if treatment is still necessary (see BOXED WARNINGS and WARNINGS). For women who have a uterus, adequate diagnostic measures, such as endometrial sampling, when indicated, should be undertaken to rule out malignancy in cases of undiagnosed persistent or recurring abnormal vaginal bleeding.

Mimvey and Mimvey Lo therapy consists of a single tablet to be taken once daily.
For the treatment of moderate to severe vasomotor symptoms associated with menopause, and the prevention of postmenopausal osteoporosis. When prescribing solely for the prevention of postmenopausal osteoporosis, therapy should only be considered for women at significant risk of osteoporosis and non-estrogen medications should be carefully considered. Mimvey 1 mg/0.5 mg Mimvey Lo 0.5 mg/0.1 mg For the treatment of moderate to severe symptoms of vulvar and vaginal atrophy. When used solely for the treatment of symptoms of vulvar and vaginal atrophy, topical vaginal products should be considered. Mimvey 1 mg/0.5 mg
Patients should be started at the lowest dose.
Ramipril

Ramipril

2.1 Hypertension

The recommended initial dose for patients not receiving a diuretic is 2.5 mg once a day. Adjust dose according to blood pressure response. The usual maintenance dosage range is 2.5 mg to 20 mg per day administered as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients, consider an increase in dosage or twice daily administration. If blood pressure is not controlled with ramipril capsules alone, a diuretic can be added.

2.3 Heart Failure Post-Myocardial Infarction

For the treatment of post-myocardial infarction patients who have shown signs of congestive heart failure, the recommended starting dose of ramipril capsules is 2.5 mg twice daily (5 mg per day). A patient who becomes hypotensive at this dose may be switched to 1.25 mg twice daily. After one week at the starting dose, increase dose (if tolerated) toward a target dose of 5 mg twice daily, with dosage increases being about 3 weeks apart.

After the initial dose of ramipril capsules, observe the patient under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. If possible, reduce the dose of any concomitant diuretic as this may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of ramipril capsules does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension [see Warnings and Precautions (5.5), Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.4 General Dosing Information

Generally, swallow ramipril capsules whole. The ramipril capsule can also be opened and the contents sprinkled on a small amount (about 4 oz.) of applesauce or mixed in 4 oz. (120 mL) of water or apple juice. To be sure that ramipril is not lost when such a mixture is used, consume the mixture in its entirety. The described mixtures can be pre-prepared and stored for up to 24 hours at room temperature or up to 48 hours under refrigeration.

Concomitant administration of ramipril capsules with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics can lead to increases of serum potassium [see Warnings and Precautions (5.8)].

2.5 Dosage Adjustment

Renal Impairment

Establish baseline renal function in patients initiating ramipril capsules. Usual regimens of therapy with ramipril capsules may be followed in patients with estimated creatinine clearance > 40 mL/min. However, in patients with worse impairment, 25% of the usual dose of ramipril is expected to produce full therapeutic levels of ramiprilat [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Hypertension

For patients with hypertension and renal impairment, the recommended initial dose is 1.25 mg ramipril capsules once daily. Dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum total daily dose of 5 mg.

Heart Failure Post-Myocardial Infarction

For patients with heart failure and renal impairment, the recommended initial dose is 1.25 mg ramipril capsules once daily. The dose may be increased to 1.25 mg twice daily, and up to a maximum dose of 2.5 mg twice daily depending on clinical response and tolerability.

Volume Depletion or Renal Artery Stenosis

Blood pressure decreases associated with any dose of ramipril capsules depend, in part, on the presence or absence of volume depletion (e.g., past and current diuretic use) or the presence or absence of renal artery stenosis. If such circumstances are suspected to be present, initiate dosing at 1.25 mg once daily. Adjust dosage according to blood pressure response.
Venlafaxine Hydrochlori...

Venlafaxine Hydrochloride

Initial Treatment

The recommended starting dose for venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets is 75 mg/day, administered in two or three divided doses, taken with food. Depending on tolerability and the need for further clinical effect, the dose may be increased to 150 mg/day. If needed, the dose should be further increased up to 225 mg/day. When increasing the dose, increments of up to 75 mg/day should be made at intervals of no less than 4 days. In outpatient settings there was no evidence of usefulness of doses greater than 225 mg/day for moderately depressed patients, but more severely depressed inpatients responded to a mean dose of 350 mg/day. Certain patients, including more severely depressed patients, may therefore respond more to higher doses, up to a maximum of 375 mg/day, generally in three divided doses (see PRECAUTIONS, General, Use in Patients With Concomitant Illness).

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to venlafaxine tablets, other SNRIs, or SSRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with venlafaxine tablets during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Dosage for Patients With Hepatic Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance and increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with hepatic cirrhosis and mild and moderate hepatic impairment compared to normal subjects (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between subjects with cirrhosis, it may be necessary to reduce the dose even more than 50%, and individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients.

Dosage for Patients With Renal Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance for venlafaxine and the increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with renal impairment (GFR = 10 to 70 mL/min) compared to normals (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 25% in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. It is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients undergoing hemodialysis. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between patients with renal impairment, individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients.

Dosage for Elderly Patients

No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients on the basis of age. As with any antidepressant, however, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. In one study, in which patients responding during 8 weeks of acute treatment with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules (75, 150, or 225 mg/day, qAM) during 26 weeks of maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, longer-term efficacy was demonstrated. A second longer-term study has demonstrated the efficacy of venlafaxine tablets in maintaining an antidepressant response in patients with recurrent depression who had responded and continued to be improved during an initial 26 weeks of treatment and were then randomly assigned to placebo or venlafaxine tablets for periods of up to 52 weeks on the same dose (100 to 200 mg/day, on a b.i.d. schedule) (see CLINICAL TRIALS). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether or not the dose of venlafaxine tablets/venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

Discontinuing Venlafaxine Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of venlafaxine tablets, other SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

Switching a Patient to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with venlafaxine tablets. Conversely, at least 7 days should be allowed after stopping venlafaxine tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Venlafaxine Tablets With Other MAOls, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start venlafaxine tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with venlafaxine tablets may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, venlafaxine tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 7 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with venlafaxine tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with venlafaxine tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Doxepin Hydrochloride S...

Doxepin Hydrochloride Solution

For most patients with illness of mild to moderate severity, a starting daily dose of 75 mg is recommended. Dosage may subsequently be increased or decreased at appropriate intervals and according to individual response. The usual optimum dose range is 75 mg/day to 150 mg/day.

In more severely ill patients, higher doses may be required with subsequent gradual increase to 300 mg/day if necessary. Additional therapeutic effect is rarely to be obtained by exceeding a dose of 300 mg/day.

In patients with very mild symptomatology or emotional symptoms accompanying organic disease, lower doses may suffice. Some of these patients have been controlled on doses as low as 25 to 50 mg/day.

The total daily dosage of doxepin hydrochloride may be given on a divided or once-a-day dosage schedule. If the once-a-day schedule is employed, the maximum recommended dose is 150 mg/day. This dose may be given at bedtime.

Anti-anxiety effect is apparent before the antidepressant effect. Optimal antidepressant effect may not be evident for two to three weeks.
Fluoxetine

Fluoxetine

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once-a-day (morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon) and should not exceed a maximum dose of 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day.

However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. A dose increase to 20 mg/day may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed.

All patients — As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment — It is generally agreed that acute episodes of Major Depressive Disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Daily Dosing — Systematic evaluation of fluoxetine in adult patients has shown that its efficacy in Major Depressive Disorder is maintained for periods of up to 38 weeks following 12 weeks of open-label acute treatment (50 weeks total) at a dose of 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA) — Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.2 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fixed daily doses of 20, 40, or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. In one of these studies, no dose-response relationship for effectiveness was demonstrated. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose. Since there was a suggestion of a possible dose-response relationship for effectiveness in the second study, a dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until 5 weeks of treatment or longer.

Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once daily (i.e., morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon). A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have been well tolerated in open studies of OCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

In adolescents and higher weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 2 weeks, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended.

In lower weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 30 mg/day is recommended. Experience with daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of fluoxetine after 13 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, adult patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to an additional 6 months without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment.

2.3 Bulimia Nervosa

Initial Treatment — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Bulimia Nervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 or 60 mg, or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Only the 60 mg dose was statistically significantly superior to placebo in reducing the frequency of binge-eating and vomiting. Consequently, the recommended dose is 60 mg/day, administered in the morning. For some patients it may be advisable to titrate up to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with bulimia.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — Systematic evaluation of continuing fluoxetine 60 mg/day for periods of up to 52 weeks in patients with bulimia who have responded while taking fluoxetine 60 mg/day during an 8 week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Panic Disorder

Initial Treatment — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Panic Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After one week, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. The most frequently administered dose in the 2 flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if no clinical improvement is observed. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in patients with Panic Disorder.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, panic disorder is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women — When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatric — A lower or less frequent dosage should be considered for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)]

Hepatic Impairment — As with many other medications, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness — Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15)].

2.9 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.10 Use of Fluoxetine With Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluoxetine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluoxetine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluoxetine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluoxetine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluoxetine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Equaline Nicotine

Equaline Nicotine

There is intersubject variation in the pharmacokinetics, clinical efficacy, and incidence of side effects with acitretin capsules. A number of the more common side effects are dose-related. Individualization of dosage is required to achieve sufficient therapeutic response while minimizing side effects. Therapy with acitretin capsules should be initiated at 25 to 50 mg per day, given as a single dose with the main meal. Maintenance doses of 25 to 50 mg per day may be given dependent upon an individual patient’s response to initial treatment. Relapses may be treated as outlined for initial therapy.

When acitretin capsules are used with phototherapy, the prescriber should decrease the phototherapy dose, dependent on the patient’s individual response (see PRECAUTIONS).

Females who have taken TEGISON (etretinate) must continue to follow the contraceptive recommendations for TEGISON. TEGISON is no longer marketed in the U.S.; for information, call 1-888-838-2872.

Information for Pharmacists

Acitretin capsules must only be dispensed in no more than a monthly supply. An acitretin capsules Medication Guide must be given to the patient each time acitretin capsules are dispensed, as required by law.
Allergy Relief

Allergy Relief

BECAUSE OF THE UNIQUE PHARMACOKINETIC PROPERTIES, DIFFICULT DOSING SCHEDULE, AND SEVERITY OF THE SIDE EFFECTS IF PATIENTS ARE IMPROPERLY MONITORED, AMIODARONE HYDROCHLORIDE TABLETS SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED ONLY BY PHYSICIANS WHO ARE EXPERIENCED IN THE TREATMENT OF LIFE-THREATENING ARRHYTHMIAS WHO ARE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE RISKS AND BENEFITS OF AMIODARONE THERAPY, AND WHO HAVE ACCESS TO LABORATORY FACILITIES CAPABLE OF ADEQUATELY MONITORING THE EFFECTIVENESS AND SIDE EFFECTS OF TREATMENT.

In order to insure that an antiarrhythmic effect will be observed without waiting several months, loading doses are required. A uniform, optimal dosage schedule for administration of amiodarone hydrochloride tablets has not been determined. Because of the food effect on absorption, amiodarone hydrochloride tablets should be administered consistently with regard to meals (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Individual patient titration is suggested according to the following guidelines:

For life-threatening ventricular arrhythmias, such as ventricular fibrillation or hemodynamically unstable ventricular tachycardia:Close monitoring of the patients is indicated during the loading phase, particularly until risk of recurrent ventricular tachycardia or fibrillation has abated. Because of the serious nature of the arrhythmia and the lack of predictable time course of effect, loading should be performed in a hospital setting. Loading doses of 800 to 1,600 mg/day are required for 1 to 3 weeks (occasionally longer) until initial therapeutic response occurs. (Administration of amiodarone hydrochloride tablets in divided doses with meals is suggested for total daily doses of 1,000 mg or higher, or when gastrointestinal intolerance occurs.) If side effects become excessive, the dose should be reduced. Elimination of recurrence of ventricular fibrillation and tachycardia usually occurs within 1 to 3 weeks, along with reduction in complex and total ventricular ectopic beats.

Since grapefruit juice is known to inhibit CYP3A4-mediated metabolism of oral amiodarone in the intestinal mucosa, resulting in increased plasma levels of amiodarone, grapefruit juice should not be taken during treatment with oral amiodarone (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).

Upon starting amiodarone hydrochloride tablet therapy, an attempt should be made to gradually discontinue prior antiarrhythmic drugs (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). When adequate arrhythmia control is achieved, or if side effects become prominent, amiodarone hydrochloride tablet dose should be reduced to 600 to 800 mg/day for one month and then to the maintenance dose, usually 400 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Monitoring Effectiveness). Some patients may require larger maintenance doses, up to 600 mg/day, and some can be controlled on lower doses. Amiodarone hydrochloride tablets may be administered as a single daily dose, or in patients with severe gastrointestinal intolerance, as a b.i.d. dose. In each patient, the chronic maintenance dose should be determined according to antiarrhythmic effect as assessed by symptoms, Holter recordings, and/or programmed electrical stimulation and by patient tolerance. Plasma concentrations may be helpful in evaluating nonresponsiveness or unexpectedly severe toxicity (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

The lowest effective dose should be used to prevent the occurrence of side effects. In all instances, the physician must be guided by the severity of the individual patient’s arrhythmia and response to therapy.

When dosage adjustments are necessary, the patient should be closely monitored for an extended period of time because of the long and variable half-life of amiodarone and the difficulty in predicting the time required to attain a new steady-state level of drug. Dosage suggestions are summarized below:

Loading Dose

Adjustment and Maintenance Dose

(Daily)

(Daily)

Ventricular Arrhythmias

1 to 3 weeks

~1 month

usual maintenance

800 to 1,600 mg

600 to 800 mg

400 mg
Sheer Finish Tinted Moi...

Sheer Finish Tinted Moisturizer Light Spf 15

Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules are available in 15 mg and 30 mg strengths. Directions for use specific to the route and available methods of administration for this dosage form is presented below. Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules should be taken before eating. Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules SHOULD NOT BE CRUSHED OR CHEWED. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with lansoprazole.

2.1 Recommended Dose
* Please refer to amoxicillin and clarithromycin full prescribing information for CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS, and for information regarding dosing in elderly and renally-impaired patients. † Controlled studies did not extend beyond indicated duration. ‡ For patients who do not heal with lansoprazole delayed-release capsules for 8 weeks (5 to 10%), it may be helpful to give an additional 8 weeks of treatment. If there is a recurrence of erosive esophagitis, an additional 8 week course of lansoprazole delayed-release capsules may be considered. § The lansoprazole dose was increased (up to 30 mg twice daily) in some pediatric patients after 2 or more weeks of treatment if they remained symptomatic. For pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule please see Administration Options. ¶ Controlled studies did not extend beyond 12 months. # Varies with individual patient. Recommended adult starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 90 mg twice daily have been administered. Daily dose of greater than 120 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with lansoprazole for more than 4 years.
Indication

Recommended Dose

Frequency

Duodenal Ulcers

Short-Term Treatment

15 mg

Once daily for 4 weeks

Maintenance of Healed

15 mg

Once daily

H. pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence*

Triple Therapy:

Lansoprazole Delayed-Release Capsules

30 mg

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

Amoxicillin

1 gram

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

Clarithromycin

500 mg

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

Dual Therapy:

Lansoprazole Delayed-Release Capsules

30 mg

Three times daily (q8h) for 14 days

Amoxicillin

1 gram

Three times daily (q8h) for 14 days

Benign Gastric Ulcer

Short-Term Treatment

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

NSAID-associated Gastric Ulcer

Healing

30 mg

Once daily for 8 weeks†

Risk Reduction

15 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks†

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD

15 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks‡

Pediatric

(1 to 11 years of age)

Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD and Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis

≤ 30 kg

15 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks§

> 30 kg

30 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks§

(12 to 17 years of age)

Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD

Nonerosive GERD

15 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

Erosive Esophagitis

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

15 mg

Once daily¶

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome

60 mg

Once daily#

Patients should be instructed that if a dose is missed, it should be taken as soon as possible. However, if the next scheduled dose is due, the patient should not take the missed dose, and should be instructed to take the next dose on time. Patients should be instructed not to take 2 doses at one time to make up for a missed dose.

2.2 Special Populations

Renal impairment patients and geriatric patients do not require dosage adjustment. However, consider dose adjustment in patients with severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5, 8.6 and 8.7)].

2.3 Important Administration Information

Administration Options

Lansoprazole Delayed-Release Capsules - Oral Administration
• Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules should be swallowed whole. • Alternatively, for patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, lansoprazole delayed-release capsules can be opened and administered as follows: • Open capsule. • Sprinkle intact granules on one tablespoon of either applesauce, ENSURE ® pudding, cottage cheese, yogurt or strained pears. • Swallow immediately. • Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules may also be emptied into a small volume of either apple juice, orange juice or tomato juice and administered as follows: • Open capsule. • Sprinkle intact granules into a small volume of either apple juice, orange juice or tomato juice (60 mL - approximately 2 ounces). • Mix briefly. • Swallow immediately. • To ensure complete delivery of the dose, the glass should be rinsed with two or more volumes of juice and the contents swallowed immediately.
Lansoprazole Delayed-Release Capsules - Nasogastric Tube (≥ 16 French) Administration
• For patients who have a nasogastric tube in place, lansoprazole delayed-release capsules can be administered as follows: • Open capsule. • Mix intact granules into 40 mL of apple juice. DO NOT USE OTHER LIQUIDS. • Inject through the nasogastric tube into the stomach. • Flush with additional apple juice to clear the tube.
USE IN OTHER FOODS AND LIQUIDS HAS NOT BEEN STUDIED CLINICALLY AND IS THEREFORE NOT RECOMMENDED.
Mupirocin Ointment

Mupirocin Ointment

A small amount of mupirocin ointment should be applied to the affected area 3 times daily. The area treated may be covered with a gauze dressing if desired. Patients not showing a clinical response within 3 to 5 days should be re-evaluated.
Griseofulvin Suspension...

Griseofulvin Suspension

Accurate diagnosis of the infecting organism is essential. Identification should be made either by direct microscopic examination of a mounting of infected tissue in a solution of potassium hydroxide or by culture on an appropriate medium.

Medication must be continued until the infecting organism is completely eradicated as indicated by appropriate clinical or laboratory examination. Representative treatment periods are tinea capitis, 4 to 6 weeks; tinea corporis, 2 to 4 weeks; tinea pedis, 4 to 8 weeks; tinea unguium – depending on rate of growth – fingernails, at least 4 months; toenails, at least 6 months.

General measures in regard to hygiene should be observed to control sources of infection or reinfection. Concomitant use of appropriate topical agents is usually required, particularly in treatment of tinea pedis. In some forms of tinea pedis, yeasts and bacteria may be involved as well as dermatophytes. Griseofulvin will not eradicate these associated bacterial or yeast infections.

ADULTS: 0.5 g daily (125 mg q.i.d., 250 mg b.i.d., or 500 mg/day). Patients with less severe or 300 extensive infections may require less, whereas those with widespread lesions may require a starting dose of 0.75 g to 1 g/day. This may be reduced gradually to 0.5 g or less after a response has been noted. In all cases, the dosage should be individualized.

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS (older than 2 years): A dosage of 10 mg/kg daily is usually adequate (pediatric patients from 30 to 50 lb, 125 mg to 250 mg daily; pediatric patients over 50 lb, 250 mg to 500 mg daily, in divided doses). Dosage should be individualized, as with adults. Clinical relapse will occur if the medication is not continued until the infecting organism is eradicated.

Safety is not established at higher doses than recommended.
Serostim

Serostim

The dosage of mexiletine hydrochloride must be individualized on the basis of response and tolerance, both of which are dose-related. Administration with food or antacid is recommended. Initiate mexiletine therapy with 200 mg every eight hours when rapid control of arrhythmia is not essential. A minimum of two to three days between dose adjustments is recommended. Dose may be adjusted in 50 or 100 mg increments up or down.

As with any antiarrhythmic drug, clinical and electrocardiographic evaluation (including Holter monitoring if necessary for evaluation) are needed to determine whether the desired antiarrhythmic effect has been obtained and to guide titration and dose adjustment.

Satisfactory control can be achieved in most patients by 200 to 300 mg given every eight hours with food or antacid. If satisfactory response has not been achieved at 300 mg q8h, and the patient tolerates mexiletine well, a dose of 400 mg q8h may be tried. As the severity of CNS side effects increases with total daily dose, the dose should not exceed 1200 mg/day.

In general, patients with renal failure will require the usual doses of mexiletine hydrochloride. Patients with severe liver disease, however, may require lower doses and must be monitored closely. Similarly, marked right-sided congestive heart failure can reduce hepatic metabolism and reduce the needed dose. Plasma level may also be affected by certain concomitant drugs (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).

Loading Dose

When rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 400 mg of mexiletine hydrochloride may be administered, followed by a 200 mg dose in eight hours. Onset of therapeutic effect is usually observed within 30 minutes to two hours.

Q12H Dosage Schedule

Some patients responding to mexiletine may be transferred to a 12 hour dosage schedule to improve convenience and compliance. If adequate suppression is achieved on a mexiletine hydrochloride dose of 300 mg or less every eight hours, the same total daily dose may be given in divided doses every 12 hours while carefully monitoring the degree of suppression of ventricular ectopy. This dose may be adjusted up to a maximum of 450 mg every 12 hours to achieve the desired response.

Transferring to Mexiletine Hydrochloride

The following dosage schedule, based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data, is suggested for transferring patients from other Class I oral antiarrhythmic agents to mexiletine: mexiletine hydrochloride treatment may be initiated with a 200 mg dose, and titrated to response as described above, 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate, 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide, 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of disopryramide or 8 to 12 hours after the last dose of tocainide.

In patients in whom withdrawal of the previous antiarrhythmic agent is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, hospitalization of the patient is recommended.

When transferring from lidocaine to mexiletine, the lidocaine infusion should be stopped when the first oral dose of mexiletine hydrochloride is administered. The infusion line should be left open until suppression of the arrhythmia appears to be satisfactorily maintained. Consideration should be given to the similarity of the adverse effects of lidocaine and mexiletine and the possibility that they may be additive.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

2.1 Recommended Dosage

The recommended dosage of cilostazol tablets is 100 mg twice daily taken at least half an hour before or two hours after breakfast and dinner.

Patients may respond as early as 2 to 4 weeks after the initiation of therapy, but treatment for up to 12 weeks may be

needed before a beneficial effect is experienced. If symptoms are unimproved after 3 months, discontinue cilostazol tablets.

2.2 Dose Reduction With CYP3A4 and CYP2C19 Inhibitors

Reduce dose to 50 mg twice daily when coadministered with strong or moderate inhibitors of CYP3A4 (e.g.,

ketoconazole, itraconazole, erythromycin, and diltiazem) or inhibitors of CYP2C19 (e.g., ticlopidine, fluconazole, and

omeprazole) [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].
Tobramycin Solution

Tobramycin Solution

The recommended dosage for both adults and pediatric patients 6 years of age and older is 1 single-use ampule (300 mg) administered BID for 28 days. Dosage is not adjusted by weight. All patients should be administered 300 mg BID. The doses should be taken as close to 12 hours apart as possible; they should not be taken less than 6 hours apart.
Tobramycin inhalation solution is inhaled while the patient is sitting or standing upright and breathing normally through the mouthpiece of the nebulizer. Nose clips may help the patient breathe through the mouth. Tobramycin inhalation solution is administered BID in alternating periods of 28 days. After 28 days of therapy, patients should stop tobramycin inhalation solution therapy for the next 28 days, and then resume therapy for the next 28 day on/28 day off cycle. Tobramycin inhalation solution is supplied as a single-use ampule and is administered by inhalation, using a hand-held PARI LC PLUS™ Reusable Nebulizer with a DeVilbiss® Pulmo-Aide® compressor. Tobramycin inhalation solution is not for subcutaneous, intravenous or intrathecal administration.
Usage

Tobramycin inhalation solution is administered by inhalation over an approximately 15 minute period, using a hand-held PARI LC PLUS™ Reusable Nebulizer with a DeVilbiss® Pulmo-Aide® compressor. Tobramycin inhalation solution should not be diluted or mixed with dornase alfa (PULMOZYME®, Genentech) or other medications in the nebulizer.
During clinical studies, patients on multiple therapies were instructed to take them first, followed by tobramycin inhalation solution.
Pentoxifylline

Pentoxifylline

The usual dosage of Pentoxifylline extended-release tablet form is one tablet (400 mg) three times a day with meals.

While the effect of Pentoxifylline may be seen within 2 to 4 weeks, it is recommended that treatment be continued for at least 8 weeks. Efficacy has been demonstrated in double-blind clinical studies of 6 months duration.

Digestive and central nervous system side effects are dose related. If patients develop these effects it is recommended that the dosage be lowered to one tablet twice a day (800 mg/day). If side effects persist at this lower dosage, the administration of Pentoxifylline extended-release tablet should be discontinued.

In patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance below 30 ml/min) reduce dose to 400 mg once a day. Dosing information cannot be provided for patients with hepatic impairment.
Acyclovir Capsule Acycl...

Acyclovir Capsule Acyclovir

Acute Treatment of Herpes Zoster

800 mg every 4 hours orally, 5 times daily for 7 to 10 days.

Genital Herpes

Treatment of Initial Genital Herpes

200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 10 days.

Chronic Suppressive Therapy for Recurrent Disease

400 mg 2 times daily for up to 12 months, followed by re-evaluation. Alternative regimens have included doses ranging from 200 mg 3 times daily to 200 mg 5 times daily.

The frequency and severity of episodes of untreated genital herpes may change over time. After 1 year of therapy, the frequency and severity of the patient’s genital herpes infection should be re-evaluated to assess the need for continuation of therapy with acyclovir.

Intermittent Therapy

200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 5 days. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom (prodrome) of recurrence.

Treatment of Chickenpox

Children (2 Years of age and Older)

20 mg/kg per dose orally 4 times daily (80 mg/kg/day) for 5 days. Children over 40 kg should receive the adult dose for chickenpox.

Adults and Children Over 40 kg

800 mg 4 times daily for 5 days.

Intravenous acyclovir is indicated for the treatment of varicella-zoster infections in immunocompromised patients.

When therapy is indicated, it should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom of chickenpox. There is no information about the efficacy of therapy initiated more than 24 hours after onset of signs and symptoms.

Patients With Acute or Chronic Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment, the dose of acyclovir capsules and tablets should be modified as shown in Table 3:

Table 3: Dosage Modification for Renal Impairment

Normal Dosage Regimen

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2)

Adjusted Dosage Regimen

Dose (mg)

Dosing Interval

200 mg every 4 hours

> 10

200

every 4 hours, 5x daily

0 to 10

200

every 12 hours

400 mg every 12 hours

> 10

400

every 12 hours

0 to 10

200

every 12 hours

800 mg every 4 hours

> 25

800

every 4 hours, 5x daily

10 to 25

800

every 8 hours

0 to 10

800

every 12 hours

Hemodialysis

For patients who require hemodialysis, the mean plasma half-life of acyclovir during hemodialysis is approximately 5 hours. This results in a 60% decrease in plasma concentrations following a 6 hour dialysis period. Therefore, the patient’s dosing schedule should be adjusted so that an additional dose is administered after each dialysis.

Peritoneal Dialysis

No supplemental dose appears to be necessary after adjustment of the dosing interval.

Bioequivalence of Dosage Forms

Acyclovir suspension was shown to be bioequivalent to acyclovir capsules (n = 20) and 1 acyclovir 800 mg tablet was shown to be bioequivalent to 4 acyclovir 200 mg capsules (n = 24).
Clotrimazole Solution

Clotrimazole Solution

Gently massage sufficient clotrimazole topical solution into the affected and surrounding skin areas twice a day, in the morning and evening.

Clinical improvement, with relief of pruritus, usually occurs within the first week of treatment with clotrimazole topical solution. If the patient shows no clinical improvement after four weeks of treatment with clotrimazole topical solution, the diagnosis should be reviewed.
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride Syrup

Cetirizine hydrochloride syrup can be taken without regard to food consumption.

Children 2 to 5 Years for Chronic Urticaria

The recommended initial dose of cetirizine hydrochloride syrup in children aged 2 to 5 years is 2.5 mg (½ teaspoonful) syrup once daily. The dosage in this age group can be increased to a maximum dose of 5 mg per day given as 1 teaspoonful syrup once a day, or one ½ teaspoonful syrup given every 12 hours.

Children 6 months to < 2 years for Perennial Allergic Rhinitis and Chronic Urticaria

The recommended dose of cetirizine hydrochloride syrup in children 6 months to 23 months of age is 2.5 mg (½ teaspoonful) once daily. The dose in children 12 to 23 months of age can be increased to a maximum dose of 5 mg per day, given as ½ teaspoonful (2.5 mg) every 12 hours.
Pca Skin Acne

Pca Skin Acne

2.1 General Considerations

The recommended initial dose of amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsule is 1 capsule of amlodipine 2.5 mg/benazepril 10 mg orally once-daily.

It is usually appropriate to begin therapy with amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules only after a patient has either (a) failed to achieve the desired antihypertensive effect with amlodipine or benazepril monotherapy, or (b) demonstrated inability to achieve adequate antihypertensive effect with amlodipine therapy without developing edema.

The antihypertensive effect of amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is largely attained within 2 weeks. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled, the dose may be titrated up to amlodipine 10 mg/benazepril 40 mg once-daily. The dosing should be individualized and adjusted according to the patient’s clinical response.

Amlodipine is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 2.5 to 10 mg while benazepril is effective in doses of 10 to 80 mg. In clinical trials of amlodipine/benazepril combination therapy using amlodipine doses of 2.5 to 10 mg and benazepril doses of 10 to 40 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of amlodipine in all patient groups, and the effects increased with increasing dose of benazepril in nonblack groups.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

Renal Impairment: Amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules are not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance (CrCl) less than or equal to 30 mL/min. No dose adjustment of amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules are required in patients with CrCl greater than 30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine roughly less than or equal to 3 mg/dL or 265 micromol/L) [see Warnings and Precautions(5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Amlodipine and benazepril hydrochloride capsules may be substituted for the titrated components.
Olio Activ Mouthwash Sp...

Olio Activ Mouthwash Spearmint

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients

The dose of moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets, 400 mg (orally) once every 24 hours. The duration of therapy depends on the type of infection as described in Table 1.
Table 1: Dosage and Duration of Therapy in Adult Patients * Due to the designated pathogens [see Indications and Usage (1)]. † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician
Type of Infection*

Dose Every 24 hours

Duration (days)†

Acute Bacterial Sinusitis (1.1)

400 mg

10

Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis (1.2)

400 mg

5

Community Acquired Pneumonia

400 mg

7 to 14

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI) (1.4)

400 mg

7

Complicated SSSI (1.5)

400 mg

7 to 21

Complicated Intra-Abdominal Infections (1.6)

400 mg

5 to 14

Intravenous formulation is indicated when it offers a route of administration advantageous to the patient (for example, patient cannot tolerate an oral dosage form). When switching from intravenous to oral formulation, no dosage adjustment is necessary. Patients whose therapy is started with moxifloxacin hydrochloride IV may be switched to moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician.

2.2 Drug Interactions With Multivalent Cations

Oral doses of moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets should be administered at least 4 hours before or 8 hours after products containing magnesium, aluminum, iron or zinc, including antacids, sucralfate, multivitamins and VIDEX® (didanosine) chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Administration Instructions

Moxifloxacin Hydrochloride Film-Coated Tablets

Moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food, drink fluids liberally.
Carbamazepine

Carbamazepine

Monitoring of blood levels has increased the efficacy and safety of anticonvulsants (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests). Dosage should be adjusted to the needs of the individual patients. A low initial daily dosage with gradual increase is advised. As soon as adequate control is achieved, the dosage may be reduced very gradually to the minimum effective level. Carbamazepine extended-release capsules may be taken with or without food. Carbamazepine extended-release capsules may be swallowed whole or may be opened and all the capsule contents sprinkled on a teaspoon of soft food such as applesauce. Make sure all of the food and medicine mixture is swallowed. Do not crush or chew carbamazepine extended-release capsules or the sprinkled capsule contents.

Carbamazepine extended-release capsules are an extended-release formulation for twice a day administration. When converting patients from immediate release carbamazepine to carbamazepine extended-release capsules, the same total daily mg dose of carbamazepine should be administered. Following conversion to carbamazepine extended-release capsules, patients should be closely monitored for seizure control. Depending on the therapeutic response after conversion, the total daily dose may need to be adjusted within the recommended dosing instructions.

Monitoring of blood levels has increased the efficacy and safety of anticonvulsants (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests). Dosage should be adjusted to the needs of the individual patients. A low initial daily dosage with gradual increase is advised. As soon as adequate control is achieved, the dosage may be reduced very gradually to the minimum effective level. Carbamazepine extended-release capsules may be taken with or without food. Carbamazepine extended-release capsules may be swallowed whole or may be opened and all the capsule contents sprinkled on a teaspoon of soft food such as applesauce. Make sure all of the food and medicine mixture is swallowed. Do not crush or chew carbamazepine extended-release capsules or the sprinkled capsule contents.

Carbamazepine extended-release capsules are an extended-release formulation for twice a day administration. When converting patients from immediate release carbamazepine to carbamazepine extended-release capsules, the same total daily mg dose of carbamazepine should be administered. Following conversion to carbamazepine extended-release capsules, patients should be closely monitored for seizure control. Depending on the therapeutic response after conversion, the total daily dose may need to be adjusted within the recommended dosing instructions.

Epilepsy

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

Adults and Children Over 12 Years of Age

Initial: 200 mg twice daily. Increase at weekly intervals by adding up to 200 mg/day until the optimal response is obtained. Dosage generally should not exceed 1000 mg per day in children 12 to 15 years of age, and 1200 mg daily in patients above 15 years of age. Doses up to 1600 mg daily have been used in adults. Maintenance: Adjust dosage to the minimum effective level, usually 800 to 1200 mg daily.

Children Under 12 Years of Age

Children taking total daily dosages of immediate-release carbamazepine of 400 mg or greater may be converted to the same total daily dosage of carbamazepine extended-release capsules, using a twice daily regimen. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 35 mg/kg. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the therapeutic range. No recommendation regarding the safety of carbamazepine extended-release capsules for use at doses above 35 mg/kg/24 hours can be made.

Combination Therapy

Carbamazepine extended-release capsules may be used alone or with other anticonvulsants. When added to existing anticonvulsant therapy, the drug should be added gradually while the other anticonvulsants are maintained or gradually decreased, except phenytoin, which may have to be increased (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions, and Pregnancy category D).

Trigeminal Neuralgia

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

Initial: On the first day, start with one 200 mg capsule. This daily dose may be increased by up to 200 mg/day every 12 hours only as needed to achieve freedom from pain. Do not exceed 1200 mg daily.

Maintenance: Control of pain can be maintained in most patients with 400 to 800 mg daily. However, some patients may be maintained on as little as 200 mg daily, while others may require as much as 1200 mg daily. At least once every 3 months throughout the treatment period, attempts should be made to reduce the dose to the minimum effective level or even to discontinue the drug.
Bisoprolol Fumarate

Bisoprolol Fumarate

The dose of bisoprolol fumarate must be individualized to the needs of the patient. The usual starting dose is 5 mg once daily. In some patients, 2.5 mg may be an appropriate starting dose (see Bronchospastic Disease in WARNINGS). If the antihypertensive effect of 5 mg is inadequate, the dose may be increased to 10 mg and then, if necessary, to 20 mg once daily.

Patients With Renal or Hepatic Impairment

In patients with hepatic impairment (hepatitis or cirrhosis) or renal dysfunction (creatinine clearance less than 40 mL/min), the initial daily dose should be 2.5 mg and caution should be used in dose-titration. Since limited data suggest that bisoprolol fumarate is not dialyzable, drug replacement is not necessary in patients undergoing dialysis.

Geriatric Patients

It is not necessary to adjust the dose in the elderly, unless there is also significant renal or hepatic dysfunction (see above and Geriatric Use in PRECAUTIONS).

Pediatric Patients

There is no pediatric experience with bisoprolol.
Atenolol

Atenolol

Hypertension

The initial dose of atenolol tablets USP is 50 mg given as one tablet a day either alone or added to diuretic therapy. The full effect of this dose will usually be seen within one to two weeks. If an optimal response is not achieved, the dosage should be increased to atenolol tablets USP 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Increasing the dosage beyond 100 mg a day is unlikely to produce any further benefit.

Atenolol tablets USP may be used alone or concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents including thiazide-type diuretics, hydralazine, prazosin, and alpha-methyldopa.

Angina Pectoris

The initial dose of atenolol tablets USP is 50 mg given as one tablet a day. If an optimal response is not achieved within one week, the dosage should be increased to atenolol tablets USP 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Some patients may require a dosage of 200 mg once a day for optimal effect.

Twenty-four hour control with once daily dosing is achieved by giving doses larger than necessary to achieve an immediate maximum effect. The maximum early effect on exercise tolerance occurs with doses of 50 to 100 mg, but at these doses the effect at 24 hours is attenuated, averaging about 50% to 75% of that observed with once a day oral doses of 200 mg.

Acute Myocardial Infarction

In patients with definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with atenolol I.V. injection should be initiated as soon as possible after the patient's arrival in the hospital and after eligibility is established. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient's hemodynamic condition has stabilized. Treatment should begin with the intravenous administration of 5 mg atenolol over 5 minutes followed by another 5 mg intravenous injection 10 minutes later. Atenolol I.V. injection should be administered under carefully controlled conditions including monitoring of blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram. Dilutions of atenolol I.V. injection in Dextrose Injection USP, Sodium Chloride Injection USP, or Sodium Chloride and Dextrose Injection may be used. These admixtures are stable for 48 hours if they are not used immediately.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (10 mg), atenolol tablets USP, 50 mg should be initiated 10 minutes after the last intravenous dose followed by another 50 mg oral dose 12 hours later. Thereafter, atenolol tablets USP can be given orally either 100 mg once daily or 50 mg twice a day for a further 6 to 9 days or until discharge from the hospital. If bradycardia or hypotension requiring treatment or any other untoward effects occur, atenolol tablets USP should be discontinued (see full prescribing information prior to initiating therapy with atenolol tablets USP).

Data from other beta blocker trials suggest that if there is any question concerning the use of IV beta blocker or clinical estimate that there is a contraindication, the IV beta blocker may be eliminated and patients fulfilling the safety criteria may be given atenolol tablets USP, 50 mg twice daily or 100 mg once a day for at least seven days (if the IV dosing is excluded).

Although the demonstration of efficacy of atenolol tablets USP is based entirely on data from the first seven postinfarction days, data from other beta blocker trials suggest that treatment with beta blockers that are effective in the postinfarction setting may be continued for one to three years if there are no contraindications.

Atenolol tablets USP is an additional treatment to standard coronary care unit therapy.

Elderly Patients or Patients With Renal Impairment

Atenolol tablets USP are excreted by the kidneys; consequently dosage should be adjusted in cases of severe impairment of renal function. In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. Evaluation of patients with hypertension or myocardial infarction should always include assessment of renal function. Atenolol excretion would be expected to decrease with advancing age.

No significant accumulation of atenolol tablets USP occurs until creatinine clearance falls below 35 mL/min/1.73 m2. Accumulation of atenolol and prolongation of its half-life were studied in subjects with creatinine clearance between 5 and 105 mL/min. Peak plasma levels were significantly increased in subjects with creatinine clearances below 30 mL/min.

The following maximum oral dosages are recommended for elderly, renally-impaired patients and for patients with renal impairment due to other causes:

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73 m2)

Atenolol Elimination Half-Life (h)

Maximum Dosage

15 to 35

16 to 27

50 mg daily

< 15

> 27

25 mg daily

Some renally-impaired or elderly patients being treated for hypertension may require a lower starting dose of atenolol tablets USP: 25 mg given as one tablet a day. If this 25 mg dose is used, assessment of efficacy must be made carefully. This should include measurement of blood pressure just prior to the next dose ("trough" blood pressure) to ensure that the treatment effect is present for a full 24 hours.

Although a similar dosage reduction may be considered for elderly and/or renally-impaired patients being treated for indications other than hypertension, data are not available for these patient populations.

Patients on hemodialysis should be given 25 mg or 50 mg after each dialysis; this should be done under hospital supervision as marked falls in blood pressure can occur.

Cessation of Therapy in Patients With Angina Pectoris

If withdrawal of atenolol tablet USP therapy is planned, it should be achieved gradually and patients should be carefully observed and advised to limit physical activity to a minimum.
Levofloxacin

Levofloxacin

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients With Normal Renal Function

The usual dose of levofloxacin tablets is 250 mg, 500 mg, or 750 mg administered orally every 24 hours, as indicated by infection and described in Table 1.

These recommendations apply to patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min. For patients with creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min, adjustments to the dosing regimen are required [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].
Table 1: Dosage in Adult Patients With Normal Renal Function (Creatinine Clearance ≥ 50 mL/min) * Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician. † Due to methicillin-susceptible Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae (including multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Moraxella catarrhalis, Chlamydophila pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, or Mycoplasma pneumoniae [ see Indications and Usage (1.2)]. ‡ Due to Streptococcus pneumoniae (excluding multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, or Chlamydophila pneumoniae [ see Indications and Usage (1.3)]. § This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis and AP due to E. coli, including cases with concurrent bacteremia. ¶ This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Enterococcus faecalis, Enterococcus cloacae, Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa; and for AP due to E. coli. # Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [ see Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Þ The safety of levofloxacin tablets in adults for durations of therapy beyond 28 days or in pediatric patients for durations beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin tablet therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk. ß Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis. Higher doses of levofloxacin tablets typically used for treatment of pneumonia can be used for treatment of plague, if clinically indicated.
Type of Infection

Dosed Every 24 Hours

Duration (Days)*

Nosocomial Pneumonia

750 mg

7 to 14

Community Acquired Pneumonia†

500 mg

7 to 14

Community Acquired Pneumonia‡

750 mg

5

Acute Bacterial Sinusitis

750 mg

5

500 mg

10 to 14

Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis

500 mg

7

Complicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI)

750 mg

7 to 14

Uncomplicated SSSI

500 mg

7 to 10

Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis

500 mg

28

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)§

750 mg

5

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)¶

250 mg

10

Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection

250 mg

3

Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure), adult and pediatric patients > 50 kg#,Þ

Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age#,Þ

500 mg

see Table 2 below

(2.2)

60Þ

60Þ

Plague, adult and pediatric patients > 50 kgß

500 mg

10 to 14

Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age

see Table 2 below (2.2)

10 to 14

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Patients

The dosage in pediatric patients ≥ 6 months of age is described below in Table 2.
Table 2: Dosage in Pediatric Patients ≥ 6 Months of Age * Due to Bacillus anthracis [ see Indications and Usage (1.13)] and Yersinia pestis [see Indications and Usage (1.14)]. † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician. ‡ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [ see Clinical Studies (14.9)]. § The safety of levofloxacin tablets in pediatric patients for durations of therapy beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin tablet therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk. ¶ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis.
Type of Infection*

Dose

Freq. Once Every

Duration†

Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure)‡,§

Pediatric patients > 50 kg

500 mg

24 hr

60 days§

Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age

8 mg/kg (not to exceed 250 mg per dose)

12 hr

60 days§

Plague¶

Pediatric patients > 50 kg

500 mg

24 hr

10 to 14 days

Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age

8 mg/kg(not to exceed 250 mg per dose)

12 hr

10 to 14 days

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Adults With Renal Impairment

Administer levofloxacin tablets with caution in the presence of renal insufficiency. Careful clinical observation and appropriate laboratory studies should be performed prior to and during therapy since elimination of levofloxacin may be reduced.

No adjustment is necessary for patients with a creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min.

In patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min), adjustment of the dosage regimen is necessary to avoid the accumulation of levofloxacin due to decreased clearance [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Table 3 shows how to adjust dose based on creatinine clearance.
Table 3: Dosage Adjustment in Adult Patients With Renal Impairment (Creatinine Clearance < 50 mL/min)
Dosage in Normal Renal Function Every 24 Hours

Creatinine Clearance 20 to 49 mL/min

Creatinine Clearance 10 to 19 mL/min

Hemodialysis or Chronic Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis (CAPD)

750 mg

750 mg every 48 hours

750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours

750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours

500 mg

500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 24 hours

500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 48 hours

500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 48 hours

250 mg

No dosage adjustment required

250 mg every 48 hours. If treating uncomplicated UTI, then no dosage adjustment is required

No information on dosing adjustment is available

2.4 Drug Interaction With Chelation Agents: Antacids, Sucralfate, Metal Cations, Multivitamins

Levofloxacin Tablets

Levofloxacin tablets should be administered at least two hours before or two hours after antacids containing magnesium, aluminum, as well as sucralfate, metal cations such as iron, and multivitamin preparations with zinc or didanosine chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

Food and Levofloxacin Tablets

Levofloxacin tablets can be administered without regard to food.

Hydration for Patients Receiving Levofloxacin Tablets

Adequate hydration of patients receiving oral levofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria and cylindruria have been reported with quinolones [see Adverse Reactions (6.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].
Sabril

Sabril

(See table below.)

Monitoring of blood levels has increased the efficacy and safety of anticonvulsants (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests). Dosage should be adjusted to the needs of the individual patient. A low initial daily dosage with a gradual increase is advised. As soon as adequate control is achieved, the dosage may be reduced very gradually to the minimum effective level. Medication should be taken with meals.

Conversion of patients from oral carbamazepine tablets to carbamazepine suspension: Patients should be converted by administering the same number of mg per day in smaller, more frequent doses (i.e., b.i.d. tablets to t.i.d. suspension).

Epilepsy

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

Adults and Children Over 12 Years of Age

Initial: 200 mg b.i.d. Increase at weekly intervals by adding up to 200 mg/day using a t.i.d. or q.i.d. regimen until the optimal response is obtained. Dosage generally should not exceed 1000 mg daily in children 12 to 15 years of age, and 1200 mg daily in patients above 15 years of age. Doses up to 1600 mg daily have been used in adults in rare instances. Maintenance: Adjust dosage to the minimum effective level, usually 800 to 1200 mg daily.

Children 6 to 12 Years of Age

Initial: 100 mg b.i.d. Increase at weekly intervals by adding up to 100 mg/day using a t.i.d. or q.i.d. regimen until the optimal response is obtained. Dosage generally should not exceed 1000 mg daily. Maintenance: Adjust dosage to the minimum effective level, usually 400 to 800 mg daily.

Children Under 6 Years of Age

Initial: 10 to 20 mg/kg/day b.i.d. or t.i.d. Increase weekly to achieve optimal clinical response administered t.i.d. or q.i.d. Maintenance: Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 35 mg/kg. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the therapeutic range. No recommendation regarding the safety of carbamazepine for use at doses above 35 mg/kg/24 hours can be made.

Combination Therapy

Carbamazepine tablets and Carbamazepine tablets (chewable) may be used alone or with other anticonvulsants. When added to existing anticonvulsant therapy, the drug should be added gradually while the other anticonvulsants are maintained or gradually decreased, except phenytoin, which may have to be increased (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions, and Usage in Pregnancy, Teratogenic Effects, Pregnancy Category D).

Trigeminal Neuralgia

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

Initial: On the first day, 100 mg b.i.d. for a total daily dose of 200 mg. This daily dose may be increased by up to 200 mg/day using increments of 100 mg every 12 hours only as needed to achieve freedom from pain. Do not exceed 1200 mg daily. Maintenance: Control of pain can be maintained in most patients with 400 to 800 mg daily. However, some patients may be maintained on as little as 200 mg daily, while others may require as much as 1200 mg daily. At least once every 3 months throughout the treatment period, attempts should be made to reduce the dose to the minimum effective level or even to discontinue the drug.
Dosage Information * Tablet = Chewable or conventional tablets
Initial Dose

Subsequent Dose

Maximum Daily Dose

Indication

Tablet*

Epilepsy

Under 6 yr

10 to 20 mg/kg/day b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Increase weekly to achieve optimal clinical response, t.i.d. or q.i.d.

35 mg/kg/24 hr (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATIONsection above)

6 to 12 yr

100 mg b.i.d. (200 mg/day)

Add up to 100 mg/day at weekly intervals, t.i.d. or q.i.d.

1000 mg/24 hr

Over 12 yr

200 mg b.i.d. (400 mg/day)

Add up to 200 mg/day at weekly intervals, t.i.d. or q.i.d.

1000 mg/24 hr (12 to 15 yr)

1200 mg/24 hr (> 15 yr)

1600 mg/24 hr (adults, in rare instances)

Trigeminal Neuralgia

100 mg b.i.d. (200 mg/day)

Add up to 200 mg/day in increments of 100 mg every 12 hr

1200 mg/24 hr
Renagel

Renagel

2.1 Recommended Dosing and Dose Modification Guidelines

Dosage of temozolomide must be adjusted according to nadir neutrophil and platelet counts in the previous cycle and the neutrophil and platelet counts at the time of initiating the next cycle. For temozolomide dosage calculations based on body surface area (BSA) see Table 5. For suggested capsule combinations on a daily dose see Table 6.

Patients with Newly Diagnosed High Grade Glioma

Concomitant Phase

Temozolomide is administered at 75 mg/m2 daily for 42 days concomitant with focal radiotherapy (60 Gy administered in 30 fractions) followed by maintenance temozolomide for 6 cycles. Focal RT includes the tumor bed or resection site with a 2- to 3- cm margin. No dose reductions are recommended during the concomitant phase; however, dose interruptions or discontinuation may occur based on toxicity. The temozolomide dose should be continued throughout the 42-day concomitant period up to 49 days if all of the following conditions are met: absolute neutrophil count greater than or equal to 1.5 x 109/L, platelet count greater than or equal to 100 x 109/L, common toxicity criteria (CTC) nonhematological toxicity less than or equal to Grade 1 (except for alopecia, nausea, and vomiting). During treatment a complete blood count should be obtained weekly. Temozolomide dosing should be interrupted or discontinued during concomitant phase according to the hematological and nonhematological toxicity criteria as noted in Table 1. Pneumocystis pneumonia (PCP) prophylaxis is required during the concomitant administration of temozolomide and radiotherapy, and should be continued in patients who develop lymphocytopenia until recovery from lymphocytopenia (CTC Grade less than or equal to 1).
TABLE 1: Temozolomide Dosing Interruption or Discontinuation During Concomitant Radiotherapy and Temozolomide * Treatment with concomitant TMZ could be continued when all of the following conditions were met: absolute neutrophil count greater than or equal to 1.5 x 10 9/L; platelet count greater than or equal to 100 x 10 9/L; CTC nonhematological toxicity less than or equal to Grade 1 (except for alopecia, nausea, vomiting).
Toxicity

TMZ Interruption*

TMZ Discontinuation

Absolute Neutrophil Count

greater than or equal to 0.5 and less than 1.5 x 109/L

less than 0.5 x 109/L

Platelet Count

greater than or equal to 10 and less than 100 x 109/L

less than 10 x 109/L

CTC Nonhematological Toxicity (except for alopecia, nausea, vomiting)

CTC Grade 2

CTC Grade 3 or 4

Maintenance Phase

Cycle 1

Four weeks after completing the temozolomide + RT phase, temozolomide is administered for an additional 6 cycles of maintenance treatment. Dosage in Cycle 1 (maintenance) is 150 mg/m2 once daily for 5 days followed by 23 days without treatment.

Cycles 2 to 6

At the start of Cycle 2, the dose can be escalated to 200 mg/m2, if the CTC nonhematologic toxicity for Cycle 1 is Grade less than or equal to 2 (except for alopecia, nausea, and vomiting), absolute neutrophil count (ANC) is greater than or equal to 1.5 x 109/L, and the platelet count is greater than or equal to 100 x 109/L. The dose remains at 200 mg/m2 per day for the first 5 days of each subsequent cycle except if toxicity occurs. If the dose was not escalated at Cycle 2, escalation should not be done in subsequent cycles.

Dose Reduction or Discontinuation During Maintenance

Dose reductions during the maintenance phase should be applied according to Tables 2and 3.

During treatment, a complete blood count should be obtained on Day 22 (21 days after the first dose of temozolomide) or within 48 hours of that day, and weekly until the ANC is above 1.5 x 109/L (1500/microL) and the platelet count exceeds 100 x 109/L (100,000/microL). The next cycle of temozolomide should not be started until the ANC and platelet count exceed these levels. Dose reductions during the next cycle should be based on the lowest blood counts and worst nonhematologic toxicity during the previous cycle. Dose reductions or discontinuations during the maintenance phase should be applied according to Tables 2 and 3.
TABLE 2: Temozolomide Dose Levels for Maintenance Treatment
Dose Level

Dose (mg/m2/day)

Remarks

-1

100

Reduction for prior toxicity

0

150

Dose during Cycle 1

1

200

Dose during Cycles 2 to 6 in absence of toxicity
TABLE 3: Temozolomide Dose Reduction or Discontinuation During Maintenance Treatment * TMZ dose levels are listed in Table 2. † TMZ is to be discontinued if dose reduction to less than 100 mg/m 2 is required or if the same Grade 3 nonhematological toxicity (except for alopecia, nausea, vomiting) recurs after dose reduction.
Toxicity

Reduce TMZ by 1 Dose Level*

Discontinue TMZ

Absolute Neutrophil Count

less than 1 x 109/L

See footnote†

Platelet Count

less than 50 x 109/L

See footnote†

CTC Nonhematological Toxicity (except for alopecia, nausea, vomiting)

CTC Grade 3

CTC Grade 4†

Patients with Refractory Anaplastic Astrocytoma

For adults the initial dose is 150 mg/m2 once daily for 5 consecutive days per 28-day treatment cycle. For adult patients, if both the nadir and day of dosing (Day 29, Day 1 of next cycle) ANC are greater than or equal to 1.5 x 109/L (1500/microL) and both the nadir and Day 29, Day 1 of next cycle platelet counts are greater than or equal to 100 x 109/L (100,000/microL), the temozolomide dose may be increased to 200 mg/m2/day for 5 consecutive days per 28-day treatment cycle. During treatment, a complete blood count should be obtained on Day 22 (21 days after the first dose) or within 48 hours of that day, and weekly until the ANC is above 1.5 x 109/L (1500/microL) and the platelet count exceeds 100 x 109/L (100,000/microL). The next cycle of temozolomide should not be started until the ANC and platelet count exceed these levels. If the ANC falls to less than 1 x 109/L (1000/microL) or the platelet count is less than 50 x 109/L (50,000/microL) during any cycle, the next cycle should be reduced by 50 mg/m2, but not below 100 mg/m2, the lowest recommended dose (see Table 4). Temozolomide therapy can be continued until disease progression. In the clinical trial, treatment could be continued for a maximum of 2 years, but the optimum duration of therapy is not known.

TABLE 4: Dosing Modification Table

TABLE 5: Daily Dose Calculations by Body Surface Area (BSA)
TABLE 5: Daily Dose Calculations by Body Surface Area (BSA)
Total BSA (m2)

75 mg/m2

(mg daily)

150 mg/m2

(mg daily)

200 mg/m2

(mg daily)

1

75

150

200

1.1

82.5

165

220

1.2

90

180

240

1.3

97.5

195

260

1.4

105

210

280

1.5

112.5

225

300

1.6

120

240

320

1.7

127.5

255

340

1.8

135

270

360

1.9

142.5

285

380

2

150

300

400

2.1

157.5

315

420

2.2

165

330

440

2.3

172.5

345

460

2.4

180

360

480

2.5

187.5

375

500
TABLE 6: Suggested Capsule Combinations Based on Daily Dose in Adults
Number of Daily Capsules by Strength (mg)

Total Daily Dose (mg)

250 mg

180 mg

140 mg

100 mg

20 mg

5 mg

75

0

0

0

0

3

3

82.5

0

0

0

0

4

0

90

0

0

0

0

4

2

97.5

0

0

0

1

0

0

105

0

0

0

1

0

1

112.5

0

0

0

1

0

2

120

0

0

0

1

1

0

127.5

0

0

0

1

1

1

135

0

0

0

1

1

3

142.5

0

0

1

0

0

0

150

0

0

1

0

0

2

157.5

0

0

1

0

1

0

165

0

0

1

0

1

1

172.5

0

0

1

0

1

2

180

0

1

0

0

0

0

187.5

0

1

0

0

0

1

195

0

1

0

0

0

3

200

0

1

0

0

1

0

210

0

0

0

2

0

2

220

0

0

0

2

1

0

225

0

0

0

2

1

1

240

0

0

1

1

0

0

255

1

0

0

0

0

1

260

1

0

0

0

0

2

270

1

0

0

0

1

0

280

0

0

2

0

0

0

285

0

0

2

0

0

1

300

0

0

0

3

0

0

315

0

0

0

3

0

3

320

0

1

1

0

0

0

330

0

1

1

0

0

2

340

0

1

1

0

1

0

345

0

1

1

0

1

1

360

0

2

0

0

0

0

375

0

2

0

0

0

3

380

0

1

0

2

0

0

400

0

0

0

4

0

0

420

0

0

3

0

0

0

440

0

0

3

0

1

0

460

0

2

0

1

0

0

480

0

1

0

3

0

0

500

2

0

0

0

0

0

2.2 Preparation and Administration

Temozolomide Capsules

In clinical trials, temozolomide was administered under both fasting and nonfasting conditions; however, absorption is affected by food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], and consistency of administration with respect to food is recommended. There are no dietary restrictions with temozolomide. To reduce nausea and vomiting, temozolomide should be taken on an empty stomach. Bedtime administration may be advised. Antiemetic therapy may be administered prior to and/or following administration of temozolomide.

Temozolomide Capsules should not be opened or chewed. They should be swallowed whole with a glass of water. If capsules are accidentally opened or damaged, precautions should be taken to avoid inhalation or contact with the skin or mucous membranes [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16.1)].
Etodolac

Etodolac

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of etodolac extended-release tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use etodolac extended-release tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with etodolac extended-release tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of juvenile rheumatoid arthritis in patients 6 to 16 years of age, the recommended dose given orally once per day should be based on body weight, according to the following table:
Table 4. Body Weight Range (kg) Dose 20 to 30 400 mg Tablet x 1 31 to 45 600 mg Tablet x 1 46 to 60 400 mg Tablet x 2 > 60 500 mg Tablet x 2
Rheumatoid Arthritis and Osteoarthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis or rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended starting dose of etodolac extended-release tablets is 400 to 1000 mg given orally once per day.

As with other NSAIDs, the lowest effective dose should be sought for each patient. In chronic conditions, a therapeutic response to therapy with etodolac extended-release tablets is sometimes seen within one week of therapy, but most often is observed by two weeks.
Epitol

Epitol

(SEE TABLE BELOW)

Monitoring of blood levels has increased the efficacy and safety of anticonvulsants (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests). Dosage should be adjusted to the needs of the individual patient. A low initial daily dosage with a gradual increase is advised. As soon as adequate control is achieved, the dosage may be reduced very gradually to the minimum effective level. Medication should be taken with meals.

Conversion of patients from oral Epitol® tablets to carbamazepine suspension: Patients should be converted by administering the same number of mg per day in smaller, more frequent doses (i.e., b.i.d. tablets to t.i.d. suspension).

Epilepsy

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE)

Adults and Children Over 12 Years of Age

Initial: 200 mg b.i.d. Increase at weekly intervals by adding up to 200 mg/day using a t.i.d. or q.i.d. regimen until the optimal response is obtained. Dosage generally should not exceed 1000 mg daily in children 12 to 15 years of age, and 1200 mg daily in patients above 15 years of age. Doses up to 1600 mg daily have been used in adults in rare instances. Maintenance: Adjust dosage to the minimum effective level, usually 800 to 1200 mg daily.

Children 6 to 12 Years of Age

Initial: 100 mg b.i.d. Increase at weekly intervals by adding up to 100 mg/day using a t.i.d. or q.i.d. regimen until the optimal response is obtained. Dosage generally should not exceed 1000 mg daily. Maintenance: Adjust dosage to the minimum effective level, usually 400 to 800 mg daily.

Children Under 6 Years of Age

Initial: 10 to 20 mg/kg/day b.i.d. or t.i.d. Increase weekly to achieve optimal clinical response administered t.i.d. or q.i.d. Maintenance: Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 35 mg/kg. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the therapeutic range. No recommendation regarding the safety of carbamazepine for use at doses above 35 mg/kg/24 hours can be made.

Combination Therapy

Epitol (carbamazepine tablets) may be used alone or with other anticonvulsants. When added to existing anticonvulsant therapy, the drug should be added gradually while the other anticonvulsants are maintained or gradually decreased, except phenytoin, which may have to be increased (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions, and Usage in Pregnancy, Teratogenic Effects, Pregnancy Category D).

Trigeminal Neuralgia

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE)

Initial: On the first day, 100 mg b.i.d. for a total daily dose of 200 mg. This daily dose may be increased by up to 200 mg/day using increments of 100 mg every 12 hours only as needed to achieve freedom from pain. Do not exceed 1200 mg daily. Maintenance: Control of pain can be maintained in most patients with 400 to 800 mg daily. However, some patients may be maintained on as little as 200 mg daily, while others may require as much as 1200 mg daily. At least once every 3 months throughout the treatment period, attempts should be made to reduce the dose to the minimum effective level or even to discontinue the drug.
Dosage Information * Tablet = Chewable or conventional tablets
Initial Dose

Subsequent Dose

Maximum Daily Dose

Indication

Tablet*

Tablet*

Tablet*

Epilepsy

Under 6 yr

10 to 20 mg/kg/day b.i.d. or t.i.d.

Increase weekly to achieve optimal clinical response, t.i.d. or q.i.d.

35 mg/kg/24 hr (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION section above)

6 to 12 yr

100 mg b.i.d. (200 mg/day)

Add up to 100 mg/day at weekly intervals, t.i.d. or q.i.d.

1000 mg/24 hr

Over 12 yr

200 mg b.i.d. (400 mg/day)

Add up to 200 mg/day at weekly intervals, t.i.d. or q.i.d.

1000 mg/24 hr (12 to 15 yr) 1200 mg/24 hr (> 15 yr) 1600 mg/24 hr (adults, in rare instances)

Trigeminal Neuralgia

100 mg b.i.d. (200 mg/day)

Add up to 200 mg/day in increments of 100 mg every 12 hr

1200 mg/24 hr
Anastrozole

Anastrozole

2.1 Recommended Dose

The dose of anastrozole tablets is one 1 mg tablet taken once a day. For patients with advanced breast cancer, anastrozole tablets should be continued until tumor progression. Anastrozole tablets can be taken with or without food.

For adjuvant treatment of early breast cancer in postmenopausal women, the optimal duration of therapy is unknown. In the ATAC trial, anastrozole tablets were administered for five years [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment or for elderly patients [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

2.2 Patients With Hepatic Impairment

No changes in dose are recommended for patients with mild-to-moderate hepatic impairment. Anastrozole tablets have not been studied in patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].
Terazosin Hydrochloride...

Terazosin Hydrochloride

If terazosin administration is discontinued for several days, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen.

Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia

Initial Dose

1 mg at bedtime is the starting dose for all patients, and this dose should not be exceeded as an initial dose. Patients should be closely followed during initial administration in order to minimize the risk of severe hypotensive response.

Subsequent Doses

The dose should be increased in a stepwise fashion to 2 mg, 5 mg, or 10 mg once daily to achieve the desired improvement of symptoms and/or flow rates. Doses of 10 mg once daily are generally required for the clinical response. Therefore, treatment with 10 mg for a minimum of 4 to 6 weeks may be required to assess whether a beneficial response has been achieved. Some patients may not achieve a clinical response despite appropriate titration. Although some additional patients responded at a 20 mg daily dose, there was an insufficient number of patients studied to draw definitive conclusions about this dose. There are insufficient data to support the use of higher doses for those patients who show inadequate or no response to 20 mg daily. If terazosin administration is discontinued for several days or longer, therapy should be reinstituted using theinitial dosing regimen.

Use With Other Drugs

Caution should be observed when terazosin is administered concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents, especially the calcium channel blocker verapamil, to avoid the possibility of developing significant hypotension. When using terazosin and other antihypertensive agents concomitantly, dosage reduction and retitration of either agent may be necessary (see PRECAUTIONS). Hypotension has been reported when terazosin has been used with phosphodiesterase-5 (PDE-5) inhibitors.

Hypertension

The dose of terazosin hydrochloride and the dose interval (12 or 24 hours) should be adjusted according to the patient’s individual blood pressure response. The following is a guide to its administration:

Initial Dose

1 mg at bedtime is the starting dose for all patients, and this dose should not be exceeded. This initial dosing regimen should be strictly observed to minimize the potential for severe hypotensive effects.

Subsequent Doses

The dose may be slowly increased to achieve the desired blood pressure response. The usual recommended dose range is 1 mg to 5 mg administered once a day; however, some patients may benefit from doses as high as 20 mg per day. Doses over 20 mg do not appear to provide further blood pressure effect and doses over 40 mg have not been studied. Blood pressure should be monitored at the end of the dosing interval to be sure control is maintained throughout the interval. It may also be helpful to measure blood pressure 2 to 3 hours after dosing to see if the maximum and minimum responses are similar, and to evaluate symptoms such as dizziness or palpitations which can result from excessive hypotensive response. If response is substantially diminished at 24 hours an increased dose or use of a twice daily regimen can be considered. If terazosin administration is discontinued for several days or longer, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen.

In clinical trials, except for the initial dose, the dose was given in the morning.

Use with other drugs

(see above).
Istalol

Istalol

2.1 Dosage in Adults

Use the lowest effective dose for the patient. The recommended initial dose is 5 mg for women and either 5 or 10 mg for men, taken only once per night immediately before bedtime with at least 7 to 8 hours remaining before the planned time of awakening. If the 5 mg dose is not effective, the dose can be increased to 10 mg. In some patients, the higher morning blood levels following use of the 10 mg dose increase the risk of next day impairment of driving and other activities that require full alertness [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. The total dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets should not exceed 10 mg once daily immediately before bedtime.

The recommended initial doses for women and men are different because zolpidem clearance is lower in women.

2.2 Special Populations

Elderly or debilitated patients may be especially sensitive to the effects of zolpidem tartrate. Patients with hepatic insufficiency do not clear the drug as rapidly as normal subjects. The recommended dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets in both of these patient populations is 5 mg once daily immediately before bedtime [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1); Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

2.3 Use With CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustment may be necessary when zolpidem tartrate tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.4 Administration

The effect of zolpidem tartrate tablets may be slowed by ingestion with or immediately after a meal.
Dexmethylphenidate Hydr...

Dexmethylphenidate Hydrochloride

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets are administered twice daily, at least 4 hours apart. Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets may be administered with or without food.

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

Patients New to Methylphenidate

The recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets for patients who are not currently taking racemic methylphenidate, or for patients who are on stimulants other than methylphenidate, is 5 mg/day (2.5 mg twice daily).

Dosage may be adjusted in 2.5 to 5 mg increments to a maximum of 20 mg/day (10 mg twice daily). In general, dosage adjustments may proceed at approximately weekly intervals.

Patients Currently Using Methylphenidate

For patients currently using methylphenidate, the recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets is half the dose of racemic methylphenidate. The maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (10 mg twice daily).

Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with periods off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a 1 month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Headache

Headache

Cefprozil tablets are administered orally.
* In the treatment of infections due to Streptococcus pyogenes, cefprozil should be administered for at least 10 days. † Not to exceed recommended adult doses.
Population/Infection

Dosage (mg)

Duration (days)

ADULTS (13 years and older)

UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

500 q 24h

10*

Acute Sinusitis (For moderate to severe infections, the higher dose should be used)

250 q 12h or 500 q 12h

10

LOWER RESPIRATORY TRACT

Secondary Bacterial Infection of Acute Bronchitis and Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis

500 q 12h

10

SKIN AND SKIN STRUCTURE

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

250 q 12h or 500 q 24h or 500 q 12h

10

CHILDREN (2 years to 12 years)

UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT †

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

7.5 mg/kg q 12h

10*

SKIN AND SKIN STRUCTURE †

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

20 mg/kg q 24h

10

INFANTS & CHILDREN (6 months to 12 years)

UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT

Otitis Media (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES)

15 mg/kg q 12h

10

Acute Sinusitis (For moderate to severe infections, the higher dose should be used)

7.5 mg/kg q 12h or 15 mg/kg q 12h

10

Renal Impairment

Cefprozil may be administered to patients with impaired renal function. The following dosage schedule should be used.

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dosage (mg)

Dosing Interval

30 to 120

standard

standard

0 to 29*

50% of standard

standard

* Cefprozil is in part removed by hemodialysis; therefore, cefprozil should be administered after the completion of hemodialysis.

Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with impaired hepatic function.
Topiramate

Topiramate

2.1 Epilepsy

It is not necessary to monitor topiramate plasma concentrations to optimize topiramate capsule (sprinkle) therapy.

On occasion, the addition of topiramate capsules (sprinkle) to phenytoin may require an adjustment of the dose of phenytoin to achieve optimal clinical outcome. Addition or withdrawal of phenytoin and/or carbamazepine during adjunctive therapy with topiramate capsules (sprinkle) may require adjustment of the dose of topiramate capsules (sprinkle).

Topiramate capsules (sprinkle) can be taken without regard to meals.

Monotherapy Use

Adults and Pediatric Patients 10 Years and Older

The recommended dose for topiramate capsule (sprinkle) monotherapy in adults and pediatric patients 10 years of age and older is 400 mg/day in two divided doses. Approximately 58% of patients randomized to 400 mg/day achieved this maximal dose in the monotherapy controlled trial; the mean dose achieved in the trial was 275 mg/day. The dose should be achieved by titration according to the following schedule (Table 1):
Table 1: Monotherapy Titration Schedule for Adults and Pediatric Patients 10 Years and Older
Morning Dose

Evening Dose

Week 1

25 mg

25 mg

Week 2

50 mg

50 mg

Week 3

75 mg

75 mg

Week 4

100 mg

100 mg

Week 5

150 mg

150 mg

Week 6

200 mg

200 mg

Children Ages 2 to < 10 Years

Dosing of topiramate as initial monotherapy in children 2 to < 10 years of age with partial onset or primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures was based on a pharmacometric bridging approach [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Dosing in patients 2 to < 10 years is based on weight. During the titration period, the initial dose of topiramate should be 25 mg/day administered nightly for the first week. Based upon tolerability, the dosage can be increased to 50 mg/day (25 mg twice daily) in the second week. Dosage can be increased by 25 to 50 mg/day each subsequent week as tolerated. Titration to the minimum maintenance dose should be attempted over 5 to 7 weeks of the total titration period. Based upon tolerability and clinical response, additional titration to a higher dose (up to the maximum maintenance dose) can be attempted at 25 to 50 mg/day weekly increments. The total daily dose should not exceed the maximum maintenance dose for each range of body weight (Table 2).
Table 2: Monotherapy Target Total Daily Maintenance Dosing for Patients 2 to < 10 Years * Administered in two equally divided doses
Weight (kg)

Total Daily Dose* (mg/day) Minimum Maintenance Dose

Total Daily Dose* (mg/day) Maximum Maintenance Dose

Up to 11

150

250

12 to 22

200

300

23 to 31

200

350

32 to 38

250

350

Greater than 38

250

400

Adjunctive Therapy Use

Adults 17 Years of Age and Over – Partial Onset Seizures, Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures, or Lennox-Gastaut Syndrome

The recommended total daily dose of topiramate capsules (sprinkle) as adjunctive therapy in adults with partial onset seizures is 200 to 400 mg/day in two divided doses, and 400 mg/day in two divided doses as adjunctive treatment in adults with primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures. It is recommended that therapy be initiated at 25 to 50 mg/day followed by titration to an effective dose in increments of 25 to 50 mg/day every week. Titrating in increments of 25 mg/day every week may delay the time to reach an effective dose. Doses above 400 mg/day (600, 800 or 1,000 mg/day) have not been shown to improve responses in dose-response studies in adults with partial onset seizures. Daily doses above 1,600 mg have not been studied.

In the study of primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures, the initial titration rate was slower than in previous studies; the assigned dose was reached at the end of 8 weeks [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Pediatric Patients Ages 2 to 16 Years – Partial Onset Seizures, Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures, or Lennox-Gastaut Syndrome

The recommended total daily dose of topiramate capsules (sprinkle) as adjunctive therapy for pediatric patients with partial onset seizures, primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures, or seizures associated with Lennox-Gastaut syndrome is approximately 5 to 9 mg/kg/day in two divided doses. Titration should begin at 25 mg/day (or less, based on a range of 1 to 3 mg/kg/day) nightly for the first week. The dosage should then be increased at 1 or 2 week intervals by increments of 1 to 3 mg/kg/day (administered in two divided doses), to achieve optimal clinical response. Dose titration should be guided by clinical outcome.

In the study of primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures, the initial titration rate was slower than in previous studies; the assigned dose of 6 mg/kg/day was reached at the end of 8 weeks [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.3 Administration of Topiramate Capsules (Sprinkle)

Topiramate capsules (sprinkle) may be swallowed whole or may be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the entire contents on a small amount (teaspoon) of soft food. This drug/food mixture should be swallowed immediately and not chewed. It should not be stored for future use.

2.4 Patients With Renal Impairment

In renally impaired subjects (creatinine clearance less than 70 mL/min/1.73 m2), one-half of the usual adult dose is recommended. Such patients will require a longer time to reach steady-state at each dose.

2.5 Geriatric Patients (Ages 65 Years and Over)

Dosage adjustment may be indicated in the elderly patient when impaired renal function (creatinine clearance rate < 70 mL/min/1.73 m2) is evident [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.6 Patients Undergoing Hemodialysis

Topiramate is cleared by hemodialysis at a rate that is 4 to 6 times greater than a normal individual. Accordingly, a prolonged period of dialysis may cause topiramate concentration to fall below that required to maintain an anti-seizure effect. To avoid rapid drops in topiramate plasma concentration during hemodialysis, a supplemental dose of topiramate may be required. The actual adjustment should take into account 1) the duration of dialysis period, 2) the clearance rate of the dialysis system being used, and 3) the effective renal clearance of topiramate in the patient being dialyzed.

2.7 Patients With Hepatic Disease

In hepatically impaired patients, topiramate plasma concentrations may be increased. The mechanism is not well understood.
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

2.1 Adult Patients

[See Indications and Usage (1.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]
* DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS [ see Indications and Usage (1.1)]
Infection*

Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy

Community-acquired pneumonia Pharyngitis/tonsillitis (second-line therapy) Skin/skin structure (uncomplicated)

500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5

Acute bacterial exacerbations of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease

500 mg once daily for 3 days OR 500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5

Acute bacterial sinusitis

500 mg once daily for 3 days

Genital ulcer disease (chancroid)

One single 1 gram dose

Non-gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis

One single 1 gram dose

Gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis

One single 2 gram dose

Azithromycin tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.2 Pediatric Patients1
* DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS [ see Indications and Usage (1.2)]
Infection*

Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy

Acute otitis media

30 mg/kg as a single dose or 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days or 10 mg/kg as a single dose on Day 1 followed by 5 mg/kg/day on Days 2 through 5.

Acute bacterial sinusitis

10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days.

Community-acquired pneumonia

10 mg/kg as a single dose on Day 1 followed by 5 mg/kg once daily on Days 2 through 5.

Pharyngitis/tonsillitis

12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days.

PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR OTITIS MEDIA, ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS, AND COMMUNITY ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA

(Age 6 months and above, [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)])

Based on Body Weight
* Effectiveness of the 3-day or 1-day regimen in pediatric patients with community-acquired pneumonia has not been established.
OTITIS MEDIA AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA: (5 Day Regimen)*

Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day Day 1and 5 mg/kg/day Days 2 to 5.

Weight

100 mg/5 mL

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL perTreatmentCourse

Total mg perTreatmentCourse

Kg

Lbs.

Day 1

Days 2 to 5

Day 1

Days 2 to 5

5

11

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

1.25 mL; (¼ tsp)

7.5 mL

150 mg

10

22

5 mL; (1 tsp)

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

15 mL

300 mg

20

44

5 mL; (1 tsp)

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

7.5 mL; (1½ tsp)

3.75 mL; (¾ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

10 mL; (2 tsp)

5 mL; (1 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

12.5 mL; (2½ tsp)

6.25 mL; (1¼ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg
* Effectiveness of the 5-day or 1-day regimen in pediatric patients with acute bacterial sinusitis has not been established.
OTITIS MEDIA AND ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS: (3 Day Regimen)*

Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day.

Weight

100 mg/5 mL

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL perTreatmentCourse

Total mg perTreatmentCourse

Kg

Lbs.

Day 1 to 3

Day 1 to 3

5

11

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

7.5 mL

150 mg

10

22

5 mL; (1 tsp)

15 mL

300 mg

20

44

5 mL; (1 tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

7.5 mL; (1 ½ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

10 mL; (2 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

12.5 mL; (2 ½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

OTITIS MEDIA: (1 Day Regimen)

Dosing Calculated on 30 mg/kg as a single dose.

Weight

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL perTreatment Course

Total mg perTreatment Course

Kg

Lbs.

1 Day Regimen

5

11

3.75 mL; (3/4 tsp)

3.75 mL

150 mg

10

22

7.5 mL; (1 ½ tsp)

7.5 mL

300 mg

20

44

15 mL; (3 tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

22.5 mL; (4 ½ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

30 mL; (6 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

37.5 mL; (7 ½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

The safety of re-dosing azithromycin in pediatric patients who vomit after receiving 30 mg/kg as a single dose has not been established. In clinical studies involving 487 patients with acute otitis media given a single 30 mg/kg dose of azithromycin, eight patients who vomited within 30 minutes of dosing were re-dosed at the same total dose.

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis: The recommended dose of azithromycin for children with pharyngitis/tonsillitis is 12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days. (See chart below)

PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR PHARYNGITIS/TONSILLITIS

(Age 2 years and above, [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)])

Based on Body Weight

PHARYNGITIS/TONSILLITIS: (5 Day Regimen)

Dosing Calculated on 12 mg/kg/day for 5 days.

Weight

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL per TreatmentCourse

Total mg per TreatmentCourse

Kg

Lbs.

Day 1 to 5

8

18

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

12.5 mL

500 mg

17

37

5 mL; (1 tsp)

25 mL

1000 mg

25

55

7.5 mL; (1½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

33

73

10 mL; (2 tsp)

50 mL

2000 mg

40

88

12.5 mL; (2½ tsp)

62.5 mL

2500 mg
Topiramate

Topiramate

2.1 Epilepsy

It is not necessary to monitor topiramate plasma concentrations to optimize topiramate tablet therapy.

On occasion, the addition of topiramate tablets to phenytoin may require an adjustment of the dose of phenytoin to achieve optimal clinical outcome. Addition or withdrawal of phenytoin and/or carbamazepine during adjunctive therapy with topiramate tablets may require adjustment of the dose of topiramate tablets.

Because of the bitter taste, tablets should not be broken.

Topiramate tablets can be taken without regard to meals.

Monotherapy Use

Adults and Pediatric Patients 10 Years and Older

The recommended dose for topiramate tablet monotherapy in adults and pediatric patients 10 years of age and older is 400 mg/day in two divided doses. Approximately 58% of patients randomized to 400 mg/day achieved this maximal dose in the monotherapy controlled trial; the mean dose achieved in the trial was 275 mg/day. The dose should be achieved by titration according to the following schedule (Table 1):
Table 1: Monotherapy Titration Schedule for Adults and Pediatric Patients 10 Years and Older
Morning Dose

Evening Dose

Week 1

25 mg

25 mg

Week 2

50 mg

50 mg

Week 3

75 mg

75 mg

Week 4

100 mg

100 mg

Week 5

150 mg

150 mg

Week 6

200 mg

200 mg

Children Ages 2 to < 10 Years

Dosing of topiramate as initial monotherapy in children 2 to < 10 years of age with partial onset or primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures was based on a pharmacometric bridging approach [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Dosing in patients 2 to < 10 years is based on weight. During the titration period, the initial dose of topiramate should be 25 mg/day administered nightly for the first week. Based upon tolerability, the dosage can be increased to 50 mg/day (25 mg twice daily) in the second week. Dosage can be increased by 25 to 50 mg/day each subsequent week as tolerated. Titration to the minimum maintenance dose should be attempted over 5 to 7 weeks of the total titration period. Based upon tolerability and clinical response, additional titration to a higher dose (up to the maximum maintenance dose) can be attempted at 25 to 50 mg/day weekly increments. The total daily dose should not exceed the maximum maintenance dose for each range of body weight (Table 2).
Table 2: Monotherapy Target Total Daily Maintenance Dosing for Patients 2 to < 10 Years * Administered in two equally divided doses
Weight (kg)

Total Daily Dose* (mg/day) Minimum Maintenance Dose

Total Daily Dose* (mg/day) Maximum Maintenance Dose

Up to 11

150

250

12 to 22

200

300

23 to 31

200

350

32 to 38

250

350

Greater than 38

250

400

Adjunctive Therapy Use

Adults 17 Years of Age and Over – Partial Onset Seizures, Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures, or Lennox-Gastaut Syndrome

The recommended total daily dose of topiramate tablets as adjunctive therapy in adults with partial onset seizures is 200 to 400 mg/day in two divided doses, and 400 mg/day in two divided doses as adjunctive treatment in adults with primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures. It is recommended that therapy be initiated at 25 to 50 mg/day followed by titration to an effective dose in increments of 25 to 50 mg/day every week. Titrating in increments of 25 mg/day every week may delay the time to reach an effective dose. Doses above 400 mg/day (600, 800 or 1,000 mg/day) have not been shown to improve responses in dose-response studies in adults with partial onset seizures. Daily doses above 1,600 mg have not been studied.

In the study of primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures, the initial titration rate was slower than in previous studies; the assigned dose was reached at the end of 8 weeks [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Pediatric Patients Ages 2 to 16 Years – Partial Onset Seizures, Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures, or Lennox-Gastaut Syndrome

The recommended total daily dose of topiramate tablets as adjunctive therapy for pediatric patients with partial onset seizures, primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures, or seizures associated with Lennox-Gastaut syndrome is approximately 5 to 9 mg/kg/day in two divided doses. Titration should begin at 25 mg/day (or less, based on a range of 1 to 3 mg/kg/day) nightly for the first week. The dosage should then be increased at 1 or 2 week intervals by increments of 1 to 3 mg/kg/day (administered in two divided doses), to achieve optimal clinical response. Dose titration should be guided by clinical outcome.

In the study of primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures, the initial titration rate was slower than in previous studies; the assigned dose of 6 mg/kg/day was reached at the end of 8 weeks [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.4 Patients With Renal Impairment

In renally impaired subjects (creatinine clearance less than 70 mL/min/1.73 m2), one-half of the usual adult dose is recommended. Such patients will require a longer time to reach steady-state at each dose.

2.5 Geriatric Patients (Ages 65 Years and Over)

Dosage adjustment may be indicated in the elderly patient when impaired renal function (creatinine clearance rate < 70 mL/min/1.73 m2) is evident [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.6 Patients Undergoing Hemodialysis

Topiramate is cleared by hemodialysis at a rate that is 4 to 6 times greater than a normal individual. Accordingly, a prolonged period of dialysis may cause topiramate concentration to fall below that required to maintain an anti-seizure effect. To avoid rapid drops in topiramate plasma concentration during hemodialysis, a supplemental dose of topiramate may be required. The actual adjustment should take into account 1) the duration of dialysis period, 2) the clearance rate of the dialysis system being used, and 3) the effective renal clearance of topiramate in the patient being dialyzed.

2.7 Patients With Hepatic Disease

In hepatically impaired patients, topiramate plasma concentrations may be increased. The mechanism is not well understood.
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

2.1 Adult Patients

[See Indications and Usage (1.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]

Infection*

Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy

Community-acquired pneumonia Pharyngitis/tonsillitis (second-line therapy) Skin/skin structure (uncomplicated)

500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5

Acute bacterial exacerbations of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease

500 mg once daily for 3 days

OR

500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5

Acute bacterial sinusitis

500 mg-once daily for 3 days

Genital ulcer disease (chancroid)

One single 1 gram dose

Non-gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis

One single 1 gram dose

Gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis

One single 2 gram dose

*DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS [see Indications and Usage (1.1)]

Azithromycin tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.2 Pediatric Patients1

Infection*

Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy

Acute otitis media

30 mg/kg as a single dose or 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days or 10 mg/kg as a single dose on Day 1 followed by 5 mg/kg/day on Days 2 through 5.

Acute bacterial sinusitis

10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days.

Community-acquired pneumonia

10 mg/kg as a single dose on Day 1 followed by 5 mg/kg once daily on Days 2 through 5.

Pharyngitis/tonsillitis

12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days.

*DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS [see Indications and Usage (1.2)]

1 see dosing tables below for maximum doses evaluated by indication

Azithromycin for oral suspension can be taken with or without food.

PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR OTITIS MEDIA, ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS, AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA

(Age 6 months and above, [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)])

Based on Body Weight

OTITIS MEDIA AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA: (5 Day Regimen)*

Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day Day 1and 5 mg/kg/day Days 2 to 5.

Weight

100 mg/5 mL

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL perTreatmentCourse

Total mg perTreatmentCourse

Kg

Lbs.

Day 1

Days 2 to 5

Day 1

Days 2 to 5

5

11

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

1.25 mL; (¼ tsp)

7.5 mL

150 mg

10

22

5 mL; (1 tsp)

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

15 mL

300 mg

20

44

5 mL; (1 tsp)

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

7.5 mL; (1½ tsp)

3.75 mL; (¾ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

10 mL; (2 tsp)

5 mL; (1 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

12.5 mL; (2½ tsp)

6.25 mL; (1¼ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

* Effectiveness of the 3 day or 1 day regimen in pediatric patients with community-acquired pneumonia has not been established.

OTITIS MEDIA AND ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS: (3 Day Regimen)*

Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day

Weight

100 mg/5 mL

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL perTreatmentCourse

Total mg perTreatmentCourse

Kg

Lbs.

Days 1 to 3

Days 1 to 3

5

11

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

7.5 mL

150 mg

10

22

5 mL; (1 tsp)

15 mL

300 mg

20

44

5 mL

(1 tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

7.5 mL

(1½ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

10 mL

(2 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

12.5 mL

(2½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

*Effectiveness of the 5 day or 1 day regimen in pediatric patients with acute bacterial sinusitis has not been established.

OTITIS MEDIA: (1 Day Regimen)

Dosing Calculated on 30 mg/kg as a single dose

Weight

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL perTreatment Course

Total mg perTreatment Course

Kg

Lbs.

1 Day Regimen

5

11

3.75 mL;

(3/4 tsp)

3.75 mL

150 mg

10

22

7.5 mL;

(1½ tsp)

7.5 mL

300 mg

20

44

15 mL;

(3 tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

22.5 mL;

(4½ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

30 mL;

(6 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

37.5 mL;

(7½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

The safety of re-dosing azithromycin in pediatric patients who vomit after receiving 30 mg/kg as a single dose has not been established. In clinical studies involving 487 patients with acute otitis media given a single 30 mg/kg dose of azithromycin, eight patients who vomited within 30 minutes of dosing were re-dosed at the same total dose.

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis: The recommended dose of azithromycin for children with pharyngitis/tonsillitis is 12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days. (See chart below.)

PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR PHARYNGITIS/TONSILLITIS

(Age 2 years and above, [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)])

Based on Body Weight

PHARYNGITIS/TONSILLITIS: (5 Day Regimen)

Dosing Calculated on 12 mg/kg/day for 5 days.

Weight

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL per TreatmentCourse

Total mg per TreatmentCourse

Kg

Lbs.

Day 1 to 5

8

18

2.5 mL;

(½ tsp)

12.5 mL

500 mg

17

37

5 mL;

(1 tsp)

25 mL

1000 mg

25

55

7.5 mL;

(1½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

33

73

10 mL;

(2 tsp)

50 mL

2000 mg

40

88

12.5 mL;

(2½ tsp)

62.5 mL

2500 mg

Constituting instructions for azithromycin for oral suspension 300, 600, 900, 1200 mg bottles. The table below indicates the volume of water to be used for constitution:

Amount of water to be added

Total volume after constitution (azithromycin content)

Azithromycin concentration after constitution

9 mL (300 mg)

15 mL (300 mg)

100 mg/5 mL

9 mL (600 mg)

15 mL (600 mg)

200 mg/5 mL

12 mL (900 mg)

22.5 mL (900 mg)

200 mg/5 mL

15 mL (1200 mg)

30 mL (1200 mg)

200 mg/5 mL
Nortriptyline Hydrochlo...

Nortriptyline Hydrochloride

Nortriptyline hydrochloride is not recommended for children.

Nortriptyline hydrochloride is administered orally in the form of capsules. Lower than usual dosages are recommended for elderly patients and adolescents. Lower dosages are also recommended for outpatients than for hospitalized patients who will be under close supervision. The physician should initiate dosage at a low level and increase it gradually, noting carefully the clinical response and any evidence of intolerance. Following remission, maintenance medication may be required for a longer period of time at the lowest dose that will maintain remission.

If a patient develops minor side effects, the dosage should be reduced. The drug should be discontinued promptly if adverse effects of a serious nature or allergic manifestations occur.

Usual Adult Dose

25 mg three or four times daily; dosage should begin at a low level and be increased as required. As an alternate regimen, the total daily dosage may be given once a day. When doses above 100 mg daily are administered, plasma levels of nortriptyline should be monitored and maintained in the optimum range of 50 to 150 ng/mL. Doses above 150 mg/day are not recommended.

Elderly and Adolescent Patients

30 to 50 mg/day, in divided doses, or the total daily dosage may be given once a day.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with nortriptyline hydrochloride. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping nortriptyline hydrochloride before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Nortriptyline Hydrochloride With Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start nortriptyline hydrochloride in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving nortriptyline hydrochloride therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, nortriptyline hydrochloride should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for two weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with nortriptyline hydrochloride may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with nortriptyline hydrochloride is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Clindamycin Hydrochlori...

Clindamycin Hydrochloride

If significant diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued (see WARNING box).

Adults:Serious infections - 150 to 300 mg every 6 hours. More severe infections - 300 to 450 mg every 6 hours.

Pediatric Patients:Serious infections - 8 to 16 mg/kg/day (4 to 8 mg/lb/day) divided into three or four equal doses. More severe infections - 16 to 20 mg/kg/day (8 to 10 mg/lb/day) divided into three or four equal doses

To avoid the possibility of esophageal irritation, clindamycin hydrochloride capsules should be taken with a full glass of water.

Serious infections due to anaerobic bacteria are usually treated with clindamycin injection. However, in clinically appropriate circumstances, the physician may elect to initiate treatment or continue treatment with clindamycin hydrochloride capsules.

In cases of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should continue for at least 10 days.
Budesonide Suspension

Budesonide Suspension

The recommended starting dose and highest recommended dose of budesonide inhalation suspension, based on prior asthma therapy, are listed in the following table.
Previous Therapy Recommended Starting Dose Highest Recommended Dose Bronchodilators alone 0.5 mg total daily dose administered twice daily in divided doses 0.5 mg total daily dose Inhaled Corticosteroids 0.5 mg total daily dose administered twice daily in divided doses 1 mg total daily dose Oral Corticosteroids 1 mg total daily dose administered as 0.5 mg twice daily 1 mg total daily dose
2.1 Dosing Recommendations

Dosing recommendations based on previous therapy are as follows:
Bronchodilators alone: 0.25 mg twice daily Inhaled corticosteroids: 0.25 mg twice daily up to 0.5 mg twice daily Oral corticosteroids: 0.5 mg twice daily
In all patients, it is desirable to downward-titrate to the lowest effective dose once asthma stability is achieved.

2.2 Directions for Use

Budesonide inhalation suspension should be administered via jet nebulizer connected to an air compressor with an adequate air flow, equipped with a mouthpiece or suitable face mask. Ultrasonic nebulizers are not suitable for the adequate administration of budesonide inhalation suspension and, therefore, are NOT recommended.

The effects of mixing budesonide inhalation suspension with other nebulizable medications have not been adequately assessed. Budesonide inhalation suspension should be administered separately in the nebulizer [see Patient Counseling Information, Administration with a jet nebulizer (17.1)].

A Pari-LC-Jet Plus Nebulizer (with face mask or mouthpiece) connected to a Pari Master compressor was used to deliver budesonide inhalation suspension to each patient in 3 U.S. controlled clinical studies. The safety and efficacy of budesonide inhalation suspension delivered by other nebulizers and compressors have not been established.
Tramadol Hydrochloride

Tramadol Hydrochloride

Adults (17 Years of age and Over)

For patients with moderate to moderately severe chronic pain not requiring rapid onset of analgesic effect, the tolerability of tramadol hydrochloride tablets USP can be improved by initiating therapy with a titration regimen: The total daily dose may be increased by 50 mg as tolerated every 3 days to reach 200 mg/day (50 mg q.i.d.). After titration, tramadol hydrochloride tablets USP 50 to 100 mg can be administered as needed for pain relief every 4 to 6 hours not to exceed 400 mg/day. For the subset of patients for whom rapid onset of analgesic effect is required and for whom the benefits outweigh the risk of discontinuation due to adverse events associated with higher initial doses, tramadol hydrochloride tablets USP 50 mg to 100 mg can be administered as needed for pain relief every four to six hours, not to exceed 400 mg per day.

Individualization of Dose

Good pain management practice dictates that the dose be individualized according to patient need using the lowest beneficial dose. Studies with tramadol in adults have shown that starting at the lowest possible dose and titrating upward will result in fewer discontinuations and increased tolerability.
• In all patients with creatinine clearance less than 30 mL/min, it is recommended that the dosing interval of tramadol be increased to 12 hours, with a maximum daily dose of 200 mg. Since only 7% of an administered dose is removed by hemodialysis, dialysis patients can receive their regular dose on the day of dialysis. • The recommended dose for adult patients with cirrhosis is 50 mg every 12 hours. • In general, dose selection for an elderly patient over 65 years old should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting the greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal or cardiac function and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. For elderly patients over 75 years old, total dose should not exceed 300 mg/day.
Amoxicillin And Clavula...

Amoxicillin And Clavulanate Potassium

Amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL does not contain the same amount of clavulanic acid (as the potassium salt) as any of the other suspensions of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium.. Amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL contains 42.9 mg of clavulanic acid per 5 mL, whereas the amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium, 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL suspension contains 28.5 mg of clavulanic acid per 5 mL and the 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL suspension contains 57 mg of clavulanic acid per 5 mL. Therefore, the amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL and 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL suspensions should notbe substituted for amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL as they are not interchangeable.

Dosage: Pediatric patients 3 months and older: Based on the amoxicillin component (600 mg/5 mL), the recommended dose of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL is 90 mg/kg/day divided every 12 hours, administered for 10 days (see chart below). This dose provides 6.4 mg/kg/day of the clavulanic acid component.

BodyWeight (kg)

Volume of Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL Powder for Oral Suspension providing 90 mg/kg/day

8

3 mL twice daily

12

4.5 mL twice daily

16

6 mL twice daily

20

7.5 mL twice daily

24

9 mL twice daily

28

10.5 mL twice daily

32

12 mL twice daily

36

13.5 mL twice daily

Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg and more:Experience with amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL in this group is not available.

Adults:Experience with amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL in adults is not available and adults who have difficulty swallowing should not be given amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL in place of the amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium 500 mg or 875 mg tablet.

Hepatically impaired patients should be dosed with caution and hepatic function monitored at regular intervals [see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS (5)].

Directions for Mixing Oral Suspension: Prepare a suspension at time of dispensing as follows: Tap bottle until all the powder flows freely. Add approximately 2/3 of the total amount of water for reconstitution (see table below) and shake vigorously to suspend powder. Add remainder of the water and again shake vigorously.

Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL Powder for Oral Suspension

Bottle Size

Amount of Water Required for Reconstitution

75 mL

68 mL

125 mL

108 mL

200 mL

170 mL

Each teaspoonful (5 mL) will contain 600 mg amoxicillin as the trihydrate and 42.9 mg of clavulanic acid as the potassium salt.

NOTE: SHAKE ORAL SUSPENSION WELL BEFORE USING.

Information for the Pharmacist: For patients who wish to alter the taste of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 ml, immediately after reconstitution 1 drop of FLAVORx™ (apple, banana cream, bubble gum, cherry, or watermelon flavor) may be added for every 5 mL of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL. The resulting suspension is stable for 10 days under refrigeration. Stability of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL when mixed with other flavors distributed by FLAVORx has not been evaluated for flavors other than the five flavors listed above.

Administration: To minimize the potential for gastrointestinal intolerance, amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL should be taken at the start of a meal. Absorption of clavulanate potassium may be enhanced when amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, 600 mg/42.9 mg per 5 mL is administered at the start of a meal.
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

[See Indications and Usage (1)]

Not for pediatric use.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients, please refer to the INDICATIONS AND USAGE and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION sections of the prescribing information for azithromycin for oral suspension 100 mg/5 mL and 200 mg/5 mL bottles.

Azithromycin tablets USP may be taken without regard to food. However, increased tolerability has been observed when tablets are taken with food.

2.2 Mycobacterial Infections

Prevention of Disseminated MAC Infections

The recommended dose of azithromycin tablets for the prevention of disseminated Mycobacterium avium complex (MAC) disease is: 1200 mg taken once weekly. This dose of azithromycin tablets may be combined with the approved dosage regimen of rifabutin.

Treatment of Disseminated MAC Infections

Azithromycin tablets should be taken at a daily dose of 600 mg, in combination with ethambutol at the recommended daily dose of 15 mg/kg. Other antimycobacterial drugs that have shown in vitro activity against MAC may be added to the regimen of azithromycin plus ethambutol at the discretion of the physician or health care provider.
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

RashThere are suggestions, yet to be proven, that the risk of severe, potentially life-threatening rash may be increased by (1) coadministration of lamotrigine tablets with valproate, (2) exceeding the recommended initial dose of lamotrigine tablets, or (3) exceeding the recommended dose escalation for lamotrigine tablets. However, cases have occurred in the absence of these factors [see Boxed Warning]. Therefore, it is important that the dosing recommendations be followed closely.

The risk of nonserious rash may be increased when the recommended initial dose and/or the rate of dose escalation for lamotrigine tablets is exceeded and in patients with a history of allergy or rash to other AEDs.

It is recommended that lamotrigine tablets not be restarted in patients who discontinued due to rash associated with prior treatment with lamotrigine unless the potential benefits clearly outweigh the risks. If the decision is made to restart a patient who has discontinued lamotrigine, the need to restart with the initial dosing recommendations should be assessed. The greater the interval of time since the previous dose, the greater consideration should be given to restarting with the initial dosing recommendations. If a patient has discontinued lamotrigine for a period of more than 5 half-lives, it is recommended that initial dosing recommendations and guidelines be followed. The half-life of lamotrigine is affected by other concomitant medications [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lamotrigine Added to Drugs Known to Induce or Inhibit Glucuronidation Because lamotrigine is metabolized predominantly by glucuronic acid conjugation, drugs that are known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation may affect the apparent clearance of lamotrigine. Drugs that induce glucuronidation include carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, rifampin, estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Valproate inhibits glucuronidation. For dosing considerations for lamotrigine tablets in patients on estrogen-containing contraceptives and atazanavir/ritonavir, see below and Table 13. For dosing considerations for lamotrigine tablets in patients on other drugs known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation, see Table 1, Table 2, Table 5, Table 6, and Table 13.

Target Plasma Levels for Patients With Epilepsy or Bipolar Disorder A therapeutic plasma concentration range has not been established for lamotrigine. Dosing of lamotrigine tablets should be based on therapeutic response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives Starting Lamotrigine Tablets in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: Although estrogen-containing oral contraceptives have been shown to increase the clearance of lamotrigine [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine tablets should be necessary solely based on the use of estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Therefore, dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine tablets based on the concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Table 1 or Table 5). See below for adjustments to maintenance doses of lamotrigine tablets in women taking estrogen-containing oral contraceptives.

Adjustments to the Maintenance Dose of Lamotrigine Tablets in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:

(1) Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2 fold over the recommended target maintenance dose to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level.

(2) Starting Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women taking a stable dose of lamotrigine tablets and not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2 fold to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The dose increases should begin at the same time that the oral contraceptive is introduced and continue, based on clinical response, no more rapidly than 50 to 100 mg/day every week. Dose increases should not exceed the recommended rate (see Table 1 or Table 5) unless lamotrigine plasma levels or clinical response support larger increases. Gradual transient increases in lamotrigine plasma levels may occur during the week of inactive hormonal preparation (pill-free week), and these increases will be greater if dose increases are made in the days before or during the week of inactive hormonal preparation. Increased lamotrigine plasma levels could result in additional adverse reactions, such as dizziness, ataxia, and diplopia. If adverse reactions attributable to lamotrigine tablets consistently occur during the pill-free week, dose adjustments to the overall maintenance dose may be necessary. Dose adjustments limited to the pill-free week are not recommended. For women taking lamotrigine tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets be necessary.

(3) Stopping Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets will in most cases need to be decreased by as much as 50% in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The decrease in dose of lamotrigine tablets should not exceed 25% of the total daily dose per week over a 2 week period, unless clinical response or lamotrigine plasma levels indicate otherwise [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. In women taking lamotrigine tablets in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be necessary.

Women and Other Hormonal Contraceptive Preparations or Hormone Replacement Therapy The effect of other hormonal contraceptive preparations or hormone replacement therapy on the pharmacokinetics of lamotrigine has not been systematically evaluated. It has been reported that ethinylestradiol, not progestogens, increased the clearance of lamotrigine up to 2 fold, and the progestin-only pills had no effect on lamotrigine plasma levels. Therefore, adjustments to the dosage of lamotrigine tablets in the presence of progestogens alone will likely not be needed.

Patients Taking Atazanavir/Ritonavir While atazanavir/ritonavir does reduce the lamotrigine plasma concentration, no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine tablets should be necessary solely based on the use of atazanavir/ritonavir. Dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine tablets based on concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Tables 1, 2 and 5). In patients already taking maintenance doses of lamotrigine tablets and not taking glucuronidation inducers, the dose of lamotrigine tablets may need to be increased if atazanavir/ritonavir is added, or decreased if atazanavir/ritonavir is discontinued [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients With Hepatic Impairment Experience in patients with hepatic impairment is limited. Based on a clinical pharmacology study in 24 subjects with mild, moderate, and severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the following general recommendations can be made. No dosage adjustment is needed in patients with mild liver impairment. Initial, escalation, and maintenance doses should generally be reduced by approximately 25% in patients with moderate and severe liver impairment without ascites and 50% in patients with severe liver impairment with ascites. Escalation and maintenance doses may be adjusted according to clinical response.

Patients With Renal Impairment Initial doses of lamotrigine tablets should be based on patients' concomitant medications (see Tables 1 to 3 or Table 5); reduced maintenance doses may be effective for patients with significant renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Few patients with severe renal impairment have been evaluated during chronic treatment with lamotrigine tablets. Because there is inadequate experience in this population, lamotrigine tablets should be used with caution in these patients.

Discontinuation Strategy Epilepsy: For patients receiving lamotrigine tablets in combination with other AEDs, a re-evaluation of all AEDs in the regimen should be considered if a change in seizure control or an appearance or worsening of adverse reactions is observed.

If a decision is made to discontinue therapy with lamotrigine tablets, a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) is recommended unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

Discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation should prolong the half-life of lamotrigine; discontinuing valproate should shorten the half-life of lamotrigine.

Bipolar Disorder: In the controlled clinical trials, there was no increase in the incidence, type, or severity of adverse reactions following abrupt termination of lamotrigine tablets. In clinical trials in patients with bipolar disorder, 2 patients experienced seizures shortly after abrupt withdrawal of lamotrigine tablets. However, there were confounding factors that may have contributed to the occurrence of seizures in these patients with bipolar disorder. Discontinuation of lamotrigine tablets should involve a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

2.2 Epilepsy – Adjunctive Therapy

This section provides specific dosing recommendations for patients older than 12 years and patients aged 2 to 12 years. Within each of these age-groups, specific dosing recommendations are provided depending upon concomitant AEDs or other concomitant medications (see Table 1 for patients older than 12 years and Table 2for patients aged 2 to 12 years). A weight-based dosing guide for patients aged 2 to 12 years on concomitant valproate is provided in Table 3.

Patients Older Than 12 YearsRecommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients Older Than 12 Years With Epilepsy * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. † Drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, other than the specified antiepileptic drugs, include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives, rifampin, and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives and the protease inhibitor atazanavir/ritonavir can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration ( 2.1) ]. Patients on rifampin and the protease inhibitor lopinavir/ritonavir should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen used with antiepileptic drugs that induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Dosage and Administration ( 2.1), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) ].
In Patients TAKING Valproate*

In Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone†, or Valproate*

In Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone† and NOT TAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

25 mg every other day

25 mg every day

50 mg/day

Weeks 3 and 4

25 mg every day

50 mg/day

100 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)

Week 5 onward to maintenance

Increase by 25 to 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks

Increase by 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks

Increase by 100 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks

Usual maintenance dose

100 to 200 mg/day with valproate alone

100 to 400 mg/day with valproate and other drugs that induce glucuronidation

(in 1 or 2 divided doses)

225 to 375 mg/day (in 2 divided doses)

300 to 500 mg/day

(in 2 divided doses)

Patients Aged 2 to 12 YearsRecommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 2.

Smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations than those used in clinical trials are recommended because of the suggestion that the risk of rash may be decreased by smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations. Therefore, maintenance doses will take longer to reach in clinical practice than in clinical trials. It may take several weeks to months to achieve an individualized maintenance dose. Maintenance doses in patients weighing less than 30 kg, regardless of age or concomitant AED, may need to be increased as much as 50%, based on clinical response.
Table 2. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients Aged 2 to 12 Years With Epilepsy * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
In Patients TAKING Valproate*

In Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone†, or Valproate*

In Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone†and NOT TAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

0.15 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight-based dosing guide)

0.3 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet

0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet

Weeks 3 and 4

0.3 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see Table 3 for weight-based dosing guide)

0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet

1.2 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet

Week 5 onward to maintenance

The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.3 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose.

The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.6 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose.

The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 1.2 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose.

Usual maintenance dose

1 to 5 mg/kg/day (maximum 200 mg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses)1 to 3 mg/kg/day with valproate alone

4.5 to 7.5 mg/kg/day (maximum 300 mg/day in 2 divided doses)

5 to 15 mg/kg/day (maximum 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses)

Maintenance dose in patients less than 30 kg

May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

Note: Only whole tablets should be used for dosing.
Table 3. The Initial Weight-Based Dosing Guide for Patients Aged 2 to 12 Years Taking Valproate (Weeks 1 to 4) With Epilepsy
If the patient’s weight is

Give this daily dose, using the most appropriate combination of lamotrigine, 2 and 5 mg tablets

Greater than

And less than

Weeks 1 and 2

Weeks 3 and 4

6.7 kg

14 kg

2 mg every other day

2 mg every day

14.1 kg

27 kg

2 mg every day

4 mg every day

27.1 kg

34 kg

4 mg every day

8 mg every day

34.1 kg

40 kg

5 mg every day

10 mg every day

Usual Adjunctive Maintenance Dose for EpilepsyThe usual maintenance doses identified in Tables 1 and 2 are derived from dosing regimens employed in the placebo-controlled adjunctive trials in which the efficacy of lamotrigine tablets was established. In patients receiving multidrug regimens employing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, or primidone without valproate, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets as high as 700 mg/day have been used. In patients receiving valproate alone, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets as high as 200 mg/day have been used. The advantage of using doses above those recommended in Tables 1 through 4 has not been established in controlled trials.

2.3 Epilepsy – Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy to Monotherapy

The goal of the transition regimen is to attempt to maintain seizure control while mitigating the risk of serious rash associated with the rapid titration of lamotrigine tablets.

The recommended maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets as monotherapy is 500 mg/day given in 2 divided doses.

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations for lamotrigine tablets should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine TabletsAfter achieving a dose of 500 mg/day of lamotrigine tablets using the guidelines in Table 1, the concomitant enzyme-inducing AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4 week period. The regimen for the withdrawal of the concomitant AED is based on experience gained in the controlled monotherapy clinical trial.

Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine TabletsThe conversion regimen involves the 4 steps outlined in Table 4.
Table 4. Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine in Patients Aged 16 Years and Older With Epilepsy

Lamotrigine

Valproate

Step 1

Achieve a dose of 200 mg/day according to guidelines in Table 1.

Maintain established stable dose.

Step 2

Maintain at 200 mg/day.

Decrease dose by decrements no greater than 500 mg/day/week to 500 mg/day and then maintain for 1 week.

Step 3

Increase to 300 mg/day and maintain for 1 week.

Simultaneously decrease to 250 mg/day and maintain for 1 week.

Step 4

Increase by 100 mg/day every week to achieve maintenance dose of 500 mg/day.

Discontinue.

Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Antiepileptic Drugs Other Than Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine TabletsNo specific dosing guidelines can be provided for conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine tablets with AEDs other than carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or valproate.

2.4 Bipolar Disorder

The goal of maintenance treatment with lamotrigine tablets is to delay the time to occurrence of mood episodes (depression, mania, hypomania, mixed episodes) in patients treated for acute mood episodes with standard therapy. The target dose of lamotrigine tablets is 200 mg/day (100 mg/day in patients taking valproate, which decreases the apparent clearance of lamotrigine, and 400 mg/day in patients not taking valproate and taking either carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitor lopinavir/ritonavir that increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine). In the clinical trials, doses up to 400 mg/day as monotherapy were evaluated; however, no additional benefit was seen at 400 mg/day compared with 200 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Accordingly, doses above 200 mg/day are not recommended. Treatment with lamotrigine tablets is introduced, based on concurrent medications, according to the regimen outlined in Table 5. If other psychotropic medications are withdrawn following stabilization, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be adjusted. For patients discontinuing valproate, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should be doubled over a 2 week period in equal weekly increments (see Table 6). For patients discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin and the protease inhibitors lopinavir/ritonavir and atazanavir/ritonavir that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation, the dose of lamotrigine tablets should remain constant for the first week and then should be decreased by half over a 2 week period in equal weekly decrements (see Table 6). The dose of lamotrigine tablets may then be further adjusted to the target dose (200 mg) as clinically indicated.

If other drugs are subsequently introduced, the dose of lamotrigine tablets may need to be adjusted. In particular, the introduction of valproate requires reduction in the dose of lamotrigine tablets [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine tablets should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].
Table 5. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients With Bipolar Disorder * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [ see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)] . † Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [ see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
In Patients TAKING Valproate*

In Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone†, or Valproate†

In Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone†and NOT TAKING Valproate*

Weeks 1 and 2

25 mg every other day

25 mg daily

50 mg daily

Weeks 3 and 4

25 mg daily

50 mg daily

100 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 5

50 mg daily

100 mg daily

200 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 6

100 mg daily

200 mg daily

300 mg daily, in divided doses

Week 7

100 mg daily

200 mg daily

up to 400 mg daily, in divided doses
Table 6. Dosage Adjustments to Lamotrigine in Patients With Bipolar Disorder Following Discontinuation of Psychotropic Medications
Discontinuation of Psychotropic Drugs (excluding Valproate*, Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone†)

After Discontinuation of Valproate*

After Discontinuation of Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone†

Current dose of Lamotrigine (mg/day) 100

Current dose of Lamotrigine (mg/day)

400

Week 1

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine

150

400

Week 2

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine

200

300

Week 3 onward

Maintain current dose of lamotrigine

200

200

The benefit of continuing treatment in patients who had been stabilized in an 8 to 16 week open-label phase with lamotrigine tablets was established in 2 randomized, placebo-controlled clinical maintenance trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, the optimal duration of treatment with lamotrigine tablets has not been established. Thus, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.
Carbidopa And Levodopa

Carbidopa And Levodopa

The optimum daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP must be determined by careful titration in each patient. Carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP are available in a 1:4 ratio of carbidopa to levodopa (25 mg/100 mg) as well as 1:10 ratio (25 mg/250 mg and 10 mg/100 mg). Tablets of the two ratios may be given separately or combined as needed to provide the optimum dosage.

Studies show that peripheral dopa decarboxylase is saturated by carbidopa at approximately 70 to 100 mg a day. Patients receiving less than this amount of carbidopa are more likely to experience nausea and vomiting.

Usual Initial Dosage

Dosage is best initiated with one carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/100 mg three times a day. This dosage schedule provides 75 mg of carbidopa per day. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day, as necessary, until a dosage of eight carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP, 25 mg/100 mg a day is reached.

If carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP, 10 mg/100 mg are used, dosage may be initiated with one tablet three or four times a day. However, this will not provide an adequate amount of carbidopa for many patients. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day until a total of eight tablets (2 tablets q.i.d.) is reached.

How to Transfer Patients From Levodopa

Levodopa must be discontinued at least twelve hours before starting this combination product. A daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP should be chosen that will provide approximately 25% of the previous levodopa dosage. Patients who are taking less than 1500 mg of levodopa a day should be started on one carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/100 mg three or four times a day. The suggested starting dosage for most patients taking more than 1500 mg of levodopa is one carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/250 mg three or four times a day.

Maintenance

Therapy should be individualized and adjusted according to the desired therapeutic response. At least 70 to 100 mg of carbidopa per day should be provided. When a greater proportion of carbidopa is required, one carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/100 mg may be substituted for each carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 10 mg/100 mg. When more levodopa is required, each carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/250 mg should be substituted for a carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/100 mg or a carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 10 mg/100 mg. If necessary, the dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP, 25 mg/250 mg may be increased by one-half or one tablet every day or every other day to a maximum of eight tablets a day. Experience with total daily dosages of carbidopa greater than 200 mg is limited.

Because both therapeutic and adverse responses occur more rapidly with this combination product than with levodopa alone, patients should be monitored closely during the dose adjustment period. Specifically, involuntary movements will occur more rapidly with carbidopa and levodopa than with levodopa. The occurrence of involuntary movements may require dosage reduction. Blepharospasm may be a useful early sign of excess dosage in some patients.

Addition of Other Antiparkinsonian Medications

Standard drugs for Parkinson’s disease, other than levodopa without a decarboxylase inhibitor, may be used concomitantly while carbidopa and levodopa therapy is being administered, although dosage adjustments may be required.

Interruption of Therapy

Sporadic cases of hyperpyrexia and confusion have been associated with dose reductions and withdrawal of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP. Patients should be observed carefully if abrupt reduction or discontinuation of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP is required, especially if the patient is receiving neuroleptics (see WARNINGS).

If general anesthesia is required, carbidopa and levodopa therapy may be continued as long as the patient is permitted to take fluids and medication by mouth. If therapy is interrupted temporarily, the patient should be observed for symptoms resembling NMS, and the usual daily dosage may be administered as soon as the patient is able to take oral medication.
Hydroxyzine Hydrochlori...

Hydroxyzine Hydrochloride

For symptomatic relief of anxiety and tension associated with psychoneurosis and as an adjunct in organic disease states in which anxiety is manifested: adults, 50 to 100 mg q.i.d.; children under 6 years, 50 mg daily in divided doses; children over 6 years, 50 to 100 mg daily in divided doses.

For use in the management of pruritus due to allergic conditions such as chronic urticaria and atopic and contact dermatoses and in histamine-mediated pruritus: adults, 25 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.; children under 6 years, 50 mg daily in divided doses; children over 6 years, 50 to 100 mg daily in divided doses.

As a sedative when used as a premedication and following general anesthesia: 50 to 100 mg for adults and 0.6 mg/kg of body weight in children.

When treatment is initiated by the intramuscular route of administration, subsequent doses may be administered orally.

As with all potent medication, the dosage should be adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy.
Granisetron Hydrochlori...

Granisetron Hydrochloride

Emetogenic Chemotherapy

The recommended adult dosage of oral granisetron hydrochloride tablets USP is 2 mg once daily or 1 mg twice daily. In the 2 mg once-daily regimen, two 1 mg tablets are given up to 1 hour before chemotherapy. In the 1 mg twice-daily regimen, the first 1 mg tablet is given up to 1 hour before chemotherapy, and the second tablet, 12 hours after the first. Either regimen is administered only on the day(s) chemotherapy is given. Continued treatment, while not on chemotherapy, has not been found to be useful.

Use in the Elderly, Renal Failure Patients or Hepatically Impaired Patients

No dosage adjustment is recommended (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics).

Pediatric Use

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients have not been established.

Radiation (Either Total Body Irradiation or Fractionated Abdominal Radiation)

The recommended adult dosage of oral granisetron hydrochloride tablets USP is 2 mg once daily. Two 1 mg tablets are taken within 1 hour of radiation.

Pediatric Use

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients have not been established.

Use in the Elderly

No dosage adjustment is recommended.
Entecavir

Entecavir

2.1 Timing of Administration

Entecavir tablets should be administered on an empty stomach (at least 2 hours after a meal and 2 hours before the next meal).

2.2 Recommended Dosage in Adults

Compensated Liver Disease

The recommended dose of entecavir tablets for chronic hepatitis B virus infection in nucleoside-inhibitor-treatment-naïve adults and adolescents 16 years of age and older is 0.5 mg once daily.

The recommended dose of entecavir tablets in adults and adolescents (at least 16 years of age) with a history of hepatitis B viremia while receiving lamivudine or known lamivudine or telbivudine resistance substitutions rtM204I/V with or without rtL180M, rtL80I/V, or rtV173L is 1 mg once daily.

Decompensated Liver Disease

The recommended dose of entecavir tablets for chronic hepatitis B virus infection in adults with decompensated liver disease is 1 mg once daily.

2.3 Recommended Dosage in Pediatric Patients

Pediatric use information is approved for Bristol-Myers Squibb Company’s Baraclude® (entecavir) tablets. However, due to Bristol-Myers Squibb Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that information.

2.4 Renal Impairment

In adult subjects with renal impairment, the apparent oral clearance of entecavir decreased as creatinine clearance decreased [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Dosage adjustment is recommended for patients with creatinine clearance less than 50 mL/min, including patients on hemodialysis or continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD), as shown in Table 2. The once-daily dosing regimens are preferred.
Table 2: Recommended Dosage of Entecavir Tablets in Adult Patients With Renal Impairment * If administered on a hemodialysis day, administer entecavir tablets after the hemodialysis session.
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Usual Dose (0.5 mg)

Lamivudine-Refractory or Decompensated Liver Disease (1 mg)

50 or greater

0.5 mg once daily

1 mg once daily

30 to less than 50

0.5 mg every 48 hours

0.5 mg once dailyOR 1 mg every 48 hours

10 to less than 30

0.5 mg every 72 hours

1 mg every 72 hours

Less than 10Hemodialysis* or CAPD

0.5 mg every 7 days

1 mg every 7 days

Pediatric use information is approved for Bristol-Myers Squibb Company’s Baraclude® (entecavir) tablets. However, due to Bristol-Myers Squibb Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that information.

2.5 Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with hepatic impairment.

2.6 Duration of Therapy

The optimal duration of treatment with entecavir tablets for patients with chronic hepatitis B virus infection and the relationship between treatment and long-term outcomes such as cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma are unknown.
Ribavirin

Ribavirin

Under no circumstances should ribavirin capsules be opened, crushed, or broken. Ribavirin capsules should be taken with food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Ribavirin capsules should not be used in patients with creatinine clearance less than 50 mL/min.
Table 2: Recommended Ribavirin Dosing in Combination Therapy (Pediatrics) * Ribavirin Oral Solution may be used for any patient regardless of body weight.
Body Weight kg (lbs)

Ribavirin

Daily Dose

Ribavirin Number of Capsules

< 47

15 mg/kg/day

Use Ribavirin Oral Solution*

(< 103)

47 to 59

800 mg/day

2 x 200 mg capsules A.M.

(103 to 131)

2 x 200 mg capsules P.M.

60 to 73

1000 mg/day

2 x 200 mg capsules A.M.

(132 to 162)

3 x 200 mg capsules P.M.

> 73

1200 mg/day

3 x 200 mg capsules A.M.

(> 162)

3 x 200 mg capsules P.M.

2.2 Ribavirin/INTRON A Combination Therapy

Adults

Duration of Treatment – Interferon Alpha-naïve Patients

The recommended dose of INTRON A is 3 million IU three times weekly subcutaneously. The recommended dose of ribavirin capsules depends on the patient’s body weight (refer to Table 3). The recommended duration of treatment for patients previously untreated with interferon is 24 to 48 weeks. The duration of treatment should be individualized to the patient depending on baseline disease characteristics, response to therapy, and tolerability of the regimen [see Indications and Usage (1.1) and Clinical Studies (14)]. After 24 weeks of treatment, virologic response should be assessed. Treatment discontinuation should be considered in any patient who has not achieved an HCV-RNA below the limit of detection of the assay by 24 weeks. There are no safety and efficacy data on treatment for longer than 48 weeks in the previously untreated patient population.
Duration of Treatment – Re-treatment with INTRON A/Ribavirin in Relapse Patients In patients who relapse following nonpegylated interferon monotherapy, the recommended duration of treatment is 24 weeks. Table 3: Recommended Dosing
Body Weight

Ribavirin Capsules

≤ 75 kg

2 x 200 mg capsules AM

3 x 200 mg capsules PM daily orally

> 75 kg

3 x 200 mg capsules AM

3 x 200 mg capsules PM daily orally

Pediatrics

The recommended dose of ribavirin is 15 mg/kg per day orally (divided dose AM and PM). Refer to Table 2 for Pediatric Dosing of ribavirin in combination with INTRON A. INTRON A for injection by body weight of 25 kg to 61 kg is 3 million IU/m2 three times weekly subcutaneously. Refer to adult dosing table for greater than 61 kg body weight.

The recommended duration of treatment is 48 weeks for pediatric patients with genotype 1. After 24 weeks of treatment, virologic response should be assessed. Treatment discontinuation should be considered in any patient who has not achieved an HCV-RNA below the limit of detection of the assay by this time. The recommended duration of treatment for pediatric patients with genotype 2/3 is 24 weeks.

2.3 Laboratory Tests

The following laboratory tests are recommended for all patients treated with ribavirin, prior to beginning treatment and then periodically thereafter.
• Standard hematologic tests - including hemoglobin (pretreatment, Week 2 and Week 4 of therapy, and as clinically appropriate [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.2, 5.7)], complete and differential white blood cell counts, and platelet count. • Blood chemistries - liver function tests and TSH. • Pregnancy - including monthly monitoring for women of childbearing potential. • ECG [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
2.4 Dose Modifications

If severe adverse reactions or laboratory abnormalities develop during combination ribavirin/INTRON A therapy, modify or discontinue the dose until the adverse reaction abates or decreases in severity [see Warnings and Precautions (5)]. If intolerance persists after dose adjustment, combination therapy should be discontinued.

Ribavirin should not be used in patients with creatinine clearance less than 50 mL/min. Patients with impaired renal function and those over the age of 50 should be carefully monitored with respect to development of anemia [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2), Use in Specific Populations (8.5), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Ribavirin should be administered with caution to patients with preexisting cardiac disease. Patients should be assessed before commencement of therapy and should be appropriately monitored during therapy. If there is any deterioration of cardiovascular status, therapy should be stopped [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

For patients with a history of stable cardiovascular disease, a permanent dose reduction is required if the hemoglobin decreases by greater than or equal to 2 g/dL during any 4 week period. In addition, for these cardiac history patients, if the hemoglobin remains less than 12 g/dL after 4 weeks on a reduced dose, the patient should discontinue combination therapy.

It is recommended that a patient whose hemoglobin level falls below 10 g/dL have his/her ribavirin dose modified or discontinued per Table 4 [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Table 4: Guidelines for Dose Modification and Discontinuation of Ribavirin in combination with INTRON A Based on Laboratory Parameters in Adults and Pediatrics * Pediatric patients who have preexisting cardiac conditions and experience a hemoglobin decrease greater than or equal to 2 g/dL during any 4 week period during treatment should have weekly evaluations and hematology testing. † These guidelines are for patients with stable cardiac disease [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Laboratory Parameters

Reduce Ribavirin Daily Dose

(see note 1) if:

Reduce INTRON A

Dose (see note 2) if:

Discontinue Therapy if:

WBC

N/A

1.0 to < 1.5 x 109/L

< 1.0 x 109/L

Neutrophils

N/A

0.5 to < 0.75 x 109/L

< 0.5 x 109/L

Platelets

N/A

25 to < 50 x 109/L (adults)

< 25 x 109/L (adults)

N/A

50 to < 70 x 109/L (pediatrics)

< 50 x 109/L (pediatrics)

Creatinine

N/A

N/A

> 2 mg/dL (pediatrics)

Hemoglobin in patients without history of cardiac disease

8.5 to < 10 g/dL

N/A

< 8.5 g/dL

Reduce Ribavirin Dose by 200 mg/day and INTRON

A Dose by Half if:

Hemoglobin in patients with history of stable cardiac disease*†

≥ 2 g/dL decrease in hemoglobin during any

four week period during treatment

< 8.5 g/dL or

< 12 g/dL after four weeks of

dose reduction

Note 1: Adult patients: 1st dose reduction of ribavirin is by 200 mg/day (except in patients receiving the 1,400 mg, dose reduction should be by 400 mg/day). If needed, 2nd dose reduction of ribavirin is by an additional 200 mg/day. Patients whose dose of ribavirin is reduced to 600 mg daily receive one 200 mg capsule in the morning and two 200 mg capsules in the evening.

Pediatric patients: 1st dose reduction of ribavirin is to 12 mg/kg/day, 2nd dose reduction of ribavirin is to 8 mg/kg/day.

Note 2: For patients on Ribavirin/INTRON A combination therapy: reduce INTRON A dose by 50%.

Refer to labeling for INTRON A for additional information about how to reduce an INTRON A dose.

2.5 Discontinuation of Dosing

Adults

Regardless of genotype, previously treated patients who have detectable HCV-RNA at week 12 or 24 are highly unlikely to achieve SVR and discontinuation of therapy should be considered.
Amoxicillin And Clavula...

Amoxicillin And Clavulanate Potassium

Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets, Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension, and Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets (Chewable) may be taken without regard to meals; however, absorption of clavulanate potassium is enhanced when Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets, Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension, and Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets (Chewable) are administered at the start of a meal. To minimize the potential for gastrointestinal intolerance, Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets, Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension, and Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets (Chewable) should be taken at the start of a meal.

2.1 Adults

The usual adult dose is one 500 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet every 12 hours or one 250 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet every 8 hours. For more severe infections and infections of the respiratory tract, the dose should be one 875 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet every 12 hours or one 500 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet every 8 hours. Adults who have difficulty swallowing may be given the 125 mg/31.25 mg per 5 mL or 250 mg/62.5 mg per 5 mL suspension in place of the 500 mg/125 mg tablet. The 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL suspension or the 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL suspension may be used in place of the 875 mg/125 mg tablet.

Two 250 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets should not be substituted for one 500 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet. Since both the 250 mg/125 mg and 500 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets contain the same amount of clavulanic acid (125 mg, as the potassium salt), two 250 mg/125 mg tablets are not equivalent to one 500 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet.

The 250 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet and the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet should not be substituted for each other, as they are not interchangeable. The 250 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet and the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet do not contain the same amount of clavulanic acid (as the potassium salt). The 250 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablet contains 125 mg of clavulanic acid, whereas the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet contains 62.5 mg of clavulanic acid.

2.2 Pediatric Patients

Based on the amoxicillin component, Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension should be dosed as follows:

Neonates and Infants Aged < 12 Weeks (< 3 Months): The recommended dose of Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension is 30 mg/kg/day divided every 12 hours, based on the amoxicillin component. Experience with the 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL formulation in this age group is limited, and thus, use of the 125 mg/31.25 mg per 5 mL oral suspension is recommended.

Patients Aged 12 Weeks (3 Months) and Older: See dosing regimens provided in Table 1. The every 12 hour regimen is recommended as it is associated with significantly less diarrhea [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, the every 12 hour suspension (200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL and 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL) and chewable tablets (200 mg/28.5 mg and 400 mg/57 mg) contain aspartame and should not be used by phenylketonurics. [see Warnings and Precautions (5.6)]
* Each strength of Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension is available as a chewable tablet for use by older children. † Duration of therapy studied and recommended for acute otitis media is 10 days.
Table 1: Dosing in Patients Aged 12 Weeks (3 Months) and Older

INFECTION

DOSING REGIMEN

Every 12 hours

Every 8 hours

200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL or 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL oral suspension*

125 mg/31.25 mg per 5 mL or 250 mg/62.5 mg per 5 mL oral suspension*

Otitis media†, sinusitis, lower respiratory tract infections, and more severe infections

45 mg/kg/day every 12 hours

40 mg/kg/day every 8 hours

Less severe infections

25 mg/kg/day every 12 hours

20 mg/kg/day every 8 hours

Patients Weighing 40 kg or More: Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations.

The 250 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets should not be used until the child weighs at least 40 kg, due to the different amoxicillin to clavulanic acid ratios in the 250 mg/125 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets (250/125) versus the 250 mg/62.5 mg Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets (Chewable) (250/62.5).

2.3 Patients With Renal Impairment

Patients with impaired renal function do not generally require a reduction in dose unless the impairment is severe. Renal impairment patients with a glomerular filtration rate of < 30 mL/min should not receive the 875 mg/125 mg dose. Patients with a glomerular filtration rate of 10 to 30 mL/min should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 12 hours, depending on the severity of the infection. Patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 10 mL/min should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection.

Hemodialysis patients should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. They should receive an additional dose both during and at the end of dialysis.

2.4 Directions for Mixing Oral Suspension

Prepare a suspension at time of dispensing as follows: Tap bottle until all the powder flows freely. Add approximately 2/3 of the total amount of water for reconstitution (see Table 2 below) and shake vigorously to suspend powder. Add remainder of the water and again shake vigorously.

Table 2: Amount of Water for Mixing Oral Suspension

Strength

Bottle Size

Amount of Water for Reconstitution

Contents of Each Teaspoonful (5 mL)

200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL

100 mL

92 mL

200 mg amoxicillin and 28.5 mg of clavulanic acid as the potassium salt

400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL

100 mL

87 mL

400 mg amoxicillin and 57 mg of clavulanic acid as the potassium salt

Note: Shake oral suspension well before using. Reconstituted suspension must be stored under refrigeration and discarded after 10 days.
Paroxetine

Paroxetine

Major Depressive Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended initial dose is 20 mg/day. Patients were dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine hydrochloride in the treatment of major depressive disorder. As with all drugs effective in the treatment of major depressive disorder, the full effect may be delayed. Some patients not responding to a 20 mg dose may benefit from dose increases, in 10 mg/day increments, up to a maximum of 50 mg/day. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least 1 week.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine tablets should remain on them. It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Systematic evaluation of the efficacy of paroxetine hydrochloride has shown that efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 1 year with doses that averaged about 30 mg.

Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended dose of paroxetine tablets in the treatment of OCD is 40 mg daily. Patients should be started on 20 mg/day and the dose can be increased in 10 mg/day increments. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least 1 week. Patients were dosed in a range of 20 to 60 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine hydrochloride in the treatment of OCD. The maximum dosage should not exceed 60 mg/day.

Maintenance Therapy

Long-term maintenance of efficacy was demonstrated in a 6 month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with OCD assigned to paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Trials). OCD is a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Panic Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The target dose of paroxetine tablets in the treatment of panic disorder is 40 mg/day. Patients should be started on 10 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 10 mg/day increments and at intervals of at least 1 week. Patients were dosed in a range of 10 to 60 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine hydrochloride. The maximum dosage should not exceed 60 mg/day.

Maintenance Therapy

Long-term maintenance of efficacy was demonstrated in a 3 month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with panic disorder assigned to paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Trials). Panic disorder is a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Social Anxiety Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended and initial dosage is 20 mg/day. In clinical trials the effectiveness of paroxetine hydrochloride was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 60 mg/day. While the safety of paroxetine has been evaluated in patients with social anxiety disorder at doses up to 60 mg/day, available information does not suggest any additional benefit for doses above 20 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Trials).

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine tablets should remain on them. Although the efficacy of paroxetine hydrochloride beyond 12 weeks of dosing has not been demonstrated in controlled clinical trials, social anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation of treatment for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Generalized Anxiety Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine tablets should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. In clinical trials the effectiveness of paroxetine was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day. The recommended starting dosage and the established effective dosage is 20 mg/day. There is not sufficient evidence to suggest a greater benefit to doses higher than 20 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 10 mg/day increments and at intervals of at least 1 week.

Maintenance Therapy

Systematic evaluation of continuing paroxetine hydrochloride for periods of up to 24 weeks in patients with Generalized Anxiety Disorder who had responded while taking paroxetine hydrochloride during an 8 week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Trials). Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to paroxetine hydrochloride and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see WARNINGS, Usage in Pregnancy). When treating pregnant women with paroxetine during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Dosage for Elderly or Debilitated Patients, and Patients With Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

The recommended initial dose is 10 mg/day for elderly patients, debilitated patients, and/or patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment. Increases may be made if indicated. Dosage should not exceed 40 mg/day.

Switching a Patient to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with paroxetine tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping paroxetine tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Paroxetine Tablets With Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start paroxetine tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with paroxetine tablets may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, paroxetine tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with paroxetine tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with paroxetine tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).

Discontinuation of Treatment With Paroxetine Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of paroxetine hydrochloride have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS,Discontinuation of Treatment With Paroxetine Tablets). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment, regardless of the indication for which paroxetine tablets are being prescribed. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.
Fluoxetine Solution

Fluoxetine Solution

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once-a-day (morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon) and should not exceed a maximum dose of 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day.

However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. A dose increase to 20 mg/day may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed.

All patients — As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment — It is generally agreed that acute episodes of Major Depressive Disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Daily Dosing — Systematic evaluation of fluoxetine in adult patients has shown that its efficacy in Major Depressive Disorder is maintained for periods of up to 38 weeks following 12 weeks of open-label acute treatment (50 weeks total) at a dose of 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA) — Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.2 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fixed daily doses of 20, 40, or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. In one of these studies, no dose-response relationship for effectiveness was demonstrated. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose. Since there was a suggestion of a possible dose-response relationship for effectiveness in the second study, a dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until 5 weeks of treatment or longer.

Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once daily (i.e., morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon). A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have been well tolerated in open studies of OCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

In adolescents and higher weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 2 weeks, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended.

In lower weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 30 mg/day is recommended. Experience with daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of fluoxetine after 13 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, adult patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to an additional 6 months without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment.

2.3 Bulimia Nervosa

Initial Treatment — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Bulimia Nervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 or 60 mg, or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Only the 60 mg dose was statistically significantly superior to placebo in reducing the frequency of binge-eating and vomiting. Consequently, the recommended dose is 60 mg/day, administered in the morning. For some patients it may be advisable to titrate up to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with bulimia.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — Systematic evaluation of continuing fluoxetine 60 mg/day for periods of up to 52 weeks in patients with bulimia who have responded while taking fluoxetine 60 mg/day during an 8 week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Panic Disorder

Initial Treatment — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Panic Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After one week, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. The most frequently administered dose in the 2 flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if no clinical improvement is observed. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in patients with Panic Disorder.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, panic disorder is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women — When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatric — A lower or less frequent dosage should be considered for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)]

Hepatic Impairment — As with many other medications, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness — Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.12)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15)].

2.9 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine oral solution. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine oral solution before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.10 Use of Fluoxetine Oral Solution With Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluoxetine oral solution in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluoxetine oral solution therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluoxetine oral solution should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluoxetine oral solution may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluoxetine oral solution is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Cefadroxil

Cefadroxil

Cefadroxil tablets are acid-stable and may be administered orally without regard to meals. Administration with food may be helpful in diminishing potential gastrointestinal complaints occasionally associated with oral cephalosporin therapy.

Adults

Urinary Tract Infections

For uncomplicated lower urinary tract infections (i.e., cystitis) the usual dosage is 1 or 2 g per day in a single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.).

For all other urinary tract infections the usual dosage is 2 g per day in divided doses (b.i.d.).

Skin and Skin Structure Infections

For skin and skin structure infections the usual dosage is 1 g per day in single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.).

Pharyngitis and Tonsillitis

Treatment of group A beta-hemolytic streptococcal pharyngitis and tonsillitis - 1 g per day in single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.) for 10 days.

Children

For urinary tract infections, the recommended daily dosage for children is 30 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours. For pharyngitis, tonsillitis, and impetigo, the recommended daily dosage for children is 30 mg/kg/day in a single dose or in equally divided doses every 12 hours. For other skin and skin structure infections, the recommended daily dosage is 30 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 12 hours. In the treatment of beta-hemolytic streptococcal infections, a therapeutic dosage of cefadroxil tablets should be administered for at least 10 days.

Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment, the dosage of cefadroxil monohydrate should be adjusted according to creatinine clearance rates to prevent drug accumulation. The following schedule is suggested. In adults, the initial dose is 1000 mg of cefadroxil tablets and the maintenance dose (based on the creatinine clearance rate [mL/min/1.73 m2]) is 500 mg at the time intervals listed below.

Creatinine Clearances

Dosage Interval

0 to 10 mL/min

36 hours

10 to 25 mL/min

24 hours

25 to 50 mL/min

12 hours

Patients with creatinine clearance rates over 50 mL/min may be treated as if they were patients having normal renal function.
Breo Ellipta

Breo Ellipta

Buprenorphine sublingual tablets are administered sublingually as a single daily dose. Buprenorphine sublingual tablets contain no naloxone and are preferred for use only during induction. Following induction, buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film or buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets are preferred due to the presence of naloxone when clinical use includes unsupervised administration. The use of buprenorphine sublingual tablets for unsupervised administration should be limited to those patients who cannot tolerate buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual film or buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets; for example, those patients who have been shown to be hypersensitive to naloxone.

Medication should be prescribed in consideration of the frequency of visits. Provision of multiple refills is not advised early in treatment or without appropriate patient follow-up visits.

2.1 Induction

Prior to induction, consideration should be given to the type of opioid dependence (i.e., long- or short-acting opioid), the time since last opioid use, and the degree or level of opioid dependence. To avoid precipitating withdrawal, induction with buprenorphine sublingual tablets should be undertaken when objective and clear signs of withdrawal are evident.

It is recommended that an adequate treatment dose, titrated to clinical effectiveness, should be achieved as rapidly as possible. In a one-month study, patients received 8 mg of buprenorphine sublingual tablets on Day 1 and 16 mg buprenorphine sublingual tablets on Day 2. From Day 3 onward, patients received either buprenorphine and naloxone sublingual tablets or buprenorphine sublingual tablets at the same buprenorphine dose as Day 2 based on their assigned treatment. Induction in the studies of buprenorphine solution was accomplished over 3 to 4 days, depending on the target dose. In some studies, gradual induction over several days led to a high rate of drop-out of buprenorphine patients during the induction period.

Patients taking heroin or other short-acting opioids:

At treatment initiation, the dose of buprenorphine sublingual tablets should be administered at least 4 hours after the patient last used opioids or preferably when moderate objective signs of opioid withdrawal appear.

Patients on methadone or other long-acting opioids:

There is little controlled experience with the transfer of methadone-maintained patients to buprenorphine. Available evidence suggests that withdrawal signs and symptoms are possible during induction onto buprenorphine. Withdrawal appears more likely in patients maintained on higher doses of methadone (>30 mg) and when the first buprenorphine dose is administered shortly after the last methadone dose. Buprenorphine sublingual tablet dosing should be initiated preferably when moderate objective signs of opioid withdrawal appear.

2.2 Maintenance
• Buprenorphine and naloxone is preferred for maintenance treatment. • Where buprenorphine sublingual tablets are used in maintenance in patients who cannot tolerate the presence of naloxone, the dosage of buprenorphine sublingual tablets should be progressively adjusted in increments / decrements of 2 mg or 4 mg buprenorphine to a level that holds the patient in treatment and suppresses opioid withdrawal signs and symptoms. • The maintenance dose is generally in the range of 4 mg to 24 mg buprenorphine per day depending on the individual patient. Doses higher than this have not been demonstrated to provide any clinical advantage.
2.3 Method of Administration

Buprenorphine sublingual tablets should be placed under the tongue until they are dissolved. For doses requiring the use of more than two tablets, patients are advised to either place all the tablets at once or alternatively (if they cannot fit in more than two tablets comfortably), place two tablets at a time under the tongue. Either way, the patients should continue to hold the tablets under the tongue until they dissolve; swallowing the tablets reduces the bioavailability of the drug. To ensure consistency in bioavailability, patients should follow the same manner of dosing with continued use of the product.

Proper administration technique should be demonstrated to the patient.

2.4 Clinical Supervision

Treatment should be initiated with supervised administration, progressing to unsupervised administration as the patient’s clinical stability permits. The use of buprenorphine sublingual tablets for unsupervised administration should be limited to those patients who cannot tolerate buprenorphine and naloxone, for example those patients with known hypersensitivity to naloxone. Buprenorphine and naloxone and buprenorphine sublingual tablets are both subject to diversion and abuse. When determining the size of the prescription quantity for unsupervised administration, consider the patient’s level of stability, the security of his or her home situation, and other factors likely to affect the ability of the patient to manage supplies of take-home medication.

Ideally, patients should be seen at reasonable intervals (e.g., at least weekly during the first month of treatment) based upon the individual circumstances of the patient. Medication should be prescribed in consideration of the frequency of visits. Provision of multiple refills is not advised early in treatment or without appropriate patient follow-up visits. Periodic assessment is necessary to determine compliance with the dosing regimen, effectiveness of the treatment plan, and overall patient progress.

Once a stable dosage has been achieved and patient assessment (e.g., urine drug screening) does not indicate illicit drug use, less frequent follow-up visits may be appropriate. A once-monthly visit schedule may be reasonable for patients on a stable dosage of medication who are making progress toward their treatment objectives. Continuation or modification of pharmacotherapy should be based on the physician’s evaluation of treatment outcomes and objectives such as:
1. Absence of medication toxicity. 2. Absence of medical or behavioral adverse effects. 3. Responsible handling of medications by the patient. 4. Patient’s compliance with all elements of the treatment plan (including recovery-oriented activities, psychotherapy, and/or other psychosocial modalities). 5. Abstinence from illicit drug use (including problematic alcohol and/or benzodiazepine use).
If treatment goals are not being achieved, the physician should reevaluate the appropriateness of continuing the current treatment.

2.5 Patients With Hepatic Impairment

Severe hepatic impairment: Consider reducing the starting and titration incremental dose by half compared to patients with normal liver function, and monitor for signs and symptoms of toxicity or overdose caused by increased levels of buprenorphine.

Moderate hepatic impairment: Although no dose adjustment is necessary for patients with moderate hepatic impairment, buprenorphine sublingual tablets should be used with caution in these patients and prescribers should monitor patients for signs and symptoms of toxicity or overdose caused by increased levels of buprenorphine.

Mild hepatic impairment: No clinically significant differences in pharmacokinetic parameters were observed in subjects with mild hepatic impairment. No dose adjustment is needed in patients with mild hepatic impairment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.11)].

2.6 Unstable Patients

Physicians will need to decide when they cannot appropriately provide further management for particular patients. For example, some patients may be abusing or dependent on various drugs, or unresponsive to psychosocial intervention such that the physician does not feel that he/she has the expertise to manage the patient. In such cases, the physician may want to assess whether to refer the patient to a specialist or more intensive behavioral treatment environment. Decisions should be based on a treatment plan established and agreed upon with the patient at the beginning of treatment.

Patients who continue to misuse, abuse, or divert buprenorphine products or other opioids should be provided with, or referred to, more intensive and structured treatment.

2.7 Stopping Treatment

The decision to discontinue therapy with buprenorphine and naloxone or buprenorphine sublingual tablets after a period of maintenance should be made as part of a comprehensive treatment plan. Both gradual and abrupt discontinuation of buprenorphine has been used, but the data are insufficient to determine the best method of dose taper at the end of treatment.
Motion Sickness Relief

Motion Sickness Relief

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 1 week, since steady state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately 1 week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations

The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥ 65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment

The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment

The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy

The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment

When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection

Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Treatment

The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder in the adolescent population has not been evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adults

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of coadministration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine tablets and olanzapine orally disintegrating tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.
Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax*and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine * Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.
For

Use in Combination

Symbyax

(mg/day)

Olanzapine

(mg/day)

Fluoxetine

(mg/day)

3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

2.5

5

10+2.5

5

10+2.5

20

20

20

40+10

40+10

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients under 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

2.1 Adult Patients

[See Indications and Usage (1.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3).]
* DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS [ see Indications and Usage (1.1)]
Infection*

Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy

Community-acquired pneumonia

Pharyngitis/tonsillitis (second-line therapy)

Skin/skin structure (uncomplicated)

500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5

Acute bacterial exacerbations of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease

500 mg once daily for 3 days

OR

500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5

Acute bacterial sinusitis

500 mg once daily for 3 days

Genital ulcer disease (chancroid)

One single 1 gram dose

Non-gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis

One single 1 gram dose

Gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis

One single 2 gram dose

Azithromycin tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.2 Pediatric Patients*
* DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS [ see Indications and Usage (1.2)]
Infection*

Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy

Acute otitis media

30 mg/kg as a single dose or 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days or 10 mg/kg as a single dose on Day 1 followed by 5 mg/kg/day on Days 2 through 5.

Acute bacterial sinusitis

10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days.

Community-acquired pneumonia

10 mg/kg as a single dose on Day 1 followed by 5 mg/kg once daily on Days 2 through 5.

Pharyngitis/tonsillitis

12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days.
* see dosing tables below for maximum doses evaluated by indication
Azithromycin for oral suspension can be taken with or without food.

PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR OTITIS MEDIA, ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS, AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA

(Age 6 months and above, [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)])

Based on Body Weight
* Effectiveness of the 3 day or 1 day regimen in pediatric patients with community-acquired pneumonia has not been established.
OTITIS MEDIA AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA: (5 Day Regimen)*

Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day Day 1 and 5 mg/kg/day Days 2 to 5.

Weight

100 mg/5 mL

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL per Treatment Course

Total mg per Treatment Course

Kg

Lbs.

Day 1

Days 2 to 5

Day 1

Days 2 to 5

5

11

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

1.25 mL; (¼ tsp)

7.5 mL

150 mg

10

22

5 mL; (1 tsp)

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

15 mL

300 mg

20

44

5 mL; (1 tsp)

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

7.5 mL; (1½ tsp)

3.75 mL; (¾ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

10 mL; (2 tsp)

5 mL; (1 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

12.5 mL; (2½ tsp)

6.25 mL; (1¼ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg
* Effectiveness of the 5 day or 1 day regimen in pediatric patients with acute bacterial sinusitis has not been established.
OTITIS MEDIA AND ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS: (3 Day Regimen)*

Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day.

Weight

100 mg/5 mL

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL per Treatment Course

Total mg per Treatment Course

Kg

Lbs.

Days 1 to 3

Days 1 to 3

5

11

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

7.5 mL

150 mg

10

22

5 mL; (1 tsp)

15 mL

300 mg

20

44

5 mL (1 tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

7.5 mL (1½ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

10 mL (2 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

12.5 mL (2½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

OTITIS MEDIA: (1 Day Regimen)

Dosing Calculated on 30 mg/kg as a single dose.

Weight

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL per Treatment Course

Total mg per Treatment Course

Kg

Lbs.

1 Day Regimen

5

11

3.75 mL; (¾ tsp)

3.75 mL

150 mg

10

22

7.5 mL; (1½ tsp)

7.5 mL

300 mg

20

44

15 mL; (3 tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

22.5 mL; (4½ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

30 mL; (6 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

37.5 mL; (7½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

The safety of re-dosing azithromycin in pediatric patients who vomit after receiving 30 mg/kg as a single dose has not been established. In clinical studies involving 487 patients with acute otitis media given a single 30 mg/kg dose of azithromycin, eight patients who vomited within 30 minutes of dosing were re-dosed at the same total dose.

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis: The recommended dose of azithromycin for children with pharyngitis/tonsillitis is 12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days. (See chart below.)

PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR PHARYNGITIS/TONSILLITIS

(Age 2 years and above, [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)])

Based on Body Weight

PHARYNGITIS/TONSILLITIS: (5 Day Regimen)

Dosing Calculated on 12 mg/kg/day for 5 days.

Weight

200 mg/5 mL

Total mL per Treatment Course

Total mg per Treatment Course

Kg

Lbs.

Day 1 to 5

8

18

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

12.5 mL

500 mg

17

37

5 mL; (1 tsp)

25 mL

1000 mg

25

55

7.5 mL; (1½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

33

73

10 mL; (2 tsp)

50 mL

2000 mg

40

88

12.5 mL; (2½ tsp)

62.5 mL

2500 mg

Constituting instructions for azithromycin for oral suspension, 300, 600, 900, 1200 mg bottles. The table below indicates the volume of water to be used for constitution.

Amount of water to be added

Total volume after constitution (azithromycin content)

Azithromycin concentration after constitution

9 mL (300 mg)

15 mL (300 mg)

100 mg/5 mL

9 mL (600 mg)

15 mL (600 mg)

200 mg/5 mL

12 mL (900 mg)

22.5 mL (900 mg)

200 mg/5 mL

15 mL (1200 mg)

30 mL (1200 mg)

200 mg/5 mL

Shake well before each use. Oversized bottle provides shake space. Keep tightly closed.

After mixing, store suspension at 5° to 30°C (41° to 86°F) and use within 10 days. Discard after full dosing is completed.
Mirtazapine

Mirtazapine

Initial Treatment

The recommended starting dose for mirtazapine tablets is 15 mg/day, administered in a single dose, preferably in the evening prior to sleep. In the controlled clinical trials establishing the efficacy of mirtazapine tablets in the treatment of major depressive disorder, the effective dose range was generally 15 to 45 mg/day. While the relationship between dose and satisfactory response in the treatment of major depressive disorder for mirtazapine tablets has not been adequately explored, patients not responding to the initial 15 mg dose may benefit from dose increases up to a maximum of 45 mg/day. Mirtazapine tablets have an elimination half-life of approximately 20 to 40 hours; therefore, dose changes should not be made at intervals of less than 1 to 2 weeks in order to allow sufficient time for evaluation of the therapeutic response to a given dose.

Elderly and Patients With Renal or Hepatic Impairment

The clearance of mirtazapine is reduced in elderly patients and in patients with moderate to severe renal or hepatic impairment. Consequently, the prescriber should be aware that plasma mirtazapine levels may be increased in these patient groups, compared to levels observed in younger adults without renal or hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Maintenance/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Systematic evaluation of mirtazapine tablets has demonstrated that its efficacy in major depressive disorder is maintained for periods of up to 40 weeks following 8 to 12 weeks of initial treatment at a dose of 15 to 45 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Based on these limited data, it is unknown whether or not the dose of mirtazapine tablets needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with mirtazapine tablets USP. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping mirtazapine tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Mirtazapine Tablets With Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start mirtazapine tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with mirtazapine tablets may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, mirtazapine tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with mirtazapine tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with mirtazapine tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).

Discontinuation of Mirtazapine Treatment

Symptoms associated with the discontinuation or dose reduction of mirtazapine tablets have been reported. Patients should be monitored for these and other symptoms when discontinuing treatment or during dosage reduction. A gradual reduction in the dose over several weeks, rather than abrupt cessation, is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, dose titration should be managed on the basis of the patient’s clinical response (see PRECAUTIONS and ADVERSE REACTIONS).

Information for Patients

Patients should be advised that taking mirtazapine tablets can cause mild pupillary dilation, which in susceptible individuals, can lead to an episode of angle-closure glaucoma. Preexisting glaucoma is almost always open-angle glaucoma because angle-closure glaucoma, when diagnosed, can be treated definitively with iridectomy. Open-angle glaucoma is not a risk factor for angle-closure glaucoma. Patients may wish to be examined to determine whether they are susceptible to angle-closure, and have a prophylactic procedure (e.g., iridectomy), if they are susceptible.
Clarithromycin

Clarithromycin

Clarithromycin tablets USP may be given with or without food.

Clarithromycin may be administered without dosage adjustment in the presence of hepatic impairment if there is normal renal function. In patients with severe renal impairment (CLCR < 30 mL/min), the dose of clarithromycin should be reduced by 50%. However, when patients with moderate or severe renal impairment are taking clarithromycin concomitantly with atazanavir or ritonavir, the dose of clarithromycin should be reduced by 50% or 75% for patients with CLCR of 30 to 60 mL/min or < 30 mL/min, respectively.
ADULT DOSAGE GUIDELINES
Clarithromycin Tablets

Infection

Dosage

(q12h)

Duration

(days)

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis due to

S. pyogenes

250 mg

10

Acute maxillary sinusitis due to

500 mg

14

H. influenzae

M. catarrhalis

S. pneumoniae

Acute exacerbation of chronic bronchitis due to

H. influenzae

500 mg

7 to 14

H. parainfluenzae

500 mg

7

M. catarrhalis

250 mg

7 to 14

S. pneumoniae

250 mg

7 to 14

Community-Acquired Pneumonia due to

H. influenzae

250 mg

7

S. pneumoniae

250 mg

7 to 14

C. pneumoniae

250 mg

7 to 14

M. pneumoniae

250 mg

7 to 14

Uncomplicated skin and skin structure

250 mg

7 to 14

S. aureus

S. pyogenes

H. pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy: Clarithromycin/Lansoprazole/Amoxicillin

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin, 30 mg lansoprazole, and 1 gram amoxicillin, all given twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES).

Triple Therapy: Clarithromycin/Omeprazole/Amoxicillin

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin, 20 mg omeprazole, and 1 gram amoxicillin, all given twice daily (q12h) for 10 days (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES). In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy: Clarithromycin/Omeprazole

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin given three times daily (q8h) and 40 mg omeprazole given once daily (qAM) for 14 days (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES). An additional 14 days of omeprazole 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy: Clarithromycin/Ranitidine Bismuth Citrate

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin given twice daily (q12h) or three times daily (q8h) and 400 mg ranitidine bismuth citrate given twice daily (q12h) for 14 days. An additional 14 days of 400 mg twice daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief. Clarithromycin and ranitidine bismuth citrate combination therapy is not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance less than 25 mL/min (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES).

Children

The usual recommended daily dosage is 15 mg/kg/day divided q12h for 10 days.
PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES
Based on Body Weight

Dosing Calculated on 7.5 mg/kg q12h

Weight

Dose

Kg

lbs

(q12h)

125 mg/5 mL

250 mg/5 mL

9

20

62.5 mg

2.5 mL q12h

1.25 mL q12h

17

37

125 mg

5 mL q12h

2.5 mL q12h

25

55

187.5 mg

7.5 mL q12h

3.75 mL q12h

33

73

250 mg

10 mL q12h

5 mL q12h

Mycobacterial Infections

Prophylaxis

The recommended dose of clarithromycin for the prevention of disseminated Mycobacterium avium disease is 500 mg b.i.d. In children, the recommended dose is 7.5 mg/kg b.i.d. up to 500 mg b.i.d. No studies of clarithromycin for MAC prophylaxis have been performed in pediatric populations and the doses recommended for prophylaxis are derived from MAC treatment studies in children. Dosing recommendations for children are in the table above.

Treatment

Clarithromycin is recommended as the primary agent for the treatment of disseminated infection due to Mycobacterium avium complex. Clarithromycin should be used in combination with other antimycobacterial drugs that have shown in vitro activity against MAC or clinical benefit in MAC treatment (see CLINICAL STUDIES). The recommended dose for mycobacterial infections in adults is 500 mg b.i.d. In children, the recommended dose is 7.5 mg/kg b.i.d. up to 500 mg b.i.d. Dosing recommendations for children are in the table above.

Clarithromycin therapy should continue if clinical response is observed. Clarithromycin can be discontinued when the patient is considered at low risk of disseminated infection.
Mirtazapine

Mirtazapine

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — Initiate fluoxetine 20 mg/day orally in the morning. Consider a dose increase after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Administer doses above 20 mg/day once daily in the morning or twice daily (i.e., morning and noon). The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — Initiate fluoxetine 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. Consider a dose increase to 20 mg/day after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

All patients — As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

Periodically reassess to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA) — Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.2 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — Initiate fluoxetine 20 mg/day, orally in the morning. Consider a dose increase after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until 5 weeks of treatment or longer. Administer doses above 20 mg/day once daily in the morning or twice daily (i.e., morning and noon). A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have been well tolerated in open studies of OCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fixed daily doses of 20, 40, or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. In one of these studies, no dose-response relationship for effectiveness was demonstrated.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In adolescents and higher weight children, initiate treatment with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 2 weeks, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. Consider additional dose increases after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended.

In lower weight children, initiate treatment with a dose of 10 mg/day. Consider additional dose increases after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 30 mg/day is recommended. Experience with daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.

In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Periodically reassess to determine the need for treatment.

2.3 Bulimia Nervosa

Initial Treatment — Administer fluoxetine 60 mg/day in the morning. For some patients it may be advisable to titrate up to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with bulimia. In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Bulimia Nervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 or 60 mg, or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Only the 60 mg dose was statistically significantly superior to placebo in reducing the frequency of binge-eating and vomiting.

Periodically reassess to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Panic Disorder

Initial Treatment — Initiate treatment with fluoxetine 10 mg/day. After one week, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. Consider a dose increase after several weeks if no clinical improvement is observed. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in patients with Panic Disorder. In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Panic Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. The most frequently administered dose in the 2 flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

Periodically reassess to determine the need for continued treatment.

2.5 Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated With Bipolar I Disorder

When using fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adult — Administer fluoxetine in combination with oral olanzapine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Make dosage adjustments, if indicated, according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg and oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies. Periodically re-examine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s Fluoxetine Capsules. However due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of fluoxetine in combination with olanzapine was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of fluoxetine and olanzapine versus Symbyax. Adjust dosage, if indicated, with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.

Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax1 and the Combination of Fluoxetine and Olanzapine

For Symbyax (mg/day)

Use in Combination

Olanzapine (mg/day)

Fluoxetine (mg/day)

3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

5

20

12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

10 + 2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

5

40 + 10

12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

10 + 2.5

40 + 10

1 Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCL) is a fixed-dose combination of fluoxetine and olanzapine.

Fluoxetine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder.

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women — When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatric — Consider a lower or less frequent dosage for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

Hepatic Impairment — As with many other medications, use a lower or less frequent dosage in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness — Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.12)].

Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination — Use a starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, non-smoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Titrate slowly and adjust dosage as needed in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. Fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients less than 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.16) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15)].

2.9 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.10 Use of Fluoxetine With Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluoxetine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluoxetine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluoxetine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluoxetine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluoxetine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Cefadroxil

Cefadroxil

Cefadroxil capsules are acid-stable and may be administered orally without regard to meals. Administration with food may be helpful in diminishing potential gastrointestinal complaints occasionally associated with oral cephalosporin therapy.

Adults

Urinary Tract Infections

For uncomplicated lower urinary tract infections (i.e., cystitis) the usual dosage is 1 or 2 g per day in a single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.).

For all other urinary tract infections the usual dosage is 2 g per day in divided doses (b.i.d.).

Skin and Skin Structure Infections

For skin and skin structure infections the usual dosage is 1 g per day in single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.).

Pharyngitis and Tonsillitis

Treatment of group A beta-hemolytic streptococcal pharyngitis and tonsillitis – 1 g per day in single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.) for 10 days.

Children

For urinary tract infections, the recommended daily dosage for children is 30 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours. For pharyngitis, tonsillitis, and impetigo, the recommended daily dosage for children is 30 mg/kg/day in a single dose or in equally divided doses every 12 hours. For other skin and skin structure infections, the recommended daily dosage is 30 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 12 hours. In the treatment of beta-hemolytic streptococcal infections, a therapeutic dosage of cefadroxil capsules should be administered for at least 10 days.

See chart for total daily dosage for children.

DAILY DOSAGE OF CEFADROXIL FOR ORAL SUSPENSION

Child’s Weight

lbs

kg

250 mg/5 mL

500 mg/5 mL

10

4.5

½ tsp

20

9.1

1 tsp

30

13.6

1½ tsp

40

18.2

2 tsp

1 tsp

50

22.7

2½ tsp

1¼ tsp

60

27.3

3 tsp

1½ tsp

70 & above

31.8 +

--

2 tsp

Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment, the dosage of cefadroxil monohydrate should be adjusted according to creatinine clearance rates to prevent drug accumulation. The following schedule is suggested. In adults, the initial dose is 1000 mg of cefadroxil capsules and the maintenance dose (based on the creatinine clearance rate [mL/min/1.73 m2]) is 500 mg at the time intervals listed below.

Creatinine Clearances

Dosage Interval

0 to 10 mL/min

36 hours

10 to 25 mL/min

24 hours

25 to 50 mL/min

12 hours

Patients with creatinine clearance rates over 50 mL/min may be treated as if they were patients having normal renal function.
Oxymorphone Hydrochlori...

Oxymorphone Hydrochloride

Selection of patients for treatment with oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets should be governed by the same principles that apply to the use of similar opioid analgesics [see Indications and Usage (1)]. Physicians should individualize treatment in every case [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)], using non-opioid analgesics, opioids on an as needed basis, combination products, and chronic opioid therapy in a progressive plan of pain management such as outlined by the World Health Organization, the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, and the American Pain Society.

Oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets should be administered on an empty stomach, at least one hour prior to or two hours after eating [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.1 Individualization of Dosage

As with any opioid drug product, it is necessary to adjust the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient's prior analgesic treatment experience. In the selection of the initial dose of oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets, attention should be given to the following:
• The total daily dose, potency and specific characteristics of the opioid the patient has been taking previously; • The relative potency estimate used to calculate the equivalent oxymorphone dose needed; • The patient’s degree of opioid tolerance; • The age, general condition, and medical status of the patient; • Concurrent non-opioid analgesics and other medications; • The type and severity of the patient's pain; • The balance between pain control and adverse experiences; • Risk factors for abuse or addiction, including a prior history of abuse or addiction.
Once therapy is initiated, frequently assess pain relief and other opioid effects. Titrate dose to adequate pain relief (generally mild or no pain). Patients who experience breakthrough pain may require dosage adjustment.

If signs of excessive opioid-related adverse experiences are observed, the next dose may be reduced. Adjust dosing to obtain an appropriate balance between pain relief and opioid-related adverse experiences. If significant adverse events occur before the therapeutic goal of mild or no pain is achieved, the events should be treated aggressively. Once adverse events are adequately managed, continue upward titration to an acceptable level of pain control.

During periods of changing analgesic requirements, including initial titration, frequent contact is recommended between physician, other members of the healthcare team, the patient, and the caregiver/family. Advise patients and family members of the potential common adverse reactions associated with changing opioid doses.

The dosing recommendations below, therefore, can only be considered as suggested approaches to what is actually a series of clinical decisions over time in the management of the pain of each individual patient.

2.2 Initiation of Therapy

Titrate dose to adequate pain relief (generally mild or no pain).

Opioid-Naïve Patients

Patients who have not been receiving opioid analgesics should be started on oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets in a dosing range of 10 to 20 mg every four to six hours depending on the initial pain intensity. If deemed necessary to initiate therapy at a lower dose (e.g., for renal or hepatic impairment or for geriatric patients), patients may be started with oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets, 5 mg. The dose should be titrated based upon the individual patient’s response to their initial dose of oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets. This dose can then be adjusted to an acceptable level of analgesia taking into account the pain intensity and adverse reactions experienced by the patient.

Initiation of therapy with doses higher than 20 mg is not recommended because of potential serious adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Conversion From Parenteral Oxymorphone to Oxymorphone Hydrochloride Tablets

Given oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets’ absolute oral bioavailability of approximately 10%, patients receiving parenteral oxymorphone may be converted to oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets by administering 10 times the patient’s total daily parenteral oxymorphone dose as oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets, in four or six equally divided doses (e.g., [IV dose x 10] divided by 4 or 6). For example, approximately 10 mg of oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets four times daily may be required to provide pain relief equivalent to a total daily IM dose of 4 mg oxymorphone. Due to patient variability with regard to opioid analgesic response, upon conversion patients should be closely monitored to ensure adequate analgesia and to minimize side effects.

Conversion From Other Oral Opioids to Oxymorphone Hydrochloride Tablets

For conversion from other opioids to oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets, physicians and other healthcare professionals are advised to refer to published relative potency information, keeping in mind that conversion ratios are only approximate. In general, it is safest to start oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets therapy by administering half of the calculated total daily dose of oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets in 4 to 6 equally divided doses, every 4 to 6 hours. The initial dose of oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets can be gradually adjusted until adequate pain relief and acceptable side effects have been achieved.

2.3 Maintenance of Therapy

During therapy, continual re-evaluation of the patient receiving oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets is important, with special attention to the maintenance of pain control and the relative incidence of side effects associated with therapy. If the level of pain increases, effort should be made to identify the source of increased pain, while adjusting the dose [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)].

2.4 Cessation of Therapy

When the patient no longer requires therapy with oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets, doses should be tapered gradually to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient [see Drug Abuse and Dependence (9.3)].

2.5 Patients With Hepatic Impairment

Oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets are contraindicated in patients with moderate or severe hepatic impairment. Use oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets with caution in patients with mild hepatic impairment, starting with the lowest dose (e.g., 5 mg) and titrating slowly while carefully monitoring side effects [see Warnings and Precautions (5.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.6 Patients With Renal Impairment

There are 57% and 65% increases in oxymorphone bioavailability in patients with moderate and severe renal impairment, respectively; treated with extended-release oxymorphone tablets [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Accordingly, oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets should be administered cautiously and in reduced dosages to patients with creatinine clearance rates less than 50 mL/min.

2.7 Use With Central Nervous System Depressants

Oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets, like all opioid analgesics, should be started at 1/3 to 1/2 of the usual dose in patients who are concurrently receiving other central nervous system (CNS) depressants including sedatives or hypnotics, general anesthetics, phenothiazines, tranquilizers, and alcohol, because respiratory depression, hypotension and profound sedation, coma or death may result [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3) and Drug Interactions (7.1)]. When combined therapy with any of the above medications is considered, the dose of one or both agents should be reduced.

Although no specific interaction between oxymorphone and monoamine oxidase inhibitors has been observed, oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets are not recommended for use in patients who have received MAO inhibitors within 14 days [see Drug Interactions (7.5)].

2.8 Geriatric Patients

Exercise caution in the selection of the starting dose of oxymorphone hydrochloride tablets for an elderly patient by starting at the low end of the dosing range (e.g., 5 mg) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].
Duloxetine

Duloxetine

Venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules should be administered in a single dose with food, either in the morning or in the evening at approximately the same time each day [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Each capsule should be swallowed whole with fluid and not divided, crushed, chewed, or placed in water or it may be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the entire contents on a spoonful of applesauce. This drug/food mixture should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets (spheroids).

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

For most patients, the recommended starting dose for venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules is 75 mg per day, administered in a single dose. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 37.5 mg per day for 4 to 7 days to allow new patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 75 mg per day. Patients not responding to the initial 75 mg per day dose may benefit from dose increases to a maximum of 225 mg per day. Dose increases should be in increments of up to 75 mg per day, as needed, and should be made at intervals of not less than 4 days, since steady-state plasma levels of venlafaxine and its major metabolites are achieved in most patients by day 4 [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. In the clinical studies establishing efficacy, upward titration was permitted at intervals of 2 weeks or more.

It should be noted that, while the maximum recommended dose for moderately depressed outpatients is also 225 mg per day for venlafaxine tablets (immediate-release), more severely depressed inpatients in one study of the development program for that product responded to a mean dose of 350 mg per day (range of 150 to 375 mg per day). Whether or not higher doses of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules are needed for more severely depressed patients is unknown; however, the experience with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules doses higher than 225 mg per day is very limited.

2.4 Panic Disorder

The recommended starting dose is 37.5 mg per day of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules for 7 days. Patients not responding to 75 mg per day may benefit from dose increases to a maximum of approximately 225 mg per day. Dose increases should be in increments of up to 75 mg per day, as needed, and should be made at intervals of not less than 7 days.

2.5 Switching Patients from Venlafaxine Tablets

Depressed patients who are currently being treated at a therapeutic dose with venlafaxine tablets (immediate release) may be switched to venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent dose (mg per day), e.g., 37.5 mg venlafaxine twice a day to 75 mg venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily. However, individual dosage adjustments may be necessary.

2.6 Specific Populations

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

The total daily dose should be reduced by 50% in patients with mild (Child-Pugh = 5 to 6) to moderate (Child-Pugh = 7 to 9) hepatic impairment. In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh = 10 to 15) or hepatic cirrhosis, it may be necessary to reduce the dose by 50% or more [See Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

Patients with Renal Impairment

The total daily dose should be reduced by 25% to 50% in patients with mild (CLcr = 60 to 89 mL/min) or moderate (CLcr = 30 to 59 mL/min) renal impairment. In patients undergoing hemodialysis or with severe renal impairment (CLcr < 30 mL/min), the total daily dose should be reduced by 50% or more. Because there was much individual variability in clearance between patients with renal impairment, individualization of dosage may be desirable in some patients [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

2.7 Maintenance Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled studies to indicate how long patients with MDD or PD should be treated with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of MDD require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules/venlafaxine tablets have demonstrated continuation of response in clinical studies up to 52 weeks, at the same dose at which patients responded during the initial treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. It is not known whether or not the dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

In a clinical study for PD, patients continuing venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the same dose at which they responded during the initial 12 weeks of treatment experienced a statistically significantly longer time to relapse than patients randomized to placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. The need for continuing medication in patients with PD who improve with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsule treatment should be periodically reassessed.

2.8 Discontinuing Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Extended-release Capsules

A gradual reduction in the dose, rather than abrupt cessation, is recommended whenever possible. In clinical studies with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules, tapering was achieved by reducing the daily dose by 75 mg at one-week intervals. Individualization of tapering may be necessary [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.9 Switching Patients to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI (intended to treat psychiatric disorders) and initiation of therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules. In addition, at least 7 days should be allowed after stopping venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.2), Warnings and Precautions (5.2), and Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Use of Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Extended-release Capsules with other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Intravenous Methylene Blue

Do not start venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization should be considered [see Contraindications 4.2)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsule therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. Monitor the patient for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 7 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules can be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg concomitantly with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Amoxicillin Capsule Amo...

Amoxicillin Capsule Amoxicillin

2.1 Dosing for Adult and Pediatric Patients > 3 Months of Age

Except for gonorrhea, treatment should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. It is recommended that there be at least 10 days’ treatment for any infection caused by Streptococcus pyogenes to prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever. In some infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.
Table 1. Dosing Recommendations for Adult and Pediatric Patients > 3 Months of Age * Dosing for infections caused by bacteria that are intermediate in their susceptibility to amoxicillin should follow the recommendations for severe infections. † The children’s dosage is intended for individuals whose weight is less than 40 kg. Children weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to the adult recommendations.
Infection

Severity*

Usual Adult Dose

Usual Dose for Children > 3 Months†

Ear/Nose/Throat

Skin/Skin Structure

Genitourinary Tract

Mild/Moderate

500 mg every 12 hours or

250 mg every 8 hours

25 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours

or

20 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 8 hours

Severe

875 mg every 12 hours or

500 mg every 8 hours

45 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours

or

40 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 8 hours

Lower Respiratory

Tract

Mild/Moderate or

Severe

875 mg every 12 hours or

500 mg every 8 hours

45 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 12 hours

or

40 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 8 hours

Gonorrhea

Acute, Uncomplicated Ano-Genital and Urethral Infections in Males and Females

3 grams as single oral dose

Prepubertal children:

50 mg/kg amoxicillin, combined with 25 mg/kg probenecid as a single dose.

Note: since probenecid is contraindicated in children under 2 years, do not use this regimen in children under 2 years of age.

2.2 Dosing in Neonates and Infants Aged ≤ 12 Weeks (≤ 3 Months)

Treatment should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. It is recommended that there be at least 10 days’ treatment for any infection caused by Streptococcus pyogenes to prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever. Due to incompletely developed renal function affecting elimination of amoxicillin in this age group, the recommended upper dose of amoxicillin is 30 mg/kg/day divided every 12 hours. There are currently no dosing recommendations for pediatric patients with impaired renal function.

2.3 Dosing for H. pylori Infection

Triple Therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 1 gram amoxicillin, 500 mg clarithromycin, and 30 mg lansoprazole, all given twice daily (every 12 hours) for 14 days.

Dual Therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 1 gram amoxicillin and 30 mg lansoprazole, each given three times daily (every 8 hours) for 14 days.

Please refer to clarithromycin and lansoprazole full prescribing information.

2.4 Dosing in Renal Impairment
• Patients with impaired renal function do not generally require a reduction in dose unless the impairment is severe. • Severely impaired patients with a glomerular filtration rate of < 30 mL/min should not receive a 875 mg dose. • Patients with a glomerular filtration rate of 10 to 30 mL/min should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 12 hours, depending on the severity of the infection. • Patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 10 mL/min should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. • Hemodialysis patients should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. They should receive an additional dose both during and at the end of dialysis.
2.5 Directions for Mixing Oral Suspension

Tap bottle until all powder flows freely. Add approximately 1/3 of the total amount of water for reconstitution (see Table 2) and shake vigorously to wet powder. Add remainder of the water and again shake vigorously.
Table 2. Amount of Water for Mixing Oral Suspension
Strength

Bottle Size

Amount of Water

Required for Reconstitution

Oral Suspension 125 mg/5 mL

80 mL

62 mL

100 mL

77 mL

150 mL

113 mL

Oral Suspension 250 mg/5 mL

80 mL

47 mL

100 mL

60 mL

150 mL

90 mL

After reconstitution, the required amount of suspension should be placed directly on the child’s tongue for swallowing. Alternate means of administration are to add the required amount of suspension to formula, milk, fruit juice, water, ginger ale, or cold drinks. These preparations should then be taken immediately.

NOTE: SHAKE ORAL SUSPENSION WELL BEFORE USING. Keep bottle tightly closed. Any unused portion of the reconstituted suspension must be discarded after 14 days. Refrigeration is preferable, but not required.
Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone Sodium

2.1 Required Laboratory Testing Prior to Initiation and During Therapy

Prior to initiating treatment with clozapine tablets, a baseline ANC must be obtained. The baseline ANC must be at least 1500/μL for the general population, and at least 1000/μL for patients with documented Benign Ethnic Neutropenia (BEN). To continue treatment, the ANC must be monitored regularly [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.2 Dosing Information

The starting dose is 12.5 mg once daily or twice daily. The total daily dose can be increased in increments of 25 mg to 50 mg per day, if well-tolerated, to achieve a target dose of 300 mg to 450 mg per day (administered in divided doses) by the end of 2 weeks. Subsequently, the dose can be increased once weekly or twice weekly, in increments of up to 100 mg. The maximum dose is 900 mg per day. To minimize the risk of orthostatic hypotension, bradycardia, and syncope, it is necessary to use this low starting dose, gradual titration schedule, and divided dosages [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Clozapine tablets can be taken with or without food [see Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.3 Maintenance Treatment

Generally, patients responding to clozapine tablets should continue maintenance treatment on their effective dose beyond the acute episode.

2.4 Discontinuation of Treatment

Method of treatment discontinuation will vary depending on the patient’s last ANC:
• See Tables 2 or 3 for appropriate ANC monitoring based on the level of neutropenia if abrupt treatment discontinuation is necessary because of moderate to severe neutropenia. • Reduce the dose gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks if termination of clozapine therapy is planned and there is no evidence of moderate to severe neutropenia. • For abrupt clozapine discontinuation for a reason unrelated to neutropenia, continuation of the existing ANC monitoring is recommended for general population patients until their ANC is ≥1500/μL and for BEN patients until their ANC is ≥1000/μL or above their baseline. • Additional ANC monitoring is required for any patient reporting onset of fever (temperature of 38.5°C or 101.3°F, or greater) during the 2 weeks after discontinuation [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. • Monitor all patients carefully for the recurrence of psychotic symptoms and symptoms related to cholinergic rebound such as profuse sweating, headache, nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea.
2.5 Re-Initiation of Treatment

When restarting clozapine tablets in patients who have discontinued clozapine tablets (i.e., 2 days or more since the last dose), re-initiate with 12.5 mg once daily or twice daily. This is necessary to minimize the risk of hypotension, bradycardia, and syncope [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. If that dose is well-tolerated, the dose may be increased to the previously therapeutic dose more quickly than recommended for initial treatment.

2.6 Dosage Adjustments with Concomitant use of CYP1A2, CYP2D6, CYP3A4 Inhibitors or CYP1A2, CYP3A4 Inducers

Dose adjustments may be necessary in patients with concomitant use of: strong CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., fluvoxamine, ciprofloxacin, or enoxacin); moderate or weak CYP1A2 inhibitors (e.g., oral contraceptives, or caffeine); CYP2D6 or CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., cimetidine, escitalopram, erythromycin, paroxetine, bupropion, fluoxetine, quinidine, duloxetine, terbinafine, or sertraline); CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, St. John’s wort, and rifampin); or CYP1A2 inducers (e.g., tobacco smoking) (Table 1) [see Drug Interactions (7)].
Table 1: Dose Adjustment in Patients Taking Concomitant Medications
Co-medications

Scenarios

Initiating clozapine tablets while taking a co-medication

Adding a co-medication while taking clozapine tablets

Discontinuing a

co-medication while continuing clozapine tablets

Strong CYP1A2 Inhibitors

Use one third of the clozapine tablets dose.

Increase clozapine tablets dose based on clinical response.

Moderate or Weak CYP1A2 Inhibitors

Monitor for adverse reactions. Consider reducing the clozapine tablets dose if necessary.

Monitor for lack of effectiveness. Consider increasing clozapine tablets dose if necessary.

CYP2D6 or CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Strong CYP3A4 Inducers

Concomitant use is not recommended. However, if the inducer is necessary, it may be necessary to increase the clozapine tablets dose. Monitor for decreased effectiveness.

Reduce clozapine tablets dose based on clinical response.

Moderate or weak CYP1A2 or CYP3A4 Inducers

Monitor for decreased effectiveness. Consider increasing the clozapine tablets dose if necessary.

Monitor for adverse reactions. Consider reducing the clozapine tablets dose if necessary.

2.7 Renal or Hepatic Impairment or CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers

It may be necessary to reduce the clozapine tablets dose in patients with significant renal or hepatic impairment, or in CYP2D6 poor metabolizers [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6, 8.7)].
Aricept

Aricept

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — Initiate fluoxetine capsules 20 mg/day orally in the morning. Consider a dose increase after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Administer doses above 20 mg/day once daily in the morning or twice daily (i.e., morning and noon).The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — Initiate fluoxetine capsules 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. Consider a dose increase to 20 mg/day after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

All patients — As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be

delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer. Periodically reassess to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA) — Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.2 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Adult— Initiatefluoxetine capsules 20 mg/day, orally in the morning.Considera dose increase after severalweeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until5weeks of treatment orlonger. Administer doses above 20 mg/day once daily in the morning or twice daily (i.e., morning and noon).A doserangeof 20 to 60 mg/day isrecommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have beenwell tolerated in open studies ofOCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients wereadministered fixed daily doses of 20, 40, or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo[see Clinical Studies(14.2)]. In one of thesestudies, no dose-responserelationship for effectiveness was demonstrated.

Pediatric(children and adolescents)— In adolescents and higherweight children, initiate treatmentwitha dose of 10 mg/day. After2weeks, increase the dose to 20 mg/day.Consider additional dose increases after several more weeksif insufficient clinical improvement is observed.A doserange of 20 to 60 mg/day isrecommended.

In lowerweight children, initiate treatmentwitha dose of 10 mg/day. Consider additional dose increases afterseveral more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed.A doserange of 20 to 30 mg/day isrecommended.Experiencewith daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.

In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patientswereadministered fluoxetine doses in therange of 10 to 60 mg/day[see Clinical Studies(14.2)]. Periodicallyreassess to determine the need for treatment.

2.3 Bulimia Nervosa

InitialTreatment— Administerfluoxetine capsules 60 mg/day in the morning.For some patients it may be advisable to titrateup to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied inpatientswith bulimia. In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of BulimiaNervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 or 60 mg, or placebo[see Clinical Studies(14.3)].Only the 60 mg dosewas statistically significantly superior to placebo inreducing the frequency of binge-eating andvomiting.

Periodicallyreassess to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Panic Disorder

InitialTreatment— Initiate treatmentwith fluoxetine capsules 10 mg/day. After one week, increase the dose to 20 mg/day. Considera dose increase after severalweeks if no clinical improvement is observed.Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/dayhave not been systematically evaluated in patientswith PanicDisorder. In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetinesupporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Panic Disorder, patientswere administered fluoxetine doses in therange of10 to 60 mg/day[seeClinical Studies(14.4)]. The most frequently administered dose in the2 flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

2.5 Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated With Bipolar I Disorder

When using fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adult — Administer fluoxetine capsules in combination with oral olanzapine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Make dosage adjustments, if indicated, according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg and oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of coadministration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies. Periodically re-examine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s Fluoxetine Capsules. However due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of fluoxetine in combination with olanzapine was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of fluoxetine and olanzapine versus Symbyax. Adjust dosage, if indicated, with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.
Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax* and the Combination of Fluoxetine and Olanzapine * Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCL) is a fixed-dose combination of fluoxetine and olanzapine.
For Symbyax (mg/day)

Use in Combination

Olanzapine (mg/day)

Fluoxetine (mg/day)

3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

5

20

12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

10 + 2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

5

40 + 10

12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

10 + 2.5

40 + 10

Fluoxetine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder.

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women — When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatric — Consider a lower or less frequent dosage for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

Hepatic Impairment — As with many other medications, use a lower or less frequent dosage in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness — Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.12)].

Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination — Use a starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, non-smoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Titrate slowly and adjust dosage as needed in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. Fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients less than 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.16) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15)].

2.9 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.10 Use of Fluoxetine With Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluoxetine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluoxetine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluoxetine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluoxetine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluoxetine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Hydrocodone Bitartrate ...

Hydrocodone Bitartrate And Ibuprofen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of hydrocodone bitartrate and ibuprofen tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use hydrocodone bitartrate and ibuprofen tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with hydrocodone bitartrate and ibuprofen tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

For the short-term (generally less than 10 days) management of acute pain, the recommended dose of hydrocodone bitartrate and ibuprofen is one tablet every 4 to 6 hours, as necessary. Dosage should not exceed 5 tablets in a 24 hour period. It should be kept in mind that tolerance to hydrocodone can develop with continued use and that the incidence of untoward effects is dose related.

The lowest effective dose or the longest dosing interval should be sought for each patient (see WARNINGS), especially in the elderly. After observing the initial response to therapy with hydrocodone bitartrate and ibuprofen tablets, the dose and frequency of dosing should be adjusted to suit the individual patient’s need, without exceeding the total daily dose recommended.
Jinteli

Jinteli

Use of estrogen-alone, or in combination with a progestin, should be with the lowest effective dose and for the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals and risks for the individual woman. Postmenopausal women should be re-evaluated periodically as clinically appropriate to determine if treatment is still necessary.

2.1 Treatment of Moderate to Severe Vasomotor Symptoms due to Menopause

Jintelitherapy consists of a single tablet to be taken orally once daily.

2.2 Prevention of Postmenopausal Osteoporosis

Jinteli therapy consists of a single tablet taken orally once daily.
Cefdinir

Cefdinir

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE for Indicated Pathogens.)

Capsules

The recommended dosage and duration of treatment for infections in adults and adolescents are described in the following chart; the total daily dose for all infections is 600 mg. Once-daily dosing for 10 days is as effective as BID dosing. Once-daily dosing has not been studied in pneumonia or skin infections; therefore, cefdinir capsules USP should be administered twice daily in these infections. Cefdinir capsules USP may be taken without regard to meals.
Adults and Adolescents (Age 13 Years and Older)
Type of Infection

Dosage

Duration

Community-Acquired Pneumonia

300 mg q12h

10 days

Acute Exacerbations of Chronic Bronchitis

300 mg q12h

5 to 10 days

or

600 mg q24h

10 days

Acute Maxillary Sinusitis

300 mg q12h

10 days

or

600 mg q24h

10 days

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

300 mg q12h

5 to 10 days

or

600 mg q24h

10 days

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

300 mg q12h

10 days

Pediatric Patients

Alternate dosage forms of cefdinir (e.g., cefdinir for oral suspension) may be best suited for pediatric dosing. The recommended dosage and duration of treatment for infections in pediatric patients are described in the following chart; the total daily dose for all infections is 14 mg/kg, up to a maximum dose of 600 mg per day. Once-daily dosing for 10 days is as effective as BID dosing. Once-daily dosing has not been studied in skin infections; therefore, cefdinir for oral suspension should be administered twice daily in this infection. Cefdinir for oral suspension may be administered without regard to meals.
Pediatric Patients (Age 6 Months Through 12 Years)
Type of Infection

Dosage

Duration

Acute Bacterial Otitis Media

7 mg/kg q12h

5 to 10 days

or

14 mg/kg q24h

10 days

Acute Maxillary Sinusitis

7 mg/kg q12h

10 days

or

14 mg/kg q24h

10 days

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

7 mg/kg q12h

5 to 10 days

or

14 mg/kg q24h

10 days

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

7 mg/kg q12h

10 days

Pediatric patients who weigh ≥ 43 kg should receive the maximum daily dose of 600 mg.

Patients With Renal Insufficiency

For adult patients with creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min, the dose of cefdinir should be 300 mg given once daily.

Creatinine clearance is difficult to measure in outpatients. However, the following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance (CLcr) in adult patients. For estimates to be valid, serum creatinine levels should reflect steady-state levels of renal function.

Males:

CLcr =

(weight) (140 – age)

(72) (serum creatinine)

Females:

CLcr = 0.85 x above value

where creatinine clearance is in mL/min, age is in years, weight is in kilograms, and serum creatinine is in mg/dL.3

The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in pediatric patients:

CLcr = K ×

body length or height

serum creatinine

where K = 0.55 for pediatric patients older than 1 year4 and 0.45 for infants (up to 1 year).5

In the above equation, creatinine clearance is in mL/min/1.73 m2, body length or height is in centimeters, and serum creatinine is in mg/dL.

For pediatric patients with a creatinine clearance of < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2, the dose of cefdinir should be 7 mg/kg (up to 300 mg) given once daily.

Patients on Hemodialysis

Hemodialysis removes cefdinir from the body. In patients maintained on chronic hemodialysis, the recommended initial dosage regimen is a 300 mg or 7 mg/kg dose every other day. At the conclusion of each hemodialysis session, 300 mg (or 7 mg/kg) should be given. Subsequent doses (300 mg or 7 mg/kg) are then administered every other day.
Clarithromycin

Clarithromycin

Clarithromycin extended-release tablets USP should be taken with food. Clarithromycin extended-release tablets USP should be swallowed whole and not chewed, broken or crushed.

Clarithromycin may be administered without dosage adjustment in the presence of hepatic impairment if there is normal renal function. In patients with severe renal impairment (CLCR < 30 mL/min), the dose of clarithromycin should be reduced by 50%. However, when patients with moderate or severe renal impairment are taking clarithromycin concomitantly with atazanavir or ritonavir, the dose of clarithromycin should be reduced by 50% or 75% for patients with CLCR of 30 to 60 mL/min or < 30 mL/min, respectively.
ADULT DOSAGE GUIDELINES
Clarithromycin Extended-Release Tablets USP

Infection

Dosage (q24h)

Duration (days)

Acute maxillary sinusitis due to

2 x 500 mg

14

H. influenzae

M. catarrhalis

S. pneumoniae

Acute exacerbation of chronic bronchitis due to

H. influenzae

2 x 500 mg

7

H. parainfluenzae

2 x 500 mg

7

M. catarrhalis

2 x 500 mg

7

S. pneumoniae

2 x 500 mg

7

Community-Acquired Pneumonia due to

H. influenzae

2 x 500 mg

7

H. parainfluenzae

2 x 500 mg

7

M. catarrhalis

2 x 500 mg

7

S. pneumoniae

2 x 500 mg

7

C. pneumoniae

2 x 500 mg

7

M. pneumoniae

2 x 500 mg

7
Granisetron

Granisetron

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The initial dosage of doxazosin tablets USP in patients with hypertension and/or BPH is 1 mg given once daily in the a.m. or p.m. This starting dose is intended to minimize the frequency of postural hypotension and first-dose syncope associated with doxazosin tablets USP. Postural effects are most likely to occur between 2 and 6 hours after a dose. Therefore, blood pressure measurements should be taken during this time period after the first dose and with each increase in dose. If doxazosin tablet USP administration is discontinued for several days, therapy should be restarted using the initial dosing regimen.

Concomitant administration of doxazosin tablets USP with a PDE-5 inhibitor can result in additive blood pressure lowering effects and symptomatic hypotension; therefore, PDE-5 inhibitor therapy should be initiated at the lowest dose in patients taking doxazosin tablets USP.

Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia 1 to 8 mg once daily

The initial dosage of doxazosin mesylate is 1 mg, given once daily in the a.m. or p.m. Depending on the individual patient’s urodynamics and BPH symptomatology, dosage may then be increased to 2 mg and thereafter to 4 mg and 8 mg once daily, the maximum recommended dose for BPH. The recommended titration interval is 1 to 2 weeks. Blood pressure should be evaluated routinely in these patients.

Hypertension 1 to 16 mg once daily

The initial dosage of doxazosin mesylate is 1 mg given once daily. Depending on the individual patient’s standing blood pressure response (based on measurements taken at 2 to 6 hours post-dose and 24 hours post-dose), dosage may then be increased to 2 mg and thereafter if necessary to 4 mg, 8 mg and 16 mg to achieve the desired reduction in blood pressure. Increases in dose beyond 4 mg increase the likelihood of excessive postural effects, including syncope, postural dizziness/vertigo and postural hypotension. At a titrated dose of 16 mg once daily, the frequency of postural effects is about 12% compared to 3% for placebo.
Valproic Acid Solution

Valproic Acid Solution

2.1 Treatment of Osteoporosis in Postmenopausal Women

The recommended dosage is:
• one 70 mg tablet once weekly
or
• one 10 mg tablet once daily
2.2 Prevention of Osteoporosis in Postmenopausal Women

The recommended dosage is:
• one 35 mg tablet once weekly
or
• one 5 mg tablet once daily
2.3 Treatment to Increase Bone Mass in Men With Osteoporosis

The recommended dosage is:
• one 70 mg tablet once weekly
or
• one 10 mg tablet once daily
2.4 Treatment of Glucocorticoid-Induced Osteoporosis

The recommended dosage is one 5 mg tablet once daily, except for postmenopausal women not receiving estrogen, for whom the recommended dosage is one 10 mg tablet once daily.

2.5 Treatment of Paget's Disease of Bone

The recommended treatment regimen is 40 mg once a day for six months.

Re-treatment of Paget's Disease

Re-treatment with alendronate sodium tablets may be considered, following a six month post-treatment evaluation period in patients who have relapsed, based on increases in serum alkaline phosphatase, which should be measured periodically. Re-treatment may also be considered in those who failed to normalize their serum alkaline phosphatase.

2.6 Important Administration Instructions

Instruct patients to do the following:
• Take alendronate sodium tablets at least one-half hour before the first food, beverage, or medication of the day with plain water only [ see Patient Counseling Information (17.2)]. Other beverages (including mineral water), food, and some medications are likely to reduce the absorption of alendronate sodium tablets [ see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Waiting less than 30 minutes, or taking alendronate sodium tablets with food, beverages (other than plain water) or other medications will lessen the effect of alendronate sodium tablets by decreasing its absorption into the body • Take alendronate sodium tablets upon arising for the day. To facilitate delivery to the stomach and thus reduce the potential for esophageal irritation, an alendronate sodium tablet should be swallowed with a full glass of water (6 to 8 ounces). Patients should not lie down for at least 30 minutes and until after their first food of the day. Alendronate sodium tablets should not be taken at bedtime or before arising for the day. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of esophageal adverse experiences [ see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].
2.7 Recommendations for Calcium and Vitamin D Supplementation

Instruct patients to take supplemental calcium if dietary intake is inadequate [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Patients at increased risk for vitamin D insufficiency (e.g., over the age of 70 years, nursing home-bound, or chronically ill) may need vitamin D supplementation. Patients with gastrointestinal malabsorption syndromes may require higher doses of vitamin D supplementation and measurement of 25-hydroxyvitamin D should be considered.

Patients treated with glucocorticoids should receive adequate amounts of calcium and vitamin D.

2.8 Administration Instructions for Missed Doses

If a once-weekly dose of alendronate sodium tablets is missed, instruct patients to take one dose on the morning after they remember. They should not take two doses on the same day but should return to taking one dose once a week, as originally scheduled on their chosen day.
Risperidone

Risperidone

Table 1. Recommended Daily Dosage by Indication
Initial Dose

Titration (Increments)

Target Dose

Effective Dose Range

Schizophrenia: adults (2.1)

2 mg

1 to 2 mg

4 to 8 mg

4 to 16 mg

Schizophrenia: adolescents (2.1)

0.5 mg

0.5 to 1 mg

3 mg

1 to 6 mg

Bipolar mania: adults (2.2)

2 to 3 mg

1 mg

1 to 6 mg

1 to 6 mg

Bipolar mania: children and adolescents (2.2)

0.5 mg

0.5 to 1 mg

1 to 2.5 mg

1 to 6 mg

Irritability in autistic disorder (2.3)

0.25 mg Can increase to 0.5 mg by Day 4: (body weight less than 20 kg)

0.5 mg Can increase to 1 mg by Day 4: (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

After Day 4, at intervals of > 2 weeks: 0.25 mg (body weight less than 20 kg)

0.5 mg (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

0.5 mg: (body weight less than 20 kg)

1 mg: (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

0.5 to 3 mg

Severe Renal and Hepatic Impairment in Adults: use a lower starting dose of 0.5 mg twice daily. May increase to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily at intervals of one week or longer.

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

Risperidone tablets can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is 2 mg per day. May increase the dose at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 to 2 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4 to 8 mg per day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4 mg to 16 mg per day. However, doses above 6 mg per day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects, and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once-daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg per day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Adolescents

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 3 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of adolescent patients with schizophrenia at doses between 1 mg to 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 3 mg per day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on risperidone tablets, the effectiveness of risperidone tablets 2 mg per day to 8 mg per day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in adult patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Both adult and adolescent patients who respond acutely should generally be maintained on their effective dose beyond the acute episode. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off risperidone tablets, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to risperidone tablets, or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose

Adults

The initial dose range is 2 mg to 3 mg per day. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 mg per day. The effective dose range is 1 mg to 6 mg per day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1 mg to 6 mg per day [see Clinical Studies (14.2, 14.3)]. Risperidone tablet doses higher than 6 mg per day were not studied.

Pediatrics

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to the recommended target dose of 1 mg to 2.5 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of pediatric patients with bipolar mania at doses between 0.5 mg and 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 2.5 mg per day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer-term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with risperidone tablets. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of risperidone tablets in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use risperidone tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated With Autistic Disorder - Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

The dosage of risperidone tablets should be individualized according to the response and tolerability of the patient. The total daily dose of risperidone tablets can be administered once daily, or half the total daily dose can be administered twice daily.

For patients with body weight less than 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.25 mg per day. For patients with body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.5 mg per day. After a minimum of four days, the dose may be increased to the recommended dose of 0.5 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg and 1.0 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. Maintain this dose for a minimum of 14 days. In patients not achieving sufficient clinical response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 2 weeks or greater, in increments of 0.25 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg, or increments of 0.5 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. The effective dose range is 0.5 mg to 3 mg per day. No dosing data are available for children who weigh less than 15 kg.

Once sufficient clinical response has been achieved and maintained, consider gradually lowering the dose to achieve the optimal balance of efficacy and safety. The physician who elects to use risperidone tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from a once-daily dose administered at bedtime or administering half the daily dose twice daily, or a reduction of the dose.

2.4 Dosing in Patients With Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

For patients with severe renal impairment (CLcr < 30 mL/min) or hepatic impairment (10 to 15 points on Child Pugh System), the initial starting dose is 0.5 mg twice daily. The dose may be increased in increments of 0.5 mg or less, administered twice daily. For doses above 1.5 mg twice daily, increase in intervals of one week or greater [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6 and 8.7)].

2.5 Dose Adjustments for Specific Drug Interactions

When risperidone tablets are coadministered with enzyme inducers (e.g., carbamazepine), the dose of risperidone tablets should be increased up to double the patient’s usual dose. It may be necessary to decrease the risperidone tablets dose when enzyme inducers such as carbamazepine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Similar effect may be expected with coadministration of risperidone tablets with other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin, and phenobarbital).

When fluoxetine or paroxetine is coadministered with risperidone tablets, the dose of risperidone tablets should be reduced. The risperidone tablet dose should not exceed 8 mg per day in adults when coadministered with these drugs. When initiating therapy, risperidone tablets should be titrated slowly. It may be necessary to increase the risperidone tablet dose when enzyme inhibitors such as fluoxetine or paroxetine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].
Escitalopram

Escitalopram

Escitalopram tablets should be administered once daily, in the morning or evening, with or without food.

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adolescents

The recommended dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. A flexible-dose trial of escitalopram tablets (10 to 20 mg/day) demonstrated the effectiveness of escitalopram tablets [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of three weeks.

Adults

The recommended dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. A fixed-dose trial of escitalopram tablets demonstrated the effectiveness of both 10 mg and 20 mg of escitalopram tablets, but failed to demonstrate a greater benefit of 20 mg over 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of one week.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Systematic evaluation of continuing escitalopram tablets 10 or 20 mg/day in adult patients with major depressive disorder who responded while taking escitalopram tablets during an 8 week, acute-treatment phase demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use escitalopram tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Generalized Anxiety Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adults

The recommended starting dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of one week.

Maintenance Treatment

Generalized anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition. The efficacy of escitalopram tablets in the treatment of GAD beyond 8 weeks has not been systematically studied. The physician who elects to use escitalopram tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Special Populations

10 mg/day is the recommended dose for most elderly patients and patients with hepatic impairment.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Escitalopram tablets should be used with caution in patients with severe renal impairment.

2.4 Discontinuation of Treatment With Escitalopram Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of escitalopram tablets and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

2.5 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with escitalopram tablets. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping escitalopram tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.6 Use of Escitalopram Tablets With Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start escitalopram tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving escitalopram tablets therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, escitalopram tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with escitalopram tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with escitalopram tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

Hypertension

The recommended initial dosage of trandolapril tablets for patients not receiving a diuretic is 1 mg once daily in non-black patients and 2 mg in black patients. Dosage should be adjusted according to the blood pressure response. Generally, dosage adjustments should be made at intervals of at least 1 week. Most patients have required dosages of 2 to 4 mg once daily. There is little clinical experience with doses above 8 mg.

Patients inadequately treated with once-daily dosing at 4 mg may be treated with twice-daily dosing. If blood pressure is not adequately controlled with trandolapril tablets monotherapy, a diuretic may be added.

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of trandolapril tablets. To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued two to three days prior to beginning therapy with trandolapril tablets. (See WARNINGS.) Then, if blood pressure is not controlled with trandolapril tablets alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed. If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 0.5 mg trandolapril tablets should be used with careful medical supervision for several hours until blood pressure has stabilized. The dosage should subsequently be titrated (as described above) to the optimal response. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.)

Concomitant administration of trandolapril tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium sparing diuretics can lead to increases of serum potassium. (See PRECAUTIONS.)

Heart Failure Post Myocardial Infarction or Left-Ventricular Dysfunction Post Myocardial Infarction

The recommended starting dose is 1 mg, once daily. Following the initial dose, all patients should be titrated (as tolerated) toward a target dose of 4 mg, once daily. If a 4 mg dose is not tolerated, patients can continue therapy with the greatest tolerated dose.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment or Hepatic Cirrhosis

For patients with a creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min. or with hepatic cirrhosis, the recommended starting dose, based on clinical and pharmacokinetic data, is 0.5 mg daily. Patients should subsequently have their dosage titrated (as described above) to the optimal response.
Cleocin Phosphate

Cleocin Phosphate

2.1 Recommended Dosing

The recommended dosage is one 60 mg raloxifene hydrochloride tablet USP daily, which may be administered any time of day without regard to meals [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Recommendations for Calcium and Vitamin D Supplementation

For either osteoporosis treatment or prevention, supplemental calcium and/or vitamin D should be added to the diet if daily intake is inadequate. Postmenopausal women require an average of 1500 mg/day of elemental calcium. Total daily intake of calcium above 1500 mg has not demonstrated additional bone benefits while daily intake above 2000 mg has been associated with increased risk of adverse effects, including hypercalcemia and kidney stones. The recommended intake of vitamin D is 400 to 800 IU daily. Patients at increased risk for vitamin D insufficiency (e.g., over the age of 70 years, nursing home bound, or chronically ill) may need additional vitamin D supplements. Patients with gastrointestinal malabsorption syndromes may require higher doses of vitamin D supplementation and measurement of 25-hydroxyvitamin D should be considered.
Nicotine

Nicotine

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be taken with meals to reduce the gastrointestinal side effects associated with metformin.

If therapy with a combination tablet containing pioglitazone and metformin is considered appropriate the recommended starting dose is:
• 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients with New York Heart Association (NYHA) Class I or Class II congestive heart failure: 15 mg/500 mg or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients inadequately controlled on metformin monotherapy: 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once or twice daily (depending on the dose of metformin already being taken) and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients inadequately controlled on pioglitazone monotherapy: 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability. • for patients who are changing from combination therapy of pioglitazone plus metformin as separate tablets: pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be taken at doses that are as close as possible to the dose of pioglitazone and metformin already being taken.
Pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets may be titrated up to a maximum daily dose of 45 mg of pioglitazone and 2550 mg of metformin.

Metformin doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day.

After initiation of pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure [see Boxed Warning and Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets is not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.5) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Concomitant Use With an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Concomitant Use With Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone (one of the ingredients in pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets) and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3 fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone and metformin hydrochloride tablets are 15 mg/850 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Teva Pharmaceuticals Usa Inc

Manufacturer Details

Share This Page

Teva Pharmaceuticals Usa Inc Drugs